Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type D “Domino” 16 mm Push Buttons
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Selector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Illuminated Operators and Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Contacts and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Specifications
Environment
Conforming to standards
IEC 947-5-1, IEC 337-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508,
CSA C 22-2 n°14.
Approvals
In normal operation:
CSA, UL
ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO: pending.
Protective treatment
“TC” (All climates.)
Ambient air temperature
Storage: from -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F). Operation: from -25 to +60 °C (-13 to +140 °F).
Operating positions
All positions
Vibration resistance
Mushroom head push button: 8 gn; other push buttons: 15 gn(10 Hz < Frequency < 500 Hz)
conforming to IEC 68 2-6.
Shock resistance
Push button: 70 gn; mushroom head push button: 15 gn; selector switch: 200 g conforming to IEC 68 2-27.
Electric shock protection
Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030
Degree of protection
conforming IEC 529 and NF C 20-010
NEMA Type 1, 4, 4X (indoor), 13
IP 65
Mechanical life
Push button: 1 million operations. Mushroom head push button: 0.1 million operations
Selector switch: 0.3 million operations.
Contact block characteristics
Rated insulation voltage
Ui = 380 V - degree of pollution: 3 conforming to IEC 947-1.
Rated shock resistance voltage
Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC 947-1.
Rated operating characteristics
AC-15: B150, 5 A Continuous; DC-13: Q150, 2.5 A continuous
Contact operation
Slow-make, N.O., slow-break, N.C., N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1 section 3.
Terminal referencing
Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Short circuit protection
Fused 6 A gF conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200
For 1 million operations
Rated power
conforming to IEC 947-5-1
(electrical durability)
Connection by pin
or connector
Connection
Voltage V
24
48
60
120
230
380
AC-15
72 VA
144 VA
180 VA
360 VA
460 VA
380 VA
DC-13 (L/R - 15 ms)
144 W
144 W
180 W
120 W
46 W
- Pin 2.8 X 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in)
- Printed circuit connector
- Female connector (conforming to DIN 41651) + ribbon cable
Marking
File
E164353
CCN NKCR
File
Class
LR 44087
3211 03
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
4
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Operators
Bezel Style 8
Round Black
Bezel Style 6
Square Chrome
Bezel Style 5
Square Black
Bezel Style 9
Round Chrome
Non-Illuminated Operators
Legends are not included with operators.
Type
Color
D5A2R
Momentary Flush Push Button, Square
D8A1G
D5A7Y
Momentary Flush Push Button, Round
Momentary Extended Guard Push Button
DkA2R
Green
DkA2G
Black
DkA2S
White
DkA2W
Yellow
DkA2Y
Blue
DkA2B
Red
DfA1R
Green
DfA1G
Black
DfA1S
White
DfA1W
Yellow
DfA1Y
Blue
DfA1B
Red
D t A7R
Green
D t A7G
Black
D t A7S
White
D t A7W
Yellow
D t A7Y
Blue
D t A7B
Momentary Push Mushroom
Red
D t B1R
Push Maintain/ Rotate Release Mushroom
Red
D t C1R
White
D t E1W
Toggle Switch
D6B1R
Catalog Number
Red
k Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 5 and 6 are available in this style operator.
f Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). Only bezels 8 and 9 are available in this style operator.
t Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.
D5C1R
D8E1W
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10
Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
5
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Selector Switches and Potentiometer Knobs
Bezel Style 5
Square Black
Bezel Style 8
Round Black
Bezel Style 6
Square Chrome
Bezel Style 9
Round Chrome
Selector Switches – Two Position
Type
Color
Catalog Number
Black
D t G2S
Key d
D t L30
Black
DtG7S
Color
Catalog Number
Black
D t G3S
Key d
D t L80
Momentary Spring Return
Both Sides To Center
Black
D t G4S
Momentary Spring Return
Right To Center
Black
D t G5S
Momentary Spring Return
Left To Center
Black
D t G6S
Maintained
Momentary Spring Return
D5Gkk
Selector Switches – Three Position
Type
Maintained
D5L80
Potentiometer Control Knobs (potentiometer not supplied)
Type
D8Rkk
Catalog Number
Integrated Mounting
4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length
D t R1S
PCB Board Mounting
4 mm shaft diameter X 50 mm length
D t R3S
d Key is removable in all positions. Replacement key is 9001Z18, CP1 (key is marked 8D1).
t Add desired bezel style code (see top of page). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 11-12
Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
6
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Pilot Lights and Illuminated Operators
Bezel Style 5
Square Black
Bezel Style 8
Round Black
Bezel Style 6
Square Chrome
Bezel Style 9
Round Chrome
Illuminated Operators
Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.
Type
D5A2R
Square Momentary Illuminated Push Button
Round Momentary Illuminated Push Button
D8A1G
Momentary Illuminated Extended Guard Button
D5A7Y
Square Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button
Round Push On - Push Off Illuminated Push Button
D9A1R
Color
Catalog Number
Red
D k A2R
Green
D k A2G
White
D k A2W
Yellow
D k A2Y
Blue
D k A2B
Red
D f A1R
Green
D f A1G
White
D f A1W
Yellow
D f A1Y
Blue
D f A1B
Red
D t A7R
Green
D t A7G
White
D t A7W
Yellow
D t A7Y
Blue
D t A7B
Red
D k A2R
Green
D k A2G
White
D k A2W
Yellow
D k A2Y
Blue
D k A2B
Red
D f A1R
Green
D f A1G
White
D f A1W
Yellow
D f A1Y
Blue
D f A1B
Color
Catalog Number
Pilot Lights
Legends are not included with operators. See page 10 for legends.
Type
D5V2Y
Square Pilot Light
Round Pilot Light
D8V1G
Red
D k V2R
Green
D k V2G
White
D k V2W
Yellow
D k V2Y
Blue
D k V2B
Red
D f V1R
Green
D f V1G
White
D f V1W
Yellow
D f V1Y
Blue
D f V1B
t Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). All four bezel styles are available in this style operator.
k Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 5 and 6 are available in this style operator.
f Add desired bezel style code (see page 5). Only style 8 and 9 are available in this style operator.
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12
Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
7
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Contacts and Light Modules
Contact Blocks Only
Type
Contact Arrangement
Catalog Number
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
DU10
DU01
DU11
DU20
DU02
DUB10
DUB01
DUB11
DUB20
DUB02
DV10
DV01
DV11
DV20
DV02
DVB10
DVB01
DVB11
DVB20
DVB02
DR10
DR01
DR11
DR20
DR02
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032
inch) slip on termination.
DUkk
DUBkk
Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x
0.032 inch) slip on termination
For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.
DVkk
DVBkk
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.
For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.
DRkk
DUF
Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.
Module With Lamp Holder Only
Type
DUFB
DVF
Catalog Number
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
For use with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit board stabs.
For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap onto operator.
Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.
DUF
DUFB
DVF
DVFB
DRF
Module With Lamp Holder And Contacts
Contact
Arrangement
Type
DVFB
DRF
For snap mounting to operator, 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm
(0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination.
Printed circuit board mounting with 2.8 mm x 0.8
mm (0.110 x 0.032 inch) slip on termination. For use
with Z203 PCB mounting base. See page 9.
DUFBkk
DUFkkk
For snap mounting to operator. Has printed circuit
board stabs.
DVFkkk
DVFBkk
For soldering to printed circuit board. Does not snap
onto operator.
Ribbon cable connector. Snaps onto operator.
DRFkkk
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
N.O.
N.C.
N.O. – N.C.
N.O. – N.O.
N.C. – N.C.
6 to 120 V, 1.2 Watt Max. d
Momentary
Maintained k
DUF10
DUF01
DUF11
DUF20
DUF02
DUFB10
DUFB01
DUFB11
DUFB20
DUFB02
DVF10
DVF01
DVF11
DVF20
DVF02
DVFB10
DVFB01
DVFB11
DVFB20
DVFB02
DRF10
DRF01
DRF11
DRF20
DRF02
DUFR10
DUFR01
DUFR11
DUFR20
DUFR02
N/A
DVFR10
DVFR01
DVFR11
DVFR20
DVFR02
N/A
DRFR10
DRFR01
DRFR11
DRFR20
DRFR02
k Maintained operation is Push on - Push off.
d Contact ratings and lamp voltage can be limited by the type of mounting. i.e. printed circuit termination might not
carry full current because of the printed circuit board tracing.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 11-12
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 10
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 9
8
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Accessories
Type
Z201
Std. Pkg. Qty.t
Catalog Number
Ring Nut Wrench
1
Z201
Lamp Remover Tool
1
Z02
Closing Plate Black-Square
1
Z205
Closing Plate Black-Round
1
Z223
Replacement Mounting Ring Nut
1
Z216
Type
Voltage
Assembly Code
Std. Pkg. Qty. t
Catalog Number
6 Vac
06
10
Z206
12 Vac
12
10
Z207
24 Vac
24
10
Z208
48 Vac
48
10
Z209
60 Vac
60
10
Z210
24 V - Red
R4
5
Z219R
24 V - Green
G4
5
Z219G
24 V - Yellow
Y4
5
Z219Y
120 V - Red
R2
1
Z220R
Z02
Incandescent
(T 13⁄4)
LEDk 24 Vac/dc
Z205
LEDk 120 Vac
Std. Pkg. Qty.t
Catalog Number
Printed Circuit Board Adapter
For Type DU Contacts Only.
Type
1
Z203
Wire Harness.
For Type DU Contacts Only.
10
Z204
Z223
Z216
Type
Z2kk
Z204
Z203
Std. Pkg. Qty.t
Catalog Number
Replacement Key
(No 8D1)
1
Z18
Adjustable Spacer
(for rear fixing blocks)
4
Z220
Wire clip
2.8 mm x 0.8 mm (0.110 x 0.32 in.)
100
Z231
Ribbon Cable Connector
(for 4 wire DR Blocks)
25
Z228
Ribbon Cable Connector
(for 6 wire DR Blocks)
25
Z229
k
t
For use with illuminated operators of the same color as the LED.
Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.
Z18
Z220
Z231
Z22k
9
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Legend Plates
Type
Z213
Z215
Legend Plate with Holder
Anodized Aluminum
Z221
Z222
Marking
Z214
Z211
Z212
Std. Pkg. Qty.❋
Catalog Number
25
Z215
25
Z213
25
Z222
25
Z221
25
1
1
Z214
Z211
Z212
Legend Plate Holder with Blank Plate
Use with D5, D6 bezel
Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5
D6 bezel
Legend Plate Holder with Blank Legend
Use with D5, D6 bezel
Legend Plate Holder Only, Use with D5
D6 bezel
Blank Plate● without Holder (For use with all holders)
Yellow Contrast Plate-Round, 50 mm
Yellow Contrast Plate-Rectangular, 25 mm x 50 mm
Blank Legend
Special
Engraved
O
I
II
O I
II O I
Close
Down
Emerg. Stop
Fast
Forward
Hand Auto
Hand O Auto
High
In
Inch
Jog
Low
Lower
Off
Off On
On
Open
Out
Raise
Reverse
Run
Slow
Start
Stop
Stop Start
Test
Up
Legends Only
For D5, D6
Operators
Only
For D8, D9
Operators
Only
Legend
Plate
without
Holder
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Mylar Inserts
White with
White with
Black Letters Black Letters
Legend Plate
for Round
for Square
without
Button
Button
Holder
Illuminated Illuminated
Devices
Devices
Catalog
Catalog
Catalog
Number
Number
Number
Z215
Z222
Z214
Z214
01D
01A
99Q2●
99R2●
99W2●
99S2●
N/A
N/A
02Q2
03Q2
04Q2
05Q2
34Q2
65Q2
77Q2
82Q2
78Q2
66Q2
21Q2
24Q2
80Q2
72Q2
74Q2
69Q2
81Q2
71Q2
63Q2
85Q2
62Q2
64Q2
73Q2
70Q2
67Q2
75Q2
79Q2
17Q2
18Q2
90Q2
84Q2
76Q2
02R2
03R2
04R2
05R2
34R2
65R2
75R2
82R2
78R2
66R2
21R2
24R2
80R2
72R2
74R2
69R2
81R2
71R2
63R2
85R2
62R2
64R2
73R2
70R2
67R2
75R2
79R2
17R2
18R2
90R2
84R2
76R2
02W2
03W2
04W2
05W2
34W2
65W2
77W2
82W2
78W2
66W2
21W2
24W2
80W2
72W2
74W2
69W2
81W2
71W2
63W2
85W2
62W2
64W2
73W2
70W2
67W2
75W2
79W2
17W2
18W2
90W2
84W2
76W2
03S2
04S2
05S2
34S2
65S2
77S2
82S2
78S2
66S2
21S2
24S2
80S2
72S2
74S2
69S2
81S2
71S2
63S2
85S2
62S2
64S2
73S2
70S2
67S2
75S2
79S2
17S2
18S2
90S2
84S2
76S2
65DE
77DE
82DE
78DE
66DE
65A
77A
82A
78A
66A
80DE
72DE
74DE
69DE
81DE
71DE
63DE
80A
72A
74A
69A
81A
71A
63A
62DE
64DE
73DE
70DE
67DE
75DE
79DE
62A
64A
73A
70A
67A
75A
79A
76DE
76A
● Engraving field is 16 mm x 22 mm. Factory engraving limited to 3 lines of 12 characters (including spaces). Black
letters on silver field.
❋ Order must specify standard package quantity or multiples of that quantity.
Legend Plate Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 12
10
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Dimensions
Mounting conforming to DIN EN 50 007 and IEC 947 for
fixing holes with or without anti-rotation pip
13
25
25
9.8
15
9.8
A
A
25
1.5 - 6
16.2 +0.2
-0.0
29
18
18
29
A: d25
D5Gkk
D6Gkk
Ø25
D8Gkk
D9Gkk
A
1.5 - 6
A: d25
D5LkO
D6LkO
6
A
1.5 - 6
Ø25
A: d25
D8LkO
D5B1k
D9LkO
D6B1k
Potentiometer heads Integrated fixing
27
1.5 - 6
Ø25
D8B1k
D9B1k
Ø25
D5C1R
D9C1R
18
8
A
M7 x 0.75
6
A: d25
D5C1R
D6C1R
Board fixing
27
A
4
A
6
34
M16x1
18
18
M16x1
6
Ø25
D8A7k
D9A7k
È 31
È 31
M16x1
A
A
1.5 - 6
6
A: d25
D5A7k
D6A7k
M16x1
55
1.5 - 6
Ø25
D5A1k
D9A1k
M16x1
18
8
A: d25
D5A2k
D6A2k
M16x1
26
20
18
25
25
25
16.2 +0.2
-0.0
18
M16x1
25
1.7
1.7
Heads
without legend plate
25
M16x1
with legend plate
Push-buttons and pilot lights
50
1.5 - 6
A: d25
D5E1W
D6E1W
1.5 - 6
1.5 - 6
6
42 - 65
Ø25
D8E1W
D9E1W
A: d25
D5R1S
D6R1S
Ø25
D8R1S
D9R1S
A: d25
D5R3S
D6R3S
Ø25
D8R3S
D9R3S
Body
DVBkk
DRkk
41.5
9.5 13.5
40.5
17
9.5 13.5
42.5
DVkk
40.5
9.5 13.5
DUBkk
17
DUkk
42.5
Wiring Accessories
2.5
12.5
18
5.08
2.5
1
2.1
5
ø1.2
17
15
17
9.5 13.5
Z203
10.16
52
52
All dimensions are in
mm's. To convert to
approximate inches,
divide mm by 25.4.
Z204
7
DUBkk + Z203
16.5
DUkk + Z204
15.24
22
11
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Dimensions
Body
DUF
DUFkk
Pilot lights + contact
18
13
48
18
48
9.5 13.5
A
A
M16x1
M16x1
16
DUFB
DUFBkk
17
Pilot lights
Head
DVF
DVFkk
DVFB
DVFBkk
46
46
8
Ø25
D5V2k D8V1k
D5A2k
D8A1k
D6V2k D9V1k
D6A2k
D9A1k
17
A: d 25
DUF
DUFkk+Z204
DRF
DRFkkk
47
DUFB
DUFBkk + Z203
58
58
17
9.5 13.5
9.5 13.5
Head + DVkk
DVF
DVFkk
Head + DUkk
DUF
DUFkk + Z204
Head + DUkk
DUF
DUFkk + Z203
4
48.5
53.5
Adjustable spacer
Z220
9.5 13.5
9.5 13.5
9.5 13.5
48.5
Legend plate carrier
for square head
Z213
for round head
Z221
A:
d 25
Z205
44
44
15.5
39 - 58
M16 x 1
A
Blanking Plug
Head +DRkk
DRF
DRFkkk
58.5
64
48.5
9.5 13.5
1.5 - 6
Ø25
9.5 13.5
1.5 - 6
A: d25
Ø25
Z223
16.2
18.5
25
24.5
25
37
Legend plates
Z212
Z211
1.7
17.9
50
50
17.9
1.7
All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
16.2
16.2
25
12
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type D – 16 mm
Dimensions
Type J, O, and XVL – Pilot Lights
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type J, Description and Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Type J, Dimensions and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Type O, Description and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Type XVL, Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Type XVL, Selection and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
13
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type J – Pilot Lights
Description and Selection
Pilot Lights, Push-To-Test and Remote Test Pilot Lights
JP1R29
Class 9001 Type J compact pilot lights are designed to be mounted in a .69" (11/16") diameter mounting
hole. Each terminal will accept up to two #14 AWG wires (CU only). Type J compact pilot lights meet
NEMA Type 4 (watertight) and NEMA Type 13 (oiltight) requirements. Type JT push-to-test pilot lights
have contacts built into the encapsulated body. Type JTR remote test pilot lights have dual inputs for one
push remote testing – all you need is a push button with a current rating equal to or greater than the total
lamp draw. Type JTR remote test pilot lights can also be energized from two separate input signals of
the same voltage and polarity. This is done by wiring the “test” terminal to the second input signal.
Standard Pilot Light
Style/Voltage
JTR1R29
File 25490
Class 3211 03
None
Trans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz
Incandescent/120 Vac or dc
Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc
Other Voltagest
LED – 24-28 Vac
LED – 24-28 Vdc
LED – 120Vac
JP1R29
JP38R29
JP35R29
JPtR29
JP35LRR29
JP35DRR29
JP38LRR29
JP1G29
JP38G29
JP35G29
JPtG29
JP35LGG29
JP35DGG29
JP38LGG29
Yellow k
JP1Y29
JP38Y29
JP35Y29
JP tY29
JP35LYY29
JP35DYY29
JP38LYY29
Lamp
Volt/Amp
Replacement
Lamp
6.3 V, 0.15A
120 V, 0.015A
28 V, 0.040A
2550101020
2550101040
2550101024
28 V, 0.03A
28 V, 0.03A
28 V, 0.03A
(1)
(1)
(1)
Lamp
Volt/Amp
Replacement
Lamp
6.3 V, 0.15A
120 V, 0.15A
28 V, 0.040A
2550101020
2550101040
2550101024
28 V, 0.03A
28 V, 0.03A
28 V, 0.03A
(1)
(1)
(1)
Lamp
Volt/Amp
Replacement
Lamp
6.3 V, 0.15A
120 V, 0.015A
28 V, 0.040A
2550101020
2550101040
2550101024
28 V, 0.03A
(1)
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Style/Voltage
File E42259
CCN NKCR
JP1
JP38
JP35
JPt
–
–
–
Color Cap
Redk
Greenk
None
Trans/110-120Vac, 50-60 Hz
Incandescent/120 Vac or dc
Incandescent/24-28 Vac or dc
Other Voltagest
LED – 24-28 Vac
LED – 24-28 Vdc
LED – 120 Vac
JT1
JT38
JT35
JTt
–
–
–
Color Cap
Red k
Green k
JT1R29
JT38R29
JT35R29
JTtR29
JT35LRR29
JT35DRR29
JT38LRR29
JT1G29
JT38G29
JT35G29
JTtG29
JT35LGG29
JT35DGG29
JT38LGG29
Yellow k
JT1Y29
JT38Y29
JT35Y29
JTtY29
JT35LYY29
JT35DYY29
JT38LYY29
Remote Test Pilot Light
Style/Voltage
None
Trans/110-120 Vac, 50-60 Hz
Incandescent/120 Vac
Incandescent/24-28 Vac
Other Voltages (ac Only)t
LED – 24-28 Vac
JTR1
JTR38
JTR35
JTRt
–
Color Cap
Red k
Green k
JTR1R29
JTR38R29
JTR35R29
JTRtR29
JTR35LRR29
JTR1G29
JTR38G29
JTR35G29
JTRtG29
JTR35LGG29
Yellow k
JTR1Y29
JTR38Y29
JTR35Y29
JTRtY29
JTR35LYY29
(1) See Page 18 for replacement LED lamps. For other voltage LED lamps contact local field office.
k Supplied with “plastic” color caps. If “glass” color caps are desired, substitute G26, R26, etc., for G29, R29, etc. Example:
JP1G26, JP1R26, etc. To order a pilot light with color cap not listed above, add the color cap type number from the table below
to the basic pilot light number. Example: For a standard 120 volt transformer style pilot light with a plastic amber color cap, order
a 9001JP1A29. LED lamps are only for use with plastic red, green or yellow color caps.
t Remote test (Type JTR) only is available in AC.
Voltage
JP/JT
Code
Incandescent/6 Vac or dc
Incandescent/12 Vac or dc
Incandescent/48 Vac or dc
Incandescent/60 Vac or dc
31
32
36
37
Other Voltagest
Replacement
Volt/Amp
Lamp
2550101020
2550101022
2550101025
2550101026
6.3 V, 0.15A
12 V, 0.17A
48 V, 0.053A
60 V, 0.05A
JTR
Code
Replacement
Lamp
Volt/Amp
31t
32t
36t
37t
2550101003
2550101022
2550101025
2550101026
3 V, 0.16A
12 V, 0.17A
48 V, 0.053A
60 V, 0.05A
14
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type J – Pilot Lights
Dimensions and Accessories
Legend Plates
Max. No. of
Lines
Max. No. of
Characters
Catalog Number
Black Field
Red Field
Black Field
Red Field
Aluminum Field
2
2
2
2
2
8
8
8
8
16
JN100
JN100R
JN199
JN199R
JN700
Aluminum Field
2
16
JN799
Type
Blank
Special Marking (Specify
Marking)
Blank
Special Marking (Specify
Marking)
Replacement Color Caps - Class 9001, Type J
Catalog Number
Plastic
Glass
Color
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
Yellow
R29
G29
A29
L29
C29
W29
Y29
R26
G26
A26
L26
C26
W26
Y26
Replacement Parts - Class 9001, Type J
Type
Catalog Number
Ring Nut
6512909601
Locking Thrust Washer
6512909201
Trim Washer
6512909301
Rubber Sealing Washer
6512901801
Note:Octagonal ringnuts can be tightened with standard tools, or use the reverse end of Square D wrench
Class 9001 Type K95.
Type J Dimensions
Type
JTR1
JP, JT,
JTR31
through
JTR38
A
B
2.83" 1.20"
C
.93"
2.34" 1.11"
.84"
15
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type O - Pilot Lights
Description and Selection
Instrument Type Incandescent Pilot Lights – Class 9001, Type O NEMA 13
Voltage AC/DC
Average Current (Amps)
12 V
Color
0.170
Type O
24 V
Red
OR12
Green
OG12
Amber
OA12
Clear
OC12
Yellow
OY12
White
OW12
Blue (Fluted)
FB12
Red
OR24
Green
OG24
0.073
120 Vt
Catalog Number
Amber
OA24
Clear
OC24
Yellow
OY24
White
OW24
Blue (Fluted)
FB24
Red
OR120
Green
OG120
0.025
Amber
OA120
Clear
OC120
Yellow
OY120
White
OW120
Blue (Fluted)
FB120
t This product is not recommended for continuous use at 120 V.
Replacement Lamps - Class 9001, Type O
Voltage
Sylvania Lamp Number
Square D Catalog
Number
12 V
24 V
120 V
12PSB
24PSB
120PSB
2550105003
2550105004
2550105005
Color
Catalog Number
Red
2550420020
Replacement Lenses* - Class 9001, Type O
Green
2550420040
Amber
2550420060
Clear
2550420010
Yellow
2550420030
White
2550430040
Blue
2550470010
Minimum Order Quantity 10
Approximate Dimensions
1.84
47
0.41
10
max panel
thickness
0.81
21
0.68
mtg hole
17.5 required
A30064-963
0.20
5
0.02
thickness
.5
width
Dual Dimensions inches
mm
16
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XVL Miniature LED Pilot Lights
Specifications
General
This new Telemecanique range of LED pilot lights meets the very latest requirements in signalling
techniques.
Because of their small size, Ø8 and Ø12 mm fixing pilot lights are particularly suitable for the following
applications:
• mounting on small control stations.
• shallow depth mounting.
• large number of signalling units on a control station (low power dissipation).
Small diameter LED pilot lights also have sealed front faces (IP 65 option available). An unsealed Ø8
mm fixing model with protruding LED and black bezel (aesthetic appearance) is also offered.
Advantages:
LED pilot lights have many advantages:
• very long life and so low maintenance costs (bulb test no longer required).
• highly resistant to shocks, vibrations and over-voltage.
• low power consumption which, for example, allows compatibility with programmable controller outputs
by parallel connection with the load, to give a direct indication of output state.
• very high reliability.
Quick fixing by means of tags for soldered clips for Ø8 mm type, or threaded connectors Ø12 mm type.
Safe connection due to integral ballast resistor and reverse polarity protection device.
Conforming to standards
IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, VDE 0660-200.
Protective treatment
Standard version: “TC” treatment.
Ambient temperature
Operation: -25 °C to + 70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F). Storage: -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to
+158 °F).
Electric shock protection
Class III conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Degree of protection
IP 40 (IP 65 with seal) conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20-010.
Current consumption
25 mA.
Rated Insulation voltage
50 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.
Life
Can exceed 100,000 hours.
—)
Voltage limits including ripple (---
0.8 UN ≤ U ≤1.2 Un.
Terminal referencing
Polarity marked + – conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Cabling
XVLA1kk, XVLA2kk: tags for 2.8 x 0.5 mm quick connectors, also for soldered
connections.
XVLA3kk: threaded connectors, clamping, capacity: min. 1 - 26 AWG solid or stranded,
max. 1 - 16 AWG solid or stranded.
Dimensions
LED pilot lights
O8, with black bezel,
visible LED XVL-A1..
O 8, with lens incorporated,
protected LED XVL-A2
E
E
E
M8 x 0,5
O 16
M12 x 1
O10
O12
M8 x 0.5
12
1.5
O 12, with lens incorporated,
protected LED XVL-A3
10
12
32
1.5
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm
6
34
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 8 mm
45
E - mounting plate thickness 1 to 6 mm
All dimensions are in mms. To convert to approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
Marking
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
File E164353
CCN NKCR2
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 230.
17
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XVL Miniature LED Pilot Lights
Selection and Accessories
With Black Bezel, Raised LED
Description
Supply Voltage DC
Color
XVLA113
Red
XVLA114
5V
XVLA1kk
Ø8 mm
with integral ballast resistor
and reverse polarity protection diode
12 V
Degree of protection IP 40
24 V
Catalog Number
Green
Orange-yellow
XVLA115
Green
XVLA123
Red
XVLA124
Orange-yellow
XVLA125
Green
XVLA133
Red
XVLA134
Orange-yellow
XVLA135
Green
XVLA143
Red
XVLA144
Orange-yellow
XVLA145
48 V
With Integral Lens Cap, Covered LED
Description
Supply Voltage DC
Color
XVLA213
Red
XVLA214
5V
XVLA2kk
(1)
Ø8 mm
with integral ballast resistor
and reverse polarity protection diode
12 V
Degree of protection IP 40
24 V
Orange-yellow
XVLA215
Green
XVLA223
Red
XVLA224
Orange-yellow
XVLA225
Green
XVLA233
Red
XVLA234
Orange-yellow
XVLA235
Green
XVLA243
Red
XVLA244
48 V
Orange-yellow
XVLA245
Green
XVLA313
Red
XVLA314
5V
XVLA3kk
(2)
Ø12 mm
with integral ballast resistor
and reverse polarity protection diode
12 V
Degree of protection IP 40
24 V
XVL-X..
Orange-yellow
XVLA315
Green
XVLA323
Red
XVLA324
Orange-yellow
XVLA325
Green
XVLA333
Red
XVLA334
Orange-yellow
XVLA335
Green
XVLA343
Red
XVLA344
Orange-yellow
XVLA345
48 V
XVLXkk
Catalog Number
Green
Accessories
Description
XVLZ91k
XVL-Z91.
Catalog Number
Tightening tools
(Sold singly)
For Ø8 mm pilot lights
XVLX08
For Ø12 mm pilot lights
XVLX12
Seals (IP 65)
(Sold in lots of 10)
For Ø8 mm pilot lights
XVLZ911
For Ø12 mm pilot lights
XVLZ912
1 Quick Connects (2.8 mm x 0.5 mm)
2 Screw Termination
18
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm, Double Insulated
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Selector, Toggle, and Reset Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Illuminated Operators and Selector Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Square Illuminated Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Legend Plate Carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
XALB General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
XALB Enclosures and Base Mounted Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
XALB Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
XA2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Double Insulated
Environment
XB2B, XD2P: IEC-947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, UL 508,
CSA C 22-2 No. 14.
CSA and UL: push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600 - Q600, pilot lights and illuminated push buttons
direct supply (120 V max); pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)
Approvals
ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU, VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS
XD2P, standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS.
Protective treatment
Standard Version: “TC” (all climates).
Ambient temperature
Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F.). Operating: -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F.).
60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5g (from 40 to 50 Hz)
Resistance to vibration
conforming to IEC 68-2-6.
Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g.
Resistance to shock
Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.
Electric shock protection
XB2B, XD2P: Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF 20-030.
NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 4, 4x, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P.
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529
IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated push buttons (mounted).
and NEC 20-010.
IP 40: double-headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).
Push buttons -- 3 million operations. Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector
switches: 100,000 operations. (The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions.
Mechanical life
Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express
or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the warranty offered on this product, please refer
to the Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.)
Conformity to standards
Contact block characteristics
Nominal thermal current
Nominal insulation voltage
Insulation catagory
Contact operation
Contact resistance
Operating force
Terminal referencing
Short circuit protection
Rated power
conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix C
duty categories AC15-DC13
Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hour
Load factor: 0.5
AC supply (50-60 Hz)
10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.
500V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600V conforming to UL 508, 600v conforming to
CSA 22-2 No. 14.
Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Slow-make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1 Section 3.
≤25 mΩ conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.
Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lb
Additional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.
Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
10 A cartridge fuses, g1 or N conforming to IEC 269-1 and VDE 0660-200.
DC supply
Power broken in watts
for 1 million operations
Voltage
24 V 48 V 120 V
Inductive
65 W 48 W 40 W
load
File E164353
CCN NKCR
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
millions of operations
AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600
127 V
220 V 24/48 V
1
35% Power factor
06
04
Volts
Make
Amperes
VA
Break
Amperes
02
120
240
480
600
60
30
15
12
7200
7200
7200
7200
6
3
1.5
1.2
ith = 10 A
01
.06
.04
VA
Continuous
carrying
Amperes
720
720
720
720
10
10
10
10
Resistive 75%
Power factor
Make, Break and
continuous
Amperes
10
10
10
10
For Declaration of Conformity,
see page 226.
DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600
Inductive and resistive
.02
Volts
Make and break
Continuous
.01
125
0.55
2.5
250
0.27
2.5
600
0.10
2.5
1
Cabling
Marking
2
4 6 10 20 40 60
current in amperes
XB2B, XD2P: Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5mm2
(20 AWG), solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm2(16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or by
cable clips conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).
XA2B Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23
XA2B Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 25-27
XA2B Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 24
Contact Blocks & Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 35
20
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Non-Illuminated Operators
Operator
Type
Size
Flush head
Flush head
ZA2BA•
Flush head
premarked
Transparent flush head
ZA2BA•8
Transparent flush head
(for use with ZB2BY1• stick on legends
see page 30)
Extended head
Extended head
ZA2BL•
Extended head
premarked
Silicone booted head
Booted head
ZA2BP•
Neoprene booted head
Flush plunger
(with full guard)
Flush plunger
(with half guard)
Two flush
Two flush
premarked
Two button operators
One flush,
one extended
One flush, one extended
premarked
Color
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Grey
Green “START”
Green “ON”
White “I”
Black “O”
Green “I”
Red “O”
Red “STOP”
Red “OFF”
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Red “STOP”
Red “O”
Red “OFF”
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black/Red
Green/Red
Black/Red “I/O”
Green/Red “I/O”
Black/Red “START/STOP”
Green/Red “START/STOP”
Black/Red
Green/Red
Black/Red “I/O”
Green/Red “I/O”
Black/Red “START/STOP”
Green/Red “START/STOP”
Catalog
Number
ZA2BA1
ZA2BA2
ZA2BA3
ZA2BA4
ZA2BA5
ZA2BA6
ZA2BA8
ZA2BA333
ZA2BA341
ZA2BA131
ZA2BA232
ZA2BA331
ZA2BA432
ZA2BA434
ZA2BA435
ZA2BA38
ZA2BA48
ZA2BA58
ZA2BA68
ZA2BA78
ZA2BL1
ZA2BL2
ZA2BL3
ZA2BL4
ZA2BL5
ZA2BL6
ZA2BL434
ZA2BL432
ZA2BL435
ZA2BP2
ZA2BP3
ZA2BP4
ZA2BP5
ZA2BP6
ZA2BP02
ZA2BP03
ZA2BP04
ZA2BP05
ZA2BP06
ZA2BA24
ZA2BA34
ZA2BA44
ZA2BA54
ZA2BA64
ZA2BA22
ZA2BA32
ZA2BA42
ZA2BA52
ZA2BA62
ZA2BA9124
ZA2BA9134
ZA2BA9224
ZA2BA9234
ZA2BA9724
ZA2BA9734
ZA2BL9324
ZA2BL9334
ZA2BL9424
ZA2BL9434
ZA2BL9824
ZA2BL9834
Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
21
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates
Operator
Type
Size
30 mm
Mushroom Head
Momentary 30 mm
ZA2BC•4
Mushroom head
momentary
40 mm
60 mm
30 mm
Mushroom Head
Momentary 40 mm
ZA2BC•
Mushroom head
Latching
Push-Pull
40 mm
60 mm
Mushroom head
Latching
Turn to Release
Mushroom head
Latching, Turn to Release Trigger Actionf
Mushroom Head Turn to
Release 40 mm
ZA2BS54
Mushroom head
Latching
Key to Releasej
Mushroom head
Latching, Key to Release Trigger Actionfj
30 mm
40 mm
60 mm
30 mm
40 mm
30 mm
40 mm
60 mm
30 mm
40 mm
Color
Catalog Number
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
ZA2BC24
ZA2BC34
ZA2BC44
ZA2BC54
ZA2BC64
ZA2BC2
ZA2BC3
ZA2BC4
ZA2BC5
ZA2BC6
ZA2BR2
ZA2BR4
ZABT24
ZABT44
ZA2T2
ZA2BT4
ZA2BX2
ZA2BX4
ZA2BS44
ZA2BS54
ZA2BS64
ZA2BS834
ZA2BS844
ZA2BS74
ZA2BS14
ZA2BS24
ZA2BS934
ZA2BS944
f Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30. For
switches keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers,
contact local field office.
Mushroom Head Key to
Release 40 mm
ZA2BS14
Key Number
Suffix
421
12
458A
10
520
14
3131A
20
j Trigger action mushroom heads are "tamper proof" whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or
floating the operator.
ERGEN
M
Y
C
E
Yellow Contrast Plates▼
ST
OP
ZB2BY8330
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter
Text
Language
Catalog
Number
Blank
Emergency Stop
Arret d’Urgence
Not Aus
Parada de Emergencia
Arresto Emergenza
N/A
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
ZB2BY9101
ZB2BY9330
ZB2BY9130
ZB2BY9230
ZB2BY9430
ZB2BY9630
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Text
Language
Catalog
Number
Blank
Emergency Stop
Arret d’Urgence
Not Aus
Parada de Emergencia
Arresto Emergenza
N/A
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
ZB2BY8101
ZB2BY8330
ZB2BY8130
ZB2BY8230
ZB2BY8430
ZB2BY8630
▼ Yellow Contrast Plates comply with EN418 of the European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC.
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
22
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Selector, Toggle, and Reset Switches
Non-illuminated selector switches
Type
Catalog
Number
Positions, Action
Standard handle
or extended lever t
Standard
ZA2BD•
2-maintained
2-spring return from right to left
3-maintained
3-spring return to center from left and right
3-spring return from right to center
3-spring return from left to center
ZA2BD2
ZA2BD4
ZA2BD3
ZA2BD5
ZA2BD8
ZA2BD7
Key selectors
Type
Positions, Action
Extended
ZA2BJ•
Key switch f
Key Switch
ZA2BG•
2-maintained
2-maintained
2-spring return right to left
3-maintained
3-maintained
3-maintained
3-maintained
3-spring return to center
from left and right
3-spring return to center
from left
3-spring return to center
from right
Key
removal
Catalog
Number
Left
Left, Right
Left
All
Center
Left, Right
Left
ZA2BG2
ZA2BG4
ZA2BG6
ZA2BG0
ZA2BG3
ZA2BG5
ZA2BG9
Center
ZA2BG7
Right
ZA2BG1
Center
ZA2BG8
Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 28)
2 Position selector switch
3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
O
X
O
Contact block guide
X
O
X
1 N.O. (left or right)
1 N.C. (left or right)
1 N.O.
and
X
O
1 N.C.
Note: View from front of panel
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
1 N.O. (left)
2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)
1 N.O. (right)
1 N.C. (right)
1 N.C. (left)
2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Toggle switch
Description
Color
Catalog
Number
Two position toggle switch
Black
ZA2BD28
Reset buttons (Mechanical overload resets 10 mm travel)
Toggle Switch
ZA2BD28
NEMA Type 4X
(not suitable
for use with
ZA2BZ10•
body/contact
assemblies)
Blank
Flush
with legend
O
R
Extended
with legend
O
head
Plunger (may be trimmed to length desired)
The total operating distance may be set between 17 and 120 mm,
as measured from the front face of the panel.
Green
Red
Blue
Red
Blue
ZA2BA83
ZA2BA84
ZA2BA86
ZA2BA8401
ZA2BA8602
Red
ZA2BL8401
ZA2BZ13
When ordering extended lever, substitute “J” for “D” in part number (No additional cost).
Example: ZA2BD3 becomes ZA2BJ3
f Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 30.
For other key numbers contact local field office.
For switches keyed with different keys, add the following suffixes:
t
ZA2BA8602
Key Number
Suffix
421
458A
520
3131A
12
10
14
20
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31
23
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Pilot Lights and Light Modules
Pilot light head
Type
Color
Catalog Number
White
Standard
Standard
ZA2BV0•
Special lens for
neon and LED lamps
ZA2BV01
Green
ZA2BV03
Red
ZA2BV04
Amber
ZA2BV05
Blue
ZA2BV06
Clear
ZA2BV07
Green
ZA2BV033
Red
ZA2BV043
Amber
ZA2BV053
Blue
ZA2BV063
Clear
ZA2BV073
Pilot light modules
ZA2BV6
Type
Catalog Number
Direct supply (bulb included) a (AC/DC)
ZA2BV6a
Transformer type (AC only) 1.2 VA/6 V (bulb included)f
ZA2BV3
24 V
ZA2BV1
48 V
ZA2BV2
110/120 V
ZA2BV3
220/240 V
ZA2BV94
440/480 V
ZA2BV95
550/660 V
ZA2BV98
Resistor type 130 V (bulb included)
220/250 V
ZA2BV7
a Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
f Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.
Lamps
Voltage
AC/DC
Type
Incandescent
Replacement bulbs
(Type BA9s)
DLICE • • •
(incandescent)
Neon
(use with direct supply light module)
Type
DLICJUS • • •
(LED)
LED, BA9s base for
Direct Supply blocks
LED, BA9s base for
retrofitting into transformer Light
Modules
Watts
Catalog Number
6
1.5
DL1CB006
12
2.0
DL1CE012
24
2.0
DL1CE024
48
2.4
DL1CE048
130
2.6
120
-
NE51HRT120V
220
-
NE51HRT220V
380
-
NE51HRT380V
Color
Voltage
Part Number
DL1CE130
Green
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0063
Red
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0064
Amber
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0065
Green
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0123
Red
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0124
Amber
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0125
Green
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0243
Red
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0244
Amber
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0245
Green
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1203
Red
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1204
Amber
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1205
Green
9 Vac only
DL1CJUS0093
Red
9 Vac only
DL1CJUS0094
Amber
9 Vac only
DL1CJUS0095
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20
Replacement parts (bulbs & lenses). . . . . . . . . . . Page 30
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 32-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
24
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
Illuminated operators
Type
Color
Flush head
Flush head
ZA2BW3•
Flush head for neon and LED lamps
Extended head
Extended head
ZA2BW1•
Extended head for neon and LED lamps
With half guard
Half guard
ZA2BW3•2
Illuminated Turn-to-Release
mushroom head
Amber indicator
Two flush
Turn to release
ZA2BW7•
Two flush
premarked
Two button momentary
action operators
NEMA Type 1 only f
Amber indicator
One flush,
one extended
One flush
extended,
premarked
f
Catalog Number
White
Green
Red
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
Green
Red
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
Green
Red
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
Yellow
Blue
Clear
Black/Red
Green/Red
Black/Red “I/O”
Green/Red “I/O”
Black/Red “Start/Stop”
Green/Red “Start/Stop”
Black/Red
ZA2BW31
ZA2BW33
ZA2BW34
ZA2BW35
ZA2BW36
ZA2BW37
ZA2BW333
ZA2BW343
ZA2BW353
ZA2BW363
ZA2BW373
ZA2BW11
ZA2BW13
ZA2BW14
ZA2BW15
ZA2BW16
ZA2BW17
ZA2BW133
ZA2BW143
ZA2BW153
ZA2BW163
ZA2BW173
ZA2BW312
ZA2BW332
ZA2BW342
ZA2BW352
ZA2BW362
ZA2BW372
ZA2BW73
ZA2BW74
ZA2BW75
ZA2BW76
ZA2BW77
ZA2BW81254
ZA2BW81354
ZA2BW82254
ZA2BW82354
ZA2BW87254
ZA2BW87354
ZA2BW83254
Green/Red
ZA2BW83354
Black/Red “I/O”
Green/Red “I/O”
Black/Red “Start/Stop”
Green/Red “Start/Stop”
ZA2BW84254
ZA2BW84354
ZA2BW88254
ZA2BW88354
To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4 & 13 order silicon boot ZB2BW008.
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 20
Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 28
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 29
Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 30
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 31
25
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Illuminated Selector Switches
Selector Switches
Number of positions, action
2-maintained
Illuminated selector
ZA2BK1••
Catalog
Number
Color
Green
ZA2BK123
Red
ZA2BK124
Amber
ZA2BK125
Blue
ZA2BK126
Clear
ZA2BK127
2-spring return
Green
ZA2BK143
from right to left
Red
ZA2BK144
3-maintained
3-spring return to
center from right and left
3-spring return
from right to center
3-spring return
from left to center
Amber
ZA2BK145
Blue
ZA2BK146
Clear
ZA2BK147
Green
ZA2BK133
Red
ZA2BK134
Amber
ZA2BK135
Blue
ZA2BK136
Clear
ZA2BK137
Green
ZA2BK153
Red
ZA2BK154
Amber
ZA2BK155
Blue
ZA2BK156
Clear
ZA2BK157
Green
ZA2BK183
Red
ZA2BK184
Amber
ZA2BK185
Blue
ZA2BK186
Clear
ZA2BK187
Green
ZA2BK173
Red
ZA2BK174
Amber
ZA2BK175
Blue
ZA2BK176
Clear
ZA2BK177
Selector Switch Sequences (using light module/contact block assemblies, page 28)
2 Position selector switch
3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
O
X
O
X
O
X
1 N.O. (left or right)
1 N.C. (left or right)
1 N.O.
and
X
O
1 N.C.
Note: View from front of panel
Contact block guide
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
1 N.O. (left)
2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)
1 N.O. (right)
1 N.C. (right)
1 N.C. (left)
2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20
Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 29
Replacement Parts (lenses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 32-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
26
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Square Push Buttons
Standard operators t
Description
Type
Flush
ZA2CAk
Push buttons
Extended head
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
ZA2CA2
Green
ZA2CA3
Red
ZA2CA4
Yellow
ZA2CA5
Blue
ZA2CA6
Black
ZA2CL2
Green
ZA2CL3
Red
ZA2CL4
Yellow
ZA2CL5
Blue
ZA2CL6
White
ZA2CV01
Standard pilot lightsf
ZA2CVO k
Green
ZA2CV03
Red
ZA2CV04
Yellow
ZA2CV05
Blue
ZA2CV06
Clear
ZA2CV07
White
ZA2CW31
Illuminated push buttonsj
Flush push button
heads
ZA2CW1k
Projecting
push button heads
Green
ZA2CW33
Red
ZA2CW34
Yellow
ZA2CW35
Blue
ZA2CW36
Clear
ZA2CW37
White
ZA2CW11
Green
ZA2CW13
Red
ZA2CW14
Yellow
ZA2CW15
Blue
ZA2CW16
Clear
ZA2CW17
Accessories for square push buttons
Mounting Tool
t
f
j
Ring Nut Wrench and Lens Extractor
ZA2CZ12
For use with contact block assemblies, page 28.
For use with pilot light modules, page 24.
For use with light module / contact block assemblies, page 28.
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20
Contact Block Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
Light modules with Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 28
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
27
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Contact Block Assemblies
Contact block assemblies
contact blocks and mounting collar for XA2B pilot devices s
Contacts
N.O. N.C.
Description
1 Contact block
Contact block
with mounting collar
ZA2BZ101
2 Contact blocks
Catalog Number
1
-
ZA2BZ101
-
1
ZA2BZ102
2
-
ZA2BZ103
-
2
ZA2BZ104
1
1
ZA2BZ105
Additional contact blocks u
Description
For converting body/contact
assemblies to 3, 4, 5 or 6
contacts max or replacing
1st or 2nd contact blocks
Additional contact block
ZB2BE10k
Contact
N.O.
N.C.
■
Type
Catalog Number
Standard
ZB2BE101
Standard
ZB2BE102
Mounting collar only
for attaching contact block(s) to
operator heads
ZA2BZ009
Light module assemblies
mounting collar with light module and contact blocks for XA2B pilot devicess
Contacts
N.O. N.C.
Description
Catalog Number
Direct supply incandescent bulb included (AC/DC) j
Mounting collar
ZA2BZ009
Without contacts
1
-
ZA2BW061+
1 Contact block
-
1
ZA2BW062+
2
-
ZA2BW063+
-
2
ZA2BW064+
1
1
ZA2BW065+
2 Contact blocks
Transfomer type (1.2 VA/6 V incandescent bulb included) (AC only)fj
Without contacts◆
1
-
1 Contact block
-
1
ZA2BW0 t2
2
-
ZA2BW0 t3
-
2
ZA2BW0t4
1
1
ZA2BW0t5
2 Contact blocks
Transformer type
ZA2BWOt1
ZA2BW0 t1
Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply
2 Contact blocks
1
1
ZA2BW075
■
N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
+ Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit
voltage.
t Select proper digit for desired primary voltage: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2 (48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz) 94
(220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz).
f Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field for details.
u Non- illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contact blocks maximum (3 decks of 2).
j Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contact blocks maximum (2 decks of 2).
s Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BE101 becomes ZB2BE1013.
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20
Replacement Parts (bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 31
28
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Legend Plate Carriers
Legend plate carriers (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
Complete with “snap-in” (27 x 8 mm) legend plates, with standard text.
“Start” functions: white characters on black. “Stop” functions: white characters on red.
Catalog
Number
Standard texts
Standard text
ZA2BZ32326
30 x 40 mm
Carrier only
ZA2BZ32
Standard texts
Catalog
Number
Auto-Hand
ZA2BZ32364
Off
Auto-O-Hand
ZA2BZ32385
On
ZA2BZ32312
ZA2BZ32311
Off-On
ZA2BZ32367
Open
ZA2BZ32313
Auto
ZA2BZ32115
Power On
ZA2BZ32326
Close
ZA2BZ32314
Reset
ZA2BZ32323
Down
ZA2BZ32308
Reverse
ZA2BZ32306
Emergency Stop
ZA2BZ32330
Run
ZA2BZ32334
Fast
ZA2BZ32328
Slow
ZA2BZ32327
Forward
ZA2BZ32305
Start
ZA2BZ32303
Hand
ZA2BZ32316
Stop
ZA2BZ32304
Inch
ZA2BZ32321
Up
ZA2BZ32307
Hand-O-Auto
ZA2BZ32387
Description
Complete with “snap-in”
(27 x 8 mm) legend plates, blank
Color
Catalog
Number
Black or red background
ZA2BZ32101
White or yellow background
Legend plate carriers only
ZA2BZ32102
ZA2BZ32
Snap in blank only (27 X 8 mm)
Black or red background
ZA2BY4101
White or yellow background
ZA2BY4102
Legend plate carriers (30 x 50 mm) for XA2Bf pilot devices
Description
30 x 50 mm
ZA2BZ33
Complete with “snap-in”
(27 x 18 mm) legend plates, blank
Color
Catalog
Number
Black or red background
ZA2BZ33101
White or yellow background
Legend plate carriers only
ZA2BZ33102
ZA2BZ33
Snap in blank only (27 x 18 mm)
Black or red background
ZA2BY5101
White or yellow background
ZA2BY5102
Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 40 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
With “snap-in” blank legend plate
Black or red background
White or yellow background
ZA2BZ34101
ZA2BZ34102
Legend plate carriers only
ZA2BZ34
No legend square aspect ring
ZA2BZ31
Legend carrier for square aspect head (30 x 50 mm) for XA2B pilot devices
30 x 40 mm
Square aspect
ZA2BZ34
With “snap-in” blank legend plate
Black or red background
White or yellow background
Legend plate carriers only
ZA2BZ35101
ZA2BZ35102
ZA2BZ35
30 x 50 mm
Square aspect
ZA2BZ35
29
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Accessories
Type
Description
Guards/Locks
Closing plates
22 mm
Closing plate
ZB2SZ3
Miscellaneous Accessories
Tools
Push on/push off
mechanism
ZB2BZ21
Mylar circular
legends for use with
transparent flush
head operators
See page 21
Catalog Number
60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)
no padlocking provision
ZB2BZ19
Black plastic
Gray plastic
Blue metallic
Add on push-on/push-off mechanism
Bulb extractor for use with BA9s
Ring nut wrench
Lense removal key
No text
O
I
Auto
Hand
Off
On
Start
Stop
Forward
Reverse
ZB2SZ3
ZB2SZ4
ZB2SZ2
ZB2BZ21
XBFX13
ZA2BZ905
ZB2BZ8
ZB2BY1101
ZBZBY1146
ZBZBY1147
ZB2BY1115
ZB2BY1316
ZB2BY1312
ZB2BY1311
ZB2BY1303
ZB2BY1304
ZB2BY1305
ZB2BY1306
Replacement Parts
Type
Mylar circular legend
ZB2BVkkk
Replacement lenses
ZB2-BV...
Replacement ring nut
ZB2BW93k
ZB2-BW93.
Replacement boots
Replacement keys
ZB2BP012
ZB2-BP012
+
j
Description
Lens – standard pilot light
Lens kit – standard pilot light (includes lens, diffuser and gasket)
Lens – pilot light (jeweled for LED and Neon)
Lens – flush illuminated push buttons
Lens – flush illuminated push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon)
Lens – extended push buttons
Lens – extended push buttons (jeweled for LED and Neon)
Lens – push-to-test
Lens – rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series (2 button with indicator)
Lens – 40 mm mushroom
Standard nut for all operators
Replacement silicon boot for ZB2BP series operators
Replacement neoprene booty for ZB2BP series operators
Replacement key for standard selector switches and key release
mushroom operators. Qty. 1- Ronis key #455.
Key #421
Qty. 1
Key #458A
Qty. 1
Key #520
Qty. 1
Key #3131A
Qty. 1
Catalog Number
ZB2BV01k
ZB2BV02k
ZB2BV01k3
ZB2BW91k
ZB2BW93k3
ZB2BW93k
ZB2BW93k3
ZB2BV01k1
ZB2BW90k
W4042926400k
ZB2BBZ901
ZB2BP01j
ZB2BP02j
Q99900901
Q99900911
Q99900910
Q99900912
Q99900915
Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1-white, 3-green, 4-red, 5-amber, 6-blue, 7-clear).
Example ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.
Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue).
Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.
Q99900901
Q99900901
ZA2 BZ901
ZA2-BZ901
30
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
ZA2BL•
.47
12
1.22
31
1.57
40
ZA2B•••
1.18
30
ZA2BS844
1.18
30
1.22
31
ZA2BS74
.66
17
ZA2BS834
2.36
60
1.57
40
1.18
30
ZA2B
(with 30 x 40
legend plate carrier)
ZA2B•••
ZA2CL•
.65
16.5
.66
17
.66
17
ZA2B•••
ZA2BP•
1.57
40
dia.
1.18
30
E
ZA2CA•
1.18
30
Control units
(operating heads)
ZA2BA••
1.18
30
Panel cut-out
(Thickness E = 1 to 5 mm)
1.18
30
XA2B 22 mm
Dimensions
1.89
48
1.22
31
ZA2BS14
1.89
48
ZA2BS24
ZA2BS9•4
ZA2BW8•••4
55
19
ZA2BW8•••4
1.18
30
1.18
30
1.18
30
1.18
30
.78
20
36.5
42
33
42
ZA2BV3, BV4, BV5
33
42
42
ZA2BV7
29
(bodies)
ZA2BV6
60
ZA2BK1••
55
ZA2BW1••
ZA2BG•
.94
24
ZA2BVO•
55
ZA2BW3••
1.91
48.5
1.00
25.5
16.5
1.18
30
.27
7
ZA2BJ••
30
1.57
40
1.14
29
1.65
42
.94
24
.94
24
1.22
31
1.00
25.5
1.18
30
Mounting collar
ZA2BZ009
O 30
.94
24
ZA2BD••
.59
15
O 30
1.69
43
.94
24
ZA2BL••34
.43
11
Body contact assemblies
ZA2BZ10•
1.22
31
1.67
42.5
1.67
42.5
1.57
40
ZA2BA••34
1.18
30
.94
24
1.22
31
1.18
30
.94
24
2.36
60
1.18
30
ZA2B
(with 30 x 50
legend plate carrier)
1.57
40
1.18
30
25.5
19
11
15
All dimensions are in mm. To convert to inches, divide mm by 25.4.
31
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XALB
General Purpose Control Stations
The XALB line of standard push button wall stations are in IEC Type IP65, plastic enclosures for indoor
and outdoor use. The units have UL, CSA, and IEC approvals. The enclosures are provided with 4 to
8 cable entry knockouts. Two knockouts are in the base. A cross reference between the base (contact
blocks) and the cover (operators) is provided to avoid confusion.
Wiring
diagram
Nameplates
1 push button
Start
XALB101
1 push button
Stop
XALB111
1 push button
(mushroom head)
N/A
XALB164
1 push button
(mushroom head)
Turn to release
XALJ174
1 push button
(mushroom head)
Turn to release
“No Tease”
XALJ178
1 push button
(mushroom head)
key to release
N/A*
XALJ184
1 push button
(mushroom head)
key to release
“No Tease”
Marking
For Declaration of
Conformity, see page 226.
XALJ188
2 push buttons
Start
Stop
2 push buttons
Forward
Reverse
1 pilot light
2 push buttons
Start
Stop
XALB371
3 push buttons
Forward
Reverse
Stop
XALB311
3 push buttons
Up
Down
Stop
XALB321
3 push buttons
Open
Close
Stop
XALB341
File E164353
CCN NKCR
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
Part
Number
Operators
XALB211
120V
max
XALB221
* Yellow cover per EN418 of European Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC
32
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XALB
Enclosures and Base Mounted Components
XALB Wall Stations use ZA2B operators, special base mounted contact blocks and light modules.
Legends used are ZB2BYkk type from page 57.
Empty Enclosures
Description
Number of Holes
Part Number
1
XALB01
2
XALB02
3
XALB03
4
XALB04
5
XALB05
1
XALJ01
Light grey lid with
dark grey base
Yellow lid with grey base
XALB03
Contact Blocks (base mounted)
Symbol
Function
Part Number
3
Description
1 N/O
XENL1111
1 N/C
XENL1121
4
Slow make
1
Slow break, direct opening
2
XENL1111
Contact Blocks (operator mounted)
Description
Symbol
Slow make, Slow break, (direct opening)
XALV6
21
13
31
22
14
32
Function
2 N/C, 1N/O
ZA2BZ141
Pilot Light Bodies
Description
Supply Voltage
Direct supply bulb included (AC/DC) j
Part Number
XALV6
Transformer Type (AC only)
(1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft
Direct through resistor
BA9s, 130 V bulb included
XALW6
Part Number
120 V Primary
XALV3
240 V Primary
XALV94
480 V Primary
XALV95
230-240 V
XALV7
Illuminated Push Button Bodies (1 N/C + 1 N/O)
Description
Supply Voltage
Part Number
Direct supply (bulb included) (AC/DC) j
≤ 400 V
XALW6
120 V Primary
XALW3
240 V Primary
XALW94
480 V Primary
XALW95
230-240 V
XALW7
Transformer Type (AC only)
(1.2 VA/6 V Lamp Included)ft
Direct through resistor
BA9s, 130 V bulb included
j
f
t
Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. Replacement bulbs available on page
24. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
Base mounted transformer light modules require a separately mounted transformer which mounts in the open next to the light
module (hole blanking plug provided).
Additional primary voltages are available. Contact local field office for details.
Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 21-23
Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 25
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 20
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 30
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 34
33
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XALB
Dimensions
Single-way control stations XALB01, XALJ01, XALB1kk, XALJ1kk
(6)
2xø4.3
=
1.57
40
(2) 77 mm with selector switch
=
=
2.68
68
(1) 62 mm with push button
=
=
=
(5)
2.0
51
(1) (2)
=
=
=
2.13
54
2.68
68
(3) (4)
(3) 82 mm with mushroom head push button
=
(4) 102 mm with trigger action mushroom head push button
(5) 2 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands
4.17
106
(6) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
=
2-way control stations XALB02, XALB2kk
=
=
=
(1)
1.9
48
2.68
68
=
=
=
=
4.10
104
1.18
30
2xØ4.3
(2)
=
2.0
51
2.4
62
=
=
2.67
68
(1) 4 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands
1.57 =
40
2.13
54
(2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
=
=
=
(2)
3.86
98
1.77
45
3.07
78
2xø4.3
=
(3)
=
=
=
1.18
30
5.28
134
1.18
30
=
3-way control stations XALB03, XALB3kk
2.4
62
2.52
64 (1)
=
2.0
51
=
=
=
2.68
68
1.57
40
2.13
54
(1) Pilot light
=
(2) 6 knock-outs in sides for addition of CM12 cable glands
=
(3) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for cable entry through base
4 and 5-way control stations XALB04, B05
2xØ4.3
(1)
=
=
H
H1
H2
=
(2)
=
=
=
1.18
30
1.18
30
b
1.18
30
1.18
30
=
=
2.40
62(ZA2-BA...)
2.0
51
2.51
64(ZA2-BVO.)
2.56
65(ZA2-BP.)
3.22 / 82
(ZA2-BC44.BS44)
=
=
2.60
66
Dual Dimensions:
=
=
1.57
40
2.13
54
=
=
XAL b
H
H1
H2
B04
164 128 108 62
B05
194 158 138 72
(1) 6 knock-outs in sides for
addition of CM12 cable
glands
(2) 2 Ø 19 mm knock-outs for
cable entry through base
Inches
Millimeters
34
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XA2B 22 mm
Mounting Instructions
Panel cut-out: (legend plate carrier included)
+ 0.2
24.10
+ 0.4
3.3 0
+ 0.4
1
5 mm
+ 0.4
22.3 0
22.3 0
Legend plate carrier mounting:
Fixing the operating head onto the body:
clic
clic
Removing the body:
1
2
3
35
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Modified Panels by Square D
Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels
Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria,
incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.
Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging from
standard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot
device assemblies.
In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in
numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, and
dimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before
production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will
be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.
For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact
your local Square D sales office.
36
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Non-Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Two Button Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Specialty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reset Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Pilot Lights and Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Illuminated Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Light Module Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Specialty Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
XAPA Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
XAPG Diecast Metal Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
XAPE Flush Mount Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
XB2B 22 mm Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
General Characteristics
Environment
Conformity to standards
Approvals
Protective treatment
Ambient temperature
Resistance to vibration
Resistance to shock
Protection against electric shock
Degree of protection
conforming to IEC 529
and NF C 20-010
Mechanical life
XB2B, XD2P: UL 508, IEC 947-5-1, EN60947-5-1, IEC337-1, IEC337-2, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE1003,
BS 4794, VDE 0660-200, CSA C 22-2 No. 14, CSA C 22-2 No. 66
UL: push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600;
pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);
pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V)
CSA: push buttons and selector switches NEMA Type A600-Q600.
pilot lights and illuminated push buttons direct supply (120 V max.);
pilot lights and illuminated push buttons with transformer (600 V).
ASE, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, BUREAU VERITAS, SAHKOTARKASTUSKESKUS, GL, DNV, LROS
XD2P, standard version: CSA A600-Q600, LROS.
Standard version: TC “All climates”
Operating: -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F) Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F )
60 mm diameter mushroom head: 8 g. Other push buttons: 15 g. Small joystick controllers: 5 g (from 40 to 50 Hz)
Conforming to IEC 68-2-6.
Push buttons: 70 g. Mushroom head push-buttons: 15 g. Selector switches: 200 g. Conforming to IEC 68-2-27.
XB2B, XD2P: Class 1, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
NEMA ratings XB2B: 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12K, 13, XB2B, XD2P: IP 65: flush and protecting, illuminated and non-illuminated
push buttons (mounted). IP 66: booted and mushroom head push buttons, selector switches, pilot lights and small
joystick controllers (mounted). IP 40: double- headed push buttons (IP 65 on request).
Push buttons—3 million operations (Latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations. Illuminated selector
switches: 100,000 operations). The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions.
Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create any
express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered on this
product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D Digest.
Contact block characteristics
Nominal thermal current
Nominal insulation voltage
10 A conforming to IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, UL 508, CSA 22-2 No. 14, VDE 0660 part 2, NEMA Type A600-Q600.
500 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110, IEC 158-1, 600 V conforming to UL 508, 600 V conforming to
CSA 22-2 No. 14.
Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Slow- make N.O. or slow-break N.C. N.C. with direct opening operation conforming to EN60947-5-1
section 3.
≤25 mΩ conforming to: NF C 93-050 method A or IEC 225-7 category 3.
Flush or projecting push buttons - with 1 NO contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 NC contact: 1.8 lb
Additional contacts - N.O.: add 1 lb - N.C.: add 0.7 lb.
Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
10 A cartridge fuses, Gl or N conforming to IEC 269-1and VDE 0660-200.
Insulation catagory
Contact operation
Contact resistance
Operating force
Terminal referencing
Short circuit protection
millions of operations
Rated power
conforming to IEC 947-5-1 Appendix C
duty categories AC11-DC11
Operating frequency: 3,600 ops/hour
Load factor: 0.5
AC supply (50-60 Hz)
127 V
220 V 24/48 V
1
DC supply
Power broken in watts
for 1 million operations
File E164353
CCN NKCR
Voltage
24 V 48 V 120 V
Inductive
load
65 W 48 W 40 W
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
AC Ratings, Inductive - NEMA A600
35% Power factor
ith = 10 A
Resistive 75%
Continuous
Power factor
carrying
Make, Break and
Amperes
continuous
Amperes
Volts
Make
Amperes
VA
Break
Amperes
120
60
7200
6
720
10
10
01
240
30
7200
3
720
10
10
.06
.04
480
15
7200
1.5
720
10
10
600
12
7200
1.2
720
10
10
06
04
02
VA
Marking
For Declaration of
Conformity, see page 226.
DC Ratings, NEMA Type Q600
.02
Inductive and resistive
.01
1
Cabling
2
4 6 10 20 40 60
current in amperes
Volts
Make and break
Continuous
125
0.55
2.5
250
0.27
2.5
600
0.10
2.5
XB2B, XD2P: Screw and captive clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 lb-in. Capacity: minimum 1 x .5 mm2
(20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) or 1 x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or
by quick connector conforming to NF C 20-120 (on request).
38
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Non-Illuminated Operators
Operator
Type
Color
Flush head
ZB2BA•
Flush head
White
ZB2BA1
Black
ZB2BA2
Green
ZB2BA3
Red
ZB2BA4
Yellow
ZB2BA5
Blue
ZB2BA6
Grey
ZB2BA8
White “I”
Metallic flush head
ZB2BA•9
Transparent flush head
ZB2BA•8
Catalog
Number
ZB2BA131
Black “START”
ZB2BA230
Black “O”
ZB2BA232
Green “I”
ZB2BA331
Red “O”
ZB2BA432
Flush head premarked
Green “START”
ZB2BA333
Green “ON”
ZB2BA341
Red “STOP”
ZB2BA434
Red “OFF”
ZB2BA435
Black
ZB2BA29
Metallic flush head
(metal pusher)
Transparent flush head
Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk)
See page 57
Guarded head
ZB2BA•6
Guarded head
Green
ZB2BA39
Red
ZB2BA49
Yellow
ZB2BA59
Green
ZB2BA38
Red
ZB2BA48
Amber
ZB2BA58
Blue
ZB2BA68
Clear
ZB2BA78
White
ZB2BA16
Black
ZB2BA26
Green
ZB2BA36
Red
ZB2BA46
Yellow
ZB2BA56
Blue
ZB2BA66
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references (except ZB2BP2 TO ZB2BP6).
Example: ZB2BA2 becomes ZB2BA27.
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46
Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53
Application Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59
39
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Non-Illuminated Operators
Operator
Type
Color
Extended head
Extended head
ZB2BL•
White
ZB2BL1
Black
ZB2BL2
Green
ZB2BL3
Red
ZB2BL4
Yellow
ZB2BL5
Blue
ZB2BL6
Red “O”
Extended head premarked
Silicon booted head
Neoprene booted head
Silicon booted head
ZB2BP•
Flush with reinforced dust, damp,
and cutting oil protection
Flush with reinforced
protection
ZB2BA•5
Transparent silicon booted push button
Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk)
See page 57.
ZB2BL432
Red “STOP”
ZB2BL434
Red “OFF”
ZB2BL435
Black
Extended head
marked stop
ZB2BL434
Catalog
Number
ZB2BP2
Green
ZB2BP3
Red
ZB2BP4
Yellow
ZB2BP5
Blue
ZB2BP6
Black
ZB2BP02
Green
ZB2BP03
Red
ZB2BP04
Yellow
ZB2BP05
Blue
ZB2BP06
White
ZB2BA15
Black
ZB2BA25
Green
ZB2BA35
Red
ZB2BA45
Yellow
ZB2BA55
Blue
ZB2BA65
Green
ZB2BP38
Red
ZB2BP48
Yellow
ZB2BP58
Blue
ZB2BP68
Clear
ZB2BP78
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references (except ZB2BP2 TO ZB2BP6 and ZB2BP02 TO ZB2BP06).
Example: ZB2BL2 becomes ZB2BL27.
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 46
Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 38
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 57
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 55
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 56
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59
40
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Mushroom Operators and Yellow Contrast Plates
Operator
Type
Size
Mushroom head 40mm
ZB2BC•
30mm
Mushroom head
Momentary
40mm
Mushroom head 60mm
ZB2BR•
60mm
Mushroom head
key release
ZB2BS•4
Mushroom head
turn to release
ZB2BS54
G
ER EN
CY
EM
Mushroom head
with trigger action
turn to release
ZB2BS844
S TOP
ZB2BY8330
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
ZB2BC24
Green
ZB2BC34
Red
ZB2BC44
Yellow
ZB2BC54
Blue
ZB2BC64
Black
ZB2BC2
Green
ZB2BC3
Red
ZB2BC4
Yellow
ZB2BC5
Blue
ZB2BC6
Black
ZB2BR2
Green
ZB2BR3
Red
ZB2BR4
Yellow
ZB2BR5
Blue
ZB2BR6
40mm
Red
ZB2BS14
60mm
Red
ZB2BS24
Mushroom head push button
with trigger actionf
Key releasea
40mm
Red
ZB2BS944
Mushroom head
turn to release
40mm
Red
ZB2BS54
Premarked “EMO”
40mm
Red
ZB2BS5430
Mushroom head push button
with trigger actionf
Turn to release
40mm
Red
ZB2BS844
Mushroom head
turn to release
60mm
Red
ZB2BS64
Mushroom head
push-pull
40mm
Premarked “EMERGENCY STOP”
40mm
Mushroom head
Key releasea
Mushroom head
push-pull
60mm
Black
ZB2BT2
Red
ZB2BT4
Red
ZB2BT43
Black
ZB2BX2
Red
ZB2BX4
a Key release operators come with Ronis #455 keys (quantity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 56. For other key
numbers contact local field office.
f Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the
operator.
Guards / Locks
Type
Size
Color
Metal
40 mm with finger cutout and 7 mm holes for padlocking
Red
Plastic
60 mm (for 40 mm turn to release)
Yellow
Catalog
Number
ZB2BZ1804
ZB2BZ1905
Yellow Contrast Plates
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter
Text
Blank
Emergency Stop
Arret d’Urgence
Not Aus
Parada de Emergencia
Arresto Emergenza
Language Catalog Number
N/A
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
ZB2BY9101
ZB2BY9330
ZB2BY9130
ZB2BY9230
ZB2BY9430
ZB2BY9630
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Text
Language
Catalog Number
Blank
Emergency Stop
Arret d’Urgence
Not Aus
Parada de Emergencia
Arresto Emergenza
N/A
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
ZB2BY8101
ZB2BY8330
ZB2BY8130
ZB2BY8230
ZB2BY8430
ZB2BY8630
Contact Block Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 46
Specialty Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 53
Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 38
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 57
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 55
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 56
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 58-59
41
4/98
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Lever and Key Operators
Lever Operators
Type
Number of positions, actions
Lever Color
Catalog Number
Black
White
Red
Black
White
Red
Black
White
Red
Black
White
Red
Black
White
Red
Black
White
Red
ZB2BD2
ZB2BD201
ZB2BD204
ZB2BD4
ZB2BD401
ZB2BD404
ZB2BD3
ZB2BD301
ZB2BD304
ZB2BD5
ZB2BD501
ZB2BD504
ZB2BD8
ZB2BD801
ZB2BD804
ZB2BD7
ZB2BD701
ZB2BD704
2-maintained
Standard lever
ZB2BD•••
2-spring return
from right to left
3-maintained
Standard or
Extended lever a
3-spring return to center
from left and right
Extended lever a
ZB2BJ•••
3-spring return from
right to center
3-spring return from
left to center
Key Operators
Type
Number of positions, actions, key removal
Key switch f
Key switch
ZB2BG••
Catalog Number
2-maintained key removal from left
2-maintained key removal from left or right
2-spring return from right to left, key removal from left
3-maintained key removal from center
3-maintained key removal from left and right
3-maintained key removal from left
3-maintained key removal from all positions
3-spring return left or right to center, key removal from center
3-spring return left to center key removal right
3-spring return right to center key removal center
3-spring return right to center key removal left
ZB2BG2
ZB2BG4
ZB2BG6
ZB2BG3
ZB2BG5
ZB2BG9
ZB2BG0
ZB2BG7
ZB2BG1
ZB2BG8
ZB2BG08
Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 46)
2 Position selector switch
3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
O
X
O
Contact block guide
X
O
X
1 N.O. (left or right)
1 N.C. (left or right)
1 N.O.
and
X
O
1 N.C.
Note: View from front of panel
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
1 N.O. (left)
2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)
1 N.O. (right)
1 N.C. (right)
1 N.C. (left)
2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BD3 becomes ZB2BD37.
a When ordering extended lever subsitute J for D. Example: ZB2BD2 becomes ZB2BJ2.
f Key selector switches come with Ronis #455 keys (quanitity 2) as standard. For replacement keys see page 21. For switches
keyed with different keys, add the suffixes shown in the table below (no change in price). For other key numbers contact local field
office.
Key Number
Suffix
421
458A
520
3131A
12
10
14
20
Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46
Specialty Contacts................................................................................ Page 53
Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38
Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57
Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56
Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59
42
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Two Button Operators
Momentary operators
Type
Two flush
ZB2BA9•••
Marked f
Black/Red
ZB2BA9124
Green/Red
ZB2BA9134
I,O
Black/Red
ZB2BA9224
I,O
Green/Red
ZB2BA9234
STOP, START
Black/Red
ZB2BA9724
STOP, START
Green/Red
ZB2BA9734
Black/Red
ZB2BL9324
Two flush
Green/Red
ZB2BL9334
I,O
Black/Red
ZB2BL9424
I,O
Green/Red
ZB2BL9434
STOP, START
Black/Red
ZB2BL9824
STOP, START
Green/Red
ZB2BL9834
One flush, one extended
One flush, one extended
ZB2BL94••
f
Catalog
Number
Color
Additional markings available on special order. Contact local field office for details.
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BA9124 becomes ZB2BA91247.
2 Button maintained operators
Type
Start/stop
ZB2BL98••
Number of
contact(s)
Button 1
Button 2
Catalog
Number
1
NO-Black
Black
XB2BF521
1
NO-Black
Red
XB2BF551
1
NO-Green
Red
XB2BF581
2
NO-Black
NO-Black
XB2BF523
2
NO-Black
NO-Red
XB2BF553
2
NO-Green
NO-Red
XB2BF583
2
NO-Black
NO-Black
XB2BF525
2
NO-Black
NC-Red
XB2BF555
2
NO-Green
NC-Red
XB2BF585
Flush interlocked push buttons
(30 mm centers, maintained,
mechanically interlocked)
Units include contact block(s) as shown.
Type
Replacement push button operators only
(with no spring return in head)
for XB2BF
Interlocked
XB2BF5••
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
ZB2BAW80424194002
Green
ZB2BAW80424194003
Red
ZB2BAW80424194004
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BF521 becomes ZB2BF5217.
Contact Block Assemblies ............................................................... Page 46
Specialty Contacts.......................................................................... Page 53
Application Information .................................................................... Page 38
Legend Plates.................................................................................. Page 57
Accessories ..................................................................................... Page 55
Replacement Parts .......................................................................... Page 56
Dimensions............................................................................... Pages 58-59
43
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Specialty Operators
Operators
Type
Wobble sticks
Catalog
Number
Color
Wobble sticks
Potentiometer operator f
Black
ZB2BB2
Red
ZB2BB4
Black
ZB2BD922
2-maintained
Joysticks t
Contacts supplied
Potentiometer operator
f
XD2PA22
4-maintained
XD2PA14
4-spring return
XD2PA24
Units come with 1 N.O. contact in each direction. Screw terminals. Contact blocks cannot be added or removed from the above
arrangements. For other requirements, contact local sales office.
Customer to supply potentiometer, unit accepts 1/4" diameter, 1.625" (43-47 mm) length shaft potentiometer.
4 Position
2 Position
OPERATED
X
OPERATED
X
CENTER
CENTER
CENTER
OPERATED
Joysticks
CENTER
X
CENTER
OPERATED
X
OPERATED
t
XD2PA12
2-spring return
CENTER
X
OPERATED
X
These 2 direction and 4 direction position charts are viewed from behind the panel, thereby reversing
east and west positions. When lever is moved away from center, only one contact changes from N.O.
to N.C. The other contact blocks in the swtich are unaffected.
Two step push buttons (contacts supplied)
Type
Flush head
k
Contact
1st step
Contact
2nd step
Catalog
Number
N.O.
N.O.
XB2BAk41
N.O.
N.C.
XB2BAk42
N.O.+N.C.
N.O.
XB2BAk43
N.O.+N.C.
N.O.+N.C.
XB2BAk44
Replace k with desired color head. (1-white, 2-black, 3-green, 4-red, 5-yellow, 6-blue).
Two position toggle switch (maintained)
Type
Two position toggle switch
NEMA Type 1 only
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
ZB2BD28
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BD922 becomes ZB2BD9227.
Contact Block Assemblies .....................................................................Page 46
Specialty Contacts ................................................................................ Page 53
Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38
Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57
Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56
Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
44
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Reset Operators
Reset operators
Type
Adjustable
length of rod
Description
XB2BA8kk
0.39" (10 mm) Travel
Panel thickness: 0.04" - 0.12" (1-3 mm)
Tightened by nut
0.55" (14 mm) Travel
Panel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm)
Tightened by 2 screw mounting
base (supplied)
0.24" - 0.63"
(6 - 16 mm)
0.63" - 1.02"
(16 - 26 mm)
1.18" - 2.25"
(30 - 57 mm)
2.16" - 3.23"
(55 - 82 mm)
XB2BA9kk
30 to 82 mm
3.15" - 4.2"
(80 - 107 mm)
4.13" - 5.2"
(105 - 132 mm)
Flush head
5.12"- 6.18"
(130 - 157 mm)
0.55" (14 mm) Travel
6.1" - 7.16"
Panel thickness: 0.04" - 0.23" (1-6 mm)
(155 - 182 mm)
Tightened by 2 screw mounting
base (supplied)
7.08" - 8.15"
(180 - 207 mm)
XB2BA9kk
80 to 257 mm
8.07" - 9.13"
(205 - 232 mm)
9.05" - 10.1"
(230 - 257 mm)
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
XB2BA821
Red
XB2BA841
Blue
XB2BA861
Black
XB2BA822
Red
XB2BA842
Blue
XB2BA862
Black
XB2BA921
Red
XB2BA941
Blue
XB2BA961
Black
XB2BA922
Red
XB2BA942
Blue
XB2BA962
Black
XB2BA923
Red
XB2BA943
Blue
XB2BA963
Black
XB2BA924
Red
XB2BA944
Blue
XB2BA964
Black
XB2BA925
Red
XB2BA945
Blue
XB2BA965
Black
XB2BA926
Red
XB2BA946
Blue
XB2BA966
Black
XB2BA927
Red
XB2BA947
Blue
XB2BA967
Black
XB2BA928
Red
XB2BA948
Blue
XB2BA968
Black
XB2BA929
Red
XB2BA949
Blue
XB2BA969
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BA944 becomes ZB2BA9447.
Application Information ......................................................................... Page 38
Legend Plates ....................................................................................... Page 57
Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59
45
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Contact Blocks
Mounting base with contact block(s) “Screw clamp connection”
N.O.
Contacts
N.O.
N.C.
Type
ZB2BZ101
N.C.
1 Contact Block
2 Contact Blocks
Catalog Number
1
-
-
1
ZB2BZ101
ZB2BZ102
2
-
ZB2BZ103
-
2
ZB2BZ104
1
1
ZB2BZ105
Additional contact blocks
Contacts
N.O.
N.C.
Type
ZB2BE10 k
For making up body assemblies
with 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocks
or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf
1
-
-
1
Catalog Number
ZB2BE101
■
ZB2BE102
Mounting base with contact block(s) “Quick connect” t
Contacts
N.O.
N.C.
Type
1 Contact Block
2 Contact Blocks
Catalog Number
1
-
ZB2BZ1013
-
1
ZB2BZ1023
2
-
ZB2BZ1033
-
2
ZB2BZ1043
1
1
ZB2BZ1053
Additional contact blocks “Quick Connect” *
Contacts
N.O.
N.C.
Type
For making up body assemblies
with 3, 4, 5 or max. of 6 contact blocks
or replacing 1st or 2nd contact blockf
1
-
-
1
Catalog Number
ZB2BE1013
■
ZB2BE1023
Spare parts
Description
ZB2BZ009
Catalog Number
Mounting Base only
With fixing screws
ZB2BZ009
Quick Connect t
Fitting by customer
ZB2BZ003
t Quick connect contact blocks will accept commercially available female quick slide connector (1 x 0.25" or 2 x 0.11")
f Non-illuminated devices can be configured with 6 contacts maximum (3 decks of 2).
■
N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
Non-Illuminated Operators .............................................................Pages 39-41
Specialty Contacts ............................................................................... Page 53
Application Information..........................................................................Page 38
Accessories...........................................................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts................................................................................Page 56
Dimensions ....................................................................................Pages 58-59
46
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Pilot Lights and Light Modules
Pilot light heads
Type
Standard
ZB2BV••
Special lens for neon and
LED bulbs
ZB2BV0••
Standard
Special lens for neon and LED bulbs
Glass lens (NEMA Type 1 only)
Color
Catalog
Number
White
ZB2BV01
Green
ZB2BV03
Red
ZB2BV04
Amber
ZB2BV05
Blue
ZB2BV06
Clear
ZB2BV07
Green
ZB2BV033
Red
ZB2BV043
Amber
ZB2BV053
Blue
ZB2BV063
Clear
ZB2BV073
Green
ZB2BV032
Red
ZB2BV042
Amber
ZB2BV052
Clear
ZB2BV072
Pilot light modules f
Direct supply
ZB2BV6
Type
Catalog
Number
Direct supply (incandescent bulb included)t (AC/DC)
ZB2BV6t
Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V bulb included) (AC only)
24 V: 50-60 Hz
ZB2BV1
48 V: 50-60 Hz
110 V: 50 Hz
ZB2BV2
110-120 V: 60 Hz
ZB2BV3
127 V: 50 Hz
ZB2BV91
220 V: 50 Hz
Transformer type
ZB2BV3
240 V: 50 Hz
ZB2BV4
220-240 V: 60 Hz
ZB2BV94
380 V: 50 Hz
ZB2BV5
415 V: 50 Hz
ZB2BV9
440-480 V: 60 Hz
ZB2BV95
500 V: 50 Hz
ZB2BV8
550-660 V: 60 Hz
ZB2BV98
Resistor type (130 V bulb included).
220/250 V (AC/DC)
t
f
ZB2BV7
Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V. If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
Light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BV6 becomes ZB2BV63.
Replacement Bulbs................................................................................Page 56
Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38
Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56
Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
47
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
Operator
Type
Color
Flush head
Flush Head
ZB2BW3•
Flush head for neon and LED lamps
Flush Head for LED
ZB2BW3••
Extended head
Extended Head
ZB2BW1•
Extended head for neon and LED lamps
Extended Head for LED
ZB2BW1••
Silicon booted flush head
Use with mylar circular legend (ZB2BY1kkk )
See page 57
Silicon Booted Flush Head
ZB2BW5•
Push to test
Catalog
Number
White
ZB2BW31
Green
ZB2BW33
Red
ZB2BW34
Amber
ZB2BW35
Blue
ZB2BW36
Clear
ZB2BW37
Green
ZB2BW333
Red
ZB2BW343
Amber
ZB2BW353
Blue
ZB2BW363
Clear
ZB2BW373
White
ZB2BW11
Green
ZB2BW13
Red
ZB2BW14
Amber
ZB2BW15
Blue
ZB2BW16
Clear
ZB2BW17
Green
ZB2BW133
Red
ZB2BW143
Amber
ZB2BW153
Blue
ZB2BW163
Clear
ZB2BW173
Green
ZB2BW53
Red
ZB2BW54
Amber
ZB2BW55
Blue
ZB2BW56
Clear
ZB2BW57
Green
ZB2BV031
Red
ZB2BV041
Amber
ZB2BV051
Blue
ZB2BV061
Clear
ZB2BV071
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BV071 becomes ZB2BV0717.
Light Module Assemblies .......................................................................Page 52
Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54
Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38
Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57
Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56
Dimensions .....................................................................................Pages 58-59
48
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
Mushroom operator
Type
Color
40 mm Mushroon head
2 position momentary
40 mm Mushroom head
ZB2BW••
40 mm Mushroom head
2 position maintained
Two button with amber indicatort
Green
ZB2BW43
Red
ZB2BW44
Amber
ZB2BW45
Blue
ZB2BW46
Clear
ZB2BW47
Green
ZB2BW63
Red
ZB2BW64
Amber
ZB2BW65
Blue
ZB2BW66
Clear
ZB2BW67
Color
Catalog
Number
NEMA Type 1 only f
Type
Marked
Two Flush
Two Flush
Amber Indicator
ZB2BW8••54
Black/Red
ZB2BW81254
Green/Red
ZB2BW81354
I,O
Black/Red
ZB2BW82254
I,O
Green/Red
ZB2BW82354
START,STOP
Black/Red
ZB2BW87254
START,STOP
Green/Red
ZB2BW87354
One flush, one extended
t
f
Catalog
Number
Black/Red
ZB2BW83254
Green/Red
ZB2BW83354
I,O
Black/Red
ZB2BW84254
I,O
Green/Red
ZB2BW84354
START,STOP
Black/Red
ZB2BW88254
START,STOP
Green/Red
ZB2BW88354
Additional color indicators available, contact local field office for details.
To upgrade to NEMA Type 3, 4, 13 order clear silicon boot ZB2BW008.
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BW64 becomes ZB2BW647.
Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52
Specialty Light Modules ........................................................................Page 54
Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38
Legend Plates .......................................................................................Page 57
Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts ................................................................................Page 56
Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59
49
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
Selector Switches
Number of positions, action
Catalog
Number
Color
2-maintained
Selector switch
ZB2BK1kk
Green
ZB2BK123
Red
ZB2BK124
Amber
ZB2BK125
Blue
ZB2BK126
Clear
ZB2BK127
2-spring return
Green
ZB2BK143
from right to left
Red
ZB2BK144
3-maintained
3-spring return to
center from right and left
3-spring return
from right to center
3-spring return
from left to center
Amber
ZB2BK145
Blue
ZB2BK146
Clear
ZB2BK147
Green
ZB2BK133
Red
ZB2BK134
Amber
ZB2BK135
Blue
ZB2BK136
Clear
ZB2BK137
Green
ZB2BK153
Red
ZB2BK154
Amber
ZB2BK155
Blue
ZB2BK156
Clear
ZB2BK157
Green
ZB2BK183
Red
ZB2BK184
Amber
ZB2BK185
Blue
ZB2BK186
Clear
ZB2BK187
Green
ZB2BK173
Red
ZB2BK174
Amber
ZB2BK175
Blue
ZB2BK176
Clear
ZB2BK177
Selector Switch Sequences (using contact block assemblies, page 52)
2 Position selector switch
3 Position selector switch
Contact block guide
O
X
O
Contact block guide
X
O
X
1 N.O. (left or right)
1 N.C. (left or right)
1 N.O.
and
X
O
1 N.C.
Note: View from front of panel
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
1 N.O. (left)
2 NC wired in series (side-by-side)
1 N.O. (right)
1 N.C. (right)
1 N.C. (left)
2 NO wired in parallel (side-by-side)
Operating heads with black metal bezel
To order, add suffix 7 to the above references.
Example: ZB2BK123 becomes ZB2BK1237.
Light Module Assemblies.......................................................................Page 52
Specialty Light Modules.........................................................................Page 54
Application Information ..........................................................................Page 38
Legend Plates........................................................................................Page 57
Accessories ...........................................................................................Page 55
Dimensions.....................................................................................Pages 58-59
50
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Illuminated Operators
40 mm Mushroom head
Push
positiont
Type
Non-Illuminated
XB2BN•••
Illuminated
(Direct Supply)
XB2BN••6•
Illuminated
(Transformer type)
XB2BN••••
Color
Catalog Number
1N.O. - 1N.C.♦
Catalog Number
2N.O. - 2N.C.
M
M
M
M
M
M
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
M
M
M
M
M
M
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
M
M
M
M
M
M
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
M
M
M
M
M
M
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
SR
White
XB2BN111
XB2BN112
Green
XB2BN311
XB2BN312
Red
XB2BN411
XB2BN412
Amber
XB2BN511
XB2BN512
Non-illuminated
Blue
XB2BN611
XB2BN612
M: Maintained
Clear
XB2BN711
XB2BN712
SR: Spring Return
White
XB2BN121
XB2BN322
Red
XB2BN421
XB2BN422
Amber
XB2BN521
XB2BN522
Blue
XB2BN621
XB2BN622
Clear
XB2BN721
XB2BN722
White
XB2BN1161
XB2BN1162
Green
XB2BN3161
XB2BN3162
Red
XB2BN4161
XB2BN4162
Amber
XB2BN5161
XB2BN5162
Blue
XB2BN6161
XB2BN6162
Illuminated
Clear
XB2BN7161
XB2BN7162
Direct supply
White
XB2BN1261
XB2BN1262
Green
XB2BN3261
XB2BN3262
Red
XB2BN4261
XB2BN4262
Amber
XB2BN5261
XB2BN5262
Blue
XB2BN6261
XB2BN6262
Clear
XB2BN7261
XB2BN7262
White
XB2BN1131
XB2BN1132
Green
XB2BN3131
XB2BN3132
Red
XB2BN4131
XB2BN4132
Amber
XB2BN5131
XB2BN5132
Blue
XB2BN6131
XB2BN6132
Illuminated
Clear
XB2BN7131
XB2BN7132
Transformer Type
White
XB2BN1231
XB2BN1232
110/120 V
Green
XB2BN3231
XB2BN3232
Red
XB2BN4231
XB2BN4232
Amber
XB2BN5231
XB2BN5232
Blue
XB2BN6231
XB2BN6232
Clear
XB2BN7231
XB2BN7232
White
XB2BN1141
XB2BN1142
Green
XB2BN3141
XB2BN3142
Red
XB2BN4141
XB2BN4142
Amber
XB2BN5141
XB2BN5142
Blue
XB2BN6141
XB2BN6142
Illuminated
Clear
XB2BN7141
XB2BN7142
Transformer Type
White
XB2BN1241
XB2BN1242
220/240V
Green
XB2BN3241
XB2BN3242
Red
XB2BN4241
XB2BN4242
Amber
XB2BN5241
XB2BN5242
Blue
XB2BN6241
XB2BN6242
Clear
XB2BN7241
XB2BN7242
White
W40429264001
Green
W40429264003
Red
W40429264004
Mushroom lens only
Amber
W40429264005
Blue
W40429264006
Clear
W40429264007
t Position status: Position 1 - Pull. Spring return, Position 2- Center, Maintained, Position 3 - Push. Maintained or spring return.
f Contacts cannot be modified or interchanged; therefore operators are not sold separately.
1 N.O./1 N.C.
Pos. 1
Pull
Pos. 2
Center
2 N.O./2 N.C.
Pos. 3
Push
Pos. 1
Pull
Pos. 2
Center
Pos. 3
Push
Application Information...........................................Page 38
Legend Plates ........................................................Page 57
Accessories ............................................................Page 55
Replacement Parts.................................................Page 56
Dimensions......................................................Pages 58-59
51
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Light Module Assemblies
Light module assemblies with contact block(s)
screw clamp connectorsk
N.O.
Type
N.C.
N.O.
Contacts
N.C.
Catalog
Number
Direct supply (incandescent bulb included) (AC/DC)
Without contactsf
-
-
1 Contact block
1
-
ZB2BW061+
-
1
ZB2BW062+
2 Contact blocks
Direct supply
ZB2BW06 k
ZB2BW063+
2
ZB2BW064+
1
1
ZB2BW065+
ZB2BW0t0
Without contactsf
-
-
1
-
ZB2BW0t1
-
1
ZB2BW0t2
2
-
ZB2BW0t3
-
2
ZB2BW0t4
1
1
ZB2BW0t5
1
ZB2BW075
Resistor type (130 V incandescent bulb included) 220-250 V supply
1
Additional contact blocks f
N.O.
■
N.C.
Contacts
N.O.
N.C.
Type
For making up body assemblies
with 3 or maximum 4 contact blocks
or replacing 1st or 2nd contact block
Additional contact block
ZB2BE10 k
-
-
1 Contact block
2 Contact blocks
Resistor type
ZB2BW075
2
Transformer type (1.2 VA/6 V AC incandescent bulb included) (AC only)j
2 Contact blocks
Transformer type
ZB2BW03k
ZB2BW060+
1
-
-
1
Catalog
Number
ZB2BE101
■
ZB2BE102
+
Complete catalog number by adding one of the following voltages: 6, 12, 24, 48 or 120 V AC/DC.
Note: If desired without bulb, omit voltage.
t Select proper digit for voltage desired: 1 (24 V 50/60 Hz) 2(48 V 50/60 Hz) 3 (110/120 V 50/60 Hz).
94 (220/240 V 60 Hz) 95 (440/480 V 60 Hz) 98 (550/600 V 60 Hz).
f Illuminated devices can be configured with a light module and 4 contacts maximum (2 decks of 2).
j Additional primary voltages available, contact local field office for details.
k Contact blocks and light module assemblies are available with quick connectors. Add suffix “3” to end of part number.
Example: ZB2BW061 becomes ZB2BW0613.
■
N.C. contact is direct opening operation conforming to EN 60 947-5-1, Section 3.
Illuminated Operators .................................................................... Pages 48-50
Specialty Light Modules........................................................................ Page 54
Application Information ......................................................................... Page 38
Legend Plates....................................................................................... Page 57
Accessories .......................................................................................... Page 55
Replacement Parts ............................................................................... Page 56
Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59
52
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Specialty Contact Blocks
Specialty contact blocks
Type
N.O.
Description
Low voltage / low current
Gold flashed contacts
5-24 volt 0.1-100 mA
Contact block without mounting base
N.C.
Number of
contacts
Catalog
Number
1-N.O.
ZB2BE1016
1-N.C.
ZB2BE1026
1-N.O.
ZB2BZ1016
1-N.C.
ZB2BZ1026
1-N.O.
Contact block w/o mounting base
Early closing
Late opening
Overlapping block w/mounting base
Overlapping, sequencing &
time delay contact blocks
Sequencing block w/mounting base
ZB2BE202
1-NO (early closing) &
1-NC (late opening)
ZB2BZ106
1-NO(early closing) &
1-N.O.
0.1-30 sec. time delay block
w/mounting base
1-N.O. &
10-180 sec. time delay block
w/mounting base
1-N.O. &
Contact blocks for ring
tongue lugs with widths
smaller than 0.312” (8 mm)
ZB2BE201
1-N.C.
1-N.C.
1-N.C.
ZB2BZ107
ZB2BZ91
ZB2BZ92
1-N.O.
ZB2BE1019
1-N.C.
ZB2BE1029
Application Information......................................................................... Page 38
Accessories.......................................................................................... Page 55
Replacement Parts .............................................................................. Page 56
Dimensions ................................................................................... Pages 58-59
53
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Specialty Light Modules
Specialty Light Modules
Type
Supply Voltage
Catalog Number
Flashing pilot light base
Light Module with incandescent bulb
included
Description
120 Vac
ZB2BV184
Flashing illuminated push button base
Light Module with incandescent bulb and
1 N.O./1 N.C. included
120 Vac
ZB2BW1845
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Flashing pilot light base
ZB2BV184
Off
Flashing
On
Wiring in parallel
X1 Y1
X1 Y1
X1 Y1
X1 Y1
X1 Y1
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
X2 Y2
X2 Y2
X2 Y2
X2 Y2
X2 Y2
-X1,+X2
Type
Remote test pilot light base
Description
Supply Voltage
Catalog Number
Single Diode
<380 V
ac or dc
ZB2BV156c
Description
Supply Voltage
Catalog Number
Dual Diode
<380 V
ac or dc
ZB2BV68
c When ordering, specify voltage required (6-120 V) Example: ZB2BV156120V
Typical Wiring Diagram – Single Diode
Test
X1
X2
Remote test
pilot light base
ZB2BV156
Type
Remote test pilot light base
Typical Wiring Diagram – Dual Diode
X1
M
Test
X2
Illuminated Operators..................................................................... Pages 48-50
Application Information.......................................................................... Page 38
Legend Plates ....................................................................................... Page 57
Accessories........................................................................................... Page 55
Replacement Parts................................................................................ Page 56
Dimensions .................................................................................... Pages 58-59
54
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
XB2B Accessories
Type
Boots
ZB2BZ16 kk
Catalog
Number
Description
Silicon boot for rectangular push button w/indicator light
ZB2BW008
Silicon boot for rectangular push button w/o light
ZB2BA008
40 mm for Momentary Mushrooms
40 mm with finger cut-out for push-pull
ZB2BZ17 kk
Guards/Locks
40 mm with finger cut-out and 7mm holes for padlocking
Blue
ZB2BZ1601
Black
ZB2BZ1602
Red
ZB2BZ1604
Yellow
ZB2BZ1605
Blue
ZB2BZ1701
Black
ZB2BZ1702
Red
ZB2BZ1704
Yellow
ZB2BZ1705
Blue
ZB2BZ1801
Black
ZB2BZ1802
Red
ZB2BZ1804
Yellow
ZB2BZ18 kk
Closing plates
22 mm
ZB2SZ3
Miscellaneous
accessories
ZB2BZ1805
60 mm mushroom guard (black plastic)
no padlocking provision
ZB2BZ19
Padlock attachment
(makes flush operator inaccessible)
ZB2BZ6
Black plastic
ZB2SZ3
Gray plastic
ZB2 SZ4
Blue metallic
ZB2SZ2
Adapter for mounting into 1 3/16" (30 mm) hole
and used with 30 mm P.B. nameplate
ZB2BZ41
Adapter for mounting into 30 mm hole and use with
XB2B nameplate
ZB2BZ4
Base only-for mounting contact blocks
ZB2BZ009
Add on push-on/push-off mechanism
ZB2BZ21
Bulb extractor for use with BA9s
XBFX13
ZB2BZ21
55
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Lamps
Voltage
AC/DC
Type
6
1.5
DL1CB006
2.0
DL1CE012
24
2.0
DL1CE024
48
2.4
DL1CE048
130
2.6
120
-
NE51HRT120V
220
-
NE51HRT220V
380
-
NE51HRT380V
Color
Voltage
Part Number
Neon
(use with direct supply light module)
Type
DL1CJUS• • •
(LED)
LED, BA9s base for
Direct Supply blocks
LED, BA9s base for
retrofitting into transformer Light
Modules
Catalog Number
12
Incandescent
Replacement bulbs
(Type BA9s)
DL1CE• • •
(incandescent)
Watts
DL1CE130
Green
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0063
Red
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0064
Amber
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0065
Green
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0123
Red
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0124
Amber
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0125
Green
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0243
Red
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0244
Amber
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0245
Green
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1203
Red
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1204
Amber
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1205
Green
9 Vac only
DL1CJUS0093
Red
9 Vac only
DL1CJUS0094
Amber
9 Vac only
DL1CJUS0095
Replacement Lenses, Boots and Keys
Type
ZB2BVkkk
ZB2-BV...
Replacement lenses
ZB2BW93k
ZB2-BW93.
ZB2BP012
ZB2-BP012
Replacement boots
Q99900901
Replacement keys
Q99900901
k
j
Catalog
Number
Description
Lens - standard pilot light
ZB2BV01k
Lens kit - standard pilot light
(includes lens, diffuser & gasket)
ZB2BV02k
Lens - pilot light
(jeweled for LED & Neon)
ZB2BV01k3
Lens - flush illuminated push buttons
ZB2BW91k
Lens - flush illuminated push buttons
(Jeweled for LED & Neon)
ZB2BW93k3
Lens - extended push buttons
ZB2BW93k
Lens - extended push buttons
(jeweled for LED & Neon)
ZB2BW93k3
Lens - push-to-test
ZB2BV01k1
Lens - rectangle for ZB2BW80000 series
(2 button with indicator)
ZB2BW90k
Lens - 40 mm mushroom
W4042926400k
Replacement silicon boot for ZB2BP
series operators
ZB2BP01j
Replacement neoprene boot for ZB2BP
series operators
ZB2BP02j
Replacement key for standard selector switches and key
release mushroom operators. Qty. 1 - Ronis key #455
Q99900901
Key # 421
Q99900911
Qty. 1
Key # 458A
Qty. 1
Q99900910
Key # 520
Qty. 1
Q99900912
Key # 3131A
Qty. 1
Q99900915
Complete lens part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (1- white, 3- green, 4-red, 5- amber, 6- blue, 7-clear). Example
ZB2BV013 green standard pilot lens. Note: Jeweled lens not available in white.
Complete boot part number by replacing with digit for desired color. (2- black, 3- green, 4- red, 5- yellow, 6- blue, 7-clear).
Example ZB2BP013 green silicon boot.
56
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Legend Plates
PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40 mm
Texta
Catalog Number
ERGEN
M
Y
C
E
Close
Down
Emergency Stop
Fast
Forward
For Rev
For-O-Rev
Hand Off Auto
High
High Low
In
Inch
Jog For
Jog Rev
Jog Run
Left
Low
Lower
Man-Auto
Off
Texta
ZB2BY2314
ZB2BY2308
ZB2BY2330
ZB2BY2328
ZB2BY2305
ZB2BY2371
ZB2BY2384
ZB2BY2387
ZB2BY2338
ZB2BY2369
ZB2BY2503
ZB2BY2321
ZB2BY2381
ZB2BY2380
ZB2BY2365
ZB2BY2310
ZB2BY2336
ZB2BY2337
ZB2BY2372
ZB2BY2312
Text
OP
ZB2BY8330
ZB2BY2311
ZB2BY2367
ZB2BY2313
ZB2BY2376
ZB2BY2388
ZB2BY2339
ZB2BY2326
ZB2BY2335
ZB2BY2323
ZB2BY2306
ZB2BY2309
ZB2BY2334
ZB2BY2327
ZB2BY2303
ZB2BY2304
ZB2BY2366
ZB2BY2307
ZB2BY2370
ZB2BY2389
a All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.
For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 60 mm diameter
ST
Catalog Number
On
Off On
Open
Open Close
Open-O-Close
Out
Power On
Raise
Reset
Reverse
Right
Run
Slow
Start
Stop
Stop Start
Up
Up Down
Up-O-Down
Blank
Emergency Stop
Arret d’Urgence
Not Aus
Parada de Emergencia
Arresto Emergenza
N/A
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Blank
Emergency Stop
Arret d’Urgence
Not Aus
Parada de Emergencia
Arresto Emergenza
Language Catalog Number
N/A
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Description
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Silver
Metal legend plates
Black
PVC custom engraved
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Red
j
Text
ZB2BY9101
ZB2BY9330
ZB2BY9130
ZB2BY9230
ZB2BY9430
ZB2BY9630
Type
PVC blank legend
PVC Yellow Legend Plates 90 mm diameter
Language Catalog Number
Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm
Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm
Red background-45 mm x 67.5 mm
(For use w/mushroom head operators)
Oversized legend-48 mm x 48 mm
(For use with XB2 operators)
Black or red background- 30 mm x 48 mm
(For use w/2 position joysticks)
30 x 40 mm
30 x 50 mm
30 x 40 mm
30 x 50 mm
30 x 40 mm
30 x 50 mm
Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm
Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm
White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm
Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm
Red background, white letters-45 mm x 67.5 mm
ZB2BY8101
ZB2BY8330
ZB2BY8130
ZB2BY8230
ZB2BY8430
ZB2BY8630
Catalog Number
ZB2BY2101
ZB2BY4101
ZB2BY5101
XBCY22011
ZD2GY2201
ZB2BY2011
ZB2BY6011
ZB2BY2021
ZB2BY6021
ZB2BY2041
ZB2BY6041
ZB2BY2002
ZB2BY2004
ZB2BY4001
ZB2BY4005
ZB2BY5004
Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.
Mylar Circular Legends
Type
Mylar circular
legends for use with
transparent flush
head operators
See page 39, 48
Description
No text
O
I
Auto
Hand
Off
On
Start
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Catalog Number
ZB2BY1101
ZBZBY1146
ZBZBY1147
ZB2BY1115
ZB2BY1316
ZB2BY1312
ZB2BY1311
ZB2BY1303
ZB2BY1304
ZB2BY1305
ZB2BY1306
57
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Dimensions
.87
22
.79
20
.59
15
2.36
60
1.57
40
1.57
40
2.36
60
.94
24
1.34
34
1.26
32
1.25
32
.91
23
1.14
29
1.57
40
ZB2BG•
1.14
29
1.14
29
.83
21
.55
14
.75
19
.98
25
ZB2 BL93•4
ZB2BA91•4
ZB2BD922
.63
16
1.79
42.5
1.14
29
Dual Dimensions inches
mm
1.46
37
ZB2BVO•2
ZB2BVO•1
ZB2BVO•
ZB2BVO•3
1.14
29
1.54
39
.91
23
1.06
27
1.06
27
1.85
47
1.18
30
1.57
40
.94
24
1.85
47
.43
11
ZB2BW81•••
1.18
30
.59
15
ZB2BB•
.98
ZB2BW83•••
Maximum
travel = 25mm
in all directions
22
2.17
55
.43
11
1.34
34
ZB2BD•••
ZB2BK1•••
ZB2BS944
ZB2BS844
ZB2BJ•••
ZB2BS24
ZB2BS14
ZB2BR•
ZB2BX•
ZB2BS64
ZB2BC•
ZB2BT•
ZB2BS54
ZB2BW4•
1.18
30
.59
15
1.14
29
.67
17
ZB2BP•
ZB2BW5•
1.18
30
1.14
29
1.14
29
1.14
29
.47
12
ZB2BH•
ZB2BL•
ZB2BW1•
1.14
29
ZB2BA•6
ZB2BA•
ZB2BA•8
ZB2BA•9
ZB2BW3•
3.46
88
58
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Dimensions
XB2BF5••
40°
60
2.36
29
30
1.14
1.18
dia.
centers
40°
XD2PA••
3.11
79
0.94
24
24
ZB2BW075
2.28
2.40
42
58
61
ZB2BW184
ZB2BW1845
ZB2BV68
3.23
2.32
66
82
59
Standard pushbuttons
and pilot lights
40x30
ZB2BZ9•
1.57x1.18
40x30
1.57x1.18
40x30
2.60
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (Minimum spacing)
General mounting set-up
1.57x1.18
1.65
37
ZB2BW0••
1.57x1.18
1.57
1.57
40
1.46
1.87
0.94
43
ZB2 BW06•
40x30
1.69
ZB2BV1, ZB2BV2
ZB2BV3, ZB2BV9•
ZB2BV7
1.57
ZB2BV6
3.54
1.73
90
44
47.5
45
40
1.77
12
40
Contact blocks and bases only
ZB2BZ10•, ZB2BZ10••,
ZB2BE10•, ZB2BE10••,
ZB2BE20•
0.47
4 Position Joysticks
2 Position Joysticks
dia.
Operator
0.886
22.5 +0.4
-0.0
Nameplate
40
22.5 +0.4
-0.0
85
0.886
3.35
3.35
1.57
0.886
22.5 +0.4
-0.0
85
dia.
dia.
Panel
Contact block
with mounting
base
1.18
30
dia.
0.886
22.5 +0.4
-0.0
1.18
3.35
30
85
60
0.886
22.5 +0.4
-0.0
2.36
dia.
Dual Dimensions inches
mm
Rectangular units
w/ indicator
47
Rectangular units
w/o indicator
1.85
Adder contact
block
1.50
38
1.73
44
59
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XAP
Insulated and Metal Control Station Enclosures
Characteristics
Glass-reinforced polyester insulated enclosures XAPA
Material
Glass-reinforced polyester.
Approvals
Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5.
Protective treatment
Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.
Ambient temperature
Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection
IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13.
Electric shock protection
Class II conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Flame resistance
CSTB: M3, NF C 20-455: 850 °C, IEC 92: 960 °C, UL 94: VO.
Chemical resistance
High degree of resistance to acids, bases, sea water, mineral salts, all solvents, petrol, diesel, oils and greases.
Cable entry
Undrilled.
Diecast metal enclosures XAPG
Material
Zinc alloy (XAPG1-XAP4) Aluminum (XAPG5...)
Approvals
Special version: CSA COFFRET 4 and 5, UL COFFRET 1, 3, 4 and 12K.
Protective treatment
Standard version: “TC” treatment. Special version: “TH” treatment.
Ambient temperature
Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection
IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4, 13.
Electric shock protection
Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Chemical resistance
Special treatments on request.
Cable entry
Tapped entries for cable glands (see dimensions page).
Flush mount enclosures XAPE
Material and color
Anodized aluminum front plate. Insulated protective rear cover.
Protective treatment
Standard version: “TC” and “TH” treatments.
Ambient temperature
Operation: -25 °C to +70 °C. Storage: -40 °C to +70 °C.
Degree of protection
IP 65 conforming to IEC 529 and IP 657 conforming to NF C 20-010. NEMA Types 4X, 13.
Electric shock protection
Class I conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030.
Chemical resistance
High degree of resistance to organic acids, diluted mineral acids, salts, alcohol, acetone, chloride and fluoride solvents, oils
and petrol.
Cable entry
With rear cover: knock-out cable entries.
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 226.
60
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XAPA
Glass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures
Undrilled Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced Polyester
Type
HxW Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Number
85 x 146
XAPA1100
85 x 226
XAPA2100
151 x 241
XAPA3100
151 x 241
XAPA4100
For XAPA1100
XAPZ100
For XAPA2100
XAPZ200
For XAPA3100 and 4100
XAPZ300
without hinges
NEMA 4, 4X, 13
Usable depth 83 mm
with hinges
Sheet steel with
ground screw
Undrilled Grounding Plate
XAPA1100
XAPA2100
Undrilled Insulated enclosures
XAPA1100, XAP2100
XAPA3100, XAPA4100
=
Fixing
H
b
P=83
=
a
87
=
G
=
(1)
a
b
G
H
85
146
70
105
A2100
85
226
70
180
A3100
151
241
135
200
A4100
151
241
135
200
Cable entries not drilled
(1) 11 mm for XAPA4kkk stations with hinges
(2) 2 x Ø 5.6 mm untapped holes, depth
12 mm
b
(2)
XAP
A1100
a
Drilled Insulated Enclosures, Glass-Reinforced Polyester
1
1
XAPA1110
2
1
2
XAPA1120
4
2
2
XAPA1104
8
2
4
XAPA2108
16
4
4
XAPA3116
XAPA2108
Drilled Grounding Plate
Sheet steel with ground screw
Fixing
b
P=83
H
b1
=
=
XAPA
b1
(2)
b2
b2
=
=
=
=
For XAPA1110
XAPZ110
For XAPA1120
XAPZ120
For XAPA1104
XAPZ104
For XAPA2108
XAPZ208
For XAPA3116
XAPZ316
For Ø 22 mm control and signalling units
Insulated enclosures with cut-outs
87
Catalog Number
1
NEMA 4, 4X, 13
Usable depth 83 mm
40 mm centerline
spacing of holes
XAPA1104
Number of Rows
Vertical
Horizontal
Number of Knock-outs
22 mm
Type
=
G
XAP
a
b
b1
b2
G
H
A1110
85
146
–
–
70
105
A1120
85
146
40
–
70
105
A1104
85
146
40
30
70
105
A2108
85
226
40
30
70
180
A3116
151
241
40
30
135
200
Cable entries not drilled
(2) 2 x 5.6 mm untapped holes, depth 12 mm
=
61
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XAPG
Diecast Metal Enclosures
Undrilled DieCast Enclosures (Painted Grey RAL 7032)
Type
Material
Usable Depth
H xW x Dt
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Number
80 x 80 x 51.5
XAPG19100
49 mm
130 x 80 x 51.5
XAPG29100
175 x 80 x 51.5
XAPG39100
80 x 80 x 77
XAPG19400
130 x 80 x 77
XAPG29400
175 x 80 x 77
XAPG39400
220 x 80 x 77
XAPG49400
310 x 85 x 77
XAPG59400
Number of
22 mm knock-outs
Catalog Number
2
XAPG19702
3
XAPG29703
4
XAPG39704
2
XAPG19802
3
XAPG29803
4
XAPG39804
1
XAPG19201
2
XAPG29202
3
XAPG39203
1
XAPG19501
2
XAPG29502
3
XAPG39503
4
XAPG49504
5
XAPG59505
Zinc
NEMA Type 4, 13
74.5 mm
XAPG 39400
Aluminum
t
74.5 mm
25.4 mm = 1"
Drilled DieCast Enclosures (Painted Grey RAL 7032)
Type
Material
Usable Depth
49 mm
NEMA Type 4, 13
30 mm centerline
spacing of holes
XAP G29703
Zinc
74.5 mm
49 mm
NEMA Type 4, 13
40 mm centerline
spacing of holes
Zinc
b
74.5 mm
Aluminum
a
h
c
g
a
74.5 mm
b
c
g
h
Catalog
Number
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
XAPG19201
XAPG29202
XAPG39203
XAPG19501
XAPG29502
XAPG39503
XAPG49504
XAPG59505
XAPG19702
XAPG29703
XAPG39704
XAPG19802
XAPG29803
XAPG39804
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.35
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
85
80
80
80
80
80
80
3.15
5.12
6.90
3.15
5.12
6.90
8.66
12.20
3.15
5.12
6.90
3.15
5.12
6.90
80
130
175
80
130
175
220
310
80
130
175
80
130
175
2.03
2.03
2.03
3.03
3.03
3.03
3.03
3.03
2.03
2.03
2.03
3.03
3.03
3.03
51.5
51.5
51.5
77
77
77
77
77
51.5
51.5
51.5
77
77
77
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
2.16
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
1.97
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
55
50
50
50
50
50
50
2.56
4.53
6.30
2.56
4.53
6.30
8.07
11.60
2.56
4.53
6.30
2.56
4.53
6.30
65
115
160
65
115
160
205
295
65
115
160
65
115
160
Conduit
opening
supplied
3
⁄4" NPT
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
⁄4" NPT
3
62
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XAPE
Flush Mount Enclosures
Drilled Flush Plates
Type
Number of
22mm holes
Material
XAPE301
NEMA Type 4, 13
30mm centerline
spacing of holes
Anodized
Aluminum
H xW
Dimensions (mm)
Catalog Number
1
72 x 72
XAPE301
2
105 x 72
XAPE302
3
138 x 72
XAPE303
4
171 x 72
XAPE304
5
204 x 72
XAPE305
25.4 mm = 1"
Optional Back Box (for finger protection, if required)
Type
Material
XAPE302
Insulating
Fiberglass
Protective rear covers
Catalog Number
For flush plate XAPE301
XAPE901
For flush plate XAPE302
XAPE902
For flush plate XAPE303
XAPE903
For flush plate XAPE304
XAPE904
For flush plate XAPE305
XAPE905
Flush mounting enclosures
Front plate with cut-outs for Ø 22 mm control and signalling units
XAPE30k
For Ø 22 mm control and signalling
units
Front plate
14.5
4 x 04.2
4 x M4
5
=
H
b1
XAP
b
b1
E301
72
44
H
56
E302
105
77
89
E303
138
110
122
E304
171
143
155
E305
204
176
188
=
=
XAPE305
b
H
XAPE303
30 30 30
=
=
60
=
56
=
=
56
72
Mounting of front plate and protective rear cover
Protective rear cover for front plate XAPE30k
80
P=Usable depth
b
P
=
=
59
XAP
b
P
E901
52
82.5
E902
85
82.5
E903
118
82.5
E904
151
82.5
E905
184
82.5
63
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XB2B 22 mm
Mounting Instructions
Mounting Instructions for ZB2B
1. The panel knockout must be 7/8" (22.3 mm) with a panel thickness of 1 to 6 mm (0.04 in to 0.23 in).
No anti-rotation notch is required.
2. Insert the operator through the knockout.
3. Bayonet lock the operator into the diecast mounting base with a 1/8 clockwise turn.
4. Orient the angled fixing screws at 12 and 6 o’clock and alternately tighten the 2 screws.
5. The fixing screws will bite into the metal of the inside panel door and provide anti-rotation and a
tamperproof installation.
22.3 mm
1
+0.4
–0.0
6 mm
64
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components
XA2B-XB2B
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Electrical Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Assembly Items, Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Panel Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Printed Circuit Board Drilling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2B
General Characteristics
Environment (typical ZA2B or ZB2B operator)
Compatibility
This method of connection for the XA2B and XB2B uses special electrical blocks, combined with a range of standard
operators.
Conformity to standards
IEC 947-5-1, NF C 63-140, ASE 0119, ASE 1003, BS 4794, VDE 0660 part 200, UL 508,
CSA C 22-2 No. 14.
Approvals
UL Recognized, CSA Certified
Protective treatment
“TC” (All climates.)
Ambient air temperature
Storage: from -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F). Operation: from -25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +140 °F).
Operating positions
All positions
Resistance to vibration
60 mm mushroom head push buttons: 4 g; Other push buttons: 10 g; Joystick controller: 5 g.
Resistance to shock
Push buttons: 70 g; Mushroom head push buttons: 15 g; Selector switches: 120 g. Conforming to IEC 68 2-27.
Electric shock protection
Class II, conforming to IEC 536 and NF C 20-030
Mechanical life
1 million operations (latching mushroom head push buttons: 300,000 operations, illuminated selector switches: 100,000
operations.
Setting up characteristics
Printed circuit board assembly
The special sub-bases, type ZA2BZ079 or ZB2BZ079, must be used (see page 68)
Printed circuit board
Thickness: from 1.6 to 3.2 mm
Flow soldering
Maximum temperature: 250 °C
Speed: 1.2 m/sec
Contact block characteristics
Rated insulation voltage
300 V conforming to UL 508 and CSA C 22-2 No. 14, 250 V conforming to NF C 20-040, VDE 0110.
Insulation category
Group C conforming to NF C 20-040 and VDE 0110.
Contact operation
Slow break (N.C. contact with direct opening operation).
Flush and projecting push buttons - with 1 N.O. contact: 2.25 lb - with 1 N.O. contact: 1.8 lb
Operating force
Additional contacts: -N.O.: +1.13 lb, N.C.: +0.7 lb
Terminal referencing
Unmarked
Short circuit protection
10 A cartridge fuses gF.
Rated power
conforming to IEC 947-5-1
Utilization category: B300 - Q300
File
Marking
E164353
NKCR2
File
Class
LR 44087
3211 03
66
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2B
Electrical Blocks
Contact Blocks
Description
Part Number
13
ZB2-BE701
NO
Normally Open Contact Block
ZB2BE701
14
France
21
ZB2BE701
NC
Normally Closed Contact Block
ZB2BE702
22
ZB2-BE702
France
Pilot Light Block
X1
Pilot Light Block Direct Supply
ZB2BV67
ZB2BE702
X2
Combination Blocks Pilot Light + Contact(s)
ZB2-BV67
X1
13
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)
1 Normally Open Contact
ZB2BW0671
ZB2BV67
X2
14
X1
11
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)
+ 1 Normally Closed Contact
ZB2BW0672
ZB2-BW0672
X2
X1
13
12
23
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)
+ 2 Normally Open Contact
ZB2BW0673
ZB2BW0672
Pilot Light Block (Direct Supply)
+ 1 Normally Open Contact and
1 Normally Closed Contact
X2
14
24
X1
21
13
ZB2BW0675
X2
22
14
Dual Dimensions inches
mm
67
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2B
Assembly Items, Spare Parts
Assembly Items
Description
Part Number
Socket Adapter for all Electrical Blocks
ZB2BZ010
Operator Fixing Sub-Base for XB2B
ZB2BZ079
Operator Fixing Sub-Base for XA2B
ZA2BZ079
Screw for Fixing Blocks onto Sub-Base
ZB2BZ005
Screw for Fixing Blocks onto sub-Base with Socket Adapter
ZB2BZ006
ZB2BZ010
ZB2BZ079
Lamps
Voltage
AC/DC
Type
Incandescent
Replacement bulbs
(Type BA9s)
ZA2BZ079
Neon
(use with direct supply light module)
Type
ZB2BZ005
LED, BA9s base for
Direct Supply blocks ◆
DL1CEO**
Watts
Catalog Number
6
1.5
DL1CB006
12
2.0
DL1CE012
24
2.0
DL1CE024
48
2.4
DL1CE048
130
2.6
120
-
NE51HRT120V
220
-
NE51HRT220V
380
-
NE51HRT380V
Color
Voltage
Part Number
DL1CE130
Green
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0063
Red
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0064
Amber
6 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0065
Green
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0123
Red
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0124
Amber
12 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0125
Green
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0243
Red
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0244
Amber
24 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS0245
Green
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1203
Red
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1204
Amber
120 Vac/dc
DL1CJUS1205
◆ For best LED light output, match lamp with lens color and use jeweled style lenses.
DL1CJUS****
68
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2B
Panel Cutouts
Panel cut-outs
Dimensions in mm and inches
B '' ± t1
(40 mm )
(1.574")
Y
Ø 22.3
(40 mm)
(1.574")
B ± t1
B ' ± t1
(0.878"
+ 0.4 mm
0.0 mm
+ 0.016"
0.0" )
(30 mm)
(1.181")
(30 mm)
(1.181")
X
A ± t1
A ' ± t1
A '' ± t1
Overall tolerances of the panel/printed circuit assembly
The sum of the absolute values of the drilling tolerance must not exceed 0.5 mm (0.196”).
– in the horizontal direction X
➔Dimension - A on the panel
- C on the printed circuit
i.e.:
– and in the vertical direction Y
➔Dimensions - B on the panel
- D on the printed circuit
t1 + t2 = 0.5 mm max.
Mounting Precautions
+0.016"
+0.4 mm
∅ 22.3 mm 0.0 mm 0.878"
a. Panel cut-out diameter:
0.0"
b. When the head and fixing sub-base assembly are fixed and tightened onto the panel, the sub-base (ZA2BZ079 or ZB2BZ079)
must be oriented at a maximum angle ± 5°. Fixing sub base screws (ZB2BZ079) must be tightened with same torque value.
c. If any of the heads are fitted with legend plate carriers, it is essential that all the products are fitted with legend plate carriers.
d. Note: the following heads cannot be used with the electrical blocks on page 67:
– double headed push button operators with indicator light ZB2BW8
– ZA2C square head operators
69
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Printed Circuit Board Components XA2B-XB2B
Printed Circuit Board Drilling
View from the electrical block side: Dimensions in mm.
Y
13
4
3
5
10 4
N/O
contact block
13
14
8.3
14
drilling for two
adjacent blocks
N/C
contact/block
21
4
5
10
21
22
4
22
C''' ± t2
D ''' ± t2
Direct Supply
indicator light
block
X1
D '' ± t2
20
X1
14
X2
12
14
X2
24
18
13
4
23
X1
3
23
14
20
X1
X2
14
24
C ± t2
24,60
Socket adapter (ZB2BZ010)
C '' ± t2
X1 (2)
(3)
X2 (4)
26
(1)
18,75
France
30 mm
C ' ± t2
X1-X2 : bulbs
1-2-3-4 : contacts
22,75
ZB2-BZ010
X
12
X2
Indicator contact
"combination"
block
13
13
X1
15
11
19
14
X1
11
D ± t2
13
D ' ± t2
Indicator contact
"combination"
block
X2
24.6
20
X2
Legends for printed circuit drilling and terminal marking
3 different types of drilling are necessary:
}
→HOLES FOR CONNECTIONS: Ø 1.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.059" ± 0.0039")
→CENTERING HOLE OF THE ELECTRICAL BLOCK: Ø 4.5 mm ± 0.1 (Ø 0.177" ± 0.0039")
CLEARANCE HOLE: (Ø 0.275" ± 0.0039") (As Required):
→SCREWDRIVER
for the introduction of an electrical block assembling screw to a sub-base.
It is recommended to fit a screw every 90 mm (3.54") horizontally and 120 mm (4.72") vertically
13
14
Terminal marking conforming to CENELEC EN 50013.
Indicates the function of the electrical block.
70
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type K and SK 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type K and SK Common Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Type K Heavy Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73- 86
Type K Voltage Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Type K and SK Selector Switch Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Type K Heavy Duty Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Type K Heavy Duty Pilot Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Type K Heavy Duty Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Type SK Corrosion Resistant Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Type SK Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Type SK Corrosion Resistant Potentiometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Type SK Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Type K, SK, KX, and T Light Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Type K and SK “H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Type K and SK Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Type K and SK Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 105
Type K and SK Application Data and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Type K and SK Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Type K and SK Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Common Operators
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
“START” Push Buttons
Operator
Style
“STOP” Push Buttons
Button
Color
Type
Legend
Plate
Operator
Style
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
Black
KR1BH13
KN201SP
30.5 mm
Corrosion
Resistant
(Non Metallic)
Black
SKR1BH13
KN101SP
Description
Contact
Block
“OFF – ON” Selector Switch
Operator
Style
Contact
Block
Included
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
1
0
30.5 mm
Corrosion
Resistant
(Non Metallic)
Knob
Color
Black
Type
Legend
Plate
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
Red
KR1RH13
KN202RP
30.5 mm
Corrosion
Resistant
(Non Metallic)
Red
SKR1RH13
KN102RP
Knob
Color
Type
Legend
Plate
Black
KS43BH13
KN260SP
Black
SKS43BH13
KN160SP
Type
Legend
Plate
Operator
Style
KS11BH13
KN244SP
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
KN144SP
30.5 mm
Corrosion
Resistant
(Non Metallic)
0
1
Black
SKS11BH13
RED – 120 Vac – “ON” Pilot Light
Operator Style
Description
Contact
Sequence
Description
Legend Plate
Operator Style
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
KP1R31
KN203SP
30.5 mm
Corrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)
SKP1R31
KN103SP
RED – 120 Vac – “ON” Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Description
KP1G31
KN204SP
30.5 mm
Corrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)
SKP1G31
KN104SP
Description
GREEN – 120 Vac –“OFF” Push-To-Test Pilot Light
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
KT1R31
KN203SP
30.5 mm
Corrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)
SKT1R31
KN103SP
LR 25490
3211 03
0
1
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
Operator Style
File
Class
0
0
Legend Plate
Legend Plate
E42259
NKCR
1
0
Type
Type
File
CCN
Contact
Block
Included
GREEN – 120 Vac – “OFF” Pilot Light
Type
Operator Style
Contact
Block
“HAND – OFF – AUTO” Selector Switch
Contact
Sequence
Description
Button
Color
Description
Description
Type
Legend Plate
30.5 mm
Industrial
(Metal)
KT1G31
KN204RP
30.5 mm
Corrosion Resistant
(Non Metallic)
SKT1G31
KN104RP
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 227.
72
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Contact blocks and legend plate not included unless otherwise noted.
Description
Operator With
1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
Color
Full Guard
No Guard
Extended Guard
Operator With
1 N.O. Contact
(KA2)
Operator With
1 N.C. Contact
(KA3)
Operator Only
With No
Contacts ➄
Black
KR1BH13
KR1BH5
KR1BH6
KR1B
Red
KR1RH13
KR1RH5
KR1RH6
KR1R
KR1G
Green
KR1GH13
KR1GH5
KR1GH6
Universal ①
KR1UH13
KR1UH5
KR1UH6
KR1U
Other ➁
KR1➁H13
KR1➁H5
KR1➁H6
KR1➁
Black
KR3BH13
KR3BH5
KR3BH6
KR3B
Red
KR3RH13
KR3RH5
KR3RH6
KR3R
KR3G
Green
KR3GH13
KR3GH5
KR3GH6
Universal ①
KR3UH13
KR3UH5
KR3UH6
KR3U
Other ➁
KR3➁H13
KR3➁H5
KR3➁H6
KR3➁
Black
KR2BH13
KR2BH5
KR2BH6
KR2B
Red
KR2RH13
KR2RH5
KR2RH6
KR2R
KR2G
Green
KR2GH13
KR2GH5
KR2GH6
Universal ①
KR2UH13
KR2UH5
KR2UH6
KR2U
Other ➁
KR2➁H13
KR2➁H5
KR2➁H6
KR2➁
Black
KR4BH13
KR4BH5
KR4BH6
KR4B
Red
KR4RH13
KR4RH5
KR4RH6
KR4R
Red ➂
KR4R05H13
KR4R05H5
KR4R05H6
KR4R05
Green
KR4GH13
KR4GH5
KR4GH6
KR4G
Other ➃
KR4➃H13
KR4➃H5
KR4➃H6
KR4➃
Black
KR24BH13
KR24BH5
KR24BH6
KR24B
Red
KR24RH13
KR24RH5
KR24RH6
KR24R
Snap-In Mushroom Button
3
1 ⁄8'' Diameter
Mushroom Button
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Green
KR24GH13
KR24GH5
KR24GH6
KR24G
Other ➃
KR24➃H13
KR24➃H5
KR24➃H6
KR24➃
Black
KR5BH13
KR5BH5
KR5BH6
KR5B
Red
KR5RH13
KR5RH5
KR5RH6
KR5R
Red ➂
KR5R05H13
KR5R05H5
KR5R05H6
KR5R05
Green
KR5GH13
KR5GH5
KR5GH6
KR5G
Other ➃
KR5➃H13
KR5➃H5
KR5➃H6
KR5➃
Black
KR25BH13
KR25BH5
KR25BH6
KR25B
Red
KR25RH13
KR25RH5
KR25RH6
KR25R
Snap-In Mushroom Button
21⁄4'' Diameter
Mushroom Button
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
①
➁
➂
➃
➄
Green
KR25GH13
KR25GH5
KR25GH6
KR25G
Other ➃
KR25➃H13
KR25➃H5
KR25➃H6
KR25➃
The universal push button operators contain one each of the following color inserts: black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
See table below.
Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability. Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.
See table below.
These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks – for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: KR24B + H2(2 - KA1) = KR24BH2
Color
➁ For KR1, 2, 3
Choose Color and Place Code in
Type Number
➃ For KR4, 5, 24, 25
Choose Color and Place Color
Code in Type Number
Blue
Yellow
White
Orange
Gray
L
Y
W
S
E
L
Y
–
S
–
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
73
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Multifunction Operators
Meets UL Type 13/NEMA Type 13 and UL Type 6/NEMA Type 6, which UL and NEMA consider
an equivalent to UL Type 4/NEMA Type 4.
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend plate and contact blocks not included unless otherwise noted.
Description
15⁄8" Dia. Knob x
For 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" Dia. Knob - see 12
Includes Type KN379 Legend Plate Marked
Pull To Start
Push To Stop
Color
With 1 N.O.
& 1 N.C.
Contact
(KA2, KA3)
Without
Contacts
⑨
Momentary
Dual
Function
Universal ①
Green-Red
Other ➁
KR6UH7
KR6GRH7
KR6➁H7
KR6UH37
KR6GRH37
KR6➁H37
KR6U
KR6GR
KR6➁
Momentary
Interlocked
Dual Function
Universal ①
Green-Red
Other ➁
KR67UH7
KR67GRH7
KR67➁H7
KR67UH37
KR67GRH37
KR67➁H37
KR67U
KR67GR
KR67➁
Maintained
Interlocked
Dual Function
Universal ①
Green-Red
Other ➁
KR7UH7
KR7GRH7
KR7➁H7
KR7UH37
KR7GRH37
KR7➁H37
KR7U
KR7GR
KR7➁
Description
Color
–
Contacts
See ⑩
(KA2, KA3)
Without
Contacts
Both Buttons
Maintained Interlocked
Assembly
Universal ➂
Other ➃
–
KR11UH1
KR11➃H1
KR11U
KR11➃
One Button Momentary
One Button Maintained
Interlocked Assembly
Universal ➂
Other ➃
–
KR12UH1H1
KR12➃H1H1
KR12U
KR12➃
Description 12
Color
With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With 1 N.O. 1 N.C.
Contact
(1 KA1)
Without Contacts ⑨
3 Position
Momentary Pull Maintained Neutral Momentary Push
Non-Illuminated
Red
Green
Other➄
KR8RH25
KR8GH25
KR8➄H25
–
–
–
KR8R
KR8G
KR8➄
2 Position
Maintained Pull Maintained Push
Non-Illuminated
Red 11
Green
Other➄
–
–
–
KR9RH13
KR9GH13
KR9➄H13
KR9R
KR9G
KR9➄
Voltage
With Red Knob With 2
N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob
With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob
Without Contacts ⑨
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Other – Transformer, LED, Flashing ⑦
Other – Full Voltage, Resistor, Neon ⑧
KR8P1RH25
KR8P➅RH25
KR8P➅RH25
KR8P1➄H25
KR8P➅➄H25
KR8P➅➄H25
KR8P1➄
KR8P➅➄
KR8P➅➄
Voltage
With Red 11 Knob With 1
N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact
(KA1)
With Other Color Knob
With 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob
Without Contacts
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Other – Transformer, LED, Flashing ⑦
Other – Full Voltage, Resistor, Neon ⑧
KR9P1RH13
KR9P➅RH13
KR9P➅RH13
KR9P1➄H13
KR9P➅➄H13
KR9P➅➄H13
KR9P1➄
KR9P➅➄
KR9P➅➄
Description 12
3 Position
Momentary Pull Maintained Neutral Momentary Push
Illuminated
Description 12
15⁄8" Dia. Knob x
For 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" Dia. Knob - see 12
Includes Type KN379 Legend
Plate Marked
Pull To Start
Push To Stop
With 2 N.O.
Contacts
(2 KA2)
2 Position
Maintained Pull Maintained Push
Illuminated
① Universal for KR6, 67, 7 includes 2 inserts each of black, red and green.
➁ Choose one color for each button. R = red, G = green, B = Black.
EXAMPLE: A KR6 with left red and right black = KR6RB
➂ Universal for KR11, 12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.
➃ Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: A KR11 with top button grey and bottom button orange = KR11ES
➄ Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: KR9 with a yellow knob = KR9Y
➅ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 76.
EXAMPLE: KR8P➅ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage = KR8P8
⑦ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED
uses green knob) or use clear knob..
⑧ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
⑨ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks. For maximum block usage
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: KR67BB + H8(2 KA3) = KR67BBH8
Voltage Assembly Codes
See Page 76
⑨
⑩ KR11UH1 has 1 - KA1 (1 N.O., 1 N.C.) and KR12UH1H1 has 2 - KA1 (2 N.O., 2 N.C.).
To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob –
substitute “R05” in place of “R”. Not available in 1 3⁄8" or 21⁄4" diameter knobs.
12 For 13⁄8" or 21⁄4" Dia. Knob:
a) Order -20 or -21 knob from page 105.
b) Order 9001K54 adapter (no charge) - allows -20 or -21 knob to fit on push pull
operators. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 rating.
c) Can order assembled operator by replacing color code with -20 or -21. Example: 9001
KR9R would be 9001KR9R20 or 9001KR9R21. No price adder.
11
Other Color Code Selection
✻
Color
KR6, KR7, KR67
KR11, KR12
KR8, KR9
Black
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
White
Orange
Clear
Amber
Gray
B
R
G
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B
R
G
L
Y
W
S
–
–
E
B✻
R
G
L
Y
W
S✻
C
A
–
These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
74
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend plate and contact block not included unless otherwise noted.
Voltage
and
Frequency
Description
Full Guard
Illuminated
Push Button
Clear Plastic Top
Full Guard
Illuminated
Push Button
Metal Top
No Guard
Illuminated
Push Button
2 4 Inch
Illuminated
Mushroom
With Other Color Cap
Without Contact Block ①
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K1L1RH13
K1L1GH13
K1L1 ➄
Transformer
K1L7RH13
K1L7GH13
K1L7 ➄
Full Voltage
K1L35RH13
K1L35GH13
K1L35 ➄
Transformer or Flashing
K1L➁RH13
K1L➁GH13
K1L➁➄
Full Voltage
K1L➁RH13
K1L➁GH13
K1L➁➄
Resistor or Neon ➂
K1L➁RH13
K1L➁GH13
K1L➁➄
LED ➃
K1L➁RH13
K1L➁GH13
K1L➁➄
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K3L1RH13
K3L1GH13
K3L1 ➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K3L7RH13
K3L7GH13
K3L7 ➄
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
K3L35RH13
K3L35GH13
K3L35 ➄
Transformer or Flashing
K3L➁RH13
K3L➁GH13
K3L➁➄
Full Voltage
K3L➁RH13
K3L➁GH13
K3L➁➄
Resistor or Neon ➂
K3L➁RH13
K3L➁GH13
K3L➁➄
LED ➃
K3L➁RH13
K3L➁GH13
K3L➁➄
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K2L1RH13
K2L1GH13
K2L1 ➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K2L7RH13
K2L7GH13
K2L7 ➄
24-28 Vac-dc
For other Voltages
see Table ➁
For other Voltages
see Table ➁
Full Voltage
K2L35RH13
K2L35GH13
K2L35 ➄
Transformer or Flashing
K2L➁RH13
K2L➁GH13
K2L➁➄
Full Voltage
K2L➁RH13
K2L➁GH13
K2L➁➄
Resistor or Neon ➂
K2L➁RH13
K2L➁GH13
K2L➁➄
LED ➃
K2L➁RH13
K2L➁GH13
K2L➁➄
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K2L1R20H13
K2L1G20H13
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K2L7R20H13
K2L7G20H13
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
K2L35R20H13
K2L35G20H13
Transformer or Flashing
K2L➁R20H13
K2L➁G20H13
Full Voltage
K2L➁R20H13
K2L➁G20H13
Resistor or Neon ➂
K2L➁R20H13
K2L➁G20H13
LED➃
K2L➁R20H13
K2L➁G20H13
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K2L1R21H13
K2L1G21H13
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
K2L7R21H13
K2L7G21H13
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
K2L35R21H13
K2L35G21H13
Transformer or Flashing
K2L➁R21H13
K2L➁G21H13
Full Voltage
K2L➁R21H13
K2L➁G21H13
Resistor or Neon ➂
K2L➁R21H13
K2L➁G21H13
LED➃
K2L➁R21H13
K2L➁G21H13
24-28 Vac-dc
For other Voltages
see Table ➁
1⁄
With Green Color Cap
and 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
For other Voltages
see Table ➁
13⁄8 Inch
Illuminated
Mushroom
With Red Color Cap and 1
N.O. and 1 N.C. Contact
(KA1)
Style
For other Voltages
see Table ➁
Order K2L ➁➄
Above ➅
Order K2L ➁➄
Above ➅
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage see
page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.
Example: K2L36R20+H2(2 KA1)=K2L36R20H2
➁ Add the Voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage assembly code table on page 76.
Example: K2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc Voltage = K2L25
➂ On neon Voltages use clear color caps only.
➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED Voltage chosen (i.e., red LED uses
Voltage Assembly Codes
See Page 76
red color cap) or use clear color cap.
➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table.
Example: K2L25➄ with a blue 13⁄8 mushroom button = K2L25L20
➅ The only difference between a no guard (K2L➁) operator and mushroom button operators is the
color cap.
Color Caps
Color Codes
Color
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
White
Clear
Amber
➄ K1L
➄ 13⁄8 Inch
➄ 21⁄4 Inch
K2L, K3L
Mushroom
Mushroom
R20
G20
L20
Y20
W20
C20
A20
R21
G21
L21
Y21
W21
C21
A21
R
G
L
Y
W
C
A
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Color Caps & Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 96
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
75
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K, SK — 30 mm
Voltage Assembly Codes
This page lists light module code numbers that are used in operators listed on pages 74-75.
•
•
•
Neon type light modules – use CLEAR color caps only.
LED light modules use a lamp with 7 element LED clusters that provide illumination similar to incandescent illumination.
LED light modules require the color cap color and the
LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly Code
Separate
Light Module
Type Number
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly Code
Separate
Light Module
Type Number
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
23
KM23
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
25
12
KM25
KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon ✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon ✻
Transformer
5
6
KM15
KM6
✻ Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
76
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K and SK — 30 mm
Selector Switch Selection Guide
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selector
switch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.
Step No. 1
Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a target table like the one shown for the example below.
One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of one
Type KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuit
block mounted on the same side.
KA1
=
KA3
=
+
KA2
+
For “H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
For Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108
Example:
Contact
Sequence
Table 1 – 2 Position Selector Switch
A
1
0
0
B
0
1
0
C
0
0
1
If you require
contact sequence
0 – contact open
1 – contact closed
Step No. 2
Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or
3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the contact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the example
above, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.
Push Button Line
Page Number
2
Type K
Type SK
78, 79, 90, 91
3
Type K
Type SK
80, 81, 92, 93
4
Type K
Type SK
82, 94
0
0
1
Use contact
block type
If you require
contact sequence
E
KA3
1 or 2
D
KA2
1 or 2
E
KA2
1 or 2
D
KA3
1 or 2
Use Sel. Sw.
with cam type
G
Use contact
block type
Mount on
side No.
(See page 99)
KA2
1
KA2
2
M
L
1
0
0
C
B C
E
KA3
1
E F G J
KA3
2
KA5 ✻
2
KA2
1
B
G J
D E
0
1
J L
D E
0
F
L
C
B
0
0
F
D
1
G
L
D
B
If for the example above:
1
1
0
C
F
B
If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
0
1
G
L
Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS401B (From page 80)
Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS401B (From page 92)
1
D E
D E
J L
1 or 2
KA3
1
2
KA2
1
KA5 ✻
1 or 2
KA3
2
KA2
2
KA5 ✻
1
KA5 ✻
2
M
0
2
KA2
KA2
KA3
1
KA3
1
KA5 ✻
1
KA5 ✻
2
J
1
KA3
2
G J
1
1
1
M
Type K Line – Class 9001 Type KS46B (From page 80)
Type SK Line – Class 9001 Type SKS46B (From page 92)
2
KA3
KA5 ✻
B
A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required and
If the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
KA2
KA3
M
Step No. 4:
Determine the contact blocks required by using the same table
used for Step No. 2.
Mount on
side No.
(See page 99)
Table 2 – 3 Position Selector Switch
Step No. 3
Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If several
cam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the operator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicated
in the table below:
Number of Positions
1
Use Sel. Sw.
with cam type
Table 3 – 4 Position Selector Switch
If you require
contact sequence
If for the example above:
The F cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
Use Sel. Sw.
with cam type
Use contact
block type
Mount on
side No.
(See page 99)
2
1
0
0
0
H
(A) KA3
0
1
0
0
H
(B) KA2
1
0
0
1
0
H
(C) KA2
2
(D) KA3
1
0
0
0
1
H
The L cam type were chosen:
1
0
0
1
H
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no. 2
would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
1
1
0
0
H
A & B Wired in Parallel
0
1
1
0
H
B & C Wired in Parallel
0
0
1
1
H
C & D Wired in Parallel
1
1
1
0
H
A, B & C Wired in Parallel
0
1
1
1
H
B, C & D Wired in Parallel
1
0
1
0
H
A & C Wired in Parallel
0
1
0
1
H
1
1
0
1
H
KA5 ✻
2
1
0
1
1
H
KA5 ✻
1
✻
A & D Wired in Parallel
B & D Wired in Parallel
The KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on either
side – contact your local Square D sales office.
77
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Required
Contact
Block
Position
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
Left
KA3
KA1
OR
KA2
KA1
#2
Operator
KA3
Locating
Notch
OR
KA2
Left
Right
1
0
0
1
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
KA3
#1
1
0
0
1
KA2
#1
0
1
1
0
OR
Side 2
Side 1
KA1
Right
KA3
#2
KA1
#1
OR
Top View
CAM
E
D
Non-Illuminated Operators
Type
Type
KS11
KS11B
KS11➁
KS11K➂
KS12
KS12B
KS12➁
KS12K➂
KS11BH13
KS11BH1
KS11BH2
–
–
–
Operator Only ①
Manual Return
With Contact Block(s)
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1,2,3) ➂➃
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors, Replace B in Type
Number with Other Color Code)
With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)
Spring Return from Left
Operator Only ①
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 2 only) ➃
KS25
KS25B
KS25➁
KS25K2
–
–
–
–
Spring Return From Right
Operator Only ①
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 1 Only) ➃
–
–
–
–
KS34
KS34B
KS34➁
KS34K1
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
Example:KS11K1+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS11K1H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.
Example: KS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS11FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table.
Example: KS11K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS11K2
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only part
no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at no
extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.
Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all operable
by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions are available.
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
Standard
Knob
➁
Key No.
Total Key Changes
Available
Master Key (E99)
E36 thru E60
25
2941151990
Part No.
Example: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number is
KS11K2E29.
All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by
specifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➁
➁
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
B
R
G
Y
S
L
W
A
C
B11
R8
G8
Y8
S11
L8
W8
A8
C8
FB
FR
FG
FY
FS
FL
FW
FA
FC
B25
R24
G24
Y24
S25
L24
W24
A24
C24
TB
TR
TG
TY
–
TL
–
–
TC
B18
R16
G16
Y16
–
L16
–
–
C16
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Orange
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
➂ Key Withdrawal Code
Code
1
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Code
2
Code
3
78
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL
Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend plate and contact block not included unless noted.
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Required
Contact
Block
Position
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
KA3
KA1
KA1 OR
#2
OR
KA2
Side 2
Side 1
KA3
KA1
Operator
Locating
Notch
KA1 OR
#1
OR
KA2
Top View
Left Right Left Right
KA3
#2
1
0 0
1
KA2
#2
0
1 1
0
KA3
#1
1
0 0
1
KA2
#1
0
1 1
0
CAM
E
D
Illuminated Operators
Type
Type
Manual Return ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K11J1
K12J1
K11J1R
K12J1R
K11J➁
K12J➁
K11J➁
K12J➁
K11J➁➂ K12J➁➂
Spring Return from Left ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K25J1
K25J1R
K25J➁
K25J➁
K25J➁➂
–
–
–
–
–
K25J➁➂
–
–
–
–
–
–
K34J1
K34J1R
K34J➁
K34J➁
K34J➁➂
–
K34J➁➂
K11J➁➂ K12J➁➂
Spring Return From Right ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
Example: K12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = K12J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from the voltage assembly code table below.
Example: K25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = K25J37.
➂ Add the color code as chosen form the knob color table at right.
Example: K25J35➂ with a green knob = K25J35G.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED use
red knob) or use clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly Code
Separate Light
Module Type Number
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
23
KM23
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
25
12
KM25
KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon ✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon ✻
Transformer
15
6
KM15
KM6
✻ Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Two Color Selector Switch
Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.
Knob
Factory Assembled Form Number ▲
Standard
Y178
Gloved Hand
Y1781
▲ Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type K11J1 Form Y178.
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
Standard
Knob
➂
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➂
➂
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
R
G
Y
L
W
A
C
R8
G8
Y8
L8
W8
A8
C8
FR
FG
FY
FL
FW
FA
FC
R24
G24
Y24
L24
W24
A24
C24
TR
TG
TY
TL
–
–
TC
R16
G16
Y16
L16
–
–
C16
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
79
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Contact
Block
Position
1 — Contact Closed
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
KA3
KA1
KA1
#2
OR
KA2
KA3
Locating
Notch
Operator
KA1
#1
OR
KA2
OR
Top View
Left Right Left Right
Center
Left Right
0 — Contact Open
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
KA3
#1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
KA2
#1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0 1
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
CAM
Without Knob
Operator With Standard Black Knob
Only ➀ With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4 through 10) ➂➃
With
Contact
Block(s)
Center
KA3
#2
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors,
Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)
With 1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)
With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)
With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2)
0
1
0
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
L
M
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
KS42
KS42B
KS42➁
KS42K➂
KS43
KS43B
KS43➁
KS43K➂
KS44
KS44B
KS44➁
KS44K➂
KS45
KS45B
KS45➁
KS45K➂
KS46
KS46B
KS46➁
KS46K➂
KS47
KS47B
KS47➁
KS47K➂
KS49
KS49B
KS49➁
KS49K➂
KS401
KS401B
KS401➁
KS401K➂
KS402
KS402B
KS402➁
KS402K➂
Non-Illuminated Operators
Manual
Return
Center
OR
Side 2
Side 1
KA1
Center
KS42BH13 KS43BH13 KS44BH13 KS45BH13 KS46BH13 KS47BH13 KS49BH13 KS401BH13 KS402BH13
KS42BH1 KS43BH1 KS44BH1 KS45BH1 KS46BH1 KS47BH1 KS49BH1 KS401BH1 KS402BH1
KS42BH2 KS43BH2 KS44BH2 KS45BH2 KS46BH2 KS47BH2 KS49BH2 KS401BH2 KS402BH2
Spring
Return
from Left
to Center
Without Knob
Operator With Standard Black Knob
Only ➀ With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5, 6 or 9 only) ➂➃
KS62
KS62B
KS62➁
KS62K➂
KS63
KS63B
KS63➁
KS63K➂
KS64
KS64B
KS64➁
KS64K➂
KS65
KS65B
KS65➁
KS65K➂
KS66
KS66B
KS66➁
KS66K➂
KS67
KS67B
KS67➁
KS67K➂
KS69
KS69B
KS69➁
KS69K➂
KS601
KS601B
KS601➁
KS601K➂
KS602
KS602B
KS602➁
KS602K➂
Spring
Return
From
Right to
Center
Without Knob
Operator With Standard Black Knob
Only ➀ With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 4, 5 or 7 Only) ➂➃
KS72
KS72B
KS72➁
KS72K➂
KS73
KS73B
KS73➁
KS73K➂
KS74
KS74B
KS74➁
KS74K➂
KS75
KS75B
KS75➁
KS75K➂
KS76
KS76B
KS76➁
KS76K➂
KS77
KS77B
KS77➁
KS77K➂
KS79
KS79B
KS79➁
KS79K➂
KS701
KS701B
KS701➁
KS701K➂
KS702
KS702B
KS702➁
KS702K➂
Spring
Return
Both
Sides to
Center
Without Knob
Operator With Standard Black Knob
Only ➀ With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Code 5 Only) ➂➃
KS52
KS52B
KS52➁
KS52K5
KS53
KS53B
KS53➁
KS53K5
KS54
KS54B
KS54➁
KS54K5
KS55
KS55B
KS55➁
KS55K5
KS56
KS56B
KS56➁
KS56K5
KS57
KS57B
KS57➁
KS57K5
KS59
KS59B
KS59➁
KS59K5
KS501
KS501B
KS501➁
KS501K5
KS502
KS502B
KS502➁
KS502K5
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: KS43K6+H13(KA1-SIDE 2)=KS43K6H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.
EXAMPLE: KS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS43FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.
EXAMPLE: KS43K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS43K6
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key only part
no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are available at no
extra cost:
E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.
Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all operable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions are
available.
Key No.
Total Key Changes
Available
Master Key (E99)
E36 thru E60
25
2941151990
Part No.
EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number is
KS43K6E29.
All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by
specifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
3-Position Switches
➂ Code
➂ Code
4
Yes
No
No
8
Yes
No
5
No
Yes
No
9
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6
No
No
Yes
10
Yes
Yes
Yes
7
Yes
Yes
No
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
Standard
Knob
➁
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Orange
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➁
➁
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
B
R
G
Y
S
L
W
A
C
B11
R8
G8
Y8
S11
L8
W8
A8
C8
FB
FR
FG
FY
FS
FL
FW
FA
FC
B25
R24
G24
Y24
S25
L24
W24
A24
C24
TB
TR
TG
TY
–
TL
–
–
TC
B18
R16
G16
Y16
–
L16
–
–
C16
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
80
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Contact
Block
Position
1 — Contact Closed
Quantity
and
Type
KA3
KA1
KA1
#2
OR
KA2
Side 2
Side 1
OR
Locating
Notch
Operator
Top View
KA1
#1
KA2
Center
Center
Center
0 — Contact Open
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
KA3
#2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
KA3
#1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
KA2
#1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0 1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
OR
KA3
KA1
Center
Mount
on
Side
OR
CAM
Non-Illuminated Operators
0
1
0
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
L
M
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Manual
Return ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K42J1
K42J1R
K42J➁
K42J➁
K42J➁➂
K42J➁➂
K43J1
K43J1R
K43J➁
K43J➁
K43J➁➂
K43J➁➂
K44J1
K44J1R
K44J➁
K44J➁
K44J➁➂
K44J➁➂
K45J1
K45J1R
K45J➁
K45J➁
K45J➁➂
K45J➁➂
K46J1
K46J1R
K46J➁
K46J➁
K46J➁➂
K46J➁➂
K47J1
K47J1R
K47J➁
K47J➁
K47J➁➂
K47J➁➂
K49J1
K49J1R
K49J➁
K49J➁
K49J➁➂
K49J➁➂
K401J1
K401J1R
K401J➁
K401J➁
K401J➁➂
K401J➁➂
K402J1
K402J1R
K402J➁
K402J➁
K402J➁➂
K402J➁➂
Spring
Return Left
To
Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K62J1
K62J1R
K62J➁
K62J➁
K62J➁➂
K62J➁➂
K63J1
K63J1R
K63J➁
K63J➁
K63J➁➂
K63J➁➂
K64J1
K64J1R
K641➁
K64J➁
K64J➁➂
K64J➁➂
K65J1
K65J1R
K65J➁
K65J➁
K65J➁➂
K65J➁➂
K66J1
K66J1R
K66J➁
K66J➁
K66J➁➂
K66J➁➂
K67J1
K67J1R
K67J➁
K67J➁
K67J➁➂
K67J➁➂
K69J1
K69J1R
K69J➁
K69J➁
K69J➁➂
K69J➁➂
K601J1
K601J1R
K601J➁
K601J➁
K601J➁➂
K601J➁➂
K602J1
K602J1R
K602J➁
K602J➁
K602J➁➂
K602J➁➂
Spring
Return
Right To
Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K72J1
K72J1R
K72J➁
K72J➁
K72J➁➂
K72J➁➂
K73J1
K73J1R
K73J➁
K73J➁
K73J➁➂
K73J➁➂
K74J1
K74J1R
K74J➁
K74J➁
K74J➁➂
K74J➁➂
K75J1
K75J1R
K75J➁
K75J➁
K75J➁➂
K75J➁➂
K76J1
K76J1R
K76J➁
K76J➁
K76J➁➂
K76J➁➂
K77J1
K77J1R
K77J➁
K77J➁
K77J➁➂
K77J➁➂
K79J1
K79J1R
K79J➁
K79J➁
K79J➁➂
K79J➁➂
K701J1
K701J1R
K701J➁
K701J➁
K701J➁➂
K701J➁➂
K702J1
K702J1R
K702J➁
K702J➁
K702J➁➂
K702J➁➂
Spring
Return
Both Sides
To
Center ①
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
K52J1
K52J1R
K52J➁
K52J➁
K52J➁➂
K52J➁➂
K53J1
K53J1R
K53J➁
K53J➁
K53J➁➂
K53J➁➂
K54J1
K54J1R
K54J➁
K54J➁
K54J➁➂
K54J➁➂
K55J1
K55J1R
K55J➁
K55J➁
K55J➁➂
K55J➁➂
K56J1
K56J1R
K56J➁
K56J➁
K56J➁➂
K56J➁➂
K57J1
K57J1R
K57J➁
K57J➁
K57J➁➂
K57J➁➂
K59J1
K59J1R
K59J➁
K59J➁
K59J➁➂
K59J➁➂
K501J1
K501J1R
K501J➁
K501J➁
K501J➁➂
K501J➁➂
K502J1
K502J1R
K502J➁
K502J➁
K502J➁➂
K502J➁➂
① These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: K43J35+H(2 KA1)=K43J35FRH2
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.
EXAMPLE: K43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage=K43J37
➂ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.
EXAMPLE: K43J35➂ with a green knob = K43J35G
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED use
red knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Selector Switch Knobs
Voltage Assembly Codes
See Page 82
Color
Standard
Knob
Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Two Color Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 79
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Knob
Code ➂
Type
Knob
Code ➂
Type
Knob
Code ➂
Type
B
R
G
Y
S
L
W
A
C
B11 ✻
R8
G8
Y8
S11 ✻
L8
W8
A8
C8
FB
FR
FG
FY
FS
FL
FW
FA
FC
B25 ✻
R24
G24
Y24
S25 ✻
L24
W24
A24
C24
TB
TR
TG
TY
–
TL
–
–
TC
B18 ✻
R16
G16
Y16
–
L16
–
–
C16
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Orange
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
✻
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
Non-Illuminated only.
81
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector Switch
Operators
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
1 — Contact
Closed
0 — Contact Open
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Contact Block Position
Quantity and Type
Mount on Side
KA3
KA1
OR
Side 2
Side 1
Operator
Locating
Notch
Top View
KA2
KA1 OR
#2
KA3
KA1
OR
KA2
Voltage Assembly Codes
KA1 OR
#1
Non-Illuminated Operators
Manual Return ➀
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Key Operated with E10 Key (Codes 11,12,13,14,15) ➂➃
Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From RightMaintained in the Two Mid Positions
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Illuminated Operators
KA3
#2
1
0
0
0
KA2
#2
0
0
1
0
KA3
#1
0
0
0
1
KA2
#1
0
1
0
0
Cam
Type
H
H
H
H
KS88
KS88B
KS88 ➁
KS88K ➂
H
H
H
KS89
KS89B
KS89➁
Cam
Type
Manual Return ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
H
H
H
H
H
H
K88J1
K88J1R
K88J➄
K88J➄
K88J➄➁
K88J➄➁
Spring Return From Left - Spring Return From RightMaintained in the Two Mid Positions
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and With Other Voltages Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➅
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➆
H
H
H
H
H
H
K89J1
K89J1R
K89J➄
K89J➄
K89J➄➁
K89J➄➁
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: KS88K11 + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = KS88K11H13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table
EXAMPLE: KS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = KS88FG
➂ Add the key withdrawal code from key withdrawal code table below.
EXAMPLE: KS88K➂ that the key can be withdrawn in the right position only = KS88K12
➃ All key operated devices are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 (key
only part no. is 2941101100) key change. The following 20 additional key changes are
available at no extra cost: E11-E13, E16, E21-E26, E28-E33, CH501, CH674, SR251, T107.
Occasionally it is desirable to have several devices with dissimilar key changes, but all operable by a single master key. The following key changes with master keying provisions are
available.
Total Key
Changes
Available
Master Key (E99)
Key No.
E36 thru E60
25
2941151990
✻
Voltage
Description
Voltage Assembly
Code
Separate Light
Module Type Number
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
23
KM23
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
25
12
KM25
KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon ✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon ✻
Transformer
15
6
KM15
KM6
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
➂ Key Withdrawal Code:
4-Position Switches
Code
11
Yes
No
No
Yes
12
No
No
No
Yes
13
Yes
No
No
No
14
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
15
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
Standard
Knob
Part No.
EXAMPLE: For individual key, not master keyed an E29 is chosen. The type number is
KS88K11E29.
All key operators come standard with 2 keys. Replacement keys can be purchased by specifying the key required i.e., E10, E24, E36 key only, etc.
➄ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table below.
EXAMPLE: K88J➄ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = K88J37
➅ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen, (i.e., red LED use
red knob) or use clear knob.
➆ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Gloved
Hand Knob
Coin
Operated
➁ See table on page 81.
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
82
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Pilot Lights
Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Type 4 & 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plates Not Included
Description
With Red
With Green
Fresnel Color Fresnel Color
Cap
Cap
With Other
Color Cap
Without
Color Cap
Voltage
Style
Standard Pilot Light
(Plastic fresnel
Color Cap Shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dc
For Other Voltages See
Table ➀
Transformer
Transformer
Full Voltage
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂
Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃
KP1R31
KP7R31
KP35R31
KP➀R31
KP➀R31
KP1G31
KP7G31
KP35G31
KP➀G31
KP➀G31
KP1 ➁
KP7 ➁
KP35 ➁
KP ➀➁
KP ➀➁
KP1
KP7
KP35
KP ➀
KP ➀
Push To Test Pilot
Light
(Glass Color Cap
Shown)
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dc
For Other Voltages
See Table ➀
Transformer
Transformer
Full Voltage
Transformer, Flashing or LED ➂
Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➃
KT1R31
KT7R31
KT35R31
KT➀R31
KT➀R31
KT1G31
KT7G31
KT35G31
KT➀G31
KT➀G31
KT1 ➁
KT7 ➁
KT35 ➁
KT ➀➁
KT ➀➁
KT1
KT7
KT35
KT ➀
KT ➀
Remote Test Pilot
Light
(Glass Color Cap
Shown)
120 Vac Only
24-28 Vac Only
For Other Voltages
See Table ➀➄
Resistor ➄
Full Voltage ➄
Full Voltage or Resistor ➄
KTR38R31
KTR35R31
KTR➀R31
KTR38G31
KTR35G31
KTR➀G31
KTR38 ➁
KTR35 ➁
KTR ➀➁
KTR38
KTR35
KTR ➀
KP44R
KP44G
KP44Y
(Yellow
Color
Cap)
Pilot Light For
Intrinsically
Safe Circuits
(NEMA Type 4X)
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmospheres, for
which the equipment has been tested.
These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pilot lights are Factory
Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend plates as shown on
pages 100 and 101.
Operating
Voltage Range
Nominal Current
20-30 V
AC/DC
25 mA
—
V max. = 32 V
I max. = 165 mA
➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 82.
EXAMPLE: KT①R31 with a 60VAC red LED voltage=KT37LRR31
➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table. EXAMPLE: KP1➁ with a blue
Voltage Assembly Codes
See Page 82
fresnel cap = KP1L31
➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use a
green color cap) or use clear cap.
➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.
➄ On remote test pilot lights use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes. Do not
choose LED, neon or transformer codes. For AC use only.
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Push-To-Test Ground Detector Pilot Light
(Contact Block Included — But NOT Legend Plate or Color Cap)
Used in pairs to indicate a grounded condition in a control circuit fed from a grounded centertapped transformer. The Type KT50 is commonly used in press control circuits, and fulfills the
requirements of the ground detector called for in ANSI B11.1 (1971), Par. E3.6.5. Consult
local Square D Sales Office for proper application.
Voltage and Frequency
Type
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
KT50
L2
L1
START
1
STOP
M
3
2
O.L.
M
L2
M
R
C
Test
L1
Color
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
➁ Plastic Fresnel
➁ Plastic Domed
➁ Glass
A31
L31
C31
G31
R31
W31
Y31
A9
L9
C9
G9
R9
W9
Y9
A6
L6
C6
G6
R6
W6
Y6
L1
TEST
BUTTON
L2
(TEST) C
STOP
START
(TEST) C
LSI
Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
L1
(SIG)
M1
L2
L1
(SIG)
(TEST) C
M3
L2
M2
L2
L1
(SIG)
CR
Remote Test Pilot Light
83
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Joysticks
Joy Stick Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Operator
With
Contacts
Operator
Without
Contacts ➀
Without Latch
K71H7
K71
With Latch
K70H7
K70
Without Latch
K73H7
K73
Description
Momentary Contact —
Spring Return to Center
3 PositionCenter
Off
Maintained Contact
With Latch
K72H7
K72
Without Latch
K31H8
K31
Without Latch
Momentary Contact —
Spring Return to Center
3 PositionCenter
Off
Maintained Contact
Momentary Contact —
Spring Return to Center
5 PositionCenter
Off
With Latch
Maintained Contact
With Latch
K30H8
K30
Without Latch
K33H8
K33
With Latch
K32H8
K32
Without Latch
K35H2
K35
With Latch
K34H2
K34
Without Latch
K37H2
K37
With Latch
K36H2
K36
The joystick operator is ideal for applications where only one circuit is to be energized at one time. The three position joy stick closes one circuit each in Up-Down or Right-Left position with all
circuits open in center position. The five position operator closes one circuit each in Up, Down, Left and Right positions with all circuits open in center position.
Momentary contact operators are spring return to the center position. Maintained operators remain in each position and must be reset manually. Operators with latch cannot be operated until
the latch button in center of handle is pressed.
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage – see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.
Use Legend Plate 9001KN900
Contact Arrangements
Operator
3 Position Operator
Contact Block
Type
Contact Block
Location
(See Fig. 2)
Contact
(See Fig. 2)
KA3
POS 1
A
1
0
0
KA3
POS 2
A
0
0
1
KA2
POS 1
B
1
KA2
POS 2
B
0
A
0
1
B
1
A
B
Handle position (with ref. to Nib, See Fig. 1)
1
2
OFF
3
4
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
3 Position Operator
KA1
POS 1
5 Position Operator
KA1
POS 2
(1) Contact Closed
(0) Contact Open
1.6 mm MIN - 6.3mm MAX
Figure 1
Figure 2
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Dimensions Inches
MM
84
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
Selector Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
Inserts are field convertible. For colors not listed, order operator without insert
plus separate color insert from page 105. Up to two Type KA contact blocks
can be mounted in tandem (total of four blocks). Selector push buttons cannot
be illuminated.
Two Position Operators
Contact
Block
Required
Quantity
and
Type
1 — Contact ClosedxxXXxxXxxxxxxxxxxxxF — FreexXXxX
0 — Contact OpenxxxxxxxxxXxxxxxxxxxxxD — Depressed
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
#2
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
#1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1-KA-1
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Maintained
Mount
on
Side
1-KA-1
Left
Three
Position
Operators
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Center
Right
D
F
D
F
D
F
D
-
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
-
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
CAM ➁
P
R
S
T
Y
Z
U
Color Insert
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Without Insert ➀
Black
KQ11
KQ11B
KQ12
KQ12B
KQ13
KQ13B
KQ14
KQ14B
KQ15
KQ15B
KQ18
KQ18B
KQ27
KQ27B
Order
Contact
Blocks
From
Pages
97-98.
➀ Order color inserts from page 105.
➁ Cams are not interchangeable.
Key Operated Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA
Types 4, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Key operated push buttons are used wherever unauthorized
use of a push button is to be discouraged. Examples are locking a “Start” push button in the extended position or locking a
“Stop” push button in the depressed position. The operator can
also be locked in the flush position –holding all contacts open.
Up to two Type KA contact blocks can be mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
Description
Positions In Which
Push Button Can Be Locked
Type
Extended
Flush
Depressed
Push button operable only with key in lock.
Key is removable in locked position only.
X
–
–
X
–
X
–
X
–
–
X
X
KR131
KR132
KR133
KR137
Push button operable with or without key in
lock. Push button can be locked with key
only. Key removable in both locked or unlocked position.
X
–
–
X
–
X
–
X
–
–
X
X
KR141
KR142
KR143
KR147
Unit is set by rotating key, with button in extended position. Key is removable only in
this set position. When pushed, the button
will then lock in position indicated at right.
–
–
X
–
–
X
KR152
KR153
All key operated push buttons are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 key
change.
See page 82 for other key changes (Note 4).
Color Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 99
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
85
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type K — 30 mm
Heavy Duty Operators
Potentiometer (with Dial Plate ➀ – NEMA Types 4, 13)
Watts
Description
Type
2
Operator only – Single Pot
Operator with Single Pot
Operator only – Tandem Pot
Operator with Tandem Pot
K20
K21 ➁
K22
K23 ➂
➁ ➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.
Example: Type K2105
Suffix
➁
Ohms
01
02
38
03
04
05
32
39
06
33
50
100
200
250
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3500
Suffix
➁
Ohms
07
08
40
09
35
10
36
11
12
5K
10 K
15 K
25 K
35 K
50 K
75 K
100 K
250 K
Suffix
Ohms
➁
Ohms
Suffix
➂
Front
Rear
13
37
14
15
16
17 ➃
500 K
750 K
1.0 Meg
2.5 Meg
5.0 Meg
5.0 Meg
82
83
85
88
89
1000
5000
10 K
50 K
100 K
1000
5000
10 K
50 K
100 K
➀ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type KN905.
➁ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2105
➂ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below. Example: Type K2385
➃ For use with 9050 Type T.
✻ Pontentiometer shaft diameter 1/4” (6 mm), 7/8” (22 mm) length.
Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Mark.
Emergency “Break Glass” Operator –
UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Rocker Arm Operating Lever
Allows two standard push buttons to be operated independently of each other. Order push buttons and legend plates from
pages 72 and 100 — specify which marking is to be inverted.
Type
Operator is held in a depressed position by a glass disc. When the glass disc
is broken with the hammer, button returns to a normal extended position.
Package of 5 discs included with operator. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001
KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4.
For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or 9001KA6.
K50
Type
K15
9001 K15 Replacement Parts
Alternate Action – (Push-On Push-Off) Module
Description
Part Number
Yellow bumper
Hammer and chain
Lower ring nut
Top ring nut
Package of 5 replacement discs
Clip to hold hammer
3105211101
3105206750
6512232801
9001K40
9001K57
2540902240
This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T momentary push button operators. Contact blocks mounted behind this
module (maximum of 2) will be held in the depressed position when
the operator is operated once and released to their normal position
when the operator is operated again. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001
KA3 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA1 or the N.C. contact of a
9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use the N.O. contact of a 9001KA4 or
9001KA6.
Time Delay Push Button – UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Type (All Colors)
Description
Full
Guard
Extended
Guard
No
Guard
KRD1UH1
KRD2UH1
KRD3UH1
Type
K85
Timed Cont.
1 N.O. and 1
N.C.
Time Delay After Release of
Button
Note:
When mounted in top or bottom
KRD1UH2 KRD2UH2 KRD3UH2
hole of Type K enclosures, device requires one additional
space below or above operator.
When mounted other than in top
Timed Cont.
or bottom hole, device may re2 N.O. and 2
quire two additional spaces, one
N.C.
above and one below operator.
Closing plates must be installed Timing period is adjustable from 0.1 second to 60 seconds
and begins after button has been released. Devices include
on unused holes.
a package of seven color inserts for color coding the push
button. Contacts are quick make – quick break.
Wobble Stick
For easy operation of any standard
push button.
Type
K8
86
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Operators
Non-Illuminated Momentary Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Contact Blocks And Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Description
Operator With 1 N.O.
and
1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
Color
Full Guard
No Guard
Extended Guard
Operator With
(KA2)
Operator With 1 N.C.
Contact
(KA3)
Operator Only With No
Contacts ➄
Black
SKR1BH13
SKR1BH5
SKR1BH6
SKR1B
Red
SKR1RH13
SKR1RH5
SKR1RH6
SKR1R
SKR1G
Green
SKR1GH13
SKR1GH5
SKR1GH6
Universal ➀
SKR1UH13
SKR1UH5
SKR1UH6
SKR1U
Other ➁
SKR1➁H13
SKR1➁H5
SKR1➁H6
SKR1➁
Black
SKR3BH13
SKR3BH5
SKR3BH6
SKR3B
Red
SKR3RH13
SKR3RH5
SKR3RH6
SKR3R
SKR3G
Green
SKR3GH13
SKR3GH5
SKR3GH6
Universal ➀
SKR3UH13
SKR3UH5
SKR3UH6
SKR3U
Other ➁
SKR3➁H13
SKR3➁H5
SKR3➁H6
SKR3➁
Black
SKR2BH13
SKR2BH5
SKR2BH6
SKR2B
Red
SKR2RH13
SKR2RH5
SKR2RH6
SKR2R
SKR2G
Green
SKR2GH13
SKR2GH5
SKR2GH6
Universal ➀
SKR2UH13
SKR2UH5
SKR2UH6
SKR2U
Other ➁
SKR2➁
SKR2➁H5
SKR2➁H6
SKR2➁
Black
SKR4BH13
SKR4BH5
SKR4BH6
SKR4B
Red
SKR4RH13
SKR4RH5
SKR4RH6
SKR4R
Red ➂
SKR4R05H13
SKR4R05H5
SKR4R05H6
SKR4R05
Green
SKR4GH13
SKR4GH5
SKR4GH6
SKR4G
Other ➃
SKR4➃H13
SKR4➃H5
SKR4➃H6
SKR4➃
Black
SKR24BH13
SKR24BH5
SKR24BH6
SKR24B
Red
SKR24RH13
SKR24RH5
SKR24RH6
SKR24R
Snap In Mushroom Button
13/8 Mushroom Button
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
Green
SKR24GH13
SKR24GH5
SKR24GH6
SKR24G
Other ➃
SKR24➃H13
SKR24➃H5
SKR24➃H6
SKR24➃
Black
SKR5BH13
SKR5BH5
SKR5BH6
SKR5B
Red
SKR5RH13
SKR5RH5
SKR5RH6
SKR5R
Red ➂
SKR5R05H13
SKR5R05H5
SKR5R05H6
SKR5R05
Green
SKR5GH13
SKR5GH5
SKR5GH6
SKR5G
Other ➃
SKR5➃H13
SKR5➃H5
SKR5➃H6
SKR5➃
Black
SKR25BH13
SKR25BH5
SKR25BH6
SKR25B
Red
SKR25RH13
SKR25RH5
SKR25RH6
SKR25R
Snap-In Mushroom Button
Screw-On Mushroom Button With Set Screw Security
21/4 Mushroom Button
Green
SKR25GH13
SKR25GH5
SKR25GH6
SKR25G
Other ➃
SKR25➃H13
SKR25➃H5
SKR25➃H6
SKR25➃
➀ The universal push button operators include one each of the following color inserts: black,
red, green, yellow, orange, blue and white.
➁ See table below.
➂ Knob has the words “Emergency Stop” in raised letters highlighted in white for readability.
Available in red snap-in mushroom buttons only.
➃ See table below.
➄ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number. EXAMPLE: SKR24B + H2(2-KA1) = SKR24BH2
Color
➁ For SKR1,2,3
Choose Color and Place
Color Code in Type Number
➃ For SKR4,5,24,25
Choose Color and Place
Color Code in Type Number
Blue
Yellow
White
Orange
Gray
L
Y
W
S
E
L
Y
–
S
–
Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 105
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
87
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Operators
Multifunction Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate And Contact Blocks Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Non-Illuminated
15/8" Diameter Knob
Includes Type KN179WP
Legend Plate Marked
Pull To Start Push To Stop
Illuminated
15/8" Diameter Knob
Includes Type KN179WP
Legend Plate Marked
Pull to Start Push To Stop
Description
Color
Contacts ➇
Without Contacts ➆
Both Buttons Maintained
Interlocked Assembly
Universal ➀
Other ➁
SKR11UH1
SKR11➁H1
SKR11U
SKR11➁
One Button Momentary
One Button Maintained
Interlocked Assembly
Universal ➀
Other ➁
SKR12UH1H1
SKR12➁H1H1
SKR12U
SKR12➁
Description
Color
With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With 1 N.O. 1 N.C. Contact
(1 KA1)
Without
Contacts ➆
3 POSITION
Momentary PullMaintained NeutralMomentary Push
Red ➈
Green
Other ➂
SKR8RH25
SKR8GH25
SKR8➂H25
–
–
–
SKR8R
SKR8G
SKR8➂
2 POSITION
Maintained PullMaintained Push
Red ➈
Green
Other ➂
–
–
–
SKR9RH13
SKR9GH13
SKR9➂H13
SKR9R
SKR9G
SKR9➂
Description
Voltage
With Red Knob ➈
With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob
With 2 N.C. Contacts
(1 KA3, 1 KA5)
With Other Color Knob
Without Contacts ➆
3 POSITION
Momentary PullMaintained NeutralMomentary Push
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Other – Transformer, LED,
Flashing ➄
Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon ➅
SKR8P1RH25
SKR8P➃RH25
SKR8P1➂H25
SKR8P➃➂H25
SKR8P1➂
SKR8P➃➂
SKR8P➃RH25
SKR8P➃➂H25
SKR8P➃➂
Description
Voltage
2 POSITION
Maintained PullMaintained Push
Illuminated
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Other – Transformer, L.E.D.,
Flashing ➄
Other – Full Voltage, Resistor,
Neon ➅
With Red ➈ Knob With 1 N.O. With Other Color Knob With
& 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Contact (KA1)
With Other Color Knob
Without Contacts
SKR9P1RH13
SKR9P➃RH13
SKR9P1➂H13
SKR9P➃➂H13
SKR9P1➂
SKR9P➃➂
SKR9P➃RH13
SKR9P➃➂H13
SKR9P➃➂
➀ Universal for SKR11,12 includes 2 each of black, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, white.
➁ Choose one color for each button from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: An SKR11 with top button gray and bottom button orange = SKR11ES
➂ Choose one color from table and insert color code in type number.
EXAMPLE: SKR9 with a yellow knob=SKR9Y
➃ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table on page 89.
EXAMPLE: SKR8P➃ with a 277 V 50-60 Hz voltage=SKR8P8
➄ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED uses
green knob) or use a clear knob.
➅ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
➆ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
➇ SKR11UH1 has 1 KA1(1N.O., 1N.C.) and SKR12UH1H1 has 2 KA1 (2N.O., 2N.C.).
➈ To obtain a red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob – substitute “R05” in
place of “R”. Not available in 1 3/8” or 2 1/4”.
Color
Black
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
White
Orange
Clear
Amber
Gray
✻
SKR11, SKR12➁
B
R
G
L
Y
W
S
–
–
E
SKR8, SKR9 ➂
B✻
R
G
L
Y
W
S✻
C
A
–
Color Inserts and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
These colors are not available on illuminated push-pull operators.
88
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Operators
Illuminated Push Button Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included Unless Otherwise Noted
Description
Full Guard
Illuminated
Push Button
No Guard
Illuminated
Push Button
13/8 Inch
Illuminated
Mushroom
Voltage
and
Frequency
Style
With Red Color
Cap and 1 N.O.
and 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
With Green Color
Cap and 1 N.O.
and 1 N.C.
Contact (KA1)
With Other
Color Cap
Without Contact
Blocks ➀
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK1L1RH13
SK1L1GH13
SK1L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK1L7RH13
SK1L7GH13
SK1L7➄
24-28 Vac/dc
Full Voltage
SK1L35RH13
SK1L35GH13
SK1L35➄
Transformer, Flashing
SK1L➁RH13
SK1L➁GH13
SK1L➁➄
Full Voltage
SK1L➁RH13
SK1L➁GH13
SK1L➁➄
Resistor, Neon ➂
SK1L➁RH13
SK1L➁GH13
SK1L➁➄
LED ➃
SK1L➁RH13
SK1L➁GH13
SK1L➁➄
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK2L1RH13
SK2L1GH13
SK2L1➄
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK2L7RH13
SK2L7GH13
SK2L7➄
24-28 Vac/dc
Full Voltage
SK2L35RH13
SK2L35GH13
SK2L35➄
Transformer, Flashing
SK2L➁RH13
SK2L➁GH13
SK2L➁➄
Full Voltage
SK2L➁RH13
SK2L➁GH13
SK2L➁➄
Resistor, Neon ➂
SK2L➁RH13
SK2L➁GH13
SK2L➁➄
LED ➃
SK2L➁RH13
SK2L➁GH13
SK2L➁➄
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK2L1R20H13
SK2L1G20H13
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK2L7R20H13
SK2L7G20H13
24-28 Vac/dc
Full Voltage
SK2L35R20H13
SK2L35G20H13
Transformer, Flashing
SK2L➁R20H13
SK2L➁G20H13
Full Voltage
SK2L➁R20H13
SK2L➁G20H13
Resistor, Neon ➂
SK2L➁R20H13
SK2L➁G20H13
LED ➃
SK2L➁R20H13
SK2L➁G20H13
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK2L1R21H13
SK2L1G21H13
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SK2L7R21H13
SK2L7G21H13
For other voltages
See Table ➁
For other voltages
See Table ➁
For other voltages
See Table ➁
24-28 Vac/dc
21/4 Inch
Illuminated
Mushroom
For other voltages
See Table ➁
Full Voltage
SK2L35R21H13
SK2L35G21H13
Transformer, Flashing
SK2L➁R21H13
SK2L➁G21H13
Full Voltage
SK2L➁R21H13
SK2L➁G21H13
Resistor, Neon ➂
SK2L➁R21H13
SK2L➁G21H13
LED ➃
SK2L➁R21H13
SK2L➁G21H13
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number. EXAMPLE: SK2L36R20 +H2 (2 KA1) =SK2L36R20H2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at
right. EXAMPLE: SK2L➁ with a 240 Vac-dc voltage=SK2L25.
➂ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.
➃ The color of the color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED
uses red color cap) or use a clear cap.
➄ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below. EXAMPLE: SK2L25➄ with
a blue 13/8" mushroom button=SK2L25L20.
➅ The only difference between a no guard (SK2L) operator and mushroom button operators is
the color cap.
Color Codes
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
White
Clear
Amber
SK1L ➄
SK2L
R
G
L
Y
W
C
A
13/8 Inch ➄
Mushroom
21/4 Inch ➄
Mushroom
R20
G20
L20
Y20
W20
C20
A20
R21
G21
L21
Y21
W21
C21
A21
Color Caps and Mushroom Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
✻
11/97
Order SK2L➁ ➄ ➅
Voltage Assembly Codes
Color Caps
Color
Order SK2L➁ ➄ ➅
Voltage
Description
Voltage Assembly Code
Separate Light Module
Type Number
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
23
KM23
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
KM25
KM12
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
25
12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon ✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon ✻
Transformer
15
6
KM15
KM6
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
89
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Required
Contact
Block
Position
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
KA3
KA1
OR
KA2
Side 2
Side 1
KA1
#2
KA1
OR
KA2
KA1
#1
CAM
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other Colors,
Replace B in Type Number with Other Color Code)
With 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H13)
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 (H1)
With 1 KA1 on Side #1 and 1 KA1 on Side #2 (H2)
Manual Return
With Contact Block(s)
Spring Return from Left
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Spring Return From Right
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
Left
Right
KA3
#2
1
0
0
1
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
KA3
#1
1
0
0
1
KA2
#1
0
1
1
0
OR
Non-Illuminated Operators
Operator Only ➀
Right
OR
KA3
Locating
Notch
Top View
Operator
Left
E
D
Type
Type
SKS11
SKS11B
SKS11 ➁
SKS12
SKS12B
SKS12 ➁
SKS11BH13
SKS11BH1
SKS11BH2
–
–
–
SKS25
SKS25B
SKS25 ➁
–
–
–
–
–
–
SKS34
SKS34B
SKS34 ➁
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
Example: SKS11FB+H13(KA1-Side 2) = SKS11FBH13
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.
Example: SKS11➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS11FG
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
Standard
Knob
➁
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Orange
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➁
➁
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
B
R
G
Y
S
L
W
A
C
B11
R8
G8
Y8
S11
L8
W8
A8
C8
FB
FR
FG
FY
FS
FL
FW
FA
FC
B25
R24
G24
Y24
S25
L24
W24
A24
C24
TB
TR
TG
TY
–
TL
–
–
TC
B18
R16
G16
Y16
–
L16
–
–
C16
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
90
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches
Illuminated 2 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X,
13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Contact Block Required
Contact
Block
Position
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
KA3
KA1
Side 2
Side 1
KA1
#2
OR
KA2
KA1
KA1
#1
OR
KA2
Left Right
Left Right
KA3
#2
1
0
0
1
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
KA3
#1
1
0
0
1
OR
KA3
Locating
Notch
Top View
Operator
Voltage Assembly Codes
CAM
Illuminated Operators
0
1
1
E
D
Type
Manual Return ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
SK11J1
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
SK11J1R
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
SK11J➁
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK11J➁
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ SK11J➁➂
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK11J➁➂
SK12J1
SK12J1R
SK12J➁
SK12J➂
SK12J➁➁
SK12J➁➂
Spring Return from Left ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
SK25J1
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
SK25J1R
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
SK25J➁
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK25J➁
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃ SK25J➁➂
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK25J➁➂
–
–
–
–
–
–
Spring Return From Right ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
–
–
–
–
–
–
SK34J1
SK34J1R
SK34J➁
SK34J➁
SK34J➁➂
SK34J➁➂
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number. Example: SK12J35FR+H2(2 KA1) = SK12J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table
below. Example: SK25J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc Voltage = SK25J37
➂ Add the color code as chosen from the knob color table at right. Example: SK25J35➂ with
a green knob = SK25J35G
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED use
red knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly
Code
Separate Light
Module Type
Number
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
24-28Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
Resistor
23
KM23
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon✻
25
12
KM25
KM12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon✻
Transformer
15
6
KM15
KM6
0
Type
Description
32 Vac-dc
OR
KA2
#1
Voltage
✻
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
Two Color Selector Switch
Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position on
illuminated operators.
Selector Switch Knobs
Knob
Factory Assembled
Form Number ▲
Standard
Y178
Gloved
Hand
Y1781
▲ Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK11J1 Form Y-178.
Color
Standard
Knob
➂
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➂
➂
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
R
G
Y
L
W
A
C
R8
G8
Y8
L8
W8
A8
C8
FR
FG
FY
FL
FW
FA
FC
R24
G24
Y24
L24
W24
A24
C24
TR
TG
TY
TL
–
–
TC
R16
G16
Y16
L16
–
–
C16
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 95
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
91
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Center
Contact
Block
Position
Quantity
and
Type
Center
1 — Contact Closed
0 — Contact Open
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Mount
on
Side
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
KA3
KA1
OR
Side 2
Side 1
KA2
KA1
OR
KA2
KA1
#1
1
0 0
1
0
KA2
#2
0
1 1
0
KA3
#1
0
0 1
KA2
#1
1
1 0
0
0 0 1
1
0 0
1
0 0
1
0 0
1
0 0
0
1 0
1
1 0
0 1
0
1 0
0
1 0
0
0 1
0
1 1
0
1 1
1
0 0
0
0 1
1
0 0
0
0 1
1
0 0
0
1 0
0
0 1
1
0 1
0
0 1
0
1 1
0
0 1
0
1 0
0
1 0
0
0 1
1
0 0
0
1 0
0
1 0
1
0 0
OR
KA3
Locating
Notch
Top View
Operator
OR
CAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
L
M
Non-Illuminated Operators
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
SKS42
SKS42B
SKS42➁
SKS43
SKS43B
SKS43➁
SKS44
SKS44B
SKS44➁
SKS45
SKS45B
SKS45➁
SKS46
SKS46B
SKS46➁
SKS47
SKS47B
SKS47➁
SKS49
SKS49B
SKS49➁
SKS401
SKS401B
SKS401➁
SKS402
SKS402B
SKS402➁
Operator
Only➀
Manual
Return
KA1
#2
KA3
#2
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
With Standard Black Knob (See Table for Other
Replace B in Type No. with Color Code)
With Con- Colors,
SKS42BH13 SKS43BH13 SKS44BH13 SKS45BH13 SKS46BH13 SKS47BH13 SKS49BH13 SKS401BH13 SKS402BH13
1 KA1 on side #2 (H13)
tact Block(s) With
SKS42BH1 SKS43BH1 SKS44BH1 SKS45BH1 SKS46BH1 SKS47BH1 SKS49BH1 SKS401BH1 SKS402BH1
With 1 KA1 on side #1 (H1)
SKS401BH2 SKS402BH2
With 1 KA1 on side #1 and 1 KA1 on side #2 (H2) SKS42BH2 SKS43BH2 SKS44BH2 SKS45BH2 SKS46BH2 SKS47BH2 SKS49BH2
Spring
Return from
Left to
Center
Operator
Only➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS62
SKS62B
SKS62➁
SKS63
SKS63B
SKS63➁
SKS64
SKS64B
SKS64➁
SKS65
SKS65B
SKS65➁
SKS66
SKS66B
SKS66➁
SKS67
SKS67B
SKS67➁
SKS69
SKS69B
SKS69➁
SKS601
SKS601B
SKS601➁
SKS602
SKS602B
SKS602➁
Spring
Return From
Right to
Center
Operator
Only➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS72
SKS72B
SKS72➁
SKS73
SKS73B
SKS73➁
SKS74
SKS74B
SKS74➁
SKS75
SKS75B
SKS75➁
SKS76
SKS76B
SKS76➁
SKS77
SKS77B
SKS77➁
SKS79
SKS79B
SKS79➁
SKS701
SKS701B
SKS701➁
SKS702
SKS702B
SKS702➁
Spring
Return Both
Sides to
Center
Operator
Only➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
SKS52
SKS52B
SKS52➁
SKS53
SKS53B
SKS53➁
SKS54
SKS54B
SKS54➁
SKS55
SKS55B
SKS55➁
SKS56
SKS56B
SKS56➁
SKS57
SKS57B
SKS57➁
SKS59
SKS59B
SKS59➁
SKS501
SKS501B
SKS501➁
SKS502
SKS502B
SKS502➁
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: SKS43FB+H13(KA1-POS 2) = SKS43FBH13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table below.
EXAMPLE: SKS43➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS43FG.
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
Standard
Knob
➁
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Orange
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➁
➁
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
B
R
G
Y
S
L
W
A
C
B11
R8
G8
Y8
S11
L8
W8
A8
C8
FB
FR
FG
FY
FS
FL
FW
FA
FC
B25
R24
G24
Y24
S25
L24
W24
A24
C24
TB
TR
TG
TY
–
TL
–
–
TC
B18
R16
G16
Y16
–
L16
–
–
C16
Basic Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
92
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Contact
Block
Position
1 — Contact Closed
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
KA3
KA1
OR
KA2
Side 2
Side 1
KA1
#2
OR
KA3
Locating
Notch
Operator
KA1
OR
KA2
Top View
KA1
#1
OR
0 — Contact Open
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
KA3
#2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
KA3
#1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0 0
1
0
1
1
KA2
#1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
CAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
L
M
Illuminated Operators
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Manual
Return➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK42J1
SK43J1
SK44J1
SK45J1
SK46J1
SK47J1
SK49J1
SK42J1R SK43J1R SK44J1R SK45J1R SK46J1R SK47J1R SK49J1R
SK42J➁
SK43J➁
SK44J➁
SK45J➁
SK46J➁
SK47J➁
SK49J➁
SK42J➁
SK43J➁
SK44J➁
SK45J➁
SK46J➁
SK47J➁
SK49J➁
SK42J➁➂ SK43J➁➂ SK44J➁➂ SK45J➁➂ SK46J➁➂ SK47J➁➂ SK49J➁➂
SK42J➁➂ SK43J➁➂ SK44J➁➂ SK45J➁➂ SK46J➁➂ SK47J➁➂ SK49J➁➂
SK401J1
SK402J1
SK401J1R SK402J1R
SK401J➁ SK402J➁
SK401J➁ SK402J➁
SK401J➁➂ SK402J➁➂
SK401J➁➂ SK402J➁➂
Spring
Return Left
To
Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK62J1
SK63J1
SK64J1
SK65J1
SK66J1
SK67J1
SK69J1
SK62J1R SK63J1R SK64J1R SK65J1R SK66J1R SK67J1R SK69J1R
SK62J➁
SK63J➁
SK64J➁
SK65J➁
SK66J➁
SK67J➁
SK69J➁
SK62J➁
SK63J➁
SK64J➁
SK65J➁
SK66J➁
SK67J➁
SK69J➁
SK62J➁➂ SK63J➁➂ SK64J➁➂ SK65J➁➂ SK66J➁➂ SK67J➁➂ SK69J➁➂
SK62J➁➂ SK63J➁➂ SK64J➁➂ SK65J➁➂ SK66J➁➂ SK67J➁➂ SK69J➁➂
SK601J1
SK602J1
SK601J1R SK602J1R
SK601J➁ SK602J➁
SK601J➁ SK602J➁
SK601J➁➂ SK602J➁➂
SK601J➁➂ SK602J➁➂
Spring
Return
Right To
Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK72J1
SK73J1
SK74J1
SK75J1
SK76J1
SK77J1
SK79J1
SK72J1R SK73J1R SK74J1R SK75J1R SK76J1R SK77J1R SK79J1R
SK72J➁
SK73J➁
SK74J➁
SK75J➁
SK76J➁
SK77J➁
SK79J➁
SK72J➁
SK73J➁
SK74J➁
SK75J➁
SK76J➁
SK77J➁
SK79J➁
SK72J➁➂ SK73J➁➂ SK74J➁➂ SK75J➁➂ SK76J➁➂ SK77J➁➂ SK79J➁➂
SK72J➁➂ SK73J➁➂ SK74J➁➂ SK75J➁➂ SK76J➁➂ SK77J➁➂ SK79J➁➂
SK701J1
SK702J1
SK701J1R SK702J1R
SK701J➁ SK702J➁
SK701J➁ SK702J➁
SK701J➁➂ SK702J➁➂
SK701J➁➂ SK702J➁➂
Spring
Return
Both Sides
To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK52J1
SK53J1
SK54J1
SK55J1
SK56J1
SK57J1
SK59J1
SK52J1R SK53J1R SK54J1R SK55J1R SK56J1R SK57J1R SK59J1R
SK52J➁
SK53J➁
SK54J➁
SK55J➁
SK56J➁
SK57J➁
SK59J➁
SK52J➁
SK53J➁
SK54J➁
SK55J➁
SK56J➁
SK57J➁
SK59J➁
SK52J➁➂ SK53J➁➂ SK54J➁➂ SK55J➁➂ SK56J➁➂ SK57J➁➂ SK59J➁➂
SK52J➁➂ SK53J➁➂ SK54J➁➂ SK55J➁➂ SK56J➁➂ SK57J➁➂ SK59J➁➂
SK501J1
SK502J1
SK501J1R SK502J1R
SK501J➁ SK502J➁
SK501J➁ SK502J➁
SK501J➁➂ SK502J➁➂
SK501J➁➂ SK502J➁➂
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.
EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.
➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.
EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED use
red knob) or use a clear kob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Two Color Selector Switch
Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.
Factory Assembled
Form Number ✻
Knob
✻
Standard
Y178
Gloved Hand
Y1781
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK43J1 Form Y178.
For additional product information and accessories
See Page 92
Voltage Assembly Codes (Con’t.)
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Separate
Light Module
Type Number
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly
Code
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
Separate
Light Module
Type Number
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
23
KM23
KM25
KM12
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
✻
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
25
12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon ✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon ✻
Transformer
15
6
KM15
KM6
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
93
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Illuminated 3 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Contact
Block
Position
1 — Contact Closed
Quantity
and
Type
Mount
on
Side
KA3
KA1
OR
KA2
Side 2
Side 1
KA1
#2
OR
KA3
Locating
Notch
Operator
KA1
OR
KA2
Top View
KA1
#1
OR
0 — Contact Open
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Center
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
KA3
#2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0 1
0
1
1
0
KA2
#2
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
KA3
#1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0 0
1
0
1
1
KA2
#1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
CAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
L
M
Illuminated Operators
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Manual
Return➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK42J1
SK43J1
SK44J1
SK45J1
SK46J1
SK47J1
SK49J1
SK42J1R SK43J1R SK44J1R SK45J1R SK46J1R SK47J1R SK49J1R
SK42J➁
SK43J➁
SK44J➁
SK45J➁
SK46J➁
SK47J➁
SK49J➁
SK42J➁
SK43J➁
SK44J➁
SK45J➁
SK46J➁
SK47J➁
SK49J➁
SK42J➁➂ SK43J➁➂ SK44J➁➂ SK45J➁➂ SK46J➁➂ SK47J➁➂ SK49J➁➂
SK42J➁➂ SK43J➁➂ SK44J➁➂ SK45J➁➂ SK46J➁➂ SK47J➁➂ SK49J➁➂
SK401J1
SK402J1
SK401J1R SK402J1R
SK401J➁ SK402J➁
SK401J➁ SK402J➁
SK401J➁➂ SK402J➁➂
SK401J➁➂ SK402J➁➂
Spring
Return Left
To
Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK62J1
SK63J1
SK64J1
SK65J1
SK66J1
SK67J1
SK69J1
SK62J1R SK63J1R SK64J1R SK65J1R SK66J1R SK67J1R SK69J1R
SK62J➁
SK63J➁
SK64J➁
SK65J➁
SK66J➁
SK67J➁
SK69J➁
SK62J➁
SK63J➁
SK64J➁
SK65J➁
SK66J➁
SK67J➁
SK69J➁
SK62J➁➂ SK63J➁➂ SK64J➁➂ SK65J➁➂ SK66J➁➂ SK67J➁➂ SK69J➁➂
SK62J➁➂ SK63J➁➂ SK64J➁➂ SK65J➁➂ SK66J➁➂ SK67J➁➂ SK69J➁➂
SK601J1
SK602J1
SK601J1R SK602J1R
SK601J➁ SK602J➁
SK601J➁ SK602J➁
SK601J➁➂ SK602J➁➂
SK601J➁➂ SK602J➁➂
Spring
Return
Right To
Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK72J1
SK73J1
SK74J1
SK75J1
SK76J1
SK77J1
SK79J1
SK72J1R SK73J1R SK74J1R SK75J1R SK76J1R SK77J1R SK79J1R
SK72J➁
SK73J➁
SK74J➁
SK75J➁
SK76J➁
SK77J➁
SK79J➁
SK72J➁
SK73J➁
SK74J➁
SK75J➁
SK76J➁
SK77J➁
SK79J➁
SK72J➁➂ SK73J➁➂ SK74J➁➂ SK75J➁➂ SK76J➁➂ SK77J➁➂ SK79J➁➂
SK72J➁➂ SK73J➁➂ SK74J➁➂ SK75J➁➂ SK76J➁➂ SK77J➁➂ SK79J➁➂
SK701J1
SK702J1
SK701J1R SK702J1R
SK701J➁ SK702J➁
SK701J➁ SK702J➁
SK701J➁➂ SK702J➁➂
SK701J➁➂ SK702J➁➂
Spring
Return
Both Sides
To Center➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
SK57J1
SK59J1
SK52J1
SK53J1
SK54J1
SK55J1
SK56J1
SK52J1R SK53J1R SK54J1R SK55J1R SK56J1R SK57J1R SK59J1R
SK57J➁
SK59J➁
SK52J➁
SK53J➁
SK54J➁
SK55J➁
SK56J➁
SK57J➁
SK59J➁
SK52J➁
SK53J➁
SK54J➁
SK55J➁
SK56J➁
SK52J➁➂ SK53J➁➂ SK54J➁➂ SK55J➁➂ SK56J➁➂ SK57J➁➂ SK59J➁➂
SK52J➁➂ SK53J➁➂ SK54J➁➂ SK55J➁➂ SK56J➁➂ SK57J➁➂ SK59J➁➂
SK501J1
SK502J1
SK501J1R SK502J1R
SK501J➁ SK502J➁
SK501J➁ SK502J➁
SK501J➁➂ SK502J➁➂
SK501J➁➂ SK502J➁➂
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type
number.
EXAMPLE: SK43J35FR+H2(2KA1) = SK43J35FRH2.
➁ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table at right.
EXAMPLE: SK43J➁ with a 60 Vac-dc voltage = SK43J37.
➂ Add the color as chosen from knob color table on page 91.
EXAMPLE: SK43J35➂ with a green gloved hand knob = SK43J35FG.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e. red LED use
red knob) or use a clear kob.
➄ On neon voltages use clear knobs only.
Two Color Selector Switch
Used to indicate red in left position and green in right position on illuminated operators.
Factory Assembled
Form Number ✻
Knob
✻
Standard
Y178
Gloved Hand
Y1781
Add form number to standard Type number, e.g. Type SK43J1 Form Y178.
For additional product information and accessories
See Page 92
Voltage Assembly Codes (Con’t.)
Voltage Assembly Codes
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Separate
Light Module
Type Number
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
2
1
F1
KM2
KM1
KMF1
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac Only
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
Voltage
Description
Voltage
Assembly
Code
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
Separate
Light Module
Type Number
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
33
KM33
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
3
KM3
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
4
7
F7
KM4
KM7
KMF7
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
23
KM23
KM25
KM12
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
✻
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon ✻
25
12
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
8
KM8
380 Vac-dc
Neon ✻
13
KM13
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon ✻
5
14
KM5
KM14
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon ✻
Transformer
15
6
KM15
KM6
Use clear color caps only with neon light modules.
93
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Corrosion Resistant Selector Switches and Potentiometers
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 4 Position Selector Switch Operators – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included Unless Noted. For use in
hazardous locations – See page 98.
Quantity and Type
OR
KA2
Side 2
Side 1
KA3
#2
KA1
#2
0 0 0 1
KA2
#1
0 1 0 0
Cam
Type
Manual Return
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
H
H
H
SKS88
SKS88B
SKS88➁
Spring Return From Left
Spring Return From Right
Maintained in the Two Mid Positions
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob
With Standard Black Knob
With Other Color Knob (See Table) ➁
H
H
H
SKS89
SKS89B
SKS89➁
H
H
H
H
H
H
SK88J1
SK88J1R
SK88J➂
SK88J➂
SK88J➂➁
SK88J➂➁
KA1
Top View
i
KA2
Example: Type SK2105 or SK2385
1 0 0 0
KA3
#1
KA3
OR
Type
SK-20
SK-21 ➆
SK-22
SK-23 ➇
➆ ➇ Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.
OR
0 0 1 0
Locating
Notch
2
Suffix
KA2
#2
Operator
Description
Operator only – Single Pot
Operator with Single Pot
Operator only – Tandem Pot
Operator with Tandem Pot
Mount on Side
KA3
KA1
Watts
1 — Contact
Closed
0 — Contact
Open
CONTACT BLOCK REQUIRED
Contact Block Position
Potentiometer♦ (with Dial Plate ➅)
KA1
#1
OR
Non-Illuminated Operators
Illuminated Operators
Manual Return ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and With Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
Spring Return From Left
Spring Return From Right
Maintained in the Two Mid Positions
Operator Only ➀
Without Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
With Standard Red Knob 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Without Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Without Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
With Other Color Knob and Other Voltage Transformer, Flashing or LED ➃
Ohms
Suffix
01
02
38
03
04
05
32
39
06
33
50 K
100 K
200 K
250 K
500 K
1000 K
1500 K
2000 K
2500 K
3500 K
Ohms
➆
07
08
40
09
35
10
36
11
12
5000
10 K
15 K
25 K
35 K
50 K
75 K
100 K
250 K
Suffix
➆
Ohms
13
37
14
15
16
17➈
500 K
750 K
1.0 Meg
2.5 Meg
5.0 Meg
5.0 Meg
Ohms
Suffix
➇
Front
Rear
82
83
85
88
89
1000
5000
10 K
50 K
100 K
1000
5000
10 K
50 K
100 K
➅ The dial plate only is Class 9001 Type SKN905.
➈ For use with 9050 Type T.
♦ Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm).
Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.
Selector Switch Knobs
Color
H
H
H
H
H
H
Standard
Knob
SK89J1
SK89J1R
SK89J➂
SK89J➂
SK89J➂➁
SK89J➂➁
➁
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Orange
Blue
White
Amber
Clear
With Other Color Knob Full Voltage, Neon or Resistor ➄
➀ These operators can be ordered complete with contact blocks, for maximum block usage –
see page 103. Add the “H” number chosen from page 99 to the end of the operator type number.
EXAMPLE: SKS88FB + H13(KA1-SIDE 2) = SKS88FBH13.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from knob color table at right.
EXAMPLE: SKS88➁ with a green gloved hand knob = SKS88FG.
➂ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from Voltage Assembly Code Table on page 93.
EXAMPLE: SK88J➂ with a 60 Vac-Vdc voltage = SK88J37.
➃ The color of the knob must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., red LED use
red knob) or use a clear knob.
➄ On neon voltages, use clear knobs only.
Voltage Assembly Codes
See Page 93
➆
✻
Coin
Operated
Gloved
Hand Knob
➁
➁
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
Knob
Code
Type
B
R
G
Y
S
L
W
A
C
B11 ✻
R8
G8
Y8
S11 ✻
L8
W8
A8
C8
FB
FR
FG
FY
FS
FL
FW
FA
FC
B25 ✻
R24
G24
Y24
S25 ✻
L24
W24
A24
C24
TB
TR
TG
TY
–
TL
–
–
TC
B18 ✻
R16
G16
Y16
–
L16
–
–
C16
Black and orange are opaque and for use on non-illuminated operators only.
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 99
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 97-98
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 106
Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 105
94
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — 30 mm
Corrosion Resistant Pilot Lights
Pilot Lights – UL Types 4, 4X, 13/NEMA Types 4, 4X, 13
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Legend Plate Not Included.
Description
Voltage
Standard
Pilot Light
(Plastic fresnel
color cap shown)
Push-To-Test
Pilot Light
(Plastic fresnel
color cap shown)
Remote Test
Pilot Light
(Plastic fresnel
color cap shown)
With Red
Fresnel Color
Cap
Style
With Other
Color Cap
Without Color
Cap
SKP1
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SKP1R31
SKP1G31
SKP1 ➁
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SKP7R31
SKP7G31
SKP7 ➁
SKP7
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
SKP35R31
SKP35G31
SKP35 ➁
SKP35
Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➂
SKP➀R31
SKP➀G31
SKP➀➁
SKP➀
Full Voltage, Neon or
Resistor ➃
SKP➀R31
SKP➀G31
SKP➀➁
SKP➀
SKT1
For other voltages
see Table ➀
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SKT1R31
SKT1G31
SKT1 ➁
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
SKT7R31
SKT7G31
SKT7 ➁
SKT7
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
SKT35R31
SKT35G31
SKT35 ➁
SKT35
Transformer, Flashing or
LED ➂
SKT➀R31
SKT➀G31
SKT➀➁
SKT➀
Full Voltage, Neon or
Resistor ➃
SKT➀R31
SKT➀G31
SKT➀➁
SKT➀
120 Vac Only
Resistor ➄
SKTR38R31
SKTR38G31
SKTR38 ➁
SKTR38
24-28 Vac Only
Full Voltage ➄
SKTR35R31
SKTR35G31
SKTR35 ➁
SKTR35
For other voltages
see Tables ➀➁➄
Full Voltage or Resistor➄
SKTR➀R31
SKTR➀➄G31
SKTR➀➁➄
SKTR➀
KP44R
KP44G
KP44Y
(Yellow
Color
Cap)
–
For other voltages
see Table ➀
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
These pilot lights are intrinsically safe when used with a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2). These pilot lights are Factory Mutual (FM approved). Consult your local Square
D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated — there are no replaceable
parts — except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend
plates as shown on pages 100 and 101
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits
(NEMA 4X)
With Green
Fresnel Color
Cap
Operating Voltage Range
Nominal Current
20-30 Vac/dc
25 mA
➀ Add the voltage assembly code as chosen from voltage assembly code table, page 93.
EXAMPLE: SKT➀R31 with a 60Vac red LED voltage = SKT37LRR31.
➁ Add the color code as chosen from the color cap table below.
EXAMPLE: SKP1➁ with a blue fresnel cap = SKP1L31.
➂ The color cap must be the same color as the LED voltage chosen (i.e., green LED use a
V max = 32 V
I max = 165 mA
Typical Push-To-Test Wiring Diagram
L2
L1
START
1
STOP
M
3
2
green color cap) or use a clear cap.
➃ On neon voltages use clear color caps only.
➄ Use only full voltage or resistor voltage assembly codes on remote test pilot lights. Do not
L2
M
choose LED, or neon transformer codes. For AC use only.
O.L.
M
R
C
Voltage Assembly Codes
See Page 93
Test
L1
Typical Remote Test Pilot Light Wiring Diagram
Color Caps
➁ Plastic
➁ Plastic
Fresnel
Domed
L1
Color
TEST
BUTTON
L2
(TEST) C
STOP
START
(TEST) C
LSI
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A31
L31
C31
G31
R31
W31
Y31
A9
L9
C9
G9
R9
W9
Y9
Basic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 102
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 100-101
Light Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 96
L1
(SIG)
M1
L2
L1
(SIG)
(TEST) C
M3
L2
M2
L2
L1
(SIG)
CR
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 102
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 107-108
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 96
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
Ring Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page 106
95
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX and T - 30 mm
Light Modules
Standard Light Modules for Types K, SK,. and KX Control Units ➃
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98.
• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only.
• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Voltage
2.78 in
70.61 mm
Standard
Duty
Shallow
Depth
1.75 in
44.45 mm
Description
For Use
With Single Lamp Ill.
Operators as
Indicated➀
Light
Module
Type No. ➄
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃
Rating
Lamp
Number
(ANSI)
Lamp Part
Number ➄
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM31
KM31LR
KM31LG
KM31LY
31
31LR
31LG
31LY
0.9 VA
0.65 VA
0.65 VA
0.65 VA
755
2550101020
6508805201
6508805203
6508805202
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM32
KM32LR
KM32LG
KM32LY
32
32LR
32LG
32LY
1.2 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
756
2550101037
6508805201
6508805203
6508805202
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
KM33
33
1.4 VA
756
2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM35
KM35LR
KM35LG
KM35LY
35
35LR
35LG
35LY
1.2 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
757
2550101002
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
KM23
23
2.5 VA
757
2550101002
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM36
KM36LR
KM36LG
KM36LY
36
36LR
36LG
36LY
2.6 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
48MB
2550101025
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM37
KM37LR
KM37LG
KM37LY
37
37LR
37LG
37LY
3.0 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
0.50 VA
60MB
2550101026
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM2
KM1
KMF1
2
1
F1
2.2 VA
2.4 VA
0.85 VA
1490
755
267
2550101003
2550101020
2550101036
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Full Voltage
Neon
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM38
KM38
KM11
KM38LR
KM38LG
KM38LY
38
38
11
38LR
38LG
38LY
3.0 VA
3.0 VA
0.2 VA
4.0 VA
4.0 VA
4.0 VA
120MB
120MB
NE51H
2550101027
2550101027
2550101013
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except ➁
KM3
3
2.5 VA
755
2550101020
220-240 V, 25-30 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM4
KM7
KMF7
4
7
F7
2.2 VA
2.0 VA
2.0 VA
1490
755
267
2550101003
2550101020
2550101036
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon
All Except ➁
All Except ➁ and KX
KM25
KM12
25
12
6.0 VA
0.3 VA
120MB
NE51H
2550101027
2550101013
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except ➁
KM8
8
2.4 VA
755
2550101020
380 Vac-dc
Neon
All Except ➁ and KX
KM13
13
0.4 VA
NE51H
2550101013
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon
All Except ➁
All Except ➁ and KX
KM5
KM14
5
14
2.8 VA
0.5 VA
755
NE51H
2550101020
2550101013
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon
Transformer
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁
KM15
KM6
15
6
0.6 VA
2.5 VA
NE51H
755
2550101013
2550101020
Replacement lamps for Series G 120Vac LED Light Modules ➂
Voltage
Description
Lamp Part Number
120 Vac Only
LED Red
6508805207
120 Vac Only
LED Green
6508805209
120 Vac Only
LED Yellow
6508805208
1.73
43.94
1.89
48.01
1.87
47.50
Side View
Top View
1.87
47.50
1.12
28.45
Side View
shown with 9001 KA contact block
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Types K and SK Control Units
For use in hazardous locations – See page 98. Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact
blocks by over 33%.
• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Voltage
Description
For Use With Single
Lamp Ill. Operators as
Indicated ➅
Light Module
Type No. ➄
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Rating
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
KM55
KM55LR
KM55LG
KM55LY
KM58
KM58LR
KM58LG
KM58LY
55
55LR
55LG
55LY
58
58LR
58LG
58LY
1.2 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
3.0 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
Replacement Lamps ➂ ➃
Lamp Number
Lamp Part
(ANSI)
Number ➄
757
2550101002
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
120MB
2550101027
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
➀ 9001 K, SK, KX.
➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.
➂ LED lamps shown here will also function in Class 9001 Type J pilot lights.
➃ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.
➄ All light modules with a LED above 12 V use a 14 V Bipolar LED.
➅ 9001K, SK, T
96
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Contact Blocks
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafe
contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal
screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping
action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to
2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are direct opening.
Standard Contact Blocks
Description
Symbol
Contact Blocks
With Binder Head Screws
(not Fingersafe)
Type
Symbol
KA1
Gold Flashed Contacts
With Standard
Pressure Wire Terminals
Type
Quantity
Type
KA21
25-Up ▲
KA31
KA22
25-Up ▲
KA32
KA23
25-Up ▲
KA33
KA24
25-Up ▲
KA34
KA25
25-Up ▲
KA35
(Clear Cover)
KA2
(Green Cover)
N.O. Early
Closing
KA3
N.C. Contact
Late Opening
(Red Cover)
▲ Minimum order quantity is 25.
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:
KA4
N.O. Contact
Early Closing
• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors
• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep
on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)
• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89.
• Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
(Clear Cover)
KA5
N.C. Contact
Late Opening
Symbol
(Red Cover)
Type
Symbol
Type
KA1G
KA4G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA6
N.O. Contact
Early Closing
KA2G
KA5G
N.C. Contact Late Opening
(Green Cover)
KA3G
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
Sequencing ✻
N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes before
N.O. Contact on
KA1
KA4
Overlapping ✻
N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes
before N.C.
Contact of KA5
Opens
KA4
KA6G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA1
Order One
Type KA4 and
One Type KA1
KA5
Order One
Type KA4 and
One Type KA5
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact
Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Symbol
Type
KA12
✻ For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or
SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
KA13
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 107
Maximum Block Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 103
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
AC
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)
35% Power Factor
Volts
120
240
480
600
Make
Break
Amperes
VA
Amperes
VA
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
60
30
15
12
7200
7200
7200
7200
6.0
3.0
1.5
1.2
720
720
720
720
10
10
10
10
Resistive 75%
Power Factor
Make, Break
and Continuous
Amperes
10
10
10
10
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Volts
125
250
600
Make and Break
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA5
KA6
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
–
–
1.1
0.55
0.2
10
10
10
97
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proof
equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. It can save
money to know what type of hazardous location exists. If you're not sure
what type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification”
Chart may help. If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you
know what class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lower
lefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks
Suitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description
Symbol
Type
KA41
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class
KA42
Division
I. Gas
1. Hazard May Exist
May Exist In Atmosphere
Under Normal Operating
Conditions.
Group
A. Acetylene
KA43
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases
containing Hydrogen
KA44
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential Hazard
A. May be present in
atmosphere only
under abnormal
circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to
Division 1 location.
II. Dust
1. Hazard May Exist
May Exist In Atmosphere
Under Normal Operating
Conditions.
KA45
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases
Containing Hydrogen
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity
>102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)
III. Fibers
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust
(Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
1. Production Areas
Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage
Areas
Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
Res.
0.25 A
8 VA
32/30
120/100
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust
(Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust
(Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential Hazard
A. May be present in
atmosphere only
under abnormal
circumstances.
Max. Volts AC/DC
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
Maximum Load
Ind.
0.10 A
3 VA
Cont.
0.5 A
0.5 A
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator is as indicated on page 103 for standard contact blocks,
except:
• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”
mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks
on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks
Description
Symbol
Type
KA51
For
Use
Class
Division
Group(s)
I
1
A
1.
Intrinsically Safe System ①
KA52
1.
2.
9001 BR station
Intrinsically Safe System ①
KA53
1.
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➁
Intrinsically Safe System ①
KA54
I
1
B, C, D
I
2
A
2.
I
II
II
2
1
2
B, C, D
E, F, G
E, F
1.
2.
3.
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➁
Intrinsically Safe System ①
1.
2.
9001 BR station
Intrinsically Safe System ①
1.
2.
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➁
Intrinsically Safe System ①
3.
II
2
G
1.
2.
3.
III
1, 2
–
1.
2.
3.
KA55
Make
Volts
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➂
Intrinsically Safe System ①
9001 BR Station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➂
Intrinsically Safe System ①
① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an
intrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous
area to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,
any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be
used. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,
may be used.
➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations.
1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.
2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2
areas. ◆
3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. ◆
4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,
SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For ➁ and ➂: UL Listed: File E10054(N), CCN NOIV.
For ◆: Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
120
240
Amps
VA
10.00
5.00
1200
1200
Make
Volts
Amps
115
AC NEMA Type C300 ➃
Break
0.50
VA
58
Amps
VA
1.000
120
0.500
120
DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄
Break
Amps
VA
0.50
58
Continuous
Carrying
Amps
3.0
3.0
Continuous
Carrying
Amps
3.0
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through
NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.
➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.
➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4X
V max. = 32 V
I max. = 165 mA
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with
a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2.
These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable
parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend
plates as shown on pages 100 and 101.
Operating
Nominal
Lens
Voltage
Type
Current
Color
Range
Red
KP44R
20-30 V
25 mA
Green
KP44G
AC/DC
Yellow
KP44Y
98
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK
"H" Numbers
The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allows
them to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.
The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an operator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to be
specified by a single type number. Operators and contact
blocks will be shipped completely assembled.
EXAMPLE: A Type KR1B push button with 2 Type KA1 contact
blocks would be Class 9001 Type KR1BH2.
Top View
For Types K and SK
Suffix No.
(Add to
Operator
Type No.)
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
H17
H18
H19
H21
H23
H24
H25
H26
H27
H28
H29
H31
H32
H33
H34
H36
H37
H38
H39
H40
H41
H42
H43
H44
H45
H46
H47
H48
H50
H51
H52
H53
H54
H55
H56
H57
H58
H59
H60
H61
H62
H63
H64
Positions
1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA4
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA4
KA4
KA1
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
2
3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA2
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA5
KA2
KA2
KA4
KA5
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
4
5
6
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA4
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA4
KA3
KA4
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA5
KA3
Suffix No.
(Add to
Operator
Type No.)
H66
H71
H72
H73
H74
H75
H76
H77
H78
H79
H80
H81
H82
H83
H86
H87
H89
H90
H91
H92
H93
H94
H95
H97
H98
H99
H100
H101
H102
H103
H104
H105
H106
H107
H109
H110
H111
H112
H113
H114
H115
H116
H117
H118
H119
H120
H121
H122
H124
H125
H126
H127
H128
H129
H130
H131
H132
H133
H134
H135
H136
H137
H138
H139
H140
H141
H142
H143
H144
H145
H146
H147
H148
H152
H153
H154
H155
H156
H157
H158
H159
H161
H162
H163
H164
H165
H166
H167
H168
H170
H171
H172
H173
H174
H175
H176
H177
H178
H179
Positions
1
2
3
4
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA4
KA1
KA12
KA35
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA31
KA31
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA33
KA1
KA21
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA5
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA2
KA5
KA42
KA43
KA41
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA45
KA3
KA5
KA44
KA43
KA1
KA3
KA51
KA53
KA53
KA51
KA1
KA53
KA4
KA42
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA52
KA2
K85
K85
KA55
KA22
KA54
KA53
KA23
KA54
KA1
KA6
KA4
KA3
K85
KA53
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA1
KA12
KA33
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA31
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA33
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA5
KA1
KA4
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA5
5
KA3
KA2
KA5
KA2
KA13
KA5
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA13
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA5
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
6
KA3
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA45
KA3
KA5
KA43
KA1
KA1
K85
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA44
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA44
KA2
KA41
KA5
KA4
KA52
KA51
KA2
KA52
KA5
KA43
KA1
KA2
KA53
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
K85
KA5
KA4
KA4
KA22
KA23
KA22
KA51
KA51
KA23
KA51
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA4
KA51
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA5
KA4
KA3
KA55
“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.
99
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Legend Plates
Plastic Legend Plates
For Use With Types K and SK Operators
21/4" Square
1.7" Square
Standard
Markings
Silver
Legend
with
Black
Letters
White
Legend
with
Black
Letters
Aluminum Legend Plates
For Use With Type K Operators
Black
Legend
with
White
Letters
Silver
Legend
with
Black
Letters
White
Legend
with
Black
Letters
21/2" Square
Black
Legend
with
White
Letters
Silver
Legend
with
Black
Letters
Black
Legend
Black
Legend
Blue
Legend
White
Legend
with
Black
Letters
Black
Legend
with
White
Letters
KN200
KN300
KN800
For Push Button or Pilot Light
Blank
Blank(red)
Start
Stop
On
Off
KN200SP
KN200RP ➁
KN201SP
KN202RP ➁
KN203SP
KN204RP ➁
KN200WP
KN200RP ➁
KN201WP
KN202RP ➁
KN203WP
KN204RP ➁
KN200BP
KN200RP ➁
KN201BP
KN202RP ➁
KN203BP
KN204RP ➁
KN100SP
KN100RP ➁
KN101SP
KN102RP ➁
KN103SP
KN104RP ➁
KN100WP
KN100RP ➁
KN101WP
KN102RP ➁
KN103WP
KN104RP ➁
KN100BP
KN100RP ➁
KN101BP
KN102RP ➁
KN103BP
KN104RP ➁
KN700SP
KN700RP ➁
KN701SP
KN702RP ➁
KN703SP
KN704RP ➁
KN700WP
KN700RP ➁
KN701WP
KN702RP ➁
KN703WP
KN704RP ➁
KN700BP
KN700RP ➁
KN701BP
KN702RP ➁
KN703BP
KN704RP ➁
KN200
KN200R ➀
KN201
KN202 ➀
KN203
KN204 ➀
KN300
KN300R ➀
KN301
KN302 ➀
KN303
KN304 ➀
KN800
KN800R ➀
KN801
KN802 ➀
KN803
KN804 ➀
Emerg. Stop
Forward
Reverse
Close
Open
Down
KN205RP ➁
KN206SP
KN207SP
KN208SP
KN209SP
KN210SP
KN205RP ➁
KN206WP
KN207WP
KN208WP
KN209WP
KN210WP
KN205RP ➁
KN206BP
KN207BP
KN208BP
KN209BP
KN210BP
KN105RP ➁
KN106SP
KN107SP
KN108SP
KN109SP
KN110SP
KN105RP ➁
KN106WP
KN107WP
KN108WP
KN109WP
KN110WP
KN105RP ➁
KN106BP
KN107BP
KN108BP
KN109BP
KN110BP
KN705RP ➁
KN706SP
KN707SP
KN708SP
KN709SP
KN710SP
KN705RP ➁
KN706WP
KN707WP
KN708WP
KN709WP
KN710WP
KN705RP ➁
KN706BP
KN707BP
KN708BP
KN709BP
KN710BP
KN205 ➀
KN206
KN207
KN208
KN209
KN210
KN305 ➀
KN306
KN307
KN308
KN309
KN310
KN805 ➀
KN806
KN807
KN808
KN809
KN810
Up
Fast
Slow
High
Low
Inch
KN211SP
KN212SP
KN213SP
KN214SP
KN215SP
KN216SP
KN211WP
KN212WP
KN213WP
KN214WP
KN215WP
KN216WP
KN211BP
KN212BP
KN213BP
KN214BP
KN215BP
KN216BP
KN111SP
KN112SP
KN113SP
KN114SP
KN115SP
KN116SP
KN111WP
KN112WP
KN113WP
KN114WP
KN115WP
KN116WP
KN111BP
KN112BP
KN113BP
KN114BP
KN115BP
KN116BP
KN711SP
KN712SP
KN713SP
KN714SP
KN715SP
KN716SP
KN711WP
KN712WP
KN713WP
KN714WP
KN715WP
KN716WP
KN711BP
KN712BP
KN713BP
KN714BP
KN715BP
KN716BP
KN211
KN212
KN213
KN214
KN215
KN216
KN311
KN312
KN313
KN314
KN315
KN316
KN811
KN812
KN813
KN814
KN815
KN816
In
Jog
Jog For.
Jog Rev.
Lower
Out
KN217SP
KN218SP
KN219SP
KN220SP
KN221SP
KN222SP
KN217WP
KN218WP
KN219WP
KN220WP
KN221WP
KN222WP
KN217BP
KN218BP
KN219BP
KN220BP
KN221BP
KN222BP
KN117SP
KN118SP
KN119SP
KN120SP
KN121SP
KN122SP
KN117WP
KN118WP
KN119WP
KN120WP
KN121WP
KN122WP
KN117BP
KN118BP
KN119BP
KN120BP
KN121BP
KN122BP
KN717SP
KN718SP
KN719SP
KN720SP
KN721SP
KN722SP
KN717WP
KN718WP
KN719WP
KN720WP
KN721WP
KN722WP
KN717BP
KN718BP
KN719BP
KN720BP
KN721BP
KN722BP
KN217
KN218
KN219
KN220
KN221
KN222
KN317
KN318
KN319
KN320
KN321
KN322
KN817
KN818
KN819
KN820
KN821
KN822
Reset
Run
Start Jog
Test
Raise
Decrease
KN223SP
KN224SP
KN225SP
KN226SP
KN227SP
KN228SP
KN223WP
KN224WP
KN225WP
KN226WP
KN227WP
KN228WP
KN223BP
KN224BP
KN225BP
KN226BP
KN227BP
KN228BP
KN123SP
KN124SP
KN125SP
KN126SP
KN127SP
KN128SP
KN123WP
KN124WP
KN125WP
KN126WP
KN127WP
KN128WP
KN123BP
KN124BP
KN125BP
KN126BP
KN127BP
KN128BP
KN723SP
KN724SP
KN725SP
KN726SP
KN727SP
KN728SP
KN723WP
KN724WP
KN725WP
KN726WP
KN727WP
KN728WP
KN723BP
KN724BP
KN725BP
KN726BP
KN727BP
KN728BP
KN223
KN224
KN225
KN226
KN227
KN228
KN323
KN324
KN325
KN326
KN327
KN328
KN823
KN824
KN825
KN826
KN827
KN828
Increase
Left
Right
Cycle Start
Feed Start
Cycle Stop
KN229SP
KN230SP
KN231SP
KN232SP
KN233SP
KN234SP
KN229WP
KN230WP
KN231WP
KN232WP
KN233WP
KN234WP
KN229BP
KN230BP
KN231BP
KN232BP
KN233BP
KN234BP
KN129SP
KN130SP
KN131SP
KN132SP
KN133SP
KN134SP
KN129WP
KN130WP
KN131WP
KN132WP
KN133WP
KN134WP
KN129BP
KN130BP
KN131BP
KN132BP
KN133BP
KN134BP
KN729SP
KN730SP
KN731SP
KN732SP
KN733SP
KN734SP
KN729WP
KN730WP
KN731WP
KN732WP
KN733WP
KN734WP
KN729BP
KN730BP
KN731BP
KN732BP
KN733BP
KN734BP
KN229
KN230
KN231
KN232
KN233
KN234
KN329
KN330
KN331
KN332
KN333
KN334
KN829
KN830
KN831
KN832
KN833
KN834
Motor Run
Motor Stop
Power On
Pull To Start
Push To Stop
KN236SP
KN237SP
KN238SP
KN236WP
KN237WP
KN238WP
KN236BP
KN237BP
KN238BP
KN136SP
KN137SP
KN138SP
KN136WP
KN137WP
KN138WP
KN136BP
KN137BP
KN138BP
KN736SP
KN737SP
KN738SP
KN736WP
KN737WP
KN738WP
KN736BP
KN737BP
KN738BP
KN236
KN237
KN238
KN336
KN337
KN338
KN836
KN837
KN838
N/A
N/A
N/A
KN179SP
KN179WP
KN179BP
KN779SP
KN779WP
KN779BP
N/A
KN379
N/A
For Selector Switch or Selector Push Button
For.-Rev.
Hand-Auto.
High-Low
Jog-Run
Man.-Auto.
Off-On
KN239SP
KN240SP
KN241SP
KN242SP
KN243SP
KN244SP
KN239WP
KN240WP
KN241WP
KN242WP
KN243WP
KN244WP
KN239BP
KN240BP
KN241BP
KN242BP
KN243BP
KN244BP
KN139SP
KN140SP
KN141SP
KN142SP
KN143SP
KN144SP
KN139WP
KN140WP
KN141WP
KN142WP
KN143WP
KN144WP
KN139BP
KN140BP
KN141BP
KN142BP
KN143BP
KN144BP
KN739SP
KN740SP
KN741SP
KN742SP
KN743SP
KN744SP
KN739WP
KN740WP
KN741WP
KN742WP
KN743WP
KN744WP
KN739BP
KN740BP
KN741BP
KN742BP
KN743BP
KN744BP
KN239
KN240
KN241
KN242
KN243
KN244
KN339
KN340
KN341
KN342
KN343
KN344
KN839
KN840
KN841
KN842
KN843
KN844
On-Off
Open-Close
Raise-Lower
Run-Jog
Slow-Fast
Start-Stop
KN245SP
KN246SP
KN247SP
KN248SP
KN250SP
KN251SP
KN245WP
KN246WP
KN247WP
KN248WP
KN250WP
KN251WP
KN245BP
KN246BP
KN247BP
KN248BP
KN250BP
KN251BP
KN145SP
KN146SP
KN147SP
KN148SP
KN150SP
KN151SP
KN145WP
KN146WP
KN147WP
KN148WP
KN150WP
KN151WP
KN145BP
KN146BP
KN147BP
KN148BP
KN150BP
KN151BP
KN745SP
KN746SP
KN747SP
KN748SP
KN750SP
KN751SP
KN745WP
KN746WP
KN747WP
KN748WP
KN750WP
KN751WP
KN745BP
KN746BP
KN747BP
KN748BP
KN750BP
KN751BP
KN245
KN246
KN247
KN248
KN250
KN251
KN345
KN346
KN347
KN348
KN350
KN351
KN845
KN846
KN847
KN848
KN850
KN851
Up-Down
Low-High
Stop-Start
Left-Right
On-Auto
Auto-Off-Hand
KN253SP
KN254SP
KN255SP
KN256SP
KN276SP
KN258SP
KN253WP
KN254WP
KN255WP
KN256WP
KN276WP
KN258WP
KN253BP
KN254BP
KN255BP
KN256BP
KN276BP
KN258BP
KN153SP
KN154SP
KN155SP
KN156SP
KN176SP
KN158SP
KN153WP
KN154WP
KN155WP
KN156WP
KN176WP
KN158WP
KN153BP
KN154BP
KN155BP
KN156BP
KN176BP
KN158BP
KN753SP
KN754SP
KN755SP
KN756SP
KN776SP
KN758SP
KN753WP
KN754WP
KN755WP
KN756WP
KN776WP
KN758WP
KN753BP
KN754BP
KN755BP
KN756BP
KN776BP
KN758BP
KN253
KN254
KN255
KN256
KN276
KN258
KN353
KN354
KN355
KN356
KN376
KN358
KN853
KN854
KN855
KN856
KN876
KN858
For.-Off-Rev.
Hand-Off-Auto.
Man.-Off-Auto.
Open-Off-Close
Up-Off-Down
Low-Off-High
KN259SP
KN260SP
KN262SP
KN263SP
KN264SP
KN265SP
KN259WP
KN260WP
KN262WP
KN263WP
KN264WP
KN265WP
KN259BP
KN260BP
KN262BP
KN263BP
KN264BP
KN265BP
KN159SP
KN160SP
KN162SP
KN163SP
KN164SP
KN165SP
KN159WP
KN160WP
KN162WP
KN163WP
KN164WP
KN165WP
KN159BP
KN160BP
KN162BP
KN163BP
KN164BP
KN165BP
KN759SP
KN760SP
KN762SP
KN763SP
KN764SP
KN765SP
KN759WP
KN760WP
KN762WP
KN763WP
KN764WP
KN765WP
KN759BP
KN760BP
KN762BP
KN763BP
KN764BP
KN765BP
KN259
KN260
KN262
KN263
KN264
KN265
KN359
KN360
KN362
KN363
KN364
KN365
KN859
KN860
KN862
KN863
KN864
KN865
Jog-Stop-Run
High-Low-Off
High-Off-Low
Auto-Man.-Off
KN267SP
KN270SP
KN277SP
KN278SP
KN267WP
KN270WP
KN277WP
KN278WP
KN267BP
KN270BP
KN277BP
KN278BP
KN167SP
KN170SP
KN177SP
KN178SP
KN167WP
KN170WP
KN177WP
KN178WP
KN167BP
KN170BP
KN177BP
KN178BP
KN767SP
KN770SP
KN777SP
KN778SP
KN767WP
KN770WP
KN777WP
KN778WP
KN767BP
KN770BP
KN777BP
KN778BP
KN267
KN270
KN277
KN278
KN367
KN370
KN377
KN378
KN867
KN870
KN877
KN878
➀ Legend plate has red background with silver letters.
➁ Legend plate has red background with black letters.
100
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Legend Plate Order Information
Legend Plate
Description
Standard Markings
KN100✻P
Plastic
▲
Silver Field, Black Letters
White Field, Black Letters
Red Field, Black Letters
Black Field, White Letters
Special Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Standard Markings
KN200
Specify Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Black Field
Red Field
Black Field
Red Field
KN399R
Silver Field, Black Letters
White Field, Black Letters
Red Field, Black Letters
Black Field, White Letters
Special Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Standard Markings
KN300
Special Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Blank
Any Marking (Specify Marking)
KN400
KN400
KN499
Select from
Table Below
KN599
Standard Markings
KN500
Black Field
Green Red
Field
Black Field
Red Field
Black Field
Red Field
Special Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Blank
KN600
Any Marking
(Specify Marking)
Blue Field
Red Field
KN899R
Silver Field, Black Letters
White Field, Black Letters
Red Field, Black Letters
Black Field, White Letters
Special Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Standard Markings
KN800
Special Marking
(Specify Marking
Required)
Blank
Any Marking (Specify Marking)
KN900
Blank
Legend
Plates
Special
Engraved
Legend
Plates
Minimum Centerline Spacing for Type K & SK Control Units
Centerline Spacing (Inches)
A
B
C
D
E
LEGEND PLATE ORIENTATION POS #1
1.75
Standard Push Button
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.69
1.75
13/8" Dia. Mushroom
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.69
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.25
Selector Switch Knobs
1.75
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.69
2.00
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.75
Standard Push Button
3/ " Dia. Mushroom
2.00
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.75
1 8
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.25
Selector Switch Knobs
2.00
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.75
1.94
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.62
Standard Push Button
1.94
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.62
13/8" Dia. Mushroom
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.25
Selector Switch Knobs
1.74
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.62
2.25
2.25
1.44
1.62
2.38
Standard Push Button
2.25
2.25
1.44
1.62
2.38
13/8" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
2.25
1.44
1.62
2.38
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
2.25
1.44
1.62
2.38
Selector Switch Knobs
LEGEND PLATE ORIENTATION POS #2
Standard Push Button
1.62
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.75
13/8" Dia. Mushroom
1.62
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.75
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.25
Selector Switch Knobs
1.62
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.75
1.75
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.00
Standard Push Button
1.75
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.00
13/8" Dia. Mushroom
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.25
Selector Switch Knobs
1.75
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.00
1.62
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.94
Standard Push Button
3/ " Dia. Mushroom
1.62
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.94
1 8
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.44
2.25
2.25
Selector Switch Knobs
1.62
1.31
1.44
2.25
1.94
2.25
1.31
1.62
2.38
2.38
Standard Push Button
3/ " Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.62
2.38
2.38
1 8
21/4" Dia. Mushroom
2.25
1.31
1.62
2.38
2.38
Selector Switch Knobs
2.25
1.31
1.62
2.38
2.38
Legend
Plate
Operator
KN-2
KN-5
KN3
KN4
KN6
KN2
KN5
KN3
KN4
KN6
Plate
Color
Yellow
Green
Blue
Red
Orange
Burnt Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
Red
Orange
Burnt Orange
Letter
Color
Black
White
White
White
White
Black
Black
White
White
White
White
Black
1.7 Inch
Square
KN200YP
KN200GP
KN200LP
KN200CP
KN200AP
KN200HP
KN299YP
KN299GP
KN299LP
KN299CP
KN299AP
KN299HP
2.25 Inch
Square
KN100YP
KN100GP
KN100LP
KN100CP
KN100AP
KN100HP
KN199YP
KN199GP
KN199LP
KN199CP
KN199AP
KN199HP
MM
Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.
KN900
KN999
▲ Other colors available:
Dimensions Inches
HOLE PUNCH:
KN519
KN600
KN600R
KN699
KN699R
Select from
Table on p. 100
KN799SP
KN799WP
KN799RP
KN799BP
Select from
Table on p. 100
KN899
Standard Markings
KN700✻P
Plastic
▲
Mounting Hole For All Types K, SK, and KX Control Units
KN299R
Select from
Table on p. 100
KN299SP
KN299WP
KN299RP
KN299BP
Select from
Table on p. 100
KN399
Standard Markings
KN200✻P
(Plastic)
▲
Type
Select from
Table on p. 100
KN199SP
KN199WP
KN199RP
KN199BP
Select from
Table on p. 100
KN299
2.5 Inch
Square
KN700YP
KN700GP
KN700LP
KN700CP
KN700AP
KN700HP
KN799YP
KN799GP
KN799LP
KN799CP
KN799AP
KN799HP
C
D
2
14
18
1
18
8
per field
2
2
per field
3
Enclosure Or
Grounded
Metal Part
22
4
17
2
18
18 per
pos.
2
1 per
pos.
5
18
B
A
B
KN200
15/8
13/4
15/8
21/4
KN300
KN500
KN600
D
1.13
Special Legend Plates
Approximate Dimensions (Inches)
31/
32
115/64
31/
32
19/16
200 Dia.
200
31
32
31
32
2.437
Sq.
.690
7
8
Type
7
8
2.210 sq.
1.200
Dia.
.690
Type KN900
1 11
16
11
2
1
4
1
2
.833
1.105
Type KN200, KN300 Type KN400
KN500, KN600
KN500
KN501
KN502
1.218
Type KN700*P
Type KN100*P
x
Type KN500
(For Use with Dual
Function Operators
KR6, KR7 and KR67)
13
4
.817
.200
A
F
1.31
D30052-287
The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and is
based on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading.
Type
0.88
0.88
1.12
0.88
0.88
0.88
1.12
0.88
1.00
1.00
1.12
1.00
0.88
0.88
1.12
0.88
A
KN100 KN200 KN300 KN400 KN500 KN600 KN700 KN800 KN900
16
0.88
0.88
1.12
0.88
0.88
0.88
1.12
0.88
0.88
0.88
1.12
0.88
1.12
1.12
1.12
1.12
B
Maximum Number of Lines and Characters
for Type KN Legend Plates
Type
Max. No. of
Char. per Line
Max. No. of
Lines
E
D
F
Type KN800
Standard Markings
Green
Blank
Start
On
Red
Blank
Stop
Off
Type
Black
Black
KN520
KN521
KN522
KN523
KN524
KN525
KN526
Blank
Start
On
Forward
Up
High
Open
Blank
Stop
Off
Reverse
Down
Low
Close
101
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Accessories
Padlock Attachments
Padlock Attachments
Used On
For Type K non- illuminated push button —
Std. or mushroom
(KR4, KR5 mushroom
buttons only).
Description
Holds button in
depressed position
. . . and can be
padlocked.
Type
Used On
K4
For Types K and SK
selector switches (will
not work with gloved
hand knob) and
potentiometers
Cover type attachment that can be
padlocked to keep
unauthorized
personnel from
tampering with the
operator.
K7
For Types K and SK
selector switches (will
not work with gloved
hand knob) and
potentiometers
Same as 9001 K7
except that this
lockout is spring
loaded.
K107
Cover type attachment that can be
padlocked to keep
unauthorized
personnel from
tampering with the
operator.
K108
K97
For Types K and SK
illuminated push
buttons (with or
without guard) and
key operated push
buttons
Same as 9001 K108
except that this
lockout is spring
loaded.
K109
K6
For Types K and SK
illuminated push
buttons (with or
without guard) and
key operated push
buttons
For Types K and SK
maintained push-pull
operators using 13/8"
dia. mushroom
buttons (-20 series as
shown on Page
15-72).
Cover type attachment that holds
mushroom button in
depressed position
and can be
padlocked.
K110
K5
Type K5
For Types K and SK
non-illuminated push
buttons with or without
protective boots.
Holds button in
depressed position
when padlocked.
Type K97
For Types K and SK
non-illuminated push
buttons, cover type
attachment.
For Types K and SK
push-pull operator and
illuminated push
buttons.
Attachment can be
padlocked. Does not
hold button in
depressed position.
Holds button in
depressed position . . .
and can be padlocked.
K62
Description
Type
Protective Boots
For Types K and SK
push buttons, cover
type attachment.
Similar to K6 shown
above EXCEPT without
lockout provision and
with spring loaded
cover.
K60
KU1
KU17
KU37
KU27
These Type KU protective boots are not required for UL Type 4 rating on the Type K operators
or UL Type 4 or 4X rating on the Type SK operators. Protective boots are still recommended
for very dirty environments or severe hose down. The K1 (see Page 15-73) wrench is required
for installation of these boots.
Holds maintained
For KR11U and KR12U button in depressed
.
position . . . and can be
padlocked.
For Type KR9 & SKR9
Push-Pull operatorsNon-Illuminated and
Illuminated
Holds button in
depressed positionCan be padlocked
For Non-Illuminated
Push Buttonsk
K96
K162
Clear Color for
Type
Color
Type
Standard Knob Selector Switch
KU17
Black
Red
Blue
Brown
Green
Yellow
Clear
Clear
(Provides
Full
Guard)
KU1
KU2
KU3
KU4
KU5
KU6
KU7
KU8
Gloved Hand Cap for use on std.
knob Selector Switch
KU18
Standard Pilot Light and Maintained Contact
Push Buttons
KU27
Push-to-Test and Illuminated Push Button
Without Guard
KU37
Illuminated Push But. With Guard
KU47
k
Use KU27 for maintained contact push buttons.
Mushroom Button Guards
Closing Plates
Aluminum
Mushroom
Guard for 13/8"
Mushroom
Button
Operator
(KR4, KR24)
Aluminum
Mushroom
Guard for 21/4"
Mushroom
Button
Operator
Yellow PlasticExtended
MushroomGuard for 13/8"
MushroomButton
Operators
Description
Round
(11/2'' Dia.)
Type
Type
Used On
Type
Used On
Type
Type
K48
K56▼
KR4, SKR4
K68
KR5
Gray
K11q
K51j
K56▲Mt
KR8, KR9, SKR8,SKR9
K685
KR25
Chrome
Plated
K12q
K52j
t The mushroom guard has finger holes for pushpull operators.
▼ B=Black G=Green R=Red Y=Yellow
▲ R=Red Y=Yellow
Dimensions ................................................................. Page 108
j Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13.
q Meets UL and NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13.
102
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Basic Operators, Application Data
.
Basic Operators
(Does not include Color Caps, Mushroom Buttons, Knobs, Selector Switch Cams, Contact Blocks, Light Modules or Legend Plates)
UL Types/NEMA Types
Description
4, 13
4, 4X, 13
Non Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR1
SKR1
Non Illuminated Push Button (Extended Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR2
SKR2
Non Illuminated Push Button (No Guard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR3
SKR3
Non Illuminated Push Button (Mushroom Button/screw on). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR20
SKR20
Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR6
–
Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Momentary Interlocked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR67
–
Non Illuminated Dual Push Button (Maintained Interlocked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR7
–
Momentary Pull - Maintained Neutral - Momentary Push. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR8 ➀ ➃
SKR8 ➀
Maintained Pull - Maintained Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KR9 ➀ ➃
SKR9 ➀
Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard - Plastic Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K1L ➁
SK1L ➁
Illuminated Push Button and Push To Test (No Guard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K2L ➁ ➂
SK2L➁➂
Illuminated Push Button (Full Guard - Metal Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K3L ➁
–
Standard Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KP
SKP
3 Pos. Maintained Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KS4 ➀
SKS4 ➀
3 Pos. Spring Return Both Sides To Center – Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KS5 ➀
SKS5 ➀
3 Pos. Spring Return Left To Center – Selector Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KS6 ➀
SKS6 ➀
3 Pos. Spring Return Right To Center – Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KS7 ➀
SKS7 ➀
➀ Operator can be converted to an illuminated operator by removing the liner (6509704901) and adding a light module.
➁ Operator can be converted to a non-illuminated operator by adding liner (6509704901).
➂ Operator includes jumper wires for push-to-test conversion.
➃ These operators can be supplied with 1 3/8" or 21/4" dia. mushroom buttons. For 13/8": Add ✻ 20 to type number. The ✻ refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105.
For 21/4": Add ✻ 21 to type number. The ✻ refers to the color chosen - see page 74, 88, or 105. Voids UL and NEMA Type 6 Rating.
Selector Switch Angular Travel (Types K and SK)
Maximum Contact Block Usage
(Includes Types K and SK)
2 blocks mounted side by side only: Any 2, 3 or 4 position spring
return selector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed).
Operator Service Temperature Range:
-22 °F to + 140 °F at 50% relative humidity
-30 °C to + 60 °C
2 blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks): Any selector
push button, keyed push button, 2, 3, or 4 position maintained
selector switch (non-illuminated, illuminated or keyed), push
pull operators (non-illuminated or illuminated), joy stick, dual
push button.
Environmental Ratings:
Types K: The Type K (Series H) operators are UL approved
for use in Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 flat
surface enclosures.
Type SK: The Type SK operators are UL approved for use in
Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13 flat surface
enclosures.
Types K, SK: For hazardous location use — see
page 98.
3 blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks): Single momentary push buttons (non-illuminated or illuminated).
Dimensions:
Types K and SK: See pages 107-108.
Non Hazardous Locations
Mounting Hole Dimensions:
See page 101.
2 blocks mounted in tandem on one side only: Any 2 operator
interlocked push button.
Types
K, SK
File
CCN
E42259
NKCR
File
LR25490
Class 3211 03
Marking
Minimum Centerline Spacing:
Types K and SK: See page 101.
File
LR26817
Class 3218 02
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
Hazardous Locations (see page 98)
Types
K, SK
File
CCN
E10054N
NOIV
103
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Application Data, Materials
Type K Operator Materials:
Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light
(Types KR and KT)
Type SK Operator Materials:
Push Button and Push To Test Pilot Light
(Types SKR and SKT)
Gasket – Nitrile
Seal – Nitrile
Seal Cap – Amorphous Acetal
Decorative Ring – Polyester Film
Compensating Washer – Polypropylene
Lock Ring – Amorphous Nylon
Stem – Thermoplastic Polyester
Base Cap – Thermoplastic Polyester
Knob – Polycarbonate
Liner – Polypropylene
Hold Down Spring for Type K-15 – Neoprene
Operator Base – Zinc
Operator Base (KR8) – Polyester
Return Spring – Music Wire or Stainless Steel (KT only)
Ring Nuts – Aluminum or Zinc
Springkeeper – Steel
Locking Thrust Washer – Zinc
Color Insert – Polyethylene
Selector Switch (Types KS)
Base – Thermoplastic Polyester
Stem – Acetal (non-illuminated push button)
Thermoplastic Polyester (illuminated push button
and push-to-test pilot light)
Seal – Nitrile
Gasket – Nitrile
Spring – 302 Stainless Steel
Spring Support – CRS
Lock Ring – Nylon
Trim Washer – Polypropylene
Locking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic Polyester
Ring Nut – Thermoplastic Polyester
Color Insert – Polyethylene (non-illuminated push button)
Color Cap – Polycarbonate (illuminated push button and
push-to-test pilot light)
Mushroom Button – Acetal (non-illuminated push button)
Polycarbonate (illuminated push button)
Liner – Polypropylene (non-illuminated push button)
Selector Switch (Types SKS)
Gasket – Nitrile
Seal – Nitrile
Bearing Washer – Polyester Film
Compensating Washer – Polypropylene
Cam Follower – Delrin 100
Liner – Polypropylene
Knob – Polycarbonate
Cam Carrier – Amorphous Nylon
Cam Rotor – Celenex 3300
Cam Profile– Delrin 100
Operator Base – Zinc
Detent Spring – Stainless Steel
Ring Nuts – Aluminum or Zinc
Seal keeper – Stainless Steel
Locking Thrust Washer – Zinc
Base – Thermoplastic Polyester
Seal – Nitrile
Gasket – Nitrile
Seal Keeper – 302 Stainless Steel
Spring – 302 Stainless Steel
Cam Follower – Delrin 100
Bearing Washer – Polyester Film
Cam Carrier – Trogamid
Cam Profile – Delrin 100
Liner – Polypropylene (non-illuminated only)
Knob – Polycarbonate
Trim Washer – Polypropylene
Locking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic Polyester
Spring Support – CRS
Pilot Light (Type SKP)
Pilot Light (Type KP)
Gasket – Nitrile
Compensating Washer – Polypropylene
Lens – Glass or Polycarbonate
Light Module Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester
Operator Base – Zinc
Glass Lens Ring – Anodized Aluminum
Gasket – Nitrile
Base – Thermoplastic Polyester
Trim Washer – Polypropylene
Locking Thrust Washer – Thermoplastic Polyester
Ring Nut – Thermoplastic Polyester
Color Cap – Polycarbonate
Contact Block And Light Module Materials:
Contact Block (Type KA)
Housing – Amorphous Nylon
Contact Slider – Phenolic, Nylon or Acetal
Terminal – Steel
Saddle Clamp – Steel
Spring – Stainless Steel
Contacts – Silver and Copper
Blade – Beryllium Copper
Mounting Screw – Steel
Label – Paper
Light Module (Type KM)
Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester
Socket – Steel
Terminal – Steel with Tin Plate
Saddle Clamp – Steel
Translating Pin – Polycarbonate
Transformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel, Copper,
Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluorethylene,
Acetate, Paper
Lamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire
104
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Accessories
Description
Color inserts for
KR1, KR2, KR3, SKR1,
SKR2, SKR3, KR11,
KR12, SKR11, SKR12,
KRD, T, TRD
13/8'' Snap-in
Mushroom knob
for KR4 and SKR4 ➂
21/4" Snap-in
Mushroom knob
for KR5 and SKR5 ➃
13/8" Screw-on
Mushroom knob
for KR24 and SKR24➄
21/4" Screw-on
Mushroom knob
for KR25 and SKR25 ➅
15/8" Push-Pull Knobs for
KR8,KR9, SKR8, SKR9 Operators
Color Inserts for
Dual Function Operators
KR6, KR7, KR67
Standard Color
Caps for Illuminated
Push Buttons
K1L, K2L, K3L, SK1L, SK2L
Color
Type
Package
Qty.
Black
Blue
Gray
Green
Orange
Red
Universal ➀
White
Yellow
T6BK
T6BE
T6GY
T6GN
T6OE
T6RD
T6U
T6WH
T6YW
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Black
Blue
Green
Orange
Red
Red ➁
Yellow
K16B
K16L
K16G
K16S
K16R
K16R05
K16Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Black
Blue
Green
Orange
Red
Red ➁
Yellow
K17B
K17L
K17G
K17S
K17R
K17R05
K17Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Plastic Fresnel
Pilot Light Lens
for KP, KT, SKP, SKT
Black
Blue
Green
Orange
Red
Yellow
K92B
K92L
K92G
K92S
K92R
K92Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
Domed Plastic
Pilot Light Lens
for KP, KT, SKP, SKT
Black
Blue
Green
Orange
Red
Yellow
K93B
K93L
K93G
K93S
K93R
K93Y
1
1
1
1
1
1
Amber
Black ➆
Blue
Clear
Green
Orange ➆
Red
Red ➉
White
Yellow
A22
B23
L22
C22
G22
S23
R22
R2205
W22
Y22
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Black
Green
Red
Universal ➇
B19
G19
R19
U19
10
10
10
10
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A7
L7
C7
G7
R7
W7
Y7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Color
Type
Package
Qty.
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A20
L20
C20
G20
R20
W20
Y20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A21
L21
C21
G21
R21
W21
Y21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A31
L31
C31
G31
R31
W31
Y31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A9
L9
C9
G9
R9
W9
Y9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Glass Pilot Light
Lens for KP, KT
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
White
Yellow
A6
L6
C6
G6
R6
W6
Y6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Standard Selector Switch
Knob for K and SK
Selector Switches
Amber
Black ➆
Blue
Clear
Green
Orange ➆
Red
White
Yellow
A8
B11
L8
C8
G8
S11
R8
W8
Y8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Amber
Black ➆
Blue
Clear
Green
Orange ➆
Red
White
Yellow
A24
B25
L24
C24
G24
S25
R24
W24
Y24
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Black ➆
Blue
Clear
Green
Red
Yellow
B18
L16
C16
G16
R16
Y16
1
1
1
1
1
1
Black
Blue
Green
Orange
Red
White
Yellow
T5BK
T5BE
T5GN
T5OE
T5RD
T5WH
T5YW
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Description
13/8" Mushroom Knob for
Illuminated Push Buttons
K2L, SK2L ➈
21/4" Mushroom
Knob for Illuminated
Push Buttons
K2L, SK2L ➈
Gloved Hand Selector Switch
Knob for K and SK
Selector Switches
Coin Operated Selector
Switch Knob for K and SK
Selector Switches
➀ Includes one each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, Green, Yellow, Orange, Blue,
and White.
➁ “EMERGENCY STOP” is in raised letters and hot stamped white across the front of the
mushroom button.
➂ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to form
Color Inserts for KQ
and TQ Selector
Push Buttons
a 9001 KR4 or SKR4.
➃ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR1U or SKR1U to form
Cam
Type
a 9001 KR5 or SKR5.
➄ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001
KR24 or SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR24.
➅ The mushroom button kits listed here may be assembled to a 9001 KR20 to form a 9001
KR25 or a SKR20 to form a 9001 SKR25.
➆ These color caps are opaque and are for use on non–illuminated operators only.
➇ Includes two of each of the following color inserts: Black, Red, and Green.
➈ May be used on KR8 and KR9 operators. Order mushroom button and K54 adapter (no
charge) from page 106. Using the K54 adapter voids Type 6 rating.
➉ Red knob with “Push Emergency Stop” marked on top of knob.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
L
M
K13B
K13C
K13D
K13E
K13F
K13G
K13H
K13J
K13L
3105402402
Selector Switch Cams
105
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Replacement Parts
Repair Parts
Ring Nuts
Used On
K1L
K30-K37
K70-K73
K20, K21,
K22, K23
K20, K21,
K22, K23 ➂
K2L
K3L
KP, KTR
KR1
KR11
KR12 ➀
KR12 ➁
KR13-, 14-, 15KR2
KR20
KR24
KR25
KR3
KR4
KR5
KR6
KR67
KR7
KR8, KR89
KR9
KS
Type
K44
6512233501
6512233501
Used On
SK1L
–
–
SK20, SK21,
SK22, SK23
SK20, SK21,
SK22, SK23 ➂
SK2L
–
SKP, SKTR
SKR1
SKR11
SKR12 ➀
SKR12 ➁
–
SKR2
–
–
–
SKR3
SKR4
SKR5
–
–
–
SKR8, SKR89
SKR9
SKS
SKS ➂
SKRU11
SKRU1,2,3,4,5,10
SKT
K45
K46
K49
K111
K40
K41
K42
K42
K41
K55
K42
K49
K49
K49
K40
K41
K41
K47
K47
K47
K58
K41
K45
KS ➂
K46
KT
K49
Type
SK44
–
–
SK45
SK46
SK49
–
SK40
SK41
SK42
SK42
SK41
–
SK42
–
–
–
SK40
SK41
SK41
–
–
–
SK58
SK41
SK45
SK46
SK41
SK40
SK49
Description
Part Number
2941101100
Refer to page 82
2940601100
2941151990
3105217001
4487D63XI
E10 Key
E11 through E33 keys
D10 Key
Master Key for E36 – E60
Gray cap for KR11, KR12, SKR11, or SKR12
Clear plastic top (only) for 9001 K44 & SK44
Ring Nut
Gasket for Type K and SK Push-Pull Knob
Gasket for Plastic Illuminated Lens
Gasket for Type K and SK selector switch knob
Black Compensating Gasket (Type K and SK
Operators)
Liner for Non Illuminated Operators
Locking Thrust Washer
Nylon Spacer
Locking Thrust Washer (Std. Type SK Operator)
Push Pull Mushroom Adapter ➄
Rubber Boot for Joystick
Knob on Joysticks without latch
6509701801
6509701901
3105406401
6509702001
6509704901
6512231201
6509705001
6512240601
K54
6512243201
4458D20X3
➄ Allows Type -20 and -21 mushroom color caps to be used on push pull operators. Use of
9001 K54 voids Type 6 rating.
KU Replacement Ring Nuts (Threaded Inside and Out)
Used On
Part Number
KU1 through KU8, KU27, KU37, KU47
3105204101
KU17, KU18
3105205901
Interlock
For mechanically interlocking two push buttons so that only one
button can be depressed at a time. A Type K3 attachment is
furnished with the 9001 KR11, KR12, SKR11, SKR12, SKRU1
and SKRU11 operators. However, maintained operators are
supplied here and the K3 interlock serves to release one of the
buttons when the other is depressed. When used with
momentary contact buttons, the K3 interlock does not hold the
buttons in the depressed position. It simply prevents pushing
both buttons at the same time.
The Type K3 interlock can be mounted behind the operators, or
behind Type KA contact blocks as shown. Operators and blocks
not included.
➀ Maintained button of two button operator.
➁ Momentary button of two button operator.
➂ Secondary ring nut (holds knob on selector switch or potentiometer).
Type
K3
Replacement Lamps For Series A thru F (black) Light Modules
Light
Module Type
Square D Replacement
Lamps
Part Number
–
2550101003
–
2550101003
–
–
–
–
2550101020
2550105014
2550105014
2550105014
2550105014
2550105014
2550105003
2550105003
2550105008
2550105005
2550105007
2550105003
2550105004
2550105008
2550105009
2550105010
2550105005
Lamp No.
(ANSI)
GE44 ➃
GE1490
GE44 ➃
GE1490
GE44 ➃
GE44 ➃
GE44 ➃
GE44 ➃
GE755
CMDK1A5
CMDK1A5
CMDK1A5
CMDK1A5
CMDK1A5
SYL 12PSB
SYL 12PSB
SYL 28PSB
SYL 120PSB
SYL 6PSB
SYL 12PSB
SYL 24PSB
SYL 28PSB
SYL 48PSB
SYL 60PSB
SYL 120PSB
KM1
KM2
KM3
KM4
KM5
KM6
KM7
KM8
KM9
KM11
KM12
KM13
KM14
KM15
KM21
KM22
KM23
KM25
KM31
KM32
KM34
KM35
KM36
KM37
KM38
Screwdriver
Used to tighten mounting screws on
contact blocks and light modules.
Type No.
K69
Wrench
K95
Where Used
For tightening ring nuts on Types K, KX, SK and J control units
For protective cap kits
K1
Type
K95
K1
➃ GE44 and GE755 are interchangeable (GE755 gives longer life). If a GE-44 lamp is ordered,
a GE755 (2550101020) will be substituted. For a replacement lamp in a current series light
module see the light module listing on page 96.
Selector Switch Cams
Cam
Type
Cam
Type
B
C
D
E
F
K13B
K13C
K13D
K13E
K13F
G
H
J
L
M
K13G
K13H
K13J
K13L
3105402402
106
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions — Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.
Push
Buttons
Selector
Switches
Pilot
Lights
Interlocked Push Buttons
Types KR11, KR12
SKR11, SKR12, and K3 Interlock
1.66
42
1.81
45.98
1.125
28.6
1.13
29
1.03
26
No
Guard
Type KR3
Type SKR3
Standard
Type KP
Type SKP
1.75 thru 2.25
44
57
Spacing between
Operator Center Line
C30052-246
.56
14
C30052-247
1.41
35.8
B30052-271
Light Module
Full
Guard
Type KR1
Type SKR1
33
71
C30052-246
.56
14
30052-284
Type KR11, 12
panel thickness
.06 min .25max
2
6
2.78
1.28
1.125
28.6
1.25max
32
PushTo-Test
Type KT
Type SKT
C30052-271
C30052-247
1.72
43.7
Extended
Guard
Type KR2
Type SKR2
C30052-247
1.19
30.2
C30052-246
.56
14
1.81
45.9
Illuminated
Standard
Knob
Type K
Type SK
Push Button
Illuminated
No Guard
Type K2L
Light
Module
Light Module
Light Module
1.81
45.9
min
.06
2
max
Panel Thickness
.06 Min .25
Max
6
2
1.52
39
.25
6
1.03
26
panel thickness
Light Module
B30052-270
1.66
42
1.34
34
1.96
50
Push Pull
Dual Dims
In.
mm
Dimensions When Using Contact Blocks
C65075-235
A
Key Operated
Push Button
C30052-246
1.06
26.9
1.66
42
Illuminated
Full Guard
Type SK1L
41.3
Non-Illuminated
Types
KR4, KR5
KR24, KR25
SKR4, SKR5
Type K
Type SK
C30052-247
1.625
B30052-270
1.38
2.25 35
57
Potentiometer
B30052-270
Type KS
1.81
45.9
1.25
31.8
1.81
45.9
B30052-272
1.25
31.8
Illuminated
Type K2L
Type SK2L
1.38
35
2.25
57
1.41
35.8
1.25
31.8
Key Operated
Selector Switch
Mushroom
Buttons
Coin Operated
Type KS
B
Illuminated and
Non-Illuminated
Types KR8, KR9
KR8P, KR9P
1.63
Dia
41.4
B30052-285
Type: K20 w/o Potentiometer
K21 w/ Potentiometer
SK20 w/o Potentiometer
SK21 w/ Potentiometer
.06
2
Panel Thickness
.25
max
min
6
Panel Thickness
1/16 min-1/4 max
1.66
42
2.10
53
1.60
41
1.52
39
( Illuminated Shown )
min
max
.25
,06
6
2
panel thickness
“A” Dim.
Type No.
Depressed
(Stop)
Midway
(Neutral)
Extended
(Start)
KR8,
SKR8
13/8
19/16
13/4
3
3
KR9,
SKR9
1
--
15/16
KR8P,
SKR8P
13/8
19/16
13/4
KR9P,
SKR9P
1
--
15/16
“B” Dim.
/4
1.66
.97
14
42
25
2.85
2.63
72
0.56
14
3.66
93
65075-323
67
All Type KA
Except Reed
/4
113/16
0.56
All Reed
Contact Blocks
Type: K22 w/o Potentiometer
K23 w/ Potentiometer
SK22 w/o Potentiometer
SK23 w/ Potentiometer
107
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions — Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.
Time Delay Push Button
Type KRD
A
B
2.5
63.5
Emergency
“Break Glass” Operator
Dual Function
Operator
Selector
Push Button
Type K15
Types KR6, KR7
Type KQ
2.0
50.8
3.28
83.3
2.25
57.2
panel thickness
1 min 1 max
4
16
Type No.
Panel Thickness
.25
.06
max
min
2
6
1.28
33
4.69
119
Dimension A
.66
17
Dim. B
KRD1UH1
KRD1UH2
Full Guard
9/
KRD2UH1
KRD2UH2
Ext. Guard
11/
KRD3UH1
KRD3UH2
No Guard
9/
1.66
42
2 1/ 2
16
16
2 1/ 2
16
2 1/ 2
.97
25
2.63
67
B30051-248
Protective Boots
Alternate Action
Module “Push-on,
Push-off”
Padlock Attachments
1.50 Dia.
38
1.98
1.96
50
Type KU27
Type KU1 to KU8
Type K96
Type K4
1.50 Dia
38
Type K85
50
1.72
44
0.69
16
1.62
41
2.26
57
1.56
40
1.08
27
A65075-075
A65075-078
TYPE KU37
0.98
25
TYPE KU47
1.50 Dia.
38
2.22
56 max
C65075-234
Type K7, K107, K108,
K109, and K110
1.36
36
0.81
21
1.61
40.9
1.45 Dia
37
1.61
41
A65075-079
A65075-060
1.52
39
TYPE KU18
TYPE KU17
Type K6, K60, and K97
1.62 Dia
41
1.51 Dia.
41
0.75
19.05
0.97
26
1.79
45
1.39
40
2.00
50
1.79
45
2.29
58
B65075-074
A65075-077
2.29
58
Type K62
A65075-101
For K67
B65075-069
Type K5
2.56
65
2.20
55.88
2.61
66
Rocker Arm Operating Lever
1.94
49
1.84
47
2.20
56
2.20
56
B65075-071
Type K50
1.85
47
B65075-065
START
Mushroom Button Guards
Type K56Y, K56YM ✻
Type K48
Type K68
1.88
48 Dia
1.73
44 Dia
1.63
41 Dia
20* max.
2.0 min
50.8
2.75
70
20* max.
2.50
64
1.69
43
STOP
1.94
49.28
1.09
28
1.14
29
0.19
5 Dia
1.00
25
B65075-231
B65075-232
2.38
60 Dia
1.75
max
44.45
3.0
76.2
C65013-001-27
A65075-233
✻ 9001K56YM includes finger holes.
108
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Button and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type KX 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type KX Square Multifunction Complete Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Type KX Square Oiltight/Watertight Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Type KX Selector Switch Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Type KX Square Multifunction Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Type KX Square Multifunction Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Type KX Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Type KX Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Types K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Application Data, Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Type KX Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Complete Operators
The operators listed below come complete with color caps, legend inserts/plates, contact blocks, and light modules (illuminated
operators only) and can be ordered using the short type number. If the operator you desire is not listed below, see pages 110
through 119. For a component breakdown of each of the operators listed on this page, refer to Product Data M-603.
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Button
Color
Description
Selector Switches
Contacts
Non-Illuminated
Type
Number
Green
Red
Start
Stop
KXRA101
KXRA102
Green
Start
KXRA133
NonIlluminated
Illuminated
110-120 V,
50-60 Hz
Transf.
Legend
Marking
Red
Stop
KXRA134
Red
Mushroom
Emerg.
Stop
KXRN105
Red
Mushroom
Emerg.
Stop
KXRN135
Green
Red
Start
Stop
KXRB103
KXRB104
Red
Mushroom
Emerg.
Stop
Description
Legend
Knob
2-Maint.
Off-On
Black
1
0
0
1
KXSA125
2-Maint.
Off-On
Black
0
1
KXSA139
3-Maint.
Hand-Off-Auto.
Black
1
0
0
0
0
1
KXSD126
Black
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
KXSD127
3-Maint.
Illuminated - 110-120 V, 50-60 Hz, Transf.
Description
Legend
Knob
2-Maint.
Off-On
Red
Type
Number
3-Maint.
Hand-Off-Auto.
Red
1
0
0
0
0
1
KXSM129
3-Maint.
Hand-Off-Auto.
Red
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
KXSM130
Top Button (#1)
Bottom Button (#2)
Contacts
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-Mom.-Stop
KXRC111
Green-Mom.-Start
Red-Mom.-Stop
KXRC136
Green-Mom.-Up✻
Green-Mom.-Down✻
KXRD112
Green-Mom.-Open✻
Green-Mom.-Close✻
KXRD113
Green-Mom.-Fwd.✻
Green-Mom.-Rev.✻
KXRD114
Green-Mom.-Up✻
Green-Mom.-Down✻
KXRD140
Green-Mom.-Open✻
Green-Mom.-Close✻
KXRD141
Green-Mom.-Fwd.✻
Green-Mom.-Rev.✻
KXRD142
Green-Maint.-Start✻
Red-Maint.-Stop✻
KXRE115
Green-Mom.-Reset✻
Red-Maint.-Stop✻
KXRF116
Contacts
Type
Number
Positions
KXRP106
Dual Push Buttons
Description
Hand-Off-Auto.
Contacts
Type
Number
Positions
1
0
0
1
KXSJ128
Single Pilot Light
Lens
Color
Legend
Marking
Type
Number
Standard
Red
Green
On
Off
KXPA107
KXPA108
Push-ToTest
Red
Green
On
Off
KXTA109
KXTA110
Description
110-120 V,
50-60 Hz
Transf.
Dual Push To Test Pilot Light
(Pushing Button #1 Tests Pilot Light #2 — Pushing Button #4 Tests Pilot Light #3)
Description
Dual Push Button With One Pilot Light
Description
1
2
3
Pilot Light
at 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
Top
Button
(#1)
Middle
Lens
(#2)
Bottom
Button
(#3)
GreenMom.-Start
RedOn
RedMom.-Stop
KXRG117
GreenMom.-Start
RedOn
RedMom.-Stop
KXRG137
Green
Mom.✻-Blank
RedBlank
GreenMom.✻-Blank
KXRH118
GreenMaint.✻-Start
RedOn
RedMaint.✻-Stop
KXRJ119
GreenMom.-Reset✻
RedOn
RedMaint.✻-Stop
KXRK120
Contacts
Type
Number
Description
1
2
3
4
Pilot Lights
at 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz
Transf.
✻
Top
Button (#1)
Right
Lens
(#3)
GreenMom.-Start
RedOn
GreenRed
Off
Mom.-Stop
White-Mom.Number 1
White
1
GreenMom.-Start
RedOn
GreenMom.✻Blank
RedBlank
Buttons are mechanically interlocked.
Blue
2
Bottom
Button (#4)
Contacts
Type
Number
Bottom
Button (#4)
Type
Number
Green
Blank
Red
Blank
Red
Blank
Green
Blank
KXTC123
1
2
3
4
Pilot Lights
at 110-120 V,
50-60 Hz Transf.
Dual Pilot Light
Left Lens (#1)
Right Lens (#2)
Type Number
Red
On
Green
Off
KXPB124
1
2
110-120 V,
50-60 Hz. Transf.
Description
Top
Left (#1)
Top
Right (#2)
Bottom
Left (#3)
Bottom
Right (#4)
Type
Number
White
Blank
Blue
Blank
Green
Blank
Red
Blank
KXPC131
White
Blank
Blue
Blank
Green
Blank
Red
Blank
KXTE150 ◆
KXRL121
KXRL132
GreenRedOff
Mom.-Stop
KXRL138
RedBlank
Right
Lens (#3)
Four Field Pilot Light
Blue-Mom.Number 2
GreenMom.✻Blank
Left
Lens (#2)
Description
Dual Push Button With Dual Pilot Lights
Left
Lens
(#2)
Top
Button (#1)
KXRM122
110-120 V,
50-60 Hz
Transf.
Remote Test ◆
120 V, AC Resistor
◆ If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously – do NOT operate above
120 Vac.
110
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Complete Operators
9001 KX
Operator
Code
Cam
Code
Key
Withdrawal
Code
Voltage
Code
For Use With
Selector Switches
ONLY
For Use With
Illuminated Operators
ONLY
RA
RB
RC
RD
RE
RF
RG
RH
RJ
RK
RL
RM
RN
RP
PA
PB
PC
TA
TB
TC
TD
TE
BA
BB
BC
BD
Legend/Color Location
Selector Switches
Non-illuminated – 2 position maintained selector switch
Non-illuminated – 2 position spring return from left
Non-illuminated – 2 position spring return from right
Non-illuminated – 3 position maintained selector switch
Non-illuminated – 3 position spring return from left to center
Non-illuminated – 3 position spring return from right to center
Non-illuminated – 3 position spring return both sides to center
Non-illuminated – 4 position maintained selector switch
Illuminated – 2 position maintained selector switch
Illuminated – 2 position spring return from left
Illuminated – 2 position spring return from right
Illuminated – 3 position maintained selector switch
Illuminated – 3 position spring return left to center
Illuminated – 3 position spring return right to center
Illuminated – 3 position spring return both sides to center
Illuminated – 4 position maintained selector switch
Key Operated – 2 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 1, 2, 3
Key Operated – 2 position spring return from left – Key Code 2
Key Operated – 2 position spring return from right – Key Code 1
Key Operated – 3 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 4-10
Key Operated – 3 position spring return left to center – Key Codes 5, 6, 9
Key Operated – 3 position spring return right to center – Key Codes 4, 5, 7
Key Operated – 3 position spring return both sides to center – Key Code 5
Key Operated – 4 position maintained selector switch – Key Codes 11, 12, 13, 14
Push Buttons
Standard Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminated
Standard Single Momentary Push Button – Illuminated
Two Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock
Two Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock
Two Maintained Push Buttons with Interlock
One Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with Interlock
Two Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Single Pilot Light
Two Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot Light
Two Maintained Push Buttons with Interlock and a Single Pilot Light
One Momentary – One Maintained Push Button with Interlock and a Single Pilot Light
Two Momentary Push Buttons with NO Interlock and a Dual Pilot Light
Two Momentary Push Buttons with Interlock and a Dual Pilot Light
Mushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Non-illuminated
Mushroom Single Momentary Push Button – Illuminated
Pilot Lights
Standard Pilot Light
Standard Dual Pilot Light
Standard Four-Field Pilot Light
Single Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Single Remote Test Pilot Light
Dual Push-To-Test Pilot Light
Dual Remote Test Pilot Light
Remote Test Four-Field Pilot Light
Potentiometers
Operator Only – Single Pot
Operator with Single Pot
Operator Only – Tandem Pot
Operator with Tandem Pot
1
2
3
Yes
No
Yes
4
5
6
7
Yes
No
No
Yes
KXPA
KXRA
KXRB
KXRG
KXRH
KXRJ
KXRK
KXRN
KXRP
KXS
KXTA
KXTB ◆
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
8
9
10
No
No
No
Yes
No Yes
No Yes
No No
Yes Yes
Yes No Yes
No Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Transformer
Resistor
Transformer
Full Voltage
Full Voltage
KXPC ✻
KXTE ✻
Resistor
Code
No.
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Flashing Type
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
220-24 V, 50-60 Hz
Flashing Type
277 V, 50-60 Hz
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
18 V, AC or DC
32 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
240 V, AC or DC
6 V, AC or DC
12-14 V, AC or DC
24-28 V, AC or DC
48 V, AC or DC
60 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
277 V, 50-60 Hz
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
6 V, AC or DC
24 V, AC or DC
28 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
12 V, AC or DC
48 V, AC or DC
60 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
6 V, AC or DC
120 V, AC or DC
12 V AC
24 V AC
28 V AC
48 V AC
60 V AC
120 V AC
KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 2
1 0
(Code H13)
0 1
KA – 1 Mtd. on Side 1
1 0
(Code H1)
0 1
Use These Cam Codes
E
With These
SA – SB
Operator
SJ – SK
Codes
SR – SS
1 = Contact Closed
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
D
SC – SL
ST
1
0
0
1
0 0
1 1
0 1
1 0
B
1
0
1
0
0 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
C
0
0
0
0
0 1
1 0
0 1
1 0
D
1
0
1
0
3 Position
0 = Contact Open
0 0
1 0 0
1 0
0 0 1
0 0
0 1 0
1 0
0 0 1
E
F
SD – SE – SF – SG
SM – SN – SO – SP
SV – SW – SX – SY
1
0
0
1
0 0
1 1
0 1
0 0
G
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
A
2
B
3
C
KXRG
KXRH
KXRJ
KXRK
1
A
2 C
3
B
4
D
1 B
2
A
KXPB
1
A
A1 B2
KXPC
KXTE
KXRC
KXRD
KXRE
KXRF
1
A
2
B
KXRL
KXRM
KXTC
KXS
1 0
0 0
0 1
1 0
L
1
0
0
1
1 0
0 1
1 1
0 0
M
Potentiometers
have black knobs
1
Color Code
Color
3
7
R
G
A
L
W
B
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
Black ▲
F7
8
5
6
33
23
38
25
31
32
35
36
37
38
1
3
7
8
5
6
31
34
35
38
32
36
37
38
1
31
38
32
34
35
36
37
38
4 Position
0 0
1 1
0 1
1 0
J
KXRA
KXRB
KXRN
KXRP
KXPA
KXTA
F1
✻ Only voltage codes 31, 34, 35 and 38 may be used with
KXTE.
◆ Only resistor and full voltage styles may be used with KXTB
and KXTD.
2 Position
1
A
3 D
4
C
Voltage and
Frequency
Full Voltage
KXPB
KXRL
KXRM
KXTC
KXTD◆
11
12
13
14
No
No
Yes
No
For Use
With
Transformer
This information is also available on the
Class 9001 Type KX key sheet M-8091
which is available from your local Square D sales office.
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Resistor
Contact Block(s)
Required To Obtain
These Sequences
Contact
Block
Code
Color
Code
Insert the proper color code(s)
for the lens or knob required.
For location of color codes,
see table below.
For Use With
Key-operated Selector
Switches ONLY
Operator Codes and Operator Description
SA
SB
SC
SD
SE
SF
SG
SH
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SP
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SV
SW
SX
SY
SZ
Ohm
Value
Code
1
0
0
0
000
010
001
100
H
SH
SQ
SZ
▲ Not available with text or
with certain operators (see
selection in this section).
For Use With
Potentiometers
ONLY
For KXBB
Ohms
50
100
250
500
1000
2500
5000
10 K
25 K
50 K
100 K
250 K
500
1.0 Meg
2.5 Meg
5.0 Meg
1500
3500
35 K
75 K
750 K
200
2000
15 K
For KXBD
Ohms
Code
Front
Rear
82
1000
1000
83
5000
5000
85
10 K
10 K
88
50 K
50 K
89
100 K
100 K
Code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
Not used on standard type
pilot lights (KXPA, KXPB,
KXPC, KXTB, KXTD, KXTE)
or potentiometers (KXBA,
KXBB, KXBC, KXBD).
See page 122 for Proper
H Number
111
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Operators
Non-Illuminated Push Buttons
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
All non-illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. To
make the Type KXRA operator a full guard type (does not apply
to the KXRN operators), add a shroud from page 119. If legend
inserts are required to be assembled into the operator, see instructions on page 118.
Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three Type
KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).
Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two Type
KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
Button Covers
Description
Button
Type
Button
Cover
Color
Type
Number
Standard
No Cover
Green
Red
Amber
White
Blue
KXRA
KXRAG
KXRAR
KXRAA
KXRAW
KXRAL
No Cover
Red
Green
Amber
White
Blue
KXRN
KXRNR
KXRNG
KXRNA
KXRNW
KXRNL
Mushroom
Single Button
Momentary
Description
Button
Type
Both
Momentary
Both
Momentary
Mechanical
Interlock
No
None
Green
Amber
Amber
Other
None
Red
Red
Green
Other
KXRC
KXRCGR
KXRCAR
KXRCAG
KXRC ✻
Yes
None
Green
Green
Red
Amber
Other
None
Red
Green
Red
Amber
Other
KXRD
KXRDGR
KXRDGG
KXRDRR
KXRDAA
KXRD ✻
None
Green
Green
Red
Amber
Other
None
Red
Green
Red
Amber
Other
KXRE
KXREGR
KXREGG
KXRERR
KXREAA
KXRE ✻
None
Green
Green
Green
Other
None
Red
Green
Amber
Other
KXRF
KXRFGR
KXRFGG
KXRFGA
KXRF ✻
2
Both
Maintained
Top Button
Momentary
Bottom Button
Maintained
Yes
Yes
Color
Type
Number
Code
KXRA
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
Black
KXAR1
KXAG1
KXAA1
KXAL1
KXAW1
KXAB1
R
G
A
L
W
B▼
KXRN
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXARM1
KXAGM1
KXAAM1
KXALM1
KXAWM1
KXRC
KXRD
KXRE
KXRF
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
Black
KXAR2
KXAG2
KXAA2
KXAL2
KXAW2
KXAB2
Includes
KXN100
Type
Number
(2)
Bottom
For Use on
Includes
KXN100
◆
(1)
Top
1
Dual Push Button
(Non–illuminated
Only)
Button Cover
Color
Description
Includes
KXN200
R
G
A
L
W
R
G
A
L
W
B▼
◆
Two required per operator. When ordering an assembled operator — specify two code
numbers. The first code will be assembled into #1 and the second code will be assembled
into #2.
▼ Not available with text.
Standard Contact Blocks
Symbol
Contact Block
Type
Contact Block Assembled
To Operator
Suffix▲
KA1
H13
KA2
H5
KA3
H6
▲ Example: Class 9001 Type KXRAG with a KA1 contact block is Type KXRAGH13.
Types KA1 and KA3 NC contacts are direct opening
✻ Add 2 color codes from button cover table. See example below.
Example: To get a Dual Push Button similar to a 9001KXRCGR except the top button is
blue, order a 9001KXRCLR.
Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Lockouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121
“H” Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122
Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123
Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121
112
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Oiltight/Watertight Operators
Illuminated Push Buttons
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Button Covers
Description
All illuminated push buttons are of the no guard type. To make
them a full guard type (does not apply to the KXRP operators),
add a shroud from page 119. If legend inserts are required to be
assembled into the operators, see instructions on page 118.
For Use on
Color
Type Number
Code
KXRA
KXRB
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR1
KXAG1
KXAA1
KXAL1
KXAW1
R
G
A
L
W
KXRN
KXRP
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXARM1
KXAGM1
KXAAM1
KXALM1
KXAWM1
R
G
A
L
W
KXRG (Pos. 1 & 3)
KXRH (Pos. 1 & 3)
KXRJ (Pos. 1 & 3)
KXRK (Pos. 1 & 3)
KXRL (Pos. 1 & 4)
KXRM (Pos. 1 & 4)
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
Black
KXAR4
KXAG4
KXAA4
KXAL4
KXAW4
KXAB4
R
G
A
L
W
B▼
KXRG (Pos. 2)
KXRH (Pos. 2)
KXRJ (Pos. 2)
KXRK (Pos. 2)
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR3
KXAG3
KXAA3
KXAL3
KXAW3
R
G
A
L
W
KXRL (Pos. 2 & 3)
KXRM (Pos. 2 & 3)
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR5
KXAG5
KXAA5
KXAL5
KXAW5
R
G
A
L
W
Includes
KXN100
Momentary operators on this page will accept up to three Type
KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of six blocks).
Includes
KXN100
Maintained operators on this page will accept up to two Type KA
contact blocks mounted in tandem (total of four blocks).
To order operators with color caps other than those listed below,
substitute the proper color code from the Button Cover Table.
Includes
KXN400
Example: To get a Dual Push Button/Single Pilot Light similar to a 9001 KXRG1GGR except
the pilot light is white, order a 9001 KXRG1GWR.
Description
Button
Type
Mechanical
Interlock
Voltage
Button
Cover Color
No Light No Covers
Module
Both
Momentary
Both
Momentary
110-120 V
50-60 Hz
Trans.
No
Yes
1
2
3
Two
Push Buttons
(1 & 3)
One Pilot
Light (2)
Both
Maintained
Top
Momentary
Bottom
Maintained
Yes
Yes
KXRG
No Covers
Green-Red-Red
Green-Green-Red
Green-Amber-Red
KXRG ✻
No Light No Covers
Module
KXRH
No Covers
Green-Red-Green
Green-Amber-Green
Red-Green-Red
KXRH ✻
No Light No Covers
Module
KXRJ
Covers
110-120 V No
50-60 Hz Green-Red-Red
Green-Green-Red
Trans. Green-Amber-Red
KXRJ ✻
No Light No Covers
Module
KXRK
No Covers
Green-Red-Red
Green-Green-Red
Green-Amber-Red
Replacement Parts
Ring Nut
Adapter Assembly w/o Liner
Spring Clip
Adapter with Liner
Description
KXRK1
KXRK1GRR
KXRK1GGR
KXRK1GAR
Button
Type
Standard
Single
Button
Momentary
Mushroom
Voltage
Both
Momentary
Two
Push Buttons
(1 & 4)
Two Pilot
Lights (2 & 3)
Type
Number
No Light Module
No Cover
KXRA
110-120 V
50-60 Hz
Trans.
No Cover
Green
Red
Amber
White
Blue
KXRB1
KXRB1G
KXRB1R
KXRB1A
KXRB1W
KXRB1L
Other
Voltages
No Cover
Green
Red
KXRB✻
KXRB✻ G
KXRB✻ R
No Light Module
No Cover
KXRN
110-120 V
50-60 Hz
Trans.
No Cover
Red
Green
Amber
White
Blue
KXRP1
KXRP1R
KXRPIG
KXRPIA
KXRPIW
KXRPIL
Other
Voltages
No Cover
Red
Green
KXRP✻
KXRP✻ R
KXRP✻ G
Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).
Mechanical Voltage and
Interlock
Frequency
No
1
2
3
4
KXRK ✻
Button
Cover Color
Button
Type
6508901401
6508903350
6508900902
6508903351
No Light
Module
Insert the proper voltage code from page 116 (single lamp).
Description
✻
▼ Not available with text.
KXRJ1
KXRJ1GRR
KXRJ1GGR
KXRJ1GAR
Other
Voltages No Covers
110-120 V
50-60 Hz
Trans.
Includes
KXN500
KXRH1
KXRH1GRG
KXRH1GAG
KXRH1RGR
Other
Voltages No Covers
Other
Voltages No Covers
✻
KXRG1
KXRG1GRR
KXRG1GGR
KXRG1GAR
Other
Voltages No Covers
110-120 V
50-60 Hz
Trans.
Includes
KXN300
Type
Number
Both
Momentary
Yes
No Covers
No Covers
Green-Green110-120 V
Red-Red
50-60 Hz Green-RedTransformer Red-Green
Red-GreenGreen-Red
Type
Number
KXRL
KXRL1
KXRL1GGRR
KXRL1GRRG
KXRL1RGGR
Other
Voltages
No Covers
KXRL✻
No Light
Module
No Covers
KXRM
No Covers
Green-Green110-120 V
Red-Red
50-60 Hz Green-RedTransformer Red-Green
Red-GreenGreen-Red
Other
Voltages
✻
Button
Cover Color
No Covers
KXRM1
KXRM1GGRR
KXRM1GRRG
KXRM1RGGR
KXRM✻
Insert the proper voltage code from page 117 (dual lamp).
Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 -121
Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110
Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118
Boots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Lamp and Lens Removal Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 116 - 117
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 120 - 121
113
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Selector Switch Selection Guide
Shown below is a simplified method of selecting a selector
switch to meet almost any combination of contact sequences.
Table 1 – 2 Position Selector Switch
If you require
contact sequence
Step No. 1
Determine the contact sequence(s) required. Set up a target
table like the one shown for the example below.
Example:
Contact
Sequence
1
0
0
1
Use Sel. Sw.
with cam type
Use contact
block type
Mount on
side No.
(See page 122)
E
KA3
1 or 2
D
KA2
1 or 2
E
KA2
1 or 2
D
KA3
1 or 2
Table 2 – 3 Position Selector Switch
A
1
0
0
B
0
1
0
C
0
0
1
If you require
contact sequence
Use Sel. Sw.
with cam type
Use contact
block type
G
0 – contact open
1 – contact closed
M
L
1
Step No. 2
Look for a cam type common to all sequences in Table 1, 2 or
3. For the example above, Table 2 would be used. For the contact sequences A(1 0 0), B(0 1 0) and C(0 0 1) of the example
above, cam types F and L are common to all 3 sequences.
0
0
C
B C
KA3
1
KA3
2
KA5 ✻
2
KA2
1
G J
J L
D E
0
F
L
Step No. 3
Next, the cam type common to all the sequences (If several
cam types are common, choose one.) is used to find the operator type number. Go to the proper page number as indicated
in the table below:
C
B
0
0
F
D
1
G
L
D
B
Push Button Line
Page Number
2
Type KX
115
3
Type KX
115
4
Type KX
115
1
0
C
F
0
1
G
L
If for the example above:
0
1
D E
D E
Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDFB (from page 115)
If the L cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
If you require
contact sequence
Step No. 4:
Determine the contact blocks required by using the same table
used for Step No. 2.
If for the example above:
The F cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or 2 would be used for sequence
C(0 0 1).
The L cam type were chosen:
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 2 would be used for sequence A(1 0 0).
A 9001KA2 mounted on side no. 1 or a 9001 KA3 mounted on side no.
2 would be used for sequence B(0 1 0).
A 9001KA3 mounted on side no. 1 would be used for sequence C(0 0 1).
KA1
=
=
KA3
+
KA3
1
2
1
KA5 ✻
1 or 2
KA3
2
KA2
2
KA5 ✻
1
KA5 ✻
2
KA3
1
KA3
1
KA5 ✻
1
KA5 ✻
2
Table 3 – 4 Position Selector Switch
Type KX Line – Class 9001 Type KXSDLB (from page 115)
One Type KA1 double circuit block can be used in place of one
Type KA2 single circuit block and one Type KA3 single circuit
block mounted on the same side.
J L
1 or 2
KA2
J
1
2
KA2
KA2
M
A manual return operator with a standard black knob is required and
If the F cam type were chosen, the operator type number would be:
KA3
2
G J
1
1
1
M
B
2
KA3
KA5 ✻
M
1
KA2
KA3
B
Number of Positions
1
2
E F G J
D E
1
KA2
KA2
E
B
0
Mount on
side No.
(See page 122)
✻
Use Sel. Sw.
with cam type
Use contact
block type
Mount on
side No.
(See page 122)
2
1
0
0
0
H
(A) KA3
0
1
0
0
H
(B) KA2
1
0
0
1
0
H
(C) KA2
2
0
0
0
1
H
(D) KA3
1
1
0
0
1
H
1
1
0
0
H
A & B Wired in Parallel
0
1
1
0
H
B & C Wired in Parallel
0
0
1
1
H
C & D Wired in Parallel
1
1
1
0
H
A, B & C Wired in Parallel
0
1
1
1
H
B, C & D Wired in Parallel
1
0
1
0
H
A & C Wired in Parallel
0
1
0
1
H
1
1
0
1
H
KA5 ✻
2
1
0
1
1
H
KA5 ✻
1
A & D Wired in Parallel
B & D Wired in Parallel
The KA5 must be the last block on either side. If more than one KA5 is required on either
side – contact your local Square D sales office.
KA2
+
“H” Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 122
Outline Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
114
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Selector Switches
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
The selector switches listed below do not include a legend plate. Legend plates are required to be assembled into the operators. Maintained selector switches will accept up to two Type KA contact blocks mounted in tandem (a total of four blocks). Spring
return selector switches will accept a maximum of two Type KA contact blocks mounted side by side. To order a selector switch
with a knob other than black, substitute the proper color code from the selector switch knob table.
Example: To get a selector switch similar to a 9001KXSDCB except with a red knob, order a KXSDCR.
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Contact Block(s)
Required To Obtain
These Sequences
KA-1 Mtd. on Side 2
(Code H13)
KA-1 Mtd. on Side 1
(Code H1)
CAM
Manual Return – Operator Only
Without Knob
Standard Black Knob
Other Colors
Key Operated
Spring Return from Left
Without Knob
Standard Black Knob
Other Colors
Key Operated (Code 2 Only)
Spring Return from Right
Without Knob
Standard Black Knob
Other Colors
Key Operated (Code 1 Only)
Spring Return – Left to Center
Without Knob
Standard Black Knob
Other Colors
Key Operated (Code 5, 6, or 9 Only)
Spring Return – Right to Center
Without Knob
Standard Black Knob
Other Colors
Key Operated (Code 4, 5, or 7 Only)
Spring Return – Both Sides to Center
Without Knob
Standard Black Knob
Other Colors
Key Operated (Code 5 Only)
1 = Contact Closed 0 = Contact Open
3 Position
Center
Center
Center
Center
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
1 0 0
0 0 1
1 0 0
1 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
C
D
E
F
2 Position
Left Right
1
0
1
0
Left Right
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
E
1
0
1
0
D
KXSAE
KXSAEB
KXSAE▲
KXSRE ◆
....
....
....
....
KXSBE
KXSBEB
KXSBE▲
KXSSE◆
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
Center
Left Right
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 0 1
1 1 0
B
KXSDC
KXSDCB
KXSDC▲
KXSVC ◆
KXSDB
KXSDBB
KXSDB▲
KXSVB ◆
KXSCD
KXSCDB
KXSCD▲
KXSTD ◆
KXSDD
KXSDDB
KXSDD▲
KXSVD ◆
KXSDE
KXSDEB
KXSDE▲
KXSVE ◆
KXSDF
KXSDFB
KXSDF▲
KXSVF ◆
4 Position
Center
Left Right
1 0 0
0 1 1
0 0 1
1 0 0
G
KXSDG
KXSDGB
KXSDG▲
KXSVG ◆
Center
Left Right
1 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
0 1 0
J
KXSDJ
KXSDJB
KXSDJ▲
KXSVJ ◆
Center
Left Right
0 1 0
1 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
L
KXSDL
KXSDLB
KXSDL▲
KXSVL ◆
Center
Left Right
1 1 0
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 0
M
KXSDM
KXSDMB
KXSDM▲
KXSVM ◆
1
0
0
0
0 0
0 1
0 0
1 0
H
0
0
1
0
KXSHH
KXSHHB
KXSHH▲
KXSZH ◆
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSEB
KXSEBB
KXSEB▲
KXSWB ◆
KXSEC
KXSECB
KXSEC▲
KXSWC ◆
KXSED
KXSEDB
KXSED▲
KXSWD ◆
KXSEE
KXSEEB
KXSEE▲
KXSWE ◆
KXSEF
KXSEFB
KXSEF▲
KXSWF◆
KXSEG
KXSEGB
KXSEG ▲
KXSWG ◆
KXSEJ
KXSEJB
KXSEJ▲
KXSWJ ◆
KXSEL
KXSELB
KXSEL▲
KXSWL ◆
KXSEM
KXSEMB
KXSEM▲
KXSWM ◆
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSFB
KXSFBB
KXSFB▲
KXSXB◆
KXSFC
KXSFCB
KXSFC▲
KXSXC ◆
KXSFD
KXSFDB
KXSFD▲
KXSXD ◆
KXSFE
KXSFEB
KXSFE▲
KXSXE ◆
KXSFF
KXSFFB
KXSFF▲
KXSXF ◆
KXSFG
KXSFGB
KXSFG▲
KXSXG ◆
KXSFJ
KXSFJB
KXSFJ ▲
KXSXJ ◆
KXSFL
KXSFLB
KXSFL▲
KXSXL ◆
KXSFM
KXSFMB
KXSFM ▲
KXSXM ◆
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSGB
KXSGBB
KXSGB▲
KXSYB ◆
KXSGC
KXSGCB
KXSGC▲
KXSYC ◆
KXSGD
KXSGDB
KXSGD▲
KXSYD ◆
KXSGE
KXSGEB
KXSGE▲
KXSYE ◆
KXSGF
KXSGFB
KXSGF▲
KXSYF ◆
KXSGG
KXSGGB
KXSGG▲
KXSYG ◆
KXSGJ
KXSGJB
KXSGJ▲
KXSYJ ◆
KXSGL
KXSGLB
KXSGL▲
KXSYL ◆
KXSGM
KXSGMB
KXSGM▲
KXSYM ◆
....
....
....
....
KXSJE✻
KXSJE✻R
KXSJE✻ ▲
....
....
....
KXSMC ✻
KXSMB✻
KXSMB✻R KXSMC✻R
KXSMB✻ ▲ KXSMC✻ ▲
KXSMD✻
KXSMD✻R
KXSMD✻▲
KXSME ✻
KXSMF✻
KXSME✻R KXSMF ✻R
KXSME✻ ▲ KXSMF✻ ▲
KXSMG ✻
KXSMG ✻R
KXSMG✻ ▲
KXSMJ✻
KXSML ✻
KXSMJ✻R KXSML ✻R
KXSMJ✻ ▲ KXSML✻ ▲
KXSKE ✻
KXSKE✻R
KXSKE✻ ▲
....
....
....
Illuminated Selector Switches
Manual Return
Without Knob
Standard Red Knob
Other Colors
Spring Return from Left
Without Knob
Standard Red Knob
Other Colors
Spring Return from Right
Without Knob
Standard Red Knob
Other Colors
Spring Return – Left to Center
Without Knob
Standard Red Knob
Other Colors
Spring Return – Right to Center
Without Knob
Standard Red Knob
Other Colors
Spring Return – Both Sides to Center
Without Knob
Standard Red Knob
Other Colors
....
....
....
KXSLD✻
KXSLD✻R
KXSLD✻▲
KXSMM ✻
KXSQH✻
KXSMM✻R KXSQH✻R
KXSMM✻ ▲ KXSQH✻ ▲
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSNB✻
KXSNB✻R
KXSNB✻ ▲
KXSNC✻
KXSND✻
KXSNC t✻R KXSND✻R
KXSNC✻ ▲ KXSND✻ ▲
KXSNE ✻
KXSNE✻R
KXSNE✻ ▲
KXSNF ✻
KXSNF✻R
KXSNF✻ ▲
KXSNG ✻
KXSNG ✻R
KXSNG✻ ▲
KXSNJ✻
KXSNJ ✻R
KXSNJ✻▲
KXSNL ✻
KXSNL ✻R
KXSNL✻ ▲
KXSNM ✻
KXSNM ✻R
KXSNM✻ ▲
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSOB✻
KXSOB✻R
KXSOB✻ ▲
KXSOC✻
KXSOC ✻R
KXSOC✻▲
KXSOD✻
KXSOD✻R
KXSOD✻▲
KXSOE✻
KXSOE✻R
KXSOE✻ ▲
KXSOF ✻
KXSOF ✻R
KXSOF✻ ▲
KXSOG✻
KXSOG ✻R
KXSOG✻v
KXSOJ ✻
KXSOJ ✻R
KXSOJ✻ ▲
KXSOL✻
KXSOL ✻R
KXSOL✻ ▲
KXSOM✻
KXSOM✻R
KXSOM✻ ▲
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
KXSPB✻
KXSPB✻R
KXSPB✻▲
KXSPC✻
KXSPC✻R
KXSPC✻▲
KXSPD✻
KXSPD✻R
KXSPD✻ ▲
KXSPE ✻
KXSPE✻R
KXSPE✻▲
KXSPF ✻
KXSPF ✻R
KXSPF✻▲
KXSPG ✻
KXSPG✻R
KXSPG✻ ▲
KXSPJ ✻
KXSPJ ✻R
KXSPJ✻▲
KXSPL ✻
KXSPL ✻R
KXSPL✻ ▲
KXSPM✻
KXSPM ✻R
KXSPM✻▲
....
....
....
Note: All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number E10 key change. See 30 mm push buttons types K and SK page 85 for other key changes.
◆ Insert the proper key withdrawal code from the table below.
▲ Insert the proper color code from the selector switch knob table below.
✻ Insert proper voltage code from page 116.
Key Withdrawal Codes — The key withdrawal code numbers listed below indicate the
positions in which the key can be withdrawn (removed) from the selector switch.
2-Position Switches
Code◆
1
2
3
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
11
Yes
12
No
13
Yes
14
Yes
3-Position Switches
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Code◆
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8
9
10
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
●Factory Assembled Form No.
Y178
Y178
Used With
2 pos. s/s
3 pos. s/s
Code◆
Code◆
4
5
6
7
Two Color Selector Switch Kit — Used to indicate red in left position and green in right
position and off in the center on 3 position illuminated selector switches.
4-Position Switches
● Add form number to standard type number, example: Type KXSMC1 Form Y178.
Selector Switch Knobs
CAMS
For Use On
Color
Type
Number
All Selector
Switch
Operators
EXCEPT
Key
Operated
Black
Green
Red
Amber
Blue
White
KXAB6
KXAG6
KXAR6
KXAA6
KXAL6
KXAW6
Code▲
B
G
R
A
L
W
Cam
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
L
M
Type
K13B
K13C
K13D
K13E
K13F
K13G
K13H
K13J
K13L
3105402402
115
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Pilot Lights
Single Standard Pilot Light
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
Type KXPA
Single Standard
Pilot Light
1
2
3
4
Type KXTA
Single Push-ToTest Pilot Light
These operators include a blank KXN100 Legend Insert
Voltage
and
Frequency
Style
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dc
Transformer
Transformer
Full Voltage
KXPA1R
KXPA7R
KXPA35R
KXPA1G
KXPA7G
KXPA35G
KXPA1▲
KXPA7▲
KXPA35▲
KXPA1
KXPA7
KXPA35
See Table Below For Voltage,
Frequency
and Assembly Code
Transformer or Flashing
Resistor
Full Voltage
KXPA✻R
KXPA✻R
KXPA✻R
KXPA✻G
KXPA✻G
KXPA✻G
KXPA✻▲
KXPA✻▲
KXPA✻▲
KXPA✻
KXPA✻
KXPA✻
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
24-28 Vac-dc
Transformer
Transformer
Full Voltage
KXTA1RH1
KXTA7RH1
KXTA35RH1
KXTA1GH1
KCTA7GH1
KXTA35GH1
KXTA1▲
KXTA7▲
KXTA35▲
KXTA1H1
KXTA7H1
KXTA35H1
See Table Below For Voltage,
Frequency
and Assembly Code
Transformer or Flashing
Resistor
Full Voltage
KXTA✻ RH1
KXTA✻RH1
KXTA✻RH1
KXTA✻GH1
KXTA✻GH1
KXTA✻GH1
KXTA✻▲
KXTA✻▲
KXTA✻▲
KXTA✻H1
KXTA✻H1
KXTA✻H1
KXTB35R
KXTB38R
KXTB35G
KXTB38G
KXTB35▲
KXTB38▲
KXTB35
KXTB38
KXTB✻R
KXTB✻G
KXTB✻▲
KXTB✻
Description
With Red
Color CapType
24 Vac
120 Vac
Resistor/
Full Voltage
Choose Resistor or
Full Voltage Required
from Table Below. ◆
Type KXTB
Single Remote
Test Pilot Light
✻ Add voltage assembly code.
With Green
Color Cap Type
Without
Color Cap
Type
With Other
Color Cap Type
◆ Remote test AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use transformer.
▲ Add color code.
Single Lamp Light Module Codes
Replacement Lamps
Voltage
Description
For Use with Single Lamp ILL.
Operators As Indicated
Assembly
Code ✻
Separate Light
Module
Type No.
Rated
VA
(Watts)
Lamp Number
(ANSI)
Lamp Part
Number
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
31
KM31
0.9
755
2550101020
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
32
KM32
1.2
756
2550101037
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
33
KM33
1.4
756
2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
35
KM35
1.2
757
2550101002
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
23
KM23
2.5
757
2550101002
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
36
KM36
2.6
SYL48MB
2550101025
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
37
KM37
2.6
SYL60MB
2550101026
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
2
KM2
2.2
1490
2550101003
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
1
KM1
3.9
755
2550101020
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Flashing
All Except KXTB
F1
KMF1
3.9
267
2550101036
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
38
KM38
3.0
SYL120MB
2550101027
120 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
38
KM38
3.0
SYL120MB
2550101027
208-220 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
3
KM3
7.1
755
2550101020
220-240 V 25-30 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
4
KM4
2.2
1490
2550101003
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
7
KM7
7.7
755
2550101020
220-240 V 50-60 Hz
Flashing
All Except KXTB
F7
KMF7
7.7
267
2550101036
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
25
KM25
5.5
SYL120MB
2550101027
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
8
KM8
4.3
755
2550101020
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
5
KM5
4.8
755
2550101020
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except KXTB
6
KM6
6.0
755
2550101020
No neon light modules available.
Basic Operators (Without Light Modules, Color Caps, or Legend Inserts)
Description
Typical Push to Test Pilot Light Typical Remote Test Pilot Light
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Diagram
Type
Single Standard Pilot Light
KXPA
Single Push-to-Test Pilot Light
KXRA
L1
1
Stop
2
Start
M
3
L2
O.L.
L1
TEST
BUTTON
L2
(TEST) C
M
STOP
Dual Standard Pilot Light
KXPB
Dual Push-to-Test Pilot Light
KXRL
Four Field Pilot Light
KXPC
M
L2
R
LSI
C
Test
L1
Button Covers
Color
Type Number
▲Code
KXPA
Includes KXN100
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR8
KXAG8
KXAA8
KXAL8
KXAW8
R
G
A
L
W
KXTA-KXTB
Includes KXN100
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR1
KXAG1
KXAA1
KXAL1
KXAW1
R
G
A
L
W
M1
L2
L1
(SIG)
(TEST) C
M3
For Use On
START
(TEST) C
L2
L1
(SIG)
M2
L2
L1
(SIG)
CR
Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110
Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Lamp and Lens Removal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123
116
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Square Multifunction Pilot Lights
2 and 4 Lamp Pilot Lights – These operators include blank legend inserts
With
1 = Red 2 = Red
3 = Green 4 = Green
With Other Button Cover
Colors Type ➁
KXPB1RG
KXPB7RG
KXPB35RG
....
....
....
KXPB1➁➁
KXPB7➁➁
KXPB35➁➁
KXPB1
KXPB7
KXPB35
Transformer
Full Voltage
Resistor
KXPB➀RG
KXPB➀RG
KXPB➀RG
....
....
....
KXPB➀➁➁
KXPB➀➁➁
KXPB➀➁➁
KXPB➀
KXPB➀
KXPB➀
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
28 Vac-dc
Transformer
Transformer
Full Voltage
....
....
....
KXTC1RRGGH2
KXTC7RRGGH2
KXTC35RRGGH2
KXTC1➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC7➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC35➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC1H2
KXTC7H2
KXTC35H2
See Table Below For Voltage,
Frequency
and Assembly Codes➀
Transformer
Full Voltage
Resistor
....
....
....
KXTC➀RRGGH2
KXTC➀RRGGH2
KXTC➀RRGGH2
KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC➀➁➁➁➁H2
KXTC➀H2
KXTC➀H2
KXTC➀H2
120 Vac
Resistor
KXTD38RG
....
KXTD38➁➁
KXTD38
See Table Below For Voltage,
Frequency and Assembly Codes➀
Full Voltage
Resistor
KXTD➀RG
....
KXTD➀➁➁
KXTD➀
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
24 Vac-dc
Transformer
Resistor
....
....
KXPC1RRGG
KXPC35RRGG
KXPC1 ➁➁➁➁
KXPC35 ➁➁➁➁
KXPC1
KXPC35
See Table Below For Other Voltages
And Assembly Codes ➀
Full Voltage
or Resistor
....
....
KXPC➀RRGG
KXPC➀➁➁➁➁
KXPC➀
See Table Below For Other Voltages
And Assembly Codes ➀
Full Voltage
or Resistor
....
KXTE➀RRGG✻
KXTE➀➁➁➁➁✻
KXTE➀✻
Voltage and
Frequency
Style
Type KXPB
Dual Lamp Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
28 Vac-dc
Transformer
Transformer
Full Voltage
1
See Table Below For Voltage,
Frequency and Assembly Codes➀
Description
2
Type KXTC
Dual Lamp Push-ToTest Pilot Light
1
2
3
4
Type KXTD
Dual Lamp Remote
Test Pilot Light◆
1
2
Type KXPC (4 Lamp)
Type KXTE✻
(Remote Test 4 Lamp)◆
1
2
3
4
For use in hazardous locations – See page 121.
✻ If all four lamps are illuminated at the same time continuously — DO NOT operate above 120 Vac.
former.
With
1 = Red 2 = Green
Type
Without Button
Cover
Type
◆ Remote Test Pilot Lights are AC only. Use only full voltage or resistor assembly code. Do not use trans-
For Use with Dual or Four
Lamp Operators As Indicated
Assembly
Code ➀
Separate Light
Module Type No.
Rated
VA (Watts)
Lamp Number
(ANSI)
Lamp Part Number
KXPB, KXRL
KXRM, KXTC
31
32
34
35
36
37
1
38
3
7
8
5
6
KXAKM231
KXAKM232
KXAKM234
KXAKM235
KXAKM236
KXAKM237
KXAKM21
KXAKM238
KXAKM23
KXAKM27
KXAKM28
KXAKM25
KXAKM26
0.9
2.0
1.8
1.2
2.6
3.0
2.4
3.0
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
6PSB
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
48PSB
60PSB
6PSB
120PSB
6PSB
6PSB
6PSB
6PSB
6PSB
2550105007
2550105003
2550105004
2550105008
2550105009
2550105010
2550105007
2550105005
2550105007
2550105007
2550105007
2550105007
2550105007
KXTD
31
32
34
35
36
37
38
KXAKM231
KXAKM232
KXAKM234
KXAKM235
KXAKM236
KXAKM237
KXAKM238
0.9
2.0
1.8
1.2
2.6
3.0
3.0
6PSB
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
48PSB
60PSB
120PSB
2550105007
2550105003
2550105004
2550105008
2550105009
2550105010
2550105005
Full Voltage
Resistor
Resistor
Resistor
Resistor
Resistor
Transformer
Resistor
KXPC
31
32
34
35
36
37
1
38
KXAKM431
KXAKM432
KXAKM434
KXAKM435
KXAKM436
KXAKM437
KXAKM41
KXAKM438
0.9
2.0
1.8
1.2
2.6
3.0
2.4
3.0
6PSB
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
48PSB
60PSB
6PSB
120PSB
2550105007
2550105003
2550105004
2550105008
2550105009
2550105010
2550105007
2550105005
Full Voltage
Resistor
Resistor
Resistor
KXTE
31
34
35
38
KXAKMR431
KXAKMR434
KXAKMR435
KXAKMR438
0.9
1.8
1.2
3.0
6PSB
24PSB
28PSB
120PSB
2550105007
2550105004
2550105008
2550105005
Voltage
Description
6 Vac-dc
12 Vac-dc
24 Vac-dc
28 Vac-dc
48 Vac-dc
60 Vac-dc
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
120 Vac-dc
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
277 V, 50-60 Hz
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Full Voltage
Resistor
Full Voltage
Full Voltage
Resistor
Resistor
Transformer
Resistor
Transformer
Transformer
Transformer
Transformer
Transformer
6 Vac
12 Vac
24 Vac
28 Vac
48 Vac
60 Vac
120 Vac
Full Voltage
Resistor
Full Voltage
Full Voltage
Resistor
Resistor
Resistor
6 Vac-dc
12 Vac
24 Vac
28 Vac
48 Vac
60 Vac
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
120 Vac
6 Vac
24 Vac
28 Vac
120 Vac
➀ Add the voltage assembly code number in the type number. Example: KXTD➀RG with a 60 Vac voltage = KXTD37RG.
➁ Add the color codes from the button cover table below. Example: KXPB1➁➁ with a white and blue button cover = KXPB1WL.
Button Covers
For Use On
Color
Type No.
Code
KXPB, KXTD
Includes 2-KXN200
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAC28➂
KXAC28➂
KXAC28➂
KXAC28➂
KXAC28➂
R➃
G➃
A➃
L➃
W➃
KXTC (Pos. 1 & 4)
Includes KXN400
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR4
KXAG4
KXAA4
KXAL4
KXAW4
R
G
A
L
W
KXTC (Pos. 2 & 3)
Includes KXN500
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAR5
KXAG5
KXAA5
KXAL5
KXAW5
R
G
A
L
W
KXTE, KXPC
Includes 1–KXN100
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
KXAC48➄
KXAC48➄
KXAC48➄
KXAC48➄
KXAC48➄
R➅
G➅
A➅
L➅
W➅
➂ Each KXAC28 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXAC28 should be
required per KXPB operator –unless the same color is required for #1 and #2 – then 2KXCA28 should be ordered.
➃ When specifying color codes – the first will be installed in #1 and the second in #2.
➄ Each KXAC48 includes a clear cover and 1 each of all colors. Only 1-KXCA48 should be
required per KXPC operator –unless the same color is required for more than 1 position. If
2 of the same colors are required – order 2-KXAC48, etc.
➅ When specifying color codes — the first will be installed in #1, the second in #2, the third in
#3 and the fourth in #4.
Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Completely Assembled Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 110
Legend Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 118
Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 119
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 123
117
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Legends
Letter Height For Standard Legends
For Push Buttons or Pilot Lights
KXRA,
KXRB
KXRN,
KXRP
KXPA,
KXPC
KXTA,
KXTB
KXTE
Used On
KXRC,
KXRD
KXRE,
KXRF
1.23
31
Square
KXPB
KXTD
◆
KXRG,
KXRH
KXRJ,
KXRK✻
1.23
31
KXRG,
KXRH
KXRJ,
KXRK
KXRL,
KXRM
KXTC
1.23
31
Marking
Maximum Number of Lines and Characters
for Type KXN Legend Inserts
0.56
14
Letter
Height
0.26
7
0.48
12
0.56
14
KXRL,
KXRM
KXTC
✻
1.23
31
0.43
11
Blank
Start
Stop
On
Off
Emerg. Stop
Forward
Reverse
Close
Open
Down
Up
Jog
Reset
Run
Cycle Start
Motor Run
Power On
KXN100
KXN101
KXN102
KXN103
KXN104
KXN105
KXN106
KXN107
KXN108
KXN109
KXN110
KXN111
KXN118
KXN123
KXN124
KXN132
KXN136
KXN138
KXN200
KXN201
KXN202
KXN203
KXN204
KXN205
KXN206
KXN207
KXN208
KXN209
KXN210
KXN211
KXN218
KXN223
KXN224
KXN232
KXN236
KXN238
KXN200
KXN201V
KXN202V
KXN203V
KXN204V
KXN205V
KXN206V
KXN207V
KXN208V
KXN209V
KXN210V
KXN211V
KXN218V
KXN223V
KXN224V
KXN232V
KXN236V
KXN238V
KXN300
KXN301
KXN302
KXN303
KXN304
KXN305
KXN306
KXN307
KXN308
KXN309
KXN310
KXN311
KXN318
KXN323
KXN324
KXN332
KXN336
KXN338
KXN400
KXN401
KXN402
KXN403
KXN404
KXN405
KXN406
KXN407
KXN408
KXN409
KXN410
KXN411
KXN418
KXN423
KXN424
KXN432
KXN436
KXN438
KXN500
KXN501
KXN502
KXN503
KXN504
KXN505
KXN506
KXN507
KXN508
KXN509
KXN510
KXN511
KXN518
KXN523
KXN524
KXN532
KXN536
KXN538
SpecialMarking
KXN199
KXN299
KXN299V
KXN399
KXN499
KXN599
1⁄ "
4
(6 mm)
3⁄ "
16
(4.75 mm)
1⁄ "
8
(3 mm)
Number of
KXN199
KXN299
Horizontal
KXN299
Vertical
KXN399
KXN499
KXN599
Characters
Per Line
7
7
3
7
7
3
Lines Per
Legend Insert
4
2
4
1
1
1
Characters
Per Line
9
9
4
9
9
4
Lines Per
Legend Insert
5
2
6
2
1
2
Characters
Per Line
14
14
5
14
14
6
Lines Per
Legend Insert
8
4
9
3
2
3
Maximum Number of Lines and Characters
for Type KXN699 and KXN799 Legend Plates
Position
✻ These legend inserts are for the pilot lights in the center of the operator.
▲ These legend inserts are for the push button portion of the operator.
◆ These Legend Inserts have Vertical Printing.
1.33
34
Square
1.33
34
Square
Marking
KXSR, KXSS, KXST,
KXSV, KXSW, KXSX,
KXSY, KXSZ
KXN600
KXN639
KXN640
KXN643
KXN644
KXN645
KXN646
KXN651
KXN658
KXN660
KXN662
KXN700
KXN739
KXN740
KXN743
KXN744
KXN745
KXN746
KXN751
KXN758
KXN760
KXN762
Spcl. Marking
KXN699
KXN799
(POS 1)
KXRA, KXRB
KXRN, KXRP
KXPA, KXPC
KXTA, KXTB
KXTE
KXN600
KXN200
(POS 1)
KXN200
(POS 2)
KXRC, KXRD
KXRE, KXRF
KXN300
(POS 2)
KXN300
(POS 3)
KXRG, KXRH
KXRJ, KXRK
KXN400
(POS 1)
KXNKXN400
400
(POS 2) (POS 3)
KXN400
(POS 4)
KXRL, KXRM
KXTC
K
X
N
2
0
0
V
(POS 1)
Blank
For.-Rev.
Hand-Auto
Man-Auto
Off-On
On-Off
Open-Close
Start-Stop
Auto-Off-Hand
Hand-Off-Auto
Man-Off-Auto
KXN100
A and C
B
⁄16"
(4.75 mm)
6
6
1
⁄8"
(3 mm)
8
9
3⁄ "
16
(4.75 mm)
10
5
1
⁄8"
(3 mm)
13
7
KXN-700
KXN-600
KXN300
(POS 1)
Characters Per
Marking Area
0.76
19
0.76
19
All Type KX push buttons and pilot lights have a blank insert as
standard. These blank inserts can be custom marked using a
marking pen, a mechanical lettering set, press letters, or a tape
lettering machine that marks a tape which can then be transferred to the blank insert.
K
X
N
2
0
0
V
KXPB, KXTD
(POS 2)
Used On
Letter
Height
3
For Selector Switches
KXSA, KXSB, KXSC, KXSD,
KXSE, KXSF, KXSG, KXSH,
KXSJ, KXSK, KXSL, KXSM,
KXSN, KXSO, KXSP, KXSQ
1⁄ Inch (6 mm)
4
3⁄ Inch (4.75 mm)
16
3⁄ Inch (4.75 mm)
16
3⁄ Inch (4.75 mm)
16
3⁄ Inch (4.75 mm)
16
1⁄ Inch (3 mm)
8
1⁄ Inch (3 mm)
8
KXN100
KXN200
KXN300
KXN400
KXN500
KXN600
KXN700
To have legend inserts installed into the operators, order the
operator as normal and then tell where to install the legend
inserts using the numbered positions shown on the operator
ordered.
Example: 9001KXRL1GRGRH2 with a
9001KXN 401 in pos. 1
9001KXN 503 in pos. 2
9001KXN 504 in pos. 3
9001KXN 402 in pos. 4
KXN700
KXS
118
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Accessories
Lockout for Push Buttons
Shrouds
Holds button in
depressed position
Used On
Type No.
KXRA-KXRC
KXRD-KXRE
KXRF-KXRG
KXRJ-KXRK
KXRL-KXRM
KXRH-KXRB
KXAK4
Used to color code the Type KX operators.
Type
Closing Plate
Used On
Color
Type No.
Full
Shroud
All Push
Buttons
and Pilot
Lights
Gray
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Blue
KXAK41E
KXAK41R
KXAK41G
KXAK41Y
KXAK41B
KXAK41L
Short
Shroud
Any
KX
Operator
Gray
Red
Green
Yellow
Black
Blue
KXAK40E
KXAK40R
KXAK40G
KXAK40Y
KXAK40B
KXAK40L
Type No.
KXAK52
UL Types 4, 13/NEMA Types 4, 13
Square Closing Plate (Chrome Plated)
Same size as KX Bezel
Basic Operators
Description
Boot for Push Buttons and Pilot Lights
Transparent boot used
to exclude harmful
Contaminants
Used On
Type No.
All KX
Push Buttons and
Pilot Lights
KXAKU7
Type
2 pos. maintained
2 pos. spring return from right
2 pos. spring return from left
3 pos. maintained
3 pos. spring return from right
3 pos. spring return from left
3 pos. spring return from both sides
4 pos. maintained
KXSAE
KXSBE
KXSCD
KXSD
KXSE
KXSF
KXSG
KXSHH
Liner
Type No.
Boot For Selector Switches
6508900401
Description
Used On
Knob
Color
Type No.
Wrench
All KX selector
switches and
potentiometer
operators (except
key op.)
Transparent boot with knob used
on selector switches to exclude
harmful contaminants.
Black
Red
Green
Type No.
KXAKU17B
KXAKU17R
KXAKU17G
K95
Used to tighten ring nut on operators.
Lamp and Lens Removal Kit
Potentiometer (With Dial Plate) ①② ▼
Watts
Description
Type No.
Type No.
2
Operator only — Single Pot
Operator with Single Pot
Operator only — Tandem Pot
Operator with Tandem Pot
KXBA
KXBB✻
KXBC
KXBD◆
KXALLRT
✻◆
Complete Type No. by adding suffix No. from table below.
Example: Type KXBB05 or KXBD85
Suffix✻
Ohms
Suffix✻
Ohms
Suffix
✻
01
02
38
03
04
05
32
39
06
33
50
100
200
250
500
1000
1500
2000
3200
3500
07
08
40
09
35
10
36
11
5000
10 K
15 K
25 K
35 K
50 K
75 K
100 K
12
13
37
14
15
16
Ohms
250 K
500 K
750 K
1.1 Meg
2.2 Meg
5.0 Meg
Suffix◆
Ohms
Front
Used to remove lamp and lens on all
illuminated operators and pilot lights.
Rear
Screwdriver
82
83
85
88
89
1000
5000
10 K
50 K
100 K
1000
5000
10 K
50 K
100 K
Type No.
Used to tighten mounting screws on
contact blocks and light modules.
K69
① Dial Plate only – Order Class 9001 Type KXN905.
② Uses same potentiometer as Class 9001 Type K and SK.
▼ Potentiometer shaft diameter = 1/4" (6 mm), length = 7/8" (22 mm)
Not UL Listed, CSA Certified, or CE Marked.
119
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Contact Blocks
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are Fingersafe
contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal
screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the
wiping action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept
up to 2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA3, KA31, and KA33 NC contacts are dirct opening.
Standard Contact Blocks
Description
Symbol
Type
KA1
(Clear Cover)
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:
• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue
connectors
• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep
vs. 0.97" deep on the FINGERSAFE® Contact
Blocks)
• Same as old style Series G product available prior
to 3/89.
• Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
KA2
Symbol
Type
Symbol
Type
(Green Cover)
KA1G
KA4G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA3
KA2G
KA5G
N.C. Contact Late Opening
(Red Cover)
KA3G
KA6G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA4
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact
Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
N.O. Contact
Early Closing
(Clear Cover)
Symbol
N.C. Contact
Late Opening
Type
KA5
KA12
(Red Cover)
KA13
N.O. Contact
Early Closing
KA6
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts
– Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
DC
(Green Cover)
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
Sequencing✻
N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes before
N.O. Contact on KA1
KA4
Overlapping✻
N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes before N.C.
Contact of KA5 Opens
KA4
Volts
KA1
Order One
Type KA4 and
One Type KA1
KA5
Order One
Type KA4 and
One Type KA5
✻ For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or
SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
125
250
600
Make and Break
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA5
KA6
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
.....
.....
1.1
0.55
0.2
10
10
10
AC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)
35% Power Factor
Volts
Make
Symbol
Contact Blocks
With Binder Head Screws
(not Fingersafe)
Gold Flashed Contacts
With Standard
Pressure Wire Terminals
Type
Quantity
Type
KA21
25-Up✻
KA31
KA22
25-Up✻
KA32
KA23
25-Up✻
KA33
KA24
25-Up✻
120
240
480
600
Amperes
VA
Amperes
VA
60
30
15
12
7200
7200
7200
7200
6.0
3.0
1.5
1.2
720
720
720
720
Resistive 75%
Power Factor
Make, Break
Continuous
and
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
Amperes
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
File
CCN
E42259
NKCR
File
Class
LR 25490
3211 03
KA34
N.O. Early
Closing
N.C. Contact
Late Opening
Break
Marking
KA25
✻ Minimum order quantity is 25.
25-Up✻
KA35
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 124
120
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proof equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. It can save money to know what type of hazardous
location exists. If you're not sure what type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification” Chart may help. If
not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you know
what class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the
lower lefthand corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks
Suitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description
Symbol
Type
KA41
KA42
KA43
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class
Division
I. Gas
Group
1. Hazard May Exist
May Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal
Operating Conditions.
KA44
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases
containing Hydrogen
KA45
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential Hazard
A. May be present in
atmosphere only
under abnormal
circumstances.
B. Location adjacent
to Division 1
location.
II. Dust
1. Hazard May Exist
May Exist In Atmosphere Under Normal
Operating Conditions.
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust
(Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity
>102 ohm/cm but ≤108ohm/cm)
III. Fibers
Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and
Storage Areas
Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
For
Class
I
Division
1
Group(s)
A
I
1
B, C, D
I
2
A
I
2
B, C, D
II
1
E, F, G
II
II
III
2
2
1, 2
Maximum Load
Ind.
0.10A
3 VA
•
•
On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M,” mount
reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (either
side), maximum 2 in tandem.
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks
Description
Symbol
2.
1.
2.
E, F
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
G
3.
1.
2.
....
3.
1.
2.
3.
Type
KA51
KA52
KA53
KA54
Use
1.
1.
2.
1.
Cont.
0.5 A
0.5 A
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator is
as indicated for standard contact blocks, except:
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust
(Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
1. Production Areas
Res.
0.25A
8 VA
32/30
120/100
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases
Containing Hydrogen
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust
(Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential Hazard
A. May be present in
atmosphere only
under abnormal
circumstances.
Max. Volts AC/DC
A. Acetylene
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 BR station
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the
restrictions listed in footnote◆
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the
restrictions listed in footnote◆
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 BR station
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the
restrictions listed in footnote◆
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the
restrictions listed in footnote▲
Intrinsically Safe System✻
9001 BR Station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the
restrictions listed in footnote▲
Intrinsically Safe System✻
KA55
Volts
120
240
Volts
115
Make
Amps
10.00
5.00
VA
1200
1200
Make
Amps
0.50
VA
58
AC NEMA Type C300①
Break
Amps
VA
1.000
120
0.500
120
DC NEMA Type Q150
Break
Amps
VA
0.50
58
Continuous
Carrying Amps
3.0
3.0
Continuous
Carrying Amps
3.0
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through
NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.
① Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.
➁ Inductive and Resistive Ratings
✻ An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an intrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous area
to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system, any nonilluminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be used. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light, may be used.
◆ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I,
Division 2 hazardous locations.
1.Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.
2.All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2 areas. ■
3.Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. ■
4.The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
▲ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,
SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For ◆ and ▲: UL Listed: File E10054N, CCN NOIV.
For ■: Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
121
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX
“H” Numbers
Suffix No. (Add to
Operator Type No.)
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
H17
H18
H19
H21
H23
H24
H25
H26
H27
H28
H29
H31
H32
H33
H34
H36
H37
H38
H39
H40
H41
H42
H43
H44
H45
H46
H47
H48
H50
H51
H52
H53
H54
H55
H56
H57
H58
H59
H60
H61
H62
H63
H64
H66
H71
H72
H73
H74
H75
H76
H77
H78
H79
H80
H81
H82
H83
H86
H87
H89
H90
H91
H92
H93
H94
H95
H97
H98
H99
H100
H101
H102
H103
H104
H105
H106
H107
H109
H110
H111
H112
H113
H114
Positions
1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA4
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA4
KA4
KA1
KA2
KA5
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA4
KA1
KA12
KA35
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA31
KA31
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA33
KA1
KA21
2
3
4
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA2
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA5
KA2
KA2
KA4
KA5
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA3
KA5
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA1
KA12
KA33
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA31
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA33
KA1
5
6
The design of the Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks allows
them to be mounted side by side and/or in tandem.
The system illustrated below has been set up to enable an operator and a particular arrangement of contact blocks to be
specified by a single type number. Operators and contact
blocks will be shipped completely assembled.
EXAMPLE: A Type KXRCGR push button with 2 Type KA1 contact blocks would be Class
9001 Type KXRCGRH2.
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
For Type KX
KA4
KA3
KA1
KA5
KA1
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA4
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA4
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA5
KA2
KA13
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA5
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA5
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA3
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA5
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA13
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA5
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA3
1
2
3
4
5
H115
H116
H117
H118
H119
H120
H121
H122
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA5
KA1
KA4
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA1
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA3
H124
H125
H126
H127
H128
H129
H130
H131
H132
H133
H134
H135
H136
H137
H138
H139
H140
H141
H142
H143
H144
H145
H146
H147
H148
H152
H153
H154
H155
H156
H157
H158
H159
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
Positions
Suffix No. (Add
to Operator Type No.)
H161
H162
H163
H164
H165
H166
H167
H168
H170
H171
H172
H173
H174
H175
H176
H177
H178
H179
KA5
KA42
KA43
KA41
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA3
KA45
KA3
KA5
KA44
KA43
KA1
KA3
KA51
KA53
KA53
KA51
KA1
KA53
KA4
KA42
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA52
KA2
K85
K85
KA55
KA22
KA54
KA53
KA23
KA54
KA1
KA6
KA4
KA3
K85
KA53
6
KA5
KA5
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA45
KA3
KA5
KA43
KA1
KA1
K85
KA3
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA5
KA44
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA2
KA44
KA2
KA41
KA5
KA4
KA52
KA51
KA2
KA52
KA5
KA43
KA1
KA2
KA53
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA1
KA1
KA3
KA3
K85
KA5
KA4
KA4
KA22
KA23
KA22
KA51
KA51
KA23
KA51
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA2
KA2
KA2
KA3
KA2
KA4
KA51
KA1
KA5
KA3
KA5
KA4
KA3
KA55
“H” Numbers not shown in their sequence are no longer used.
122
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Application Data, Materials
The Type KX operators are UL and CSA Listed as follows:
Type KX Operator Materials
Single Push Button
File
CCN
E42259
NKCR
File
Class
25490C
3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity,
see page 229.
The KX operators are rated UL Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6, 12, 13/
NEMA Types 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4X, 6, 12, 13 without the use of protective
boots. Boots are recommended for dirty environments or areas
that are hosed down with water under very high pressure.
(KXRA, KXRB, KXRN, KXRP, KXTA)
Gasket – Nitrile
Locking Head – ZAMAC #3
Screws – Steel
Terminals – Steel
Button – Polycarbonate
Seal – Nitrile
Seal Retainer – Steel
Bezel – Zinc
Stem – Polycarbonate
Stem Cover – Polycarbonate
Legend Insert – Polyester
Return-Spring – Music Wire
Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum
Adaptor – Zinc
Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire
Liner – Nylon
Maximum Number of Contact Blocks Per Operator
Mom. Push Button —
Three mounted in tandem
for a total of six.
Maint. Push Button —
Two mounted in tandem
for a total of four.
Selector Switch —
Two mounted in tandem
for a total of four.
Operator Service Temperature Range:
-22 °F to +140 °F at 50% relative humidity
-30 °C to +60 °C
Mounting Hole For Type KX Control Units
Dual Push Button
(Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)
(KXRC, KXRD, KXRE, KXRF, KXRG, KXRH,
KXRJ, KXRK, KXRL, KXRM, KXTC)
Gasket – Nitrile
Seal – Nitrile
Seal Retainer – Brass
Bezel – Zinc
Button Stem – Stainless Steel
Button – Polycarbonate
Button Cover – Polycarbonate
Legend Insert – Polyester
Lamp Cover – Polycarbonate
Lens Retainer – Polycarbonate
Lens – Polycarbonate
Return-Spring – Music Wire
Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum
Adaptor – Zinc
Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire
Liner – Nylon
Retainer Ring – Steel
Interlock Pad – Polyester
Interlock – Sintered Steel
Interlock – Nylon (KXRD)
Pin – Steel (KXRE, KXRF)
Detent Bearing – Steel (KXRE, KXRF)
Detent Spring – Music Wire (KXRE, KXRF)
Interlock – Steel (KXRM)
Baffle – Steel
Locking Head – ZAMAC #3
Screws – Steel
Stem – Polycarbonate
Stem Cover – Polycarbonate
Terminals – Steel
Use Greenlee Tool #60242 for punching mounting hole and notch.
Selector Switch
Selector Switch Angular Travel
(Non-Illuminated and Illuminated)
(KXS)
Gasket – Nitrile
Seal – Nitrile
Seal Retainer – Steel
Return Spring – Music Wire
Cam Rotor – Celenex 3300
Cam Follower – Delrin 100
Cam Carrier – Trogamid
Cam Profile – Delrin 100
Bearing – Polyester
Bezel – Zinc
Knob – Polycarbonate or Nylon
Knob Ring Nut – Polycarbonate
Knob Seal – Nitrile
Legend Plate – ABS
Plug Insert – Polyester
Key Plug – Zinc, Brass, Music Wire
Key – Brass
Locking Head – Zinc
Locking Head Seal – Nitrile
Insert – Zinc
Adaptor – Zinc
Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire
Liner – Nylon
Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum
Terminals – Steel
Screws – Steel
Contact Block Type (KA)
Housing– Amorphous Nylon
Contact Slider– Nylon or Acetal
Terminal– Steel
Saddle Clamp– Steel
Spring– Steel
Contacts– Silver and Copper
Blade– Beryllium Copper
Label– Paper
Shrouds– Delrin 507
Lockout– 410 Stainless Steel
Closing Plate– ZAMAC #3
Boots– Neoprene
Potentiometer (KXBA, KXBB, KXBC, KXBD):
Pot – Clarostat Types J and EJ
Operator – ZAMAC #3
Legend Plate – ABS
Knob – Polycarbonate
Printed circuit board – Phenolic
Cam Rotor – Polyester
Cam – Acetal
Cam Carrier – Nylon
Adaptor – ZAMAC #3
Adaptor Spring – Square Music Wire
Spacer – Fiber Board
Gasket – Buna N
Terminal – Brass
Screws – Steel
Bezel – Zinc
Locking Head – ZAMAC #3
Legend Inserts (KXN100, KXN200, KXN300,
KXN400, KXN500) – .005 Thk. Matte Polyester
Legend Plates (KXN-600, KXN-700) – ABS
Pilot Light
(KXPA, KXPB, KXPC, KXTE)
O-Ring – Nitrile
Bezel – Zinc
Button – Polycarbonate
Button Cover – Polycarbonate
Button Stem – Polycarbonate
Screws – Steel
Terminals – Steel
Lens Assembly – Polycarbonate
Baffle – Steel
Ring Nut – Zinc or Aluminum
Adaptor – Zinc
Adaptor Mounting Clip – Music Wire
Light Module
(Single Lamp KM)
Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester
Socket – Steel
Terminal – Steel with Tin Plate
Saddle Clamp – Steel
Translating Pin – Polycarbonate
Transformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel,
Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride,Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper
Lamp Spring – Tin Plated Music Wire
Light Module
(2 Lamp KXAKM2)
Adaptor Screw – Steel
Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester
Lamp Terminal – Copper
Terminal – Steel
Saddle Clamp – Steel
Contact Spring – Copper
Translating Pin – Polycarbonate
Transformer – Thermoplastic Polyester, Steel,
Copper, Polyvinyl Chloride, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate, Paper
Light Module
(4 Lamp KXAKM4)
Housing – Thermoplastic Polyester
Lamp Terminal – Copper
Adaptor Screw – Steel
Terminal – Steel
Saddle Clamp – Steel
Transformer – Nylon, Steel, Copper, Polyvinyl
Chloride, Polytetrafluoroethylene, Acetate,
Paper
123
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type KX — 30 mm
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions – Consult your local Square D Sales Office for latest version of dimension drawings.
2.82
72
1.07
27
1.47
37
KX RA
KX RN
0.87
22
65075-125
2.82
72
1.85
47
1.28
32
1.47
37
KX SA
KX SB
KX SC
KX SD
0.88
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25
Max.
2
6
1.85
47
KX SE
KX SF
KX SG
KX SH
0.88
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25
Max.
2
6
65075-125
Single Push Button Operator
Non-Illuminated
0.87
22
65075-125
1.07
27
Single Pilot Light
1.47
37
KX SR
KX SS
KX ST
KX SV
0.88
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25
Max.
2
6
KX SW
KX SX
KX SY
KX SZ
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25 Max.
2
6
1.28
32
1.47
37
0.90
23
Dual Lamp Pilot Light
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25 Max.
2
6
3.10
79
1.47
37
side 2
side 1
KX SJ
KX SK
KX SL
KX SM
2.00
51
65075-125
KX SN
KX SO
KX SP
KX SQ
Single Push Button Operator
Illuminated
0.64
16
65075-125
2.00
51
65075-125
Selector Switch Operator
Illuminated
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25 Max.
2
6
1.47
37
0.85
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25
Max.
2
6
65075-125
Key Operator Selector Switch
side 2
side 1
KX RB
KX RP
KX TA
0.87
22
0.88
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25
Max.
2
6
65075-125
2.75
70
1.47
37
1.85
47
2.54
65
Dual Push Button Operator
Non-Illuminated
1.47
37
2.00
51
65075-125
2.82
72
2.82
72
KX RC
KX RD
KX RE
KX RF
0.64
16
Selector Switch Operator
Non-Illuminated
1.85
47
1.47
37
panel thickness
.06
Min.
2
1.47
37
1.47
37
Four Lamp Pilot Light
2.15
55
1.28
32
0.85
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25 Max.
2
6
1.47
37
3.20
81
1.28
32
side 2
side 1
KX RG
KX RH
KX RJ
KX RX
0.87
22
KX BA
KX BB
2.00
51
65075-125
65075-125
Dual Push Button Operator
Illuminated
1.47
37
0.87
22
65075-125
0.85
22
panel thickness
.06 Min. .25
Max.
2
6
Dual Lamp Push Button Operator
panel thickness
.06
Min. .25 Max.
2
6
Double Pot Potentiometer Operator
1.60
41
0.97
25
1.47
37
1.57
40
2.28
58
0.93
24
KX RL
KX RM
KX TC
0.85
22
65075-125
Single Pot Potentiometer Operator
4.69
119
2.75
70
KX BA
KX BB
0.85
22
panel thickness
.06
Min. .25 Max.
2
6
65075-183
Panel Thickness
0.06 Min. 0.25 Max.
2
6
SHROUD
Shroud
1.06
27
65075-183
Boot
1.08
27
65075-183
Lockout
Minimum Centerline Spacings For Type KX
21⁄4" Vertically
15⁄8" Horizontally
124
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type T 30 mm Push Buttons
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type T Foundry Duty Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Type T Foundry Duty Selector Switches and Selector Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Type T Foundry Duty Operators and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Legend Plates and Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
List of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
Foundry Duty Operators
Non-Illuminated Push Button – Legend Plate Not Included
Description
Color Insert
Type
Universal — Includes one of each
color insert — Black, red, green,
yellow, orange, blue and white.
TR50
Black
Red
Green
Blue
TR1
TR2
TR15
TR19
Half
Guard
Full
Guard
Extended
Guard
No
Guard
TR51
Without Guard
Black
Red
TR6
TR7
With
With Red
Green
Color Cap Color
Cap
(Without Guard Shown)
Universal — Includes one of each
color insert — Black, red, green,
yellow, orange, blue and white.
TR52
Black
Red
TR35
TR36
Universal — Includes one of each
color insert — Black, red, green,
yellow, orange, blue and white.
TR53
Black
Red
TR13
TR14
13⁄8" Dia. Black
13⁄8" Dia. Red
21⁄4" Dia. Black
21⁄4" Dia. Red
13⁄8" Dia. Yellow
21⁄4" Dia. Green
No Mushroom Head
TR3
TR4
TR10
TR11
TR22
TR25
TR59
With Guard
With Red
Color Cap
With
Green
Color Cap
Type
Type
Type
Type
Transformer
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
TP35R3
TP37R3
TP39R3
TP40R3
TP35G3
TP37G3
TP39G3
TP40G3
TP41R3
TP43R3
TP45R3
TP46R3
TP41G3
TP43G3
TP45G3
TP46G3
Resistor
120 Vac or dc
240 Vac or dc
TP52R3
TP53R3
TP52G3
TP53G3
TP59R3
TP60R3
TP59G3
TP60G3
Full
Voltage
6 Vac or dc
12 Vac or dc
18 Vac or dc
24-28 Vac or dc
60 Vac or dc
TP47R3
TP48R3
TP49R3
TP50R3
TP63R3
TP47G3
TP48G3
TP49G3
TP50G3
TP63G3
TP54R3
TP55R3
TP56R3
TP57R3
TP68R3
TP54G3
TP55G3
TP56G3
TP57G3
TP68G3
Type T illuminated operators and pilot lights use Type K light modules.
For replacement lamps and VA ratings refer to listing on page 132.
Separate Color Caps
Pilot Lights – Legend Plate Not Included
Plastic Color Caps for
Standard Pilot Lights
Only
Glass Color Caps for
Standard or Push To Test
Pilot Lights
Plastic Color Caps for
Illuminated Push
Buttons
Color
Type
Type
Type
Red
R1
R2
R3
Green
G1
G2
G3
Amber
A1
A2
A3
Blue
B1
B2
B3
Clear
C1
C2
C3
White
W1
W2
W3
Yellow
.....
Y2
.....
Voltage and
Frequency
Standard Pilot Light
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer 208-220
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Voltage and
Frequency
Description
Universal — Includes one of each
color insert — Black, red, green,
yellow, orange, blue and white.
Mushroom
Button
Description
Illuminated Push Button
– Contact Blocks (1 N.O.-1 N.C.) Included; Legend Plate Not Included
Push-To-Test Pilot Light
With Red
Plastic
Color Cap
With Green
Plastic
Color Cap
With Red
Glass
Color Cap
With Green
Glass
Color Cap
Type
Type
Type
Type
TP1R1
TP3R1
TP5R1
TP6R1
TP1G1
TP3G1
TP5G1
TP6G1
TP21R2
TP23R2
TP25R2
TP26R2
TP21G2
TP23G2
TP25G2
TP26G2
Neon
120 Vac or dc
240 Vac or dc
380 Vac or dc
480 Vac or dc
550 Vac or dc
TP7R1
TP8R1
TP9R1
TP10R1
TP11R1
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
Resistor
120 Vac or dc
240 Vac or dc
TP19R1
TP20R1
TP19G1
TP20G1
TP32R2
TP33R2
TP32G2
TP33G2
File
CCN
E42259
NKCR
Full
Voltage
6 Vac or dc
12 Vac or dc
18 Vac or dc
24-28 Vac or dc
60 Vac or dc
120 Vac or dc
TP12R1
TP13R1
TP14R1
TP15R1
TP18R1
TP19R1
TP12G1
TP13G1
TP14G1
TP15G1
TP18G1
TP19G1
TP27R2
TP28R2
TP29R2
TP30R2
TP64R2
TP32R2
TP27G2
TP28G2
TP29G2
TP30G2
TP64G2
TP32G2
File
Class
LR 25490
3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 227.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 130
126
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
Foundry Duty Selector Switches
Selector Switch Operators – Legend Plate and Contact Block Not Included
1 - Contact Closed
Contact Block
Required
Description
3 Position
Center
Quantity
and
Type
Center
4 Position
Center
Center
Center
Mount
on
Side
Left Right
1-KA1
Left Right
Left Right
Left Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
#2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
0 0 1
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
0 0 1
1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
#1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 0 1
1 1 0
1 0 0
0 0 1
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0
1-KA1
Selector Switch
0 - Contact Open
2 Position
A
E
D
B
C
D
E
F
H
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Manual Return
Standard Black Knob
Key Operated
TS1
TS1K✽
......
......
......
......
TS2
TS2K✽
TS3
TS3K✽
TS4
TS4K ✽
TS5
TS5K ✽
TS6
TS6K✽
TS401
Spring Return - Left to Center
Standard Black Knob
Key Operated
......
......
TS14
TS14K2✽
......
......
TS15
TS15K✽
TS16
TS16K ✽
TS17
TS17K✽
TS18
TS18K ✽
TS19
TS19K✽
......
......
Spring Return - Right to Center
Standard Black Knob
Key Operated
......
......
......
......
TS27
TS27K1✽
TS511
TS21K✽
TS521
TS22K ✽
TS531
TS23K ✽
TS541
TS24K ✽
TS551
TS25K✽
......
......
Spring Return - Both Sides to Center
Standard Black Knob
Key Operated
......
......
......
......
......
......
TS8
TS8K5
TS9
TS9K5
TS10
TS10K5
TS11
TS11K5
TS12
TS12K5
......
......
CAM
✽ Key Withdrawal Code: See table below for proper code number. All key operated selector switches are furnished as standard with Square D number NQ1101 key. For replacement key, order
9001NQ1101. No other keys are available.
Key Withdrawal Arrangement For Selector Switches
Positions marked “YES” are those in which the key can be withdrawn, locking the switch in that position.
2-Position Switches
3-Position Switches
No.
No.
No.
1
Yes
No
4
Yes
No
No
8
Yes
No
Yes
2
No
Yes
5
No
Yes
No
9
No
Yes
Yes
3
Yes
Yes
6
No
No
Yes
10
Yes
Yes
Yes
7
Yes
Yes
No
Selector Push Button Operators – Legend Plate And Contact Block Not Included
Two Position Operators
Contact
Blocks
Required
1 — KA1
2 — KA1
1 = Contact Closed
F = Free
0 = Contact Open
D = Depressed
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
F D
1 0
0 1
0 0
1 1
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 0
0 0
1 1
0 0
1 0
0 1
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
1 0
0 1
0 0
1 1
1 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 0
0 0
1 0
0 1
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 1
1 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 1
0 0
1 0
0 1
0 0
1 1
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 0
0 0
1 1
0 0
1 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
1 1
0 0
1 1
0 0
0 0
0 1
Z
Y
R
T
P
S
Half Guard
Black Insert
Cam
TQ1
TQ2
TQ36
TQ26
TQ42
TQ50
Full Guard
Black Insert
TQ11
TQ12
TQ39
TQ48
TQ45
TQ53
Extended Guard
Black Insert
TQ62
TQ56
TQ69
TQ59
TQ71
TQ73
Gloved Hand Knob For Selector Switch
Adapter Kit
Type
Allows a Type T Operator to be mounted in Type K mounting hole.
T7◆
Part Number
3042654250
◆ Fits onto Type TS1 knob.
127
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
Foundry Duty Operators & Accessories
Padlock Attachments
Latch Type
Padlock Attachment
Cover Type
Padlock Attachment
Selector Switch
Padlock Attachment
Latch Type
Padlock Attachment
Type
Type
Type
Type
TL1
TL2
TL3
TL5
Locks button in depressed position. Must be used
with operator having standard half guard. Can be
used with mushroom buttons.
(Padlock not furnished.) Must be used with
operator having standard half guard.
(Padlock not furnished.)
Locks button (with Type TU cap) in depressed
position. Does not include cap.
Maintained Contact Arrangement
Protective Cap
The Type TU1 thru 6 cap will prevent metal shavings and other foreign
matter from interfering with proper operation of oil tight push buttons.
They are for use with the KY, KZ and KYAF enclosures and can be
used with TN legend plates.
Type
Color
Type
Black
Red
Brown
Green
Yellow
TU1
TU2
TU4
TU5
TU6
Watertight Cap
TM1
Use with two Type TR push buttons and one contact block. The contact block should always be
assembled to the “Stop”operator. Not for use on illuminated push buttons.
Alternate Action (Push-on Push-off) Module
This module can be added to standard 9001 Type K, KX, SK or T operators. Contact blocks mounted behind this module (maximum of 2) will
be held in the depressed position when the operator is operated once
and released to their normal position when the operator is operated
again. For a N.C. circuit, use a 9001KA3 or the N.C. contact of a
9001 KA1 or the N.C. contact of a 9001KA4. For a N.O. circuit, use
the N.O. contact of the 9001KA4 or a 9001KA6.
These caps are for use on the Class 9001 Type
KYSS NEMA Type 4 water tight enclosures. To
retain the watertight seal (NEMA Type 4), separately mounted legend plates must be used (not
available from Square D).
Color
For Push
Buttons
Type
Type
Black
Red
Blue
Brown
Green
Yellow
TU11
TU12
TU13
TU14
TU15
TU16
TU51
TU52
TU53
TU54
TU55
TU56
Clear Silicone Cap –
For standard pilot lights
For push to test pilot lights and
illuminated push buttons
For Selector
Sw.
TU17
TU27
Type
K85
Push Button Wrench
Type
T1
Screwdriver
Simplifies installation of Type T units.
Type
Trim Washer
Type
K69
Used to tighten mounting screws on Type K contact blocks
and light modules.
TN5
For use where legend plate is not required. Keeps ringnut from marring panel finish.
Liner
Part Number
310501401
128
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
Foundry Duty Operators
Three Position Master Switches
Correct Drilling For Mounting All Devices
Description
Symbol
3-Position Master Switch,
Complete with Contact Block
Maintained
Contact
Spring Return to Center
103
TS80E2
104◆ TS82D1
3-Position Master
Switch, Without
Contact Block
✶
◆
Type ✶
TS80
These switches are furnished with special contact blocks.
Symbol 104 is same as 103 except contacts A1 and B1 are not furnished.
Basic Operators
Illuminated Push Button
With Full Guard
Less Color Cap And Light
Module
Standard Pilot Light
Less Color Cap And Light
Module
Illuminated Push Button
Without Guard And
Push To Test Pilot Light
Less Color Cap, Light Module
And Contact Block
17⁄32" diameter hole may be cut with Greenlee knockout punch, No. 60246,
available through electrical wholesalers.
Enclosure Minimum Spacings
Type
Type
Type
T1L
TP
T2L
Maintained Push Button With 13⁄8" Mushroom Button
Button locks in the depressed position – Turning knurled ring releases operator to its normal
position. Price includes nameplate: "Push-to-Stop Rotate Collar CW to Start".
Color
Type
Black
Red
Green
Brown
Yellow
Orange
Blue
TRM3
TRM4
TRM20
TRM21
TRM22
TRM23
TRM24
Type TL1 or TL2 padlock attachments can be added to TR-Type operators
without adding to overall dimensions or without interference to other
operators mounted adjacent.
Type TM1 maintained contact device may be installed on two push button
units mounted from 11⁄16" (min.) to 21⁄2" (max.) apart, arranged either vertically or side by side. The contact block should always be assembled to the
operator designated as Stop, Off or Safe.
Time Delay Push Button
Timing period is adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds and begins after push button has
been released. Devices require the space of two standard operators. Devices include a package
of seven color inserts for color coding the push button. Contacts are quick make - quick break.
Type listed is half guard version. Legend plate not included.
Description
Timed
Contact
1 N.O. &
1 N.C.
Type
TRD150
129
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
Legend Plates & Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
All Type T Operators Accept Type KA Blocks. Types KA1 and KA3 N.C.
contacts are direct opening.
Symbol
Type K
Equivalent
Type T
Type
Type
KA1
TA
KA2
TA2
KA3
TA1
Two
Type
KA1
One
Type
TB
Two
Type
KA2
One
Type
TD
Two
Type
KA3
One
Type
TC
Type K
Type T
2 Pole Double Throw For Tandem Mounting
With Type TB Contact Block Only
Symbol
Type
Legend Plates
Standard legend plate markings and special markings are listed in
30mm Push Buttons Types K and SK – order as Type TN2... or TN3...
rather than Type KN. Example: Legend plate marked “Forward,”
order TN206 or TN306.
TN-200
Special Legend Plates
Description
Type
Double
Headed
TN4
Extra large
For customer's
enclosure only. Minimum
spacing between
operators must be 25⁄16"
vertically and 21⁄4" horizontally.
TN6
Maximum Number Of Lines And Characters
For Type TN Legend Plates
Type
TN2
TN3
TN4
TN6
Max. No. of Characters per Line
16
16
16
22
Max. No. of Lines
1
3
2
4
The maximum number of characters and lines given above is a practical maximum and is
based on a minimum size of characters to facilitate easy reading. When fewer characters
than the maximum are required the size of the characters is changed to permit the best readability.
TF
Note: A Special Purpose Block is not required to
mount a Type K Block in tandem.
Contact Block Rating — Maximum AC
Type K and Type T
AC Amperes – NEMA Type A600
Inductive Pilot
Duty
35% Power Factor
Volts
120
240
480
600
Resistive
75%
Power Factor
Make
Break
Continuous
Make, Break,
and
Continuous
60
30
15
12
6
3
1.5
1.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Contact Block Rating – Maximum DC
Volts
120
240
600
Type K
Type T
DC Inductive and Resistive
DC Amperes
Inductive Pilot Duty
Make and Break
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA4
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
....
....
KA5
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
Make
and
Break
Continuous
1.1
0.55
0.2
10
10
10
2.2
....
....
10
....
....
Dimensions
For dimensions of operators, see Approval Drawing Pads 900116, 9001-17, and 9001-18. These can be requested from your
local Square D sales office.
130
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
Light Modules
Standard Light Modules for Type T Control Units ➃
• Neon type light modules — use CLEAR color caps only..
Voltage
2.78 in
70.61 mm
Standard
Duty
Shallow
Depth
For Use
With Single Lamp Ill.
Operators as
Indicated➀
Description
Light
Module
Type No.
Replacement Lamps ➂
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Rating
Lamp
Number
(ANSI)
Lamp Part
Number
6 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
KM31
31
0.9 VA
755
2550101020
12-14 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
KM32
32
1.2 VA
756
2550101037
18 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
KM33
33
1.4 VA
756
2550101037
24-28 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
KM35
35
1.2 VA
757
2550101002
32 Vac-dc
Resistor
All
KM23
23
2.5 VA
757
2550101002
48 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
KM36
36
2.6 VA
48MB
2550101025
60 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
All
KM37
37
3.0 VA
60MB
2550101026
110-120 V, 25-30 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
110-120 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM2
KM1
KMF1
2
1
F1
2.2 VA
2.4 VA
0.85 VA
1490
755
267
2550101003
2550101020
2550101036
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
120 Vac-dc
Resistor
Full Voltage
Neon
All
All
All Except ➁
KM38
KM38
KM11
38
38
11
3.0 VA
3.0 VA
0.2 VA
120MB
120MB
NE51H
2550101027
2550101027
2550101013
208-220 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except ➁
KM3
3
2.5 VA
755
2550101020
220-240 V, 25-30 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
220-240 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
Transformer
Flashing
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
All Except ➁
KM4
KM7
KMF7
4
7
F7
2.2 VA
2.0 VA
2.0 VA
1490
755
267
2550101003
2550101020
2550101036
240 Vac-dc
240 Vac-dc
Resistor
Neon
All Except ➁
All Except ➁ and KX
KM25
KM12
25
12
6.0 VA
0.3 VA
120MB
NE51H
2550101027
2550101013
277 V, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
All Except ➁
KM8
8
2.4 VA
755
2550101020
380 ac-dc
Neon
All Except ➁ and KX
KM13
13
0.4 VA
NE51H
2550101013
380-480 V, 50-60 Hz
480 Vac-dc
Transformer
Neon
All Except ➁
All Except ➁ and KX
KM5
KM14
5
14
2.8 VA
0.5 VA
755
NE51H
2550101020
2550101013
550 Vac-dc
550-600 V, 50-60 Hz
Neon
Transformer
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁
KM15
KM6
15
6
0.6 VA
2.5 VA
NE51H
755
2550101013
2550101020
1.75 in
44.45 mm
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type T Control Units
• Reduces the depth of illuminated push buttons with contact blocks by over 33%.
Voltage
Description
For Use With Single
Lamp Ill. Operators as
Indicated ➃
Light Module
Type No.
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Rating
24-28 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
Full Voltage
All Except ➁ and KX
All Except ➁ and KX
KM55
KM58
55
58
1.2 VA
3.0 VA
Replacement Lamps ➂
Lamp Number
Lamp Part
(ANSI)
Number
757
2550101002
120MB
2550101027
➀ 9001 K, SK, KX.
➁ Do not use on any remote test version pilot light.
➂ For Series A through F light modules – see page 106.
➃ 9001K, SK, T
File
CCN
E42259
NKCR
File
Class
LR 25490
3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
1.87
47.50
1.89
48.01
1.73
43.94
1.87
47.50
Side View
Top View
1.12
28.45
Side View
shown with 9001 KA contact block
131
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type T – 30 mm
List of Materials
Type TR push button
Type TP pilot light
Base — Chrome plated zinc alloy die casting
Ring nut, stem and mushroom knob — Anodised aluminium
Stem on mushroom head type — Stainless steel
Return spring — Stainless steel
Seal washer — Cork/neoprene rubber
Operating disc — Zinc plated steel
Gasket — Buna N rubber
Color inserts — Polyethylene
Spring cup — Brass
Allen screw on mushroom head — Steel alloy with Zinc oxide finish
Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy casting
Ring nut — Aluminium
Reflector — Aluminium
Gasket — Buna N rubber
Lens — Glass in aluminium holder with Buna N rubber seals or
Polycarbonate
Label — Paper
Light module — Type KM as supplied by Square D Ashville
Type TP push to test and illuminated push button
Type TS selector switch
Ring nut, gasket, seal washer, return spring and spring cup
same as Type TR above.
Base and switch knob — Chrome plated zinc alloy die casting
Shaft — Stainless steel
Cam — Zinc alloy
Color inserts — Nylon
Ball Bearing — Stainless steel
Ball bearing spring — Stainless steel
Screw and lock washer — Zinc plated steel
Circlip — Spring steel with black phosphate finish
Guide and spacer — Zinc plated steel (spring return type)
Seal — Buna N rubber (spring return type)
Various pins — Brass or zinc plated steel (spring return type)
Type TSK key operated selector switch
As type TS except as follows:
Lock barrel — Chrome plated zinc alloy die casting
Lock — Zinc alloy, brass tumblers, steel springs & stainless steel cap
Knob — Zinc alloy with aluminium shaft
Lock plate — Brass
Base — Bright zinc plated zinc alloy casting
Ring nut — Aluminium
Operator — Glass filled polyester
Spring support — Zinc plated steel
Gasket — Buna N rubber
Seal — Nitrile rubber
Spring — Stainless steel
Lock ring — Trogamid
Lens — Polycarbonate
Label — Paper
Light module and contact block — Type KM and KA as supplied
by Square D Asheville
Type T contact block
Contact block — Melamine phenolic
Contacts — Silver
Contact backing — Brass
Moving contact — Copper/silver
Operating button — Phenolic
Stem — Brass
Collar — Zinc alloy
Terminal clamps — Zinc plated steel
Screws — Zinc plated steel
Cover — Epoxy/glass laminate
Springs — Stainless steel
132
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
™
Control Bus
Version 2
30 mm Push Button Modules
Class 8330
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Options, Replacement Parts, and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Wiring and LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2
30 mm Push Button Modules
The Class 9001 Dedicated Module for 30mm Push Buttons
provides an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus and
any of the Square D Class 9001 Type K, SK, KX and T push buttons, pilot lights and selector switches (exceptions: 5-position
joy stick and Type KX multi-lamp operators). Single-bit bus interface circuitry is used in this module. If multiplexed operation is
used by the CPU interface card, the push button module is
scanned every frame. This adaptor module is not capable of being multiplexed (See page 9 for details).
Features
• Can be used with any Type K, SK, KX or T push button, pilot
light or selector switch operator (exceptions: 5-position joy
stick operators and Type KX multi-lamp operators)
• Performs control for illuminated and non-illuminated push button operators
• Relay output dedicated modules are for illuminated operators
with a standard Type KM light module
• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power
supply or additional power conductors
• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current
consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater system flexibility
• LED indicators provided on all modules showing power-on
status, input status and output status – a convenient installation and troubleshooting aide
• Modules use quick and easy IDC panel cabling including preterminated cable (Catalog #CBL2222P38C05L20)
Assembly and
Dimensions
K, SK & T
KX
KM
Dedicated Modules for Non-illuminated Operators
Catalog Number
Input Type Address A
Input Type Address B
Output Type
9001KA61
N.C.
N.O.
none
9001KA62
—
N.O.
none
9001KA63
N.C.
—
none
Dedicated Modules for Illuminated Operators Using a Class 9001
Type KM Light Module
Input Type
Address A
Catalog Number
Input Type
Address B
9001KA60KM
—
—
Electromechanical Relay ◆
9001KA61KM
N.C.
N.O.
Electromechanical Relay ◆
9001KA62KM
—
N.O.
Electromechanical Relay ◆
9001KA63KM
N.C.
—
Electromechanical Relay ◆
◆ See page 135 for general purpose ratings.
Dedicated Modules Using Bus Powered LED Lamps for Illuminated
Operators
Input Type
Address A
Catalog Number
Output Type
Address B
9001KM350BPA
—
—
LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM350BPG
—
—
LED Lamp - Green
9001KM350BPR
—
—
LED Lamp - Red
9001KM351BPA
N.C.
N.O.
LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM351BPG
N.C.
N.O.
LED Lamp - Green
9001KM351BPR
N.C.
N.O.
LED Lamp - Red
9001KM352BPA
—
N.O.
LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM352BPG
—
N.O.
LED Lamp - Green
9001KM352BPR
—
N.O.
LED Lamp - Red
9001KM353BPA
N.C.
—
LED Lamp - Amber
9001KM353BPG
N.C.
—
LED Lamp - Green
9001KM353BPR
N.C.
—
LED Lamp - Red
1.2 N•m
(11 lb-in)
Class 9001 Operator Type
KS42
KS43
KS44
KS11
KS25
KS46
KS88
B
C
D
E
F
H
X
Address A (N.C.)
xoo
xoo
oox
xo
xoo
xooo
oxxo
Address B (N.O.)
oxo
oox
oxo
ox
oox
oxoo
ooxx
KM35•BP
Cam Type
Knob Position
KA
INSTALL
LINER
0°
K, SK & T
Contacts Closed = x
Contacts Open = o
270°
1.6
41 2
.1
KA6•
90°
2.16
54.9
in
mm
Input Type
Address B
Selector Switch Logic Table
(Operators only. Select 2-input modules from table above.)
KA6•KM
0
1.5 1
.
38
Output Type
Address B
180°
With
insulation
displacement
connector
INSTALL
LINER
For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.
134
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2
30 mm Push Button Modules
Options, Replacement Parts and Accessories
Catalog Number
SPX30MMXCAM
Description
4-position selector switch cam for use with SERIPLEX modules for 30mm operators
SPXLEDA1
Replacement LED Lamp – amber
SPXLEDG1
Replacement LED Lamp – green
SPXLEDR1
Replacement LED Lamp – red
SPXUSER2
Replacement user label (has marking surface for addresses and control words). Quantity 10.
9001KXALLRT
Lamp Removal Tool
add a ‘T’ to the end of a catalog number ✻
Conformal coating. Increases Micro-Environmental Category rating from MEC pollution degree II to MEC pollution degree
III, as outlined in IEC 664-1, section 2.5.1. Conformal coating meets MIL-I-46058C.
✻ Example: To order conformal coating for catalog number 9001KA61, change to 9001KA61T.
Specifications
SERIPLEX bus power requirements:
Nominal voltage rating
Power supply voltage range at 25 °C
24 Vdc
19.2 to 30 Vdc including ripple
Bus power supply current drain
(25 °C, 24 Vdc)
no relay output:
relay output:
bus powered LED lamp:
7 mA typical
16 mA typical
18 mA typical
Worst case bus power supply current drain
(-25 °C, 30 Vdc)
no relay output:
relay output:
bus powered LED lamp:
8 mA
24 mA
24 mA
Module capacitance
75 pF typical
Bus clock frequency operating range
10 kHz to 200 kHz
Operating temperature
-25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Storage Temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Relative Humidity
5 to 95%, non-condensing
Electromechanical Relay Rating (UL)
250 Vac, 30 Vdc, 2.5 A resistive pilot duty: AC - 180 VA, DC - 15 VA, C300
Micro-environmental category
II (per IEC664-1, Section 2.5.1)
Shock (IEC 68-2-27)
30 g, 3 axes, 11 ms duration, half sine pulse
Vibration (IEC 68-2-6)
10 to 55 Hz, 1 mm peak-to-peak, 2 hour in 3 axes
Noise immunity:
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI)
Fast transients
Impulse
IEC801-2
IEC801-3
IEC801-4
IEC255-4
Compliance standards
UL File E114926, CSA File LR53531 (submitted), NOM-117
Screw terminal block specifications (relay versions only)
conductor capacity
single conductor: UL 14 - 22 AWG, CSA 14 - 26 AWG
two conductors: 18 AWG - 28 AWG
0.4 N•m (3.5 lb-in)
0.8 N•m (7.0 lb-in)
7 mm (0.3 in.)
Screw terminal torque
Fracture torque◆
Wire strip length
Maximum allowable standard contact blocks mounted on a SERIPLEX dedicated module One Contact Block (Class 9001 Type KA1 through Class 9001 Type KA6)
◆ The fracture torque leads to damage of the screw shaft, stripping of the thread or deformation of the screw slot.
Wiring and LED Indicators
Locating notch on
Operator for selector
switch applications
Actuating stem for input address B (N.O.)
Actuating stem for input address A (N.C.)
File E114921
CCN NRAQ
®
Bus cable connection
Part #SPX 5IDC22, reference
Bulletin #30298-050-01 for installation
Relay (output B)
File LR 53531
Class 2252 01
white (data)
blue (clock)
Field
Supply
red (V+)
S
black (common)
L
bare (sheild drain)
L=Class 9001
Type KM
Light Module
LED Indicators
OB
P
IB
IA
LED
IA
IB
P
OB
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Color
yellow
yellow
green
yellow
Function and Address
Input A Active
Input B Active
Bus Power Applied
Output B Active
135
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2
Modified Panels by Square D
Square D offers specialized control packages through the Modified Panels
Group. Assemblies can be manufactured to meet your specific design criteria,
incorporating special dimensions, enclosure types, and component makeup.
Specific control operator needs can be satisfied with products ranging from
standard 30 mm push buttons to printed circuit board mounted pilot
device assemblies.
In addition, Square D offers the widest variety of control products in
numerous enclosure types to meet your electrical, environmental, and
dimensional needs. Use of CAD designs, prototype assembly before
production, and personalized service insures the product you receive will
be exactly what you ordered...Guaranteed.
For additional information or receive a personalized proposal, contact
your local Square D sales office.
136
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type B and 30 mm Control Stations
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
Type B Standard Duty Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Accessories and Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Type B Standard Duty Control Stations Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Type K, SK, and KX Industrial Duty Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Type K and Sk Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Type K, SK, KX, and T Flush Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Type K and SK Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Type KY and KZC Security Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Type K, SK, KX, and T Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Hazardous Location Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations
Standard duty control stations are designed for use with magnetic motor starters to govern the starting, stopping, or reversing of all types of electric
motors. Push buttons are momentary contact unless otherwise indicated. Selector switches are maintained contact.
NEMA Type 1
Surface Mounting
Type BG201
NEMA Type 1
Flush Mounting
(w/o pullbox)
Type BF201
NEMA Type 4
Type BW243
NEMA Types 7-9
Type BR103
Control Stations
Many items are stock or can be furnished as a quick ship using a “Universal” station plus accessories.
No.
of
Units
1
2
3
Surface Mounting
NEMA Type 1 t
Stainless Steel
Flush Plate
(Pullbox k not
included) t
Watertight and
Dusttight
NEMA Type 4 t
For Hazardous
Locations
Class I, Div. I & II
Groups B, C and D
Class II Div. I & II
Groups E, F and G
NEMA Types 7 & 9 t
Nameplate Markings and Features
Contact Symbol
See page 141
Type
Type
Type
Type
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
3
3
3
16
BG101
BG102
BG103
BG104
BG107
BF101
BF102
.....
.....
BF107
BW146
BW147
BW151
BW148
BW159
BR101
.....
BR103
BR104
BR107
Off-on (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Selector Switch (w/o Legend Insert) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
17
19 or 17
BG111
BG112
BG114
BF111
BF112
BF114
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Green Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Light (w/o Lens): 120 Vac or dc q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
121
121
BG121
BG122
BG123
BF121
BF122
BF123
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Mushroom on Start and Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raise-Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Auto (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Red Mushroom on Stop, Both Buttons Maintained). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal (Maintained Contact w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
146
145
145
145
146
146
146
146
145
146
25
10
10
10
10
10
BG201
BG202
BG203
BG204
BG205
BG206
BG207
BG208
BG209
BG210
BG211
BG214
BG215
BG216
BG217
.....
BG218
BF201
BF202
.....
.....
.....
BF206
BF207
BF208
BF209
BF210
BF211
BF214
BF215
BF216
BF217
.....
BF218
BW240
BW252
BW250
BW241
BW246
BW242
BW244
BW243
BW253
BW245
BW254
BW260
BW255
BW256
BW257
.....
BW258
BR204
BR202
BR203
BR204
BR205
BR206
BR207
BR208
BR209
BR210
BR211
BR214
BR215
BR216
BR217
BR219
BR218
Off-On (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), Red P.L.: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Selector Switch & Pilot Light 120 Vac
or dc (w/o Legend Insert & w/o Lens) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 & 121
17 & 121
BG221
BG223
BF221
BF223
17 or 19& 121
BG224
BF224
Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch) & Start (Push Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Selector Switch & Push Button
(w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 & 1
BG225
BF225
17 or 19& 16
BG226
BF226
Fast-Slow-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raise-Lower-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Low-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
109
8
BG301
BG302
BG303
BG304
BG305
BG306
BG316
BG322
BG325
BG326
BG307
BF301
BF302
BF303
BF304
BF305
BF306
.....
.....
.....
.....
BF307
Start-Stop, Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Push Buttons (2) & Pilot Light: 120 Vac
or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Maintained Contacts) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . .
On-Off (Maintained Contact) & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Auto (Maintained Contacts), & Red Pilot Light: 120 Vac or dc . . . . . .
Universal Push Buttons (Maintained Contact) & Pilot Light:
120 Vac or DC (w/o Legend Inserts & w/o Lens) q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Off-Auto (Selector Switch), & Start-Stop (Push Buttons) . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Selector Switch & 2 Push Buttons (w/o Legend Inserts) q . . . . .
145 & 121
BG308
BF308
25 & 121
10 & 121
10 & 121
10 & 121
BG309
BG310
BG311
BG312
BF309
BF310
BF311
BF312
10 & 121
17 & 145
17 or 19 & 25
BG313
BG314
BG315
BF313
BF314
BF315
q “Universal” designates control stations
without legend inserts, lenses or
accessory kits. Universal stations plus
separate legend inserts and other accessories listed on page 139 allow the user to
conveniently build up standard or custom
stations.
k Use standard 2.0 or 2.13 inch deep wall
boxes, single gang for Types BF1 – and
BF2 – and two gang for Type BF3 –.
t For replacement interiors, see page 140.
Replacement enclosures (case and/or
cover) are not available for Type BR
devices.
Lockout must be factory installed on
NEMA Type 4 devices. However, replacement covers are available with the lockout
feature as standard. See page 139.
File E42259
CCN NKCR
Marking
File LR 25490
Class 3211 03
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 139
Replacement Parts. . . . Page 139-140
Replacement Interiors . . . . Page 140
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 141
Contact Symbols . . . . . . . . Page 141
138
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations
Accessories and Legends
Mushroom Caps – Kits do not include legend
insert; order separate legend insert from the
tables below.
EX: For red mushroom button marked STOP,
order one 9001 Type B301 plus one 9001
Type B102.
Color
Type
Replacement Covers for BF and BW
For NEMA TYPE 1 surface mounting stations
Red
B301
Black
B302
Red
B303
For Types
For NEMA Type 4
Lockout Kit – For NEMA Type 1 surface
mounting stations, bottom unit only. Can be
used on either push button or on 2 or 3
position selector switch. Lockout cannot be
used with mushroom cap.
Types
BF101-BF123
BF201-BF226
BF301-BF315
BW146-BW147
BW148 t
BW149-BW159
BW240
BW241t
BW242-BW260
t
3040000311
3040000302
3110104301
BWD108
BWD109
BWD108
BWD219
BWD220
BWD219
Replacement cover has lockout factory installed on cover.
Selector Switch Knob for Types BG & BF Selector Switches
Sylvania
Lamp No.
120PSB
Type
B321
Replacement Lamp
Pilot Light Lenses
For NEMA Type 1
Surface Mounting
For NEMA Type 1
Flush Mounting
Type
Type
Red
B331
B341
Green
B332
B342
Color
Sylvania
Lamp No.
Square D
Part No.
120PSB
2550105005
Replacement Lamp Holder
Type
BGC124
Interchangeable Selector Switch Legend Plates
Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts
Marking
For
NEMA Type 1
Surface
Mounting
Push Button
& Mushroom
Caps
Start
Stop
Fast
Slow
Forward
Reverse
Open
Close
Raise
Lower
Up
Down
High
Low
On
Off
Hand
Auto
Jog
Blank-Black
Blank-Red
For
NEMA Type 1
Flush
Mounting
For NEMA
Type 4 and
NEMA
Types 7-9
Lever Type
Square
For NEMA
Type 4
Button
Type
Round
Mushroom
Button Inserts
For NEMA
Type 4
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
B101
B102
B103
B104
B105
B106
B107
B108
B109
B110
B111
B112
B113
B114
B115
B116
B117
B118
B119
B129
B129R
B131
B132
B133
B134
B135
B136
B137
B138
B139
B140
B141
B142
B143
B144
B145
B146
B147
B148
B149
B159
B159R
B161
B162
B163
B164
B165
B166
B167
B168
B169
B170
B171
B172
B173
B174
B175
B176
B177
B178
B179
B189
B189R
B259
B260
....
....
B255
B256
B263
B264
B261
B262
B253
B254
....
....
B257
B258
B265
B266
....
B251
B252
B282
B283
....
....
B278
B279
B286
B287
B284
B285
B276
B277
....
....
B280
B281
B288
B289
....
B251
B252
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
For NEMA Type 1
Surface Mounting
Marking
Off-On
Hand-Off-Auto
Manual-Auto
Foward-Reverse
Open-Close
Open-Off-Close
Hand-Auto
Forward-Off-Reverse
Summer-Winter
Summer-Off-Winter
Low-Off-High
Up-Off-Down
For NEMA Type 1
Flush Mounting
Type
Type
B201
B202
B203
B204
B205
B206
B207
B208
B209
B210
B211
B212
B231
B232
B233
B234
B235
B236
B237
B238
B239
B240
B241
B242
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
Legend Insert Kits
(Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts as indicated below, Type
No. of kit.)
Where Used:
Type
Push Buttons
B100 (Incl's 1 each
of B101 thru B119)
Selector Switches
B200 (Incl's 1 each
of B201 thru B212)
Push Buttons
B130 (Incl's 1 each
of B131 thru B149)
Selector Switches
B230 (Incl's 1 each
of B231 thru B242)
For NEMA Type 4 and
NEMA Type 7-9 Lever
Type, Square
Push Button
B160 (Incl's 1 each
of B161 thru B179)
For NEMA Type 4
Button Type, Round
Push Button
B250 (Incl's 1 each
of B253 thru B266)
For NEMA Type 4
Button Type
Mushroom Button
B300 (Incl's 1 each
of B276 thru B289)
For NEMA Type 1
Surface Mounting
For NEMA Type 1
Flush Mounting
139
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations
Replacement Parts
BOC361
Type BGC214
Type BGB214
(Type BGC contact block
assemblies include cover.)
Replacement Interiors For Type B Standard Duty Push Button Stations
For Control Station
Types
Contact Block Assembly▲
Type
Contact Symbol
Terminal Block Wiring Receptacle
Type
BF101—BF107
16
BOC107
BFB107
BF111—BF114
19 or 17
BOC114
BFB114
BF121—BF123
121
BOC123
BFB123
BF201—BF214
25
BOC214
BFB214
BF215—BF218
10
BOC218
BFB214
BF221—BF224
7 or 19 & 121
BOC224
BFB224
BF225—BF226
17 or 19 & 16
BOC226
BFB226
BF301—BF307
8
BOC214 & BOC107
BFB214 & BFB107
BF308—BF309
25 & 121
BOC214 & BOC123
BFB214 & BFB123
BF310—BF313
10 & 121
BOC218 & BOC123
BFB214 & BFB123
BF314—BF315
17 or 19 & 25
BOC214 & BOC114
BFB214 & BFB114
BG101—BG107
16
BGC107
BGB107
BG111—BG114
17 or 19
BGC114
BGB114
BG121—BG123
121
BGC123
BGB123
BG201—BG214
25
BGC214
BGB214
BG215—BG218
10
BGC218
BGB214
BG221—BG224
17 or 19 & 121
BGC224
BGB224
BG225—BG226
17 or 19 & 16
BGC226
BGB226
BG301—BG307
BG316—BG326
8
BGC307
BGB307
BG308—BG309
25 & 121
BGC309
BGB309
BG310—BG313
10 & 121
BGC313
BGB309
BG314—BG315
17 or 19 & 25
BGC315
BGB315
BR101—BR107
16
BOC107
BFB107
BR202—BR214
25
BOC214
BFB214
BR215—BR219
10
BOC218
BFB214
BW101—BW107
16
BOC107
BFB107
BW202—BW214
25
BOC214
BFB214
BW215—BW218
10
BOC218
BFB214
BW146—BW159
16
BOC360
BW240—BW260
25
BOC361
BW255—BW258
10
BOC362
“C” Shaped Mounting Bracket
for 9001 BR Interior
Note: Contact block assemblies for all Type BG stations include cover and contact block.
Replacement contact block assemblies and terminal block wiring receptacles for push buttons have provision for 1 N.O. & 1
N.C. circuit on each button. Unneeded circuits need not be wired.
q
Order separate legend plates, if required, from listing on page 139.
3110112001
Electrical Contact Ratings
AC – NEMA Type B600
DC – NEMA Type P600
Inductive
35% Power Factor
Volts
120
240
480
600
Make
Resistive
75% Power Factor
Break
Amps
VA
Amps
VA
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
30.5
15
7.5
6
3600
3600
3600
3600
3.75
1.5
0.75
0.6
360
360
360
360
5
5
5
5
Inductive and Resistive
Make, Break
and Continuous
Carrying Amperes
Volts
Make and
Break
Amperes
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
5
5
5
5
120
240
600
1.1
0.55
0.2
5
5
5
140
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type B — Standard Duty Control Stations
Dimensions
Contact Symbols
120 V
Com
121
17
1
3
25
19
16
10
8
145
109
146
Approximate Dimensions
Hazardous Location
Surface Mount
Type BR
Type BG
Cast Aluminum Enclosure
Glass Filled Polyester Cover
0.45
12
0.47
12
1.37
35
2.76
3.69
94
70
4.09
5.00
104
127
3.95
100
0.30
8 2X
4.35
110
6.36
162
ON
OFF
0.34
9
0.72
0.48
18
12
1.38
60
(2)
35
0.19
5
0.34
9
Dia Mtg Holes
0.72
0.48
16
12
1.38
35
2.06
1.03 52
26
0.17
4
2.06
1.03 52
26
(2)
2.19
56
C 30064-834
K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond.
both ends
2.34
60
0.19
5
0.28
O 7
conduit centerline
2X 0 0.31 Mtg Holes
8
Dia Mtg Holes
1.37
35
Padlock Hole
1/2-14 NPT Pipe Tap
Bottom Only
0.70
18
1.19
30
0.17
4
2.53
64
0.88
22
5.75
146
2.34
0.88
22
2.41 with
61 mushroom button
C 30052-834
K.O. for 1/2-3/4 cond.
both ends
Watertight & Dusttight
Flush Mount
Type BF
Type BW
Stainless Steel
Cast Zinc Enclosure
3.28
83
2.76
70
2.25
57
.218 Dia.
Mtg. Hole
(2) Plcs.
0.61
15
4.50
114
3.75
95
4.25
108
1.63
41
1.81
46
2.28
58
4.56
116
2.13
54
1.38
35
.38
10
0.16
(4)
Dia Mtg Holes
4
1.38
35
C 30064-835A
2.25
57
B 65075-060
3.38
86
141
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Industrial Duty Enclosures
Enclosures Only (For Customer Assembly)
UL Types 1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13
No. of Units
1
2
3
4
6
9
12
16
20
25
30
UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ➀
UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13
NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 ➀
Surface Mounting
Flush Mounting
without Pullbox ➂ ➃
Surface Mounting
Sheet Steel
Cast Zinc
Die Cast Aluminum ➃
Stainless Steel (304) ➄
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
KYAF1
KYAF2
KYAF3
KYAF4
KYAF6
KYAF9
KYAF12
KYAF16
KYAF20
KYAF25
KYAF30
KZ11
KZ21➁
KZ31➁
KZ41➁
KZ6
KZ9
KZ12
KZ16
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
KY1
KY2➁
KY3➁
KY4➁
KY6
KY9
KY12
KY16
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
KYSS1
KYSS2
KYSS3
KYSS4
KYSS6
KYSS9
KYSS12
KYSS16
KYSS20
KYSS25
KYSS30
SKY1
SKY2
SKY3
SKY4
SKY6
SKY9
SKY12
SKY16
SKY20
SKY25
Not Avail.
Surface Mounting
Polymeric (Plastic)
➀ Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.
➁ Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
➂ For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.
➃ Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.
➄ Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.
Custom Built Control Stations
The catalog numbers shown include the enclosure only. A complete assembled control station is the enclosure plus all control units to be installed. Orders
must be accompanied with a key sheet (M-7687)➅ or sketch showing all control units in their desired locations. Specify the marking on the
nameplates for the enclosure. The standard nameplate size is 1.69" (43 mm) by 0.5" (13 mm) inches. It has a black field with white letters. For nameplates other than our standard, contact your local Square D Sales Office. There is an additional charge to move or add an additional conduit hole or change
the diameter of the conduit.
Example: Add a 1 inch conduit to the top (nonstandard location) of a KY6 enclosure and increase the bottom conduit from 3/4" to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm).
There would be an additionall charge for the top conduit and the bottom conduit. If 20 or more identical stations are ordered at one time, there is no additional charge.
UL Types1, 3 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3 and 13
No. of Units
1
2
3
4
6
9
12
16
20
25
30
UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13
NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ➀
UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13 (1)
Surface Mounting
Flush Mounting
without Pullbox ➂ ➃
Surface Mounting
Sheet Steel
Cast Zinc
Die Cast Aluminum ➃
Stainless Steel (304) ➄
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
KYAF100
KYAF200
KYAF300
KYAF400
KYAF600
KYAF900
KYAF1200
KYAF1600
KYAF2000
KYAF2500
KYAF3000
KZ110
KZ210➁
KZ310➁
KZ410➁
KZ60
KZ90
KZ120
KZ160
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
KY10
KY20➁
KY30➁
KY40➁
KY60
KY90
KY120
KY160
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
Not Avail.
KYSS100
KYSS200
KYSS300
KYSS400
KYSS600
KYSS900
KYSS1200
KYSS1600
KYSS2000
KYSS2500
KYSS3000
SKY100
SKY200
SKY300
SKY400
SKY600
SKY900
SKY1200
SKY1600
SKY2000
SKY2500
Not Avail.
Surface Mounting
Polymeric (Plastic)
➀ Type K Series A through Series G operators were rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 12, and 13. Type K Series H operators are rated UL Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, and 13.
➁ Only KN200 series legend plates will fit upright on these enclosures with their long axis vertical.
➂ For machine cavity mounting. Pull box not available.
➃ Type KN1, KN6 and KN7 a series of legend plates will not fit on these enclosures.
➄ Standard Type KYSS enclosures are supplied with Type 304 stainless steel — Use Form Y35 and order by description — contact your local Square D sales office.
➅ For a copy of M-7687 keysheet, reference D-Fax  #1143 or see pages 148-149.
Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147
Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149
142
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Control Stations
Type KZ310
Type KY30
Type KYAF900
Type KYSS300
Type SKY200
Control Stations
Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks in tandem (total of four blocks) on non-illuminated operators
and two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators.
Assembled Control Stations – UL Types 1, 3, 4 and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ▲
Die Cast Aluminum Enclosures
No of
Units
1
2
3
Legend Plate Marking
And Features
Type
Consists Of
Contact Blocks
Legend Plates
Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jog-Run (Selector Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-On (Sel. Sw). (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK111
KYK121 ◆
KYK18
KYK110
KYK122 ◆
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1
KS43B
KS43B
KS11B
KS11B
KS11B
KA1
KA51
KA1
KA1
KA51
KN260
KN260
KN242
KN244
KN244
Red 120 Vac Pilot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start (Mushroom Button). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (Mushroom Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK120 ◆
KYK11
KYK125 ◆
KYK12
KYK13
KYK14
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1
KP1R31
KR1B
KR1B
KR4B
KR1R
KR4R
...
KA1
KA51
KA1
KA1
KA1
...
KN201
KN201
KN201
KN202
KN202
Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop Mushroom (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Stop - Break Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Stop - Break Glass (Red Enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK15
KYK124 ◆
KYK123 ◆
KYK116
KYK117
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1
KY1S1
KR3R,K4
KR3R,K4
KR4R,K4
K15
K15
KA1
KA51
KA51
KA1
KA1
KN202
KN202
KN202
KN799RP
KN799RP
Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jog-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK24
KYK224
KYK218
KYK222 ◆
KYK221
KYK26
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KR1B,KR1B
KR1B,KR3R,K4
KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR3R
KR11GR
KR1B,KR1B
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51
KA1
KA1,KA1
KN206,KN207
KN218,KN202
KN203,KN204
KN203,KN204
KN203,KN204
KN209,KN208
Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (Mushroom on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK21
KYK223 ◆
KYK23
KYK27
KYK220 ◆
KYK22
KYK25
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KY2
KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR3R,K4
KR11GR
KR11GR
KR1B,KR4R
KR1B,KR1B
KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1
KA1
KA51
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1
KN201,KN202
KN201,KN202
KN201,KN202
KN201,KN202
KN201,KN202
KN201,KN202
KN211,KN210
Forward-Reverse-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and
Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYK35
KYK31
KYK326
KY3
KY3
KY3
KS11B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KA1,KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1
KN239,KN201,KN202
KN206,KN207,KN202
KN206,KN207,KN202
KYK322 ◆
KYK34
KY3
KY3
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KA51,KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1,KA1
KN206,KN207,KN202
KN214,KN215,KN202
KYK36
KYK33
KYK327
KY3
KY3
KY3
KS11B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KA1,KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1
KN242,KN201,KN202
KN209,KN208,KN202
KN209,KN208,KN202
KYK323 ◆
KYK317
KY3
KY3
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KP1R31,KR1B,KR3R
KA51,KA51,KA51
KA2,KA3
KN209,KN208,KN202
KN200,KN201,KN202
KYK321 ◆
KYK324
KYK32
KYK325
KY3
KY3
KY3
KY3
KP1R31,KR1B,KR3R
KP38R31,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1,KA1
KN200,KN201,KN202
KN200,KN201,KN202
KN211,KN210,KN202
KN211,KN210,KN202
KYK328 ◆
KY3
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R,K4
KA51,KA51,KA51
KN211,KN210,KN202
Jog/Run-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close-Stop (With Seated Contacts and
Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Red 120 Vac Pilot Light-Start-Stop
(With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Red 120 Vac/dc Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts and
Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosure
Operators
▲ Control stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
◆ Control station consists of components that are UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D.
Standard Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 143-144
Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 142
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 146-147
Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 148-149
143
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Control Stations
Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4 and 13 ◆
No. of
Units
Legend Plate Marking
And Features
Type
1
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
Consists Of
Enclosure
Operators
Contact Blocks
Legend Plates
KYSS101
KYSS103
KYSS105
KYSS110
KYSS111
KYSS1
KYSS1
KYSS1
KYSS1
KYSS1
KR1B
KR3R
KR3R with K5
KS11B
KS43B
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KN201
KN202
KN202
KN244
KN260
Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSS201
KYSS203
KYSS205
KYSS210
KYSS2
KYSS2
KYSS2
KYSS2
KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR3R with K5
KR1B,KR1B
KR11U
KA1,KA3
KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1
KN201,KN202
KN201,KN202
KN211,KN210
KN201,KN202
Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSS301
KYSS302
KYSS303
KYSS304
KYSS308
KYSS309
KYSS310
KYSS311
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5
KR1B,KR1B,KR3R w/K5
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KN206,KN207,KN202
KN211,KN210,KN202
KN209,KN208,KN202
KN214,KN215,KN202
KN206,KN207,KN202
KN211,KN210,KN202
KN209,KN208,KN202
KN214,KN215,KN202
◆ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13 ✻
No. of
Units
Legend Plate Marking
And Features
Type
1
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off/On (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hand/Off/Auto (Selector Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
Consists Of
Enclosures
Operators
Contact Blocks
Legend Plates
KYSK101
KYSK103
KYSK105
KYSK110
KYSK111
KYSS1
KYSS1
KYSS1
KYSS1
KYSS1
SKR1B
SKR3R
SKR3R with K5
SKS11B
SKS43B
KA1
KA3
KA3
KA1
KA1
KN101WP
KN102RP
KN102RP
KN144WP
KN160WP
Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start/Stop (Maintained Contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSK201
KYSK203
KYSK205
KYSK210
KYSS2
KYSS2
KYSS2
KYSS2
SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR3R with K5
SKR1B,SKR1B
SKR11U
KA1,KA3
KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA1
KN101WP,KN102RP
KN101WP,KN102WP
KN111WP,KN110WP
KN101WP,KN102WP
Forward/Reverse/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open/Close/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward/Reverse/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . .
Up/Down/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open/Close/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low/Stop (Lockout on Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KYSK301
KYSK302
KYSK303
KYSK304
KYSK308
KYSK309
KYSK310
KYSK311
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
KYSS3
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R w/K5
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP
KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP
KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP
KN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP
KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP
KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP
KN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP
✻ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
Assembled Control Stations - UL Types 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13/NEMA Types 1, 3, 4, 4X, and 13▲
No. of
Units
Legend Plate Marking
And Features
Type
1
Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . .
Hand-Off-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Man-Auto (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-On (Sel. Sw. with Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-On (Sel. Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consists Of
Enclosure
Operators
Contact Blocks
Legend Plates
SKY121■
SKY111
SKY107
SKY108
SKY122 ■
SKY110
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKS43B
SKS43B
SKR1B
SKS11B
SKS11B
SKS11B
KA51
KA1
KA1
KA1
KA51
KN160WP
KN160WP
KN118WP
KN143WP
KN144WP
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start (With Sealed Contacts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (With Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop (With Sealed Contacts and Lockout) . . . . . . . . .
SKY101
SKY125 ■
SKY103
SKY105
SKY124 ■
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKY1
SKR1B
SKR1B
SKR3R
SKR3R,K5
SKR3R,K5
KA1
KA1
KA51
KA3
KA3
KA51
KN144WP
KN101WP
KN101WP
KN102RP
KN102RP
KN102RP
Forward-Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKY204
SKY222 ■
SKY206
SKY201
SKY2
SKY2
SKY2
SKY2
SKR1B,SKR1B
SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B
SKR1B,SKR3R
KA1,KA1
KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1
KA1,KA3
KN106WP,KN107WP
KN103WP,KN104RP
KN109WP,KN108WP
KN101WP,KN102RP
Start-Stop (Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Stop (With Maintained Sealed Contacts). . . . . .
Start-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SKY203
SKY220 ■
SKY223 ■
SKY205
SKY2
SKY2
SKY2
SKY2
SKR1B,SKR1R,K5
SKR11GR
SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B
KA1,KA3
KA51
KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1
KN101WP,KN102RP
KN101WP,KN102RP
KN101WP,KN102RP
KN111WP,KN110WP
Forward-Reverse-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward-Reverse-Stop (With Sealed Contacts
and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Low-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close-Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open-Close-Stop (With Sealed Contacts) . . . . . . . . .
SKY301
SKY3
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
KA1,KA1,KA3
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP
SKY322 ■
SKY304
SKY303
SKY323 ■
SKY3
SKY3
SKY3
SKY3
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
KA51,KA51,KA51
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA51,KA51,KA51
KN106WP,KN107WP,KN102RP
KN114WP,KN115WP,KN102RP
KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP
KN109WP,KN108WP,KN102RP
SKY315A
SKY305
SKY302
SKY3
SKY3
SKY3
SKP1R31,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KA1,KA1,KA3
KN101WP,KN102RP
KN101WP,KN118WP,KN102RP
KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP
SKY328 ■
SKY3
SKR1B,SKR1B,SKR3R
KA51,KA51,KA51
KN111WP,KN110WP,KN102RP
2
3
Red 120 VAC Pilot Light-Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Jog-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Down-Stop (With Sealed Contacts
and Lockout on Stop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▲ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class II Division 2 Group G and Class III.
■ Control Stations are UL Listed for use in areas classified as Class I Division 2 Groups A, B, C and D.
144
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Flush Plates
Stainless Steel NEMA Type 1 Flush Plates
Two Unit
These flush plates accept Type K, SK, KX and T operators and
contact blocks and may be used with a standard 2 x 3 general
purpose switch box. A 21/2" deep box should be used with two
Type K contact blocks mounted side by side. If two Type K contact blocks mounted in tandem are needed, a 31/2" deep box
should be used. Although oiltight/watertight operators are used,
an assembled station using the flush plates is not oiltight/watertight. The kits include the stainless steel flush plate, cover
screws and a set of liners. The liners must be used to maintain Approximate Dimensions
electrical clearance.
Commercial Pull Box
Number
of
Units
Description
Type
Number
1
1 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners
K25
2
2 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners
K26
3
3 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners
K27
4
4 Unit flush plate, cover screws, insulating liners
K28
A
3.13
79.5
2.0
50.8
B
Dimensions (inches)
Number
of Units
A✻
B
1
125/32 " (45 mm)
23/4 " (70 mm)
2
319/32 " (91 mm)
49/16 " (116 mm)
3
513/32 " (36 mm)
63/8 " (162 mm)
4
7
7/
32 "
(183 mm)
8 3/
16 "
Commercial Pull Box
4.50
114.3
2.63
66.9
(208 mm)
✻ Center to center of operators is 1 13/16" (46 mm).
General Purpose NEMA Type 1 Flush Mounting Control Station
With Pull Box For Type K Control Units (Stations Are Not Oiltight)
Number of
Units
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Enclosure Only
For Customer Assembly
Custom Built Factory
Assembled Control Stations
Type
Type
KZP1
KZP2
KZP3
KZP4
KZP5
KZP6
KZP7
KZP8
KZP10
KZP20
KZP30
KZP40
KZP50
KZP60
KZP70
KZP80
Special Features
Type 304 Stainless Steel Flush Plate (Form Y242)
No. of Units
1-4
5-8
Omit Pull Box (Form Y243)
No. of Units
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
Dimensions (Type KZP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 147
145
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Enclosure Dimensions
Location Of Control Units
SKY4
KY1
KYAF1
KZ11
KYSS1
SKY1
KY2
KYAF2
KZ21
KYSS2
SKY2
KY3
KYAF3
KZ31
KYSS3
SKY3
KY16
KYAF16
KZ16
KYSS16
SKY16
KY6
KYAF6
KZ6
KYSS6
SKY6
KY4
KYAF4
KZ41
KYSS4
KYAF20
KYSS20
SKY20
Type KY
KY9
KYAF9
KZ9
KYSS9
SKY9
KY12
KYAF12
KZ12
KYSS12
SKY12
KYAF25
KYSS25
SKY25
KYAF30
KYSS30
Type KZ
R-Pt. in bottom as std.
0.22
(4) 6 Dia. Mtg. Holes
Gasket cemented
to cover
L
H
C
Table for Type KY and KZ
M-N
0.16
4
A
D
0.25
6
2.50
2.13
64
54
C65075-239
K
G
C30052-170
J
E
B
0.25
6
1
2
3
4
6
9
12
16
Overall
Dimensions
A
B
4
35/8
35/8 53/4
35/8 71/2
35/8 91/4
63/4
8
91/4
8
91/4 10
113/4 101/2
Mounting Dim.
KY
C
317/32
317/32
317/32
317/32
327/32
327/32
45/32
45/32
Conduit
KZ
D
E
F
3
3
3
3
55/8
81/8
81/8
105/8
23/4
41/2
61/4
8
67/8
67/8
87/8
93/8
31/8
31/8
31/8
31/8
61/4
83/4
83/4
111/4
H
G
Cover
Thickness
Other Dimensions
R
J
3
31/2 11/8
/ -14
—
3/4-14
51/4 11/8
13/4
4
1
3
7
1 /8
/4-14
13/4
3/ -14
83/4 11/8
13/4
3/4-14
71/2 13/8
2
4
71/2 13/8
1-111/2
2
91/2 119/32 11/4-111/2
2
10 119/32 11/2-111/2
2
KY
KZ
M
N
K
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
21/4
10-24 x 5/8
10-24 x 5/8
10-24 x 5/8
10-24 x 5/8
8-32
8-32
8-32
8-32
1.18 .50
1.18 .50
1.18 .50
1.18 .50
1.06 1.06
1.06 1.06
.88 .88
.88 .88
Inside
Dim.
Conduit
For Type
KYSS
Only
Table for Type KYAF and KYSS
F
Type KYAF
Type KYSS
A
D
2.50
64
31
8
No.
of
Units
(4) .31 Dia. Mtg. Holes
8
2.50
64
B
E
Overall
Dimensions
No.
of
Units
A
Mounting
Dimensions
B
C
D
E
F
G
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
1
4.18
106
5.24
133
3.63
92
2.25
57
4.62
117
3.41
87
3
2
4.18
106
7.74
197
3.63
92
2.25
57
7.12
181
3.41
87
3
3
4.18
106
10.24
260
3.63
92
2.25
57
9.62
244
3.41
87
3
4
4.18
106
12.74
324
3.63
92
2.25
57
12.12
308
3.41
87
3
6
7.43
189
11.37
289
4.34
110
5.50
140
10.75
273
4.13
105
3
9
9.68
246
11.37
289
4.34
110
7.75
197
10.75
273
4.13
105
/4-14
/4-14
/4-14
/4-14
/4-14
1-11 1/2
12
9.68
246
13.87
352
4.34
110
7.75
197
13.25
337
4.13
105
1 1/4-111/2
16
11.93
303
13.87
352
4.34
110
10.00
254
13.25
337
4.13
105
1 1/2-111/2
20
11.93
303
16.37
416
4.34
110
10.00
254
15.75
400
4.13
105
1 1/2-111/2
25
14.18
360
16.37
416
4.34
110
12.25
311
15.75
400
4.13
105
(2)1 1/2-111/2
30
14.18
360
18.87
479
4.34
110
12.25
311
18.25
464
4.13
105
(2)1 1/2-111/2
A
C F
C65075-176
1.70
43
G Conduit Hub
Bottom Only
(Type KYSS Only)
146
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K and SK — 30 mm
Enclosure Dimensions
Type SKY Enclosures
Flush Mount Sheet Steel
Type KZP
4.00
108
A
A
C
C
H (4 pls)
(4) 0.25 Dia. Mtg. Holes
6
H (4 pls)
1.00
2.25
57
D
2.25
57
B
E
D
2.25
57
C
Mtg.
D
A
B
B
E
G
D
E
F
0.21
Dia.
5
(4 pls)
.75
19
2.00
51
F
3.00
76
1.68
43
3.36
85
G
For 1, 2 & 3 unit only
Glass Polymeric Type SKY
H
F
plaster alignment
K.O. for 1/2, 3/4, 1
conduit Top, Bottom
& Back
1.06
27
Class 9001 Type KZP
Conduit Conduit
Height
Size Location
G
0.65 max
3.45
87
0.28
7
D30464-152
E
Mtg.
Hole
2.50
63
sky 25 only
(2)1.50 Dia. holes
38
Mtg. Dim.
E
D
IN mm IN mm IN mm IN mm
IN
C
mm
Letter Dimensions
Overall Dim.
B
IN
mm
IN
No.
of
Units
A
mm
IN
mm
Type
A
B
C
D
E
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
mm
IN
KZP1
7.56
192
5.56
141
6.38
162
3.78
96
–
mm
–
7.44
189
8.25
210
3.72
94
2.00
51
0.31 8
0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88
99
4.88 124
2.94
75
6.63 169
3.81 97
1
KZP2
9.43
240
0.31 8
0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88
99
4.88 124
2.94
75
6.63 169
3.81 97
2
KZP3
11.30
287
9.31
236
10.12
257
3.65
93
2.00
51
0.31 8
0.75 19 1.34 34 3.88
99
7.13 181
2.94
75
8.88 226
3.81 97
3
KZP4
13.18
335
11.18
284
12.00
305
3.59
91
2.00
51
0.31 8
0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120
6.75 172
4.00 102
7.53 191
7.53 191
4
KZP5
15.06
383
13.06
332
13.88
353
3.53
90
2.00
51
0.31 8
0.75 19 2.00 51 4.72 120
8.88 226
4.00 102
9.50 241
7.50 191
6
KZP6
16.93
430
14.94
379
15.75
400
3.47
88
2.00
51
0.31 8
1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273
6.00 153 11.34 288
9.41 239
9
KZP7
18.81
478
16.81
427
17.62
448
3.40
86
2.00
51
0.31 8
1.00 25 1.75 44 4.25 108 10.75 273
6.00 153 11.34 288
9.41 239
12
KZP8
20.68
525
18.69
475
19.50
495
3.34
85
2.00
51
0.31 8
1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324
8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291
16
0.31 8
1.50 38 2.00 51 5.25 133 12.75 324
8.00 203 13.41 341 11.44 291
20
0.31 8
1.50 38 2.00 51 6.25 159 14.63 372 10.00 254 15.47 393 13.47 342
25
147
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Key Sheet
CONTROL GROUP
KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE “K”, “KX”, “SK”
OR “T” ASSEMBLED OILTIGHT CONTROL STATIONS
CUSTOMER
INVOICE NUMBER
CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER
DATE
CLASS
QUANTITY
9001 TYPE
LIST PRICE EACH, DS-1
TOP
TYPE NUMBER KEY
1
Select Type Numbers from
Catalog Digest
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
1. Operator or Closing Plate.
Include “H” No. for Contact
Blocks Assembled to
Operator.
Example – KR1B-H13
A
1
G
1
N
1
U
1
AA
2. Attachment or Protective
Cap. Example – KU-1
3. Legend Plate Type Number.
Example – KN-201
4. Legend Plate Marking.
– Use Only if Special Marking is Required.
Example:
Line 3. – KN-299
Line 4. – ”Panic”
1
B
1
H
1
P
1
V
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
BB
For Further Instructions –
See Reverse Side
1
C
1
J
1
Q
1
W
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
1
D
1
K
1
R
1
X
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
1
E
1
L
1
S
1
Y
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
F
1
M
1
T
1
Z
DD
1
2
1
CC
EE
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
FF
148
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Ordering Instructions
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING ASSEMBLED CONTROL
STATIONS
1. Use separate Key Sheet for each different control station arrangement on order.
2.
3.
4.
Suffix No.
(Add to
Operator
Type No.)
Select locations on sketch (reverse side) which illustrate
manner in which station is to be mounted. Example: Selection of location A, B, C and D indicates a four unit station
mounted with its long axis vertical and the legend plates
mounted accordingly. Selection of locations A, G, N and U
indicates mounting with long axis horizontal.
Each interlock attachment Type K-3 must be specified at
two adjacent locations. Type KR-11 or Type KR-12 must be
specified at two adjacent locations. Type KRD Time Delay
Units require space equal to two push button mounting
holes. The unused hole must be covered with at Type K-51
or K-52 Closing Plate. The time delay unit must be positioned with the contacts adjacent to the unused hole. The
unused hole may be located above, below, right or left of the
unit.
Positions
1
2
Total
Circuits
3
Circuit
Symbol
4
1 N.O.
1 N.C.
H1
KA-1
H2
KA-1
KA-1
H3
KA-1
KA-1
KA-1
H4
KA-1
KA-1
KA-1
H5
KA-2
H6
KA-3
H7
KA-2
KA-2
H8
KA-3
KA-3
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
2 N.C.
3 N.O.
3 N.C.
KA-1
4 N.O.
4 N.C.
1 N.O.
1 N.C.
2 N.O.
H9
KA-4
KA-1
1 N.O.
1 E.C.N.O.
2 N.C.
H10
KA-4
KA-5
1 E.C.N.O.
1 E.C.N.C.
1 N.C.
KA-1
3 N.O.
3 N.C.
KA-3
2 N.O.
2 N.C.
Types KN-3 and KN-4 legend plates will not fit upright on 2,
3 or 4 unit Type KY or Type KZ enclosures with long axis vertical. Type KYC enclosures must use Type KN-8 legend
plates.
H11
KA-1
KA-1
H12
KA-2
KA-3
H13
KA-1
1 N.O.
1 N.C.
5.
Large (2 1/4” Dia.) mushroom button operators can not be
mounted in adjacent locations.
H14
KA-3
1 N.C.
6.
Enclosures have sufficient depth to accommodate two contact blocks side-by-side on illuminated operators (Types K,
SK and T only).
H36
KA-2
1 N.O.
KA-2
Location of Control Units – Types K, KX, SK and T
SKY-400
KY-10
KYAF-100
KYSS-100
KZ-110
SKY-100
KY-160
KYAF-1600
KYSS-1600
KZ-160
SKY-1600
KY-20
KYAF-200
KYSS-200
KZ-210
SKY-200
KY-30
KYAF-300
KYSS-300
KZ-310
SKY-300
KYAF-2000
KYSS-2000
SKY-2000
KY-40
KYAF-400
KYSS-410
KZ-410
KY-60
KYAF-600
KYSS-600
KZ-60
SKY-600
KY-90
KYAF-900
KYSS-900
KZ-90
SKY-900
KYAF-2500
KYSS-2500
SKY-2500
KY-120
KYAF-1200
KYSS1200
KZ-120
SKY-1200
KYSS-3000
149
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types KY and KZC — Security Control Stations
Application Data, Features
Standard Features
• All cylinders are random keyed.
• Key operators are all spring return from both sides to center, maintained contact not available.
• Key withdrawal is in the center position only.
• Cover is mechanically interlocked with the box to make it
difficult for unauthorized people to gain entrance into the
enclosure.
• Cover is securely held in place by allen screws.
• Cylinders are of builders hardware type, which permits keying stations to the rest of the cylinders in a development.
• Cylinder legend plate marking is “OPEN-CLOSE.”
• An optional push button is available. The legend plate marking is “STOP.”
Description
Type of Cylinder
Cylinder Finish
Type
Type
KY198
KY199
KY197
KZC198
KZC199
KZC197
KY196
KZC196
KY195
KZC195
KY194
KZC194
KY193
KZC193
Sargent
Chrome Maximum Security
Cylinder
KY192
KZC192
Emhart
Yale
Best
Chrome
Brass
Chrome Complete With Core◆
(6 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome Lock Cylinder Only
- Core Omitted▲
(6 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome Complete With Core◆
(7 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome Lock Cylinder Only
- Core Omitted▲
(7 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome
KY298
KY299
KY297
KZC298
KZC299
KZC297
KY296
KZC296
KY295
KZC295
KY294
KZC294
KY293
KZC293
Chrome Maximum Security
Cylinder
KY292
KZC292
Best
Best
Best
Schlage
Best
Key
Operator
With
Stop
Button
Satin
Chrome Finish
Flush Mtd.
W/Box
Cast
Aluminum
Enclosure ✻
Chrome
Brass
Chrome Complete With Core◆
(6 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome Lock Cylinder Only
- Core Omitted▲
(6 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome Complete With Core◆
(7 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome Lock Cylinder Only
- Core Omitted▲
(7 Tumbler Pins)
Chrome
Emhart
Yale
Best
Key
Operator
Only
Special Features
Best
Best
Schlage
Sargent
UL Listed
File E42259
CNN NKCR
CSA Listed
File LR25490
Class 321103
Type KY192
Type KZC299
Electrical Ratings
Key Operator: One Class 9007 Type AO2 snap switch is used for
the “OPEN” position and one snap switch is used for the “CLOSE”
position. See page 151 for electrical ratings of the 9007 AO2.
Stop Button: One Class 9001 Type KA1 contact block is used on the
optional push button. See page 151 for 9001KA1 electrical ratings.
(Note: The KA1 contact block has a maximum voltage rating of
300 volts (NEMA A300) when used in the Type KZC station.)
Dimensions
Surface Mount Type KY
2
1
Repair Parts
Replacement or duplicate keys: Emhart, Yale, or Schlage - local
distributor, hardware store, or lock shop that duplicates keys.
Square D can supply and deliver in 5 weeks. BEST – Must purchase from local Best Lock Corporation representative. Sargent –
must purchase from Square D. Keys supplied with our security
control station are registered to the Square D Company.
1
8
3
13
32
3
3 5
8
3 Mtg
B30064-682
35
8
5
16
5
8
5
16
3 Mtg
5
8
5
1
4 8
✻ Meets NEMA Type 3R requirements.
◆ When Best Lock stations are supplied with core, customer should contact local Best Lock
representative to change core.
▲ When Best Lock stations are supplied without core, customer must purchase core separately from Best Lock Company, and customer can subsequently change core at his convenience.
Contact Your Local Square D Sales Office If:
• Master keying is required.
• Keying several stations alike is required.
• Station is to be keyed to a specific key number.
• Nonstandard legend plates are required.
• Extra keys are required.
• A specific type of keyway is required.
3 -14
Conduit Top
4
(4) 7 Dia. Mtg. Holes
32
9
Inside Dim.
16
7
8
4
3
2 4 Mtg
1 Mtg
2
Flush Mount Type KZC
4
Mtg.
21
3
2
4
19
32
19
32
4
Mtg. 3
21
2
4
27
32
Max
0
Min
Plaster
Adjustment
21
16
1
2
16
7
7
16
9
3 716
6
8
Mtg.
59
16
21
16
1"
7
16
1
8
4
Mtg.
21
16
(14 )1/4 Dia. Mtg. Holes
1"
B30064-683
3
16
13
3
16 3 13
32
Wall Surface
1
116
7
3 16
1 3
K.O. for 2 4 1" Conduit
Top, Bottom and Back
9
32
Replacement enclosures are not sold. Replacement cores or
cylinders are not sold.
150
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Contact Blocks
The Class 9001 Type KA contact blocks have been improved. The most noticeable change is that the terminals are FINGERSAFE®
contact blocks (meeting VDE 0106 Part 100). They also have one screw mounting and captive backed out plus/minus terminal
screws. These contact blocks still use the same reliable double break direct acting contacts used since 1965. Because of the wiping
action of these contacts, they are suitable for use with programmable controllers. All contact blocks listed below will accept up to
2 #12-#24 solid or stranded wires. Types KA1, KA31, KA3, and KA33 N.C. contacts are direct opening.
Standard Contact Blocks
Description
Symbol
Contact Blocks With Binder Head
Screws (not FINGERSAFE ®
Contact Blocks)
Type
Symbol
KA1
Gold Flashed Contacts With
Standard Pressure Wire Terminals
Type
Quantity
Type
KA21
25-Up ▲
KA31
KA22
25-Up ▲
KA32
KA23
25-Up ▲
KA33
KA24
25-Up ▲
KA34
KA25
25-Up ▲
KA35
(Clear Cover)
KA2
(Green Cover)
N.O. Early
Closing
KA3
N.C. Contact
Late Opening
(Red Cover)
▲ Minimum order quantity is 25.
KA4
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE®
Contact Blocks, But Provide:
KA5
• Terminals that accept ring tongue/fork tongue connectors
• Short single circuit contact blocks (0.75" deep vs. 0.97" deep
on the FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks)
• Same as old style Series G product available prior to 3/89.
• Use form Y238 (add to catalog # as suffix)
N.O. Contact
Early Closing
(Clear Cover)
N.C. Contact
Late Opening
Symbol
(Red Cover)
Type
Symbol
Type
KA1G
KA4G
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA6
N.O. Contact
Early Closing
KA2G
KA5G
N.C. Contact Late Opening
(Green Cover)
KA3G
KA6G
Additional Circuit Arrangements Available
Sequencing ✻
N.O. Contact of KA4 closes
before N.O. Contact on KA1
KA4
Overlapping ✻ N.O. Contact of
KA4 closes before N.C. Contact
of KA5 Opens
KA4
N.O. Contact Early Closing
KA1
Order One
Type KA4 and
One Type KA1
KA5
Order One
Type KA4 and
One Type KA5
Contact Blocks Listed Below Are Not FINGERSAFE® Contact Blocks, But Have “Quick Connect” Terminals.
Symbol
Type
KA12
✻ For push buttons or two position selector switches (Types K or SKS11, K or SKS12, K or
SKS25, K or SKS34, K or SK11J, K or SK12J, K or SK25J and K or SK34J) only. For
sequencing or overlapping contacts on other operators — consult local Square D Sales Office.
KA13
Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9001 Type KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
AC
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600) 35% Power Factor
Volts
Make
Break
Amperes
VA
Amperes
VA
Continuous
Carrying Amperes
60
30
15
12
7200
7200
7200
7200
6.0
3.0
1.5
1.2
720
720
720
720
10
10
10
10
120
240
480
600
Resistive 75% Power
Factor Make, Break and
Continuous Amperes
Volts
10
10
10
10
125
250
600
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type A600)
Make and Break
KA1
KA2, KA3
KA4
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
.....
.....
Continuous
KA5, KA6 Carrying Amperes
1.1
0.55
0.2
10
10
10
Maximum Current Ratings for Control Circuit Contacts – Class 9007 Type AO2
Switch Contact
Type
Action
AO-2
SPDT
Direct Opening Contacts to
Meet IEC 947-5-1
Requirements for Positive
Opening Contacts
No
AC – 50 or 60 Hz
Inductive 35% Power Factor
Volts
120
240
480
600
Make
Break
Amps
VA
Amps
VA
40
20
10
8
4800
4800
4800
4800
15
10
6
5
1800
2400
2880
3000
DC
Resistive 75% Power Factor
Make and Break
Amperes
15
10
6
5
Inductive and Resistive
Volts
125
250
600
....
Make and Break Amperes
AC or DC
Single Throw
Double Throw
Continuous
Carrying Amperes
2.0
0.5
0.1
....
0.5
0.2
0.02
....
15
15
15
15
151
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Types K, SK, KX, and T — 30 mm
Reed Contact Blocks & Hazardous Location Information
In hazardous locations, it is not always required to use explosion-proof
equipment like the Class 9001 Type BR control stations. Knowing what
type of hazardous location exists will permit you to select the most economical solution to your application. If you're not sure what type of hazardous location exists, the “Summary of Classification” chart may help.
If not, contact your local electrical inspector. When you know what
class, division, and group(s) exists, see the table in the lower lefthand
corner of this page for what Square D has to offer.
All contact blocks listed below will accept #12-18 solid or stranded wire.
Hermetically Sealed Logic Reed Contact Blocks
Suitable for use on low energy level circuits
Description
Symbol
Type
KA41
KA42
Summary Of Classification Chart
Class
Division
I. Gas
1. Hazard May Exist
May Exist In Atmosphere
Under Normal Operating
Conditions.
Group
KA43
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases
containing Hydrogen
KA44
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
KA45
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
2. Potential Hazard
A. May be present in
atmosphere only
under abnormal
circumstances.
B. Location adjacent to
Division 1 location.
II. Dust
1. Hazard May Exist
May Exist In Atmosphere
Under Normal Operating
Conditions.
A. Acetylene
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. alcohol)
E. Conductive and Combustible Dust
(Resistivity <105 ohms/cm)
F. Carbonaceous Dusts (Resistivity
>102 ohm/cm but ≤ 108ohm/cm)
III. Fibers
Division
Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
2. Handling and Storage
Areas
Easily Ignitable Fibers or Flyings
1
A
1.
Intrinsically Safe System ①
1
B, C, D
1.
2.
9001 BR station
Intrinsically Safe System ①
1.
I
2
A
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➁
Intrinsically Safe System ①
2.
II
II
1
2
B, C, D
E, F, G
E, F
1.
2.
2
3.
1.
2.
9001 BR station
Intrinsically Safe System ①
1.
2.
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➁
Intrinsically Safe System ①
G
1.
2.
3.
III
1, 2
Symbol
Type
KA51
–
KA53
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➁
Intrinsically Safe System ①
3.
II
Description
KA52
I
2
The maximum number of logic and/or power reed contact blocks per operator
is the same for standard contact blocks,
except:
• On 3 position selector switches with cams “C,” “D,” “E,” “F,” “G,” “L,” or “M”
mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On 4 position selector switches, mount reed blocks on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
• On joysticks or on Type KR8 or SKR8 push-pull operators, mount reed blocks
on one side only (either side), maximum 2 in tandem.
Use
Group(s)
I
I
Cont.
0.5 A
0.5 A
Hermetically Sealed Power Reed Contact Blocks
1. Production Areas
For
Class
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust
(Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
Res.
0.25 A
8 VA
32/30
120/100
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. ethylene)
G. Non-Conductive Combustible Dust
(Resistivity > = 105 ohms/cm)
2. Potential Hazard
A. May be present in
atmosphere only
under abnormal
circumstances.
Max. Volts AC/DC
B. Hydrogen and Manufactured Gases
Containing Hydrogen
Maximum Load
Ind.
0.10 A
3 VA
1.
2.
3.
9001 BR station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➂
Intrinsically Safe System ①
9001 BR Station
9001 K, SK, KX control stations with the restrictions
listed in footnote ➂
Intrinsically Safe System ①
① An intrinsically safe system requires either a Class 8501 Type TO or NY2 barrier relay or an
intrinsically safe barrier to restrict the energy available in the area classified as a hazardous
area to a level less than that required to cause an explosion. In an intrinsically safe system,
any non-illuminated Class 9001 operator or control station with standard contacts can be
used. No illuminated operators, except the Class 9001 Type KP44 intrinsically safe pilot light,
may be used.
➁ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK or KX operator can be used in an area classified as Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations.
1. Only logic (KA40 series) or power (KA50 series) reed contact blocks are used.
2. All Type K and SK illuminated operators are UL approved for use in Class I Division 2
areas. ◆
3. Type KX illuminated operators do not use 4 lamp light modules, or 2 lamp light modules
other than the transformer type. ◆
4. The operators are mounted in Type KY, KYSS, KYAF, SKY enclosures.
➂ Any Class 9001 Type K, SK, or KX operator mounted in a Class 9001 Type KY, KYSS, KYAF,
SKY enclosure may be used, except potentiometer operators.
For ◆: Add Form Y243 to single lamp Push To Test pilot lights.
KA54
KA55
Make
Volts
120
240
Amps
VA
10.00
5.00
1200
1200
Make
Volts
Amps
115
AC NEMA Type C300 ➃
Break
0.50
Amps
VA
1.000
120
0.500
120
DC NEMA Type Q150 ➄
Break
VA
58
Amps
VA
0.50
58
Continuous
Carrying
Amps
3.0
3.0
Continuous
Carrying
Amps
3.0
The power reed contact blocks can be used with standard industrial relays and starters through
NEMA Size 4. Minimum voltage is 5 volts and the minimum current is 1 mA.
➃ Inductive Rating – 35% Power Factor.
➄ Inductive and Resistive Ratings.
Pilot Light For Intrinsically Safe Circuits — NEMA Type 4X
Intrinsically safe equipment must not release electrical or thermal energy capable of igniting certain explosive or combustible hazardous atmosphere, for which the equipment has been tested.
Listed below are pilot lights that are intrinsically safe when used with
a suitable approved barrier or barrier relay (Class 8501 Type TO or NY2.
These pilot lights are Factory Mutual FM# J.I. OH4A2,AX,3610 (FM approved). Consult your local Square D Sales Office for further details.
These pilot lights are fully encapsulated – there are no replaceable
parts – except for the SK40 ring nut. Use KN100 series plastic legend
plates.
Operating
Nominal
Lens
Voltage
Type
Current
Color
Range
V max. = 32 V
I max. = 165 mA
20-30 V
AC/DC
25 mA
Red
Green
Yellow
KP44R
KP44G
KP44Y
152
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Type XDP•••••C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Type XDP•••••C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Type XDP•••••C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
General Description
The XDP exterior, heavy duty monolever was designed for aircraft unloading equipment, where
exposure to severe environments and mechanical abuse are inevitable. These switches have been
engineered to withstand adverse conditions such as smog, dust, high humidity and extreme
temperatures experienced in an airport environment. The XDP is currently being used for aircraft
unloading service in Alaska. Other applications include snow plow controls and cherry pickers.
4 Types of hand operations are offered:
A 2-position monolever operator that operates 2 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator
is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
A 2-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. This is a “Z” cam operation; the lever is
spring returned to the center position (momentary). The first contact actuates with 15° operator
movement; the second contact actuates with an additional 90° movement of the operator while still
in the 15° position. Both contacts are actuated with the second movement.
A 4-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*, one contact per direction. The operator
is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
An 8-position monolever operator that operates 4 contacts*. Movement to the north, south, east, or
west positions activates a single contact. Movement to the NE, NW, SE, or SW activates two
contacts. The lever is spring returned to the center position (momentary).
* Contacts on monolevers with Telemecanique blocks are stackable with up to 3 contacts in any position.
Specifications
Electrical ratings
10 A resistive/inductive up to 15 Vdc ZB2 contacts NEMA A600, Q600
Housing
Main body: diecast ZAMAC 3
Contact mounting base: weather-resistant nylon
Handle boot: polyester elastomer (extremely temperature resistant)
Operating temperature
-40 °F to +140 °F
-40 °C to +60 °C
Mechanical/electrical life
In excess of 1 million actuations per direction at rated load
Enclosure
NEMA Type 4 (IP65) when installed in a suitable enclosure.
Exposed components:
• Unaffected by oil or grease
• Ozone resistant
• Does not age or crack with prolonged outdoor exposure
Mechanism
• Lever operated
• Momentary action (spring return to center)
• Panel mounted
• Anti-rotational, mounts with 4 screws (not provided)
• Mounting nuts remove from the rear, rounded bolt heads exposed on operator side
• Withstands severe operator abuse
154
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
Monolever switches with 1 NO ZB2 contact block (ZB2BE101) in each
position (up to 3 stackable in any position). NC contacts available,
consult factory.
Description
Function
Catalog Number
2 positions
2 contacts
XDPA1010C1
2/4 positions
4 contacts
XDPB1111C1
4 positions
4 contacts
XDPC1411C1
8 positions
8 contacts
XDPD1111C1
4.44
113
.062 Neoprene
1.6 Gasket
2.56 Square
65
1.75
44
XDP****C1, C2, C3, C6, P1, P3
Monolever with “ZB2” type contact
File E164353
CCN NKCR
®
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
Monolever switches with micro-switch V3 contacts (NO/NC).
Description
Function
Catalog Number
2 positions
2 contacts
XDPA5050C4
2/4 positions
4 contacts
XDPB5555C4
4 positions
4 contacts
XDPC5555C4
8 positions
8 contacts
XDPD5555C4
4.44
113
.062 Neoprene
1.6 Gasket
2.56 Square
65
2.06
52
0.39
10
3/16" Quick Connect
Tab Terminals
Tolerance = ±0.06 in (1.5mm)
XDP****C4
Monolever with V3 switches
File E164353
CCN NKCR2
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
Dual Dimensions:
Inches
Millimeters
155
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
XDP Heavy Duty Monolever
Monolever switches with Burgess sealed switch
V3S9 contacts (NO/NC).
Description
Function
Catalog Number
2 positions
2 contacts
XDPA5050C5
2/4 positions
4 contacts
XDPB5555C5
4 positions
4 contacts
XDPC5555C5
8 positions
8 contacts
XDPD5555C5
4.44
113
.062 Neoprene
1.6 Gasket
0.10
2.5
2.17
55
0.11 in (2.8mm)
Quick Connect
Tab Terminals
XDP****C5
Monolever with sealed switches (V3S9)
Panel Mounting Dimensions
Dual Dimensions:
Inches
1.88 dia.
48
2.0
51
2.0
51
Millimeters
4 X 0.20 dia.
5
156
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type BW, SKYP & XACA Pendant Stations
Class 9001
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
Type BW General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Type BW Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Type BW Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Seriplex Control Bus Version 2, Material Pull Pendant Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Type XACA Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Type XACA Standard Duty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Type XACA Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Type XACA Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Type XACA Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Type XACA Exploded Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Type XACA Lamps and Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Type XACA Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Type XACA Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Type SKYP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Type SKYP Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Type SK Operators, Application Data and Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Type SKYP Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Type SKYP Order Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant Stations
General Information
Type BW Standard Duty Pendant Stations
The Class 9001 Type BW Pendant Station is a pre-assembled,
2 button station well suited for standard hoist applications.
Oversized finger grips on the rear of the enclosure make it
easy to grip and operate.
Features and Options
• Made of high impact thermoplastic with self-extinguishing flammability rating (UL 94V)
• NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 Watertight, Dusttight, Oiltight,
Corrosion Resistant
• UL Listed and CSA Approved
• 1/2" conduit opening
• Internal strain relief post
• Momentary contact
• Maintained contact
• Single speed
• Two speed
• With or without mechanical interlock
• Optional external hanger bracket and seal
• Ribs on top of enclosure prevent hanger bracket from
rotating and coming loose
• Contoured for easy grip
• Easy to hold with one hand
•
•
•
Interchangeable legend inserts
Field installable mushroom button
Full cover gasket to exclude harmful contaminants
Off and Stop are White
Letters on a Red Background
•
•
Jumper included on all single speed buttons (except universal types), saves wiring time
Self-lifting pressure wire connectors for easy wiring
158
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant Stations
Specifications
Specifications
Electrical ratings
AC - NEMA B600
Enclosure type
NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, and 4X
DC - NEMA P600
Operating temperature
- 25 °C to + 60 °C
- 13 °F to + 140 °F
Housing material
Polycarbonate/PET Polyester Blend
Storage temperature
- 40 °C to + 70 °C
- 40 °F to + 158 °F
Cable entry
1/2 inch NPT
Approvals
File E42259
CCN NKCR
File LR 25490
Class 3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
Electrical Contact Ratings
(BW70’S AND BW80’S)
AC – NEMA B600
Resistive
75% Power
Factor
Inductive
35% Power Factor
Volts ▲
Make
Amps
120
240
480
600
30.0
15.0
7.5
0.6
Break
VA
3600
3600
3600
3600
Amps
3.0
1.5
0.75
0.6
VA
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
Make, Break
and Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
360
360
360
360
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
DC – NEMA P600
Inductive and Resistive
Volts
Make and
Break
Amperes
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
120
240
600
1.10
0.55
0.20
5
5
5
▲ OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.
Approximate Dimensions
2.19
56
1.09
28
0.43
11
2.94
75
1.06
27
0.91
23
1
- 14
2
NPT
0.25 0.50
Mtg. Slot
4.69
119
Type BW70B through Type BW82Y
Dual Dimensions:
Inches
mm
159
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type BW — Pendant Stations
Application Data and Order Information
The Class 9001 BW70 and BW80 pendant stations are used for hoist applications, requiring either single speed or two speed buttons. The thermoplastic enclosure is provided with a 1/2 inch conduit entrance at top to accept a pendant cable and has internal
strain relief provided as standard. The stations are rated NEMA Type 1, 3, 3R, 4 and 4X. The enclosure is available in three colors.
All universal stations have double circuit blocks (1 N.O. — 1 N.C.) on each button and come without legends so they can be assembled to fit the application. For convenience, push buttons have interchangeable legend inserts. The complete line is UL listed
and C.S.A. certified.
No.
of
Units
Legend Insert
Markings
Description
Single
Speed
2
Two
Speed
Mechanical
Interlock
Enclosure Color
Yellow
Black
Replacement
Interior
Contact
Symbol
Red
9001
Type
Contact
Symbol
Up-Down
Yes
BW72Y
BW72B
BW72R
146
BOC368
146
Forward-Reverse
Yes
BW73Y
BW73B
BW73R
146
BOC368
146
147
On-Off ▲
Yes
BW74Y
BW74B
BW74R
10
BOC358
Start-Stop
No
BW75Y
BW75B
BW75R
145
BOC359
25
Start-Stop ▲
Yes
BW76Y
BW76B
BW76R
10
BOC358
147
On-Off
No
BW77Y
BW77B
BW77R
146
BOC359
25
On-Off
No
BW79Y
BW79B
BW79R
145
BOC359
25
Up-Down
Yes
BW78Y
BW78B
.....
100
...
....
W/O Legend Inserts
Yes
BW70YU
BW70BU
BW70RU
25
BOC366
25
W/O Legend Inserts
No
BW71YU
BW71BU
BW71RU
25
BOC359
25
W/O Legend Inserts ▲
Yes
BW74YU
BW74BU
BW74RU
147
BOC358
147
W/O Legend Inserts
Yes
BW80YU
BW80BU
BW80RU
150
BOC367
150
Up-Down
Yes
BW82Y
BW82B
BW82R
150
BOC367
150
▲ Maintained contact
Interchangeable Push Button Legend Inserts
Marking
Start
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Open
Close
Raise
Lower
Up
Down
For
NEMA Type
4X
Type BW70’s
and BW80’s
Mushroom
Button
Inserts For
NEMA Type
4X Type
BW70’s
and BW80’s
Type
Type
B259
B260
B255
B256
B263
B264
B261
B262
B253
B254
B282
B283
B278
B279
B286
B287
B284
B285
B276
B277
Marking
On
Off
Hand
Auto
BlankBlack
BlankRed
Hanger Bracket and Seal Kit
For
NEMA Type
4X
Type BW70’s
and BW80’s
Mushroom
Button
Inserts For
NEMA Type
4X Type
BW70’s
and BW80's
Type
Type
B257
B258
B265
B266
B280
B281
B288
B289
B251
B251
B252
B252
Type
B350
Contact Symbol
Speed 1
10
25
Speed 2
100
Speed 1
Order must specify quantity of 10 or multiples of 10.
Speed 2
Legend Insert Kit – Kit includes one each of standard legend inserts
as indicated below Type No. of kit.
Where Used:
For NEMA Type 4X
Type BW70’s
and BW80
Type
Push Button
B250 (includes
1 each of
B253 through B266)
Mushroom
Button
B300 (includes
1 each of
B276 through B289)
145
150
147
146
File E42259
File
LR 25490
CCN NKCR
Class 3211 03
Marking
Replacement Enclosures 9001BW70’S and 9001BW80’S
Hanger Bracket
Form
Description
Yellow
Red
Black
Box
3110113201
3110113202
3110113203
Cover
3110114750
3110114751
3110114752
Screws not included. Order quantity 4 of a 21930-14281 for the screws.
Y236
Mushroom Button (less button insert) –
For NEMA Type 4X, BW70 and BW80
Color
Type
Red
B303
For Dimensions ..................................................................................... Page 159
Addition of External hanger bracket (similar to the one used on Class 9001 Type SKYP
Pendant Stations). Use when polymeric cord connectors are required.
160
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
SERIPLEX Control Bus Version 2
Material Pull Pendant Station
The Material Pull Pendant Stations provide an interface between the SERIPLEX control bus and a single input push button operator enclosed in a pendant station. Single-bit bus
interface circuitry is used in this unit. If multiplexed operation is
used by the CPU interface card, the pendant is scanned every
frame. This pendant is not capable of being multiplexed (See
page 9 for details).
Features
• Durable enclosure rated NEMA Type 12.
• Bus powered lamp modules don’t require an auxiliary power
supply or additional power conductors.
• Bus powered lamp modules use high visibility, low current
consumption LED lamps, providing long life and greater system flexibility.
• Mini-style quick-change connectors provide for easy pendant
installation and change out.
• LED indicators provided on the SERIPLEX module show
power-on status, input status and output status – a convenient installation and troubleshooting aid.
About Material Pull Systems
A SERIPLEX Material Pull Pendant is used to control the floor
stock of parts being installed during a final assembly operation.
Typically, as an assembly worker uses parts they monitor the
stock of material being used. When stock falls to a predetermined level, the assembly worker pushes the button on the Material Pull Pendant and a signal is sent to the computer
requesting parts for that specific assembly operation. The illuminated push button in the pendant flashes to indicate the location where the parts are needed and a lift truck driver is
dispatched with the parts. The lift truck driver presses the pendant push button to indicate that the parts have been delivered
and to reset the system.
Dimensions (SPXBWPEND5 only)
3.12
(79.2)
in.
(mm)
5.50
(140)
4.65
(118)
2.20
(55.9)
4.10
(104)
Pendant connector receptacle: Torque nut to 23 - 27 lb-in.
Pendant enclosure screws: Torque screws to 15 lb-in.
Operator ring nut: Torque 6 - 8 lb-ft.
Note: Gasket must be in place to maintain enclosure rating.
Replacement Parts
Part Number
Description
SPXLEDA1
LED Lamp - Amber
9001B350
BW Pendant Hanger Bracket
9001A31
Push button Lens - Amber
SPXHH2P2CABLE
Hand-Held Set-Up Tool Adapter Cable for 5-Pin Mini-style
Connectors
Internal Wiring to SERIPLEX Module
Input address B (N.O.)
Catalog
Number
Input Type
Address A
Input Type
Address B
Output Type
Address B
Description
SPX
BWPEND5
—
N.O.
LED Lamp Amber
Pendant enclosure, single illuminated push button, bus powered
amber LED lamp, 5-pin mini-style
quick change connector
9001
AEQ3370
—
N.O.
LED Indicator - Red
Pendant enclosure, single nonilluminated push button, red LED
indicating lamp inserted in bottom
of pendant, 5-pin mini-style quick
change connector
white (data)
blue (clock)
red (V+)
Electrical Specifications
Voltage: 24 Vdc
Capacitance: 75 pF (typical)
Max Current: 20 mA
Pin 1
Shield Drain
black (common)
orange (shield drain)
Module LED Indicators
OB
Pin 5
Data Line
Pin 2
V+ DC
Bus Power
Pin 4
Clock Line
Pin 3
Extended Pin
Bus Common
P
IB
LED
IB
P
OB
Male Receptacle Pin-out
Color
yellow
green
yellow
Function and Address
Input B Active
Bus Power Applied
Output B Active
For additional information, see catalog 8330CT9601R11/96.
161
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Specifications
XAC pendant stations are designed for standard or medium duty control circuit applications. The enclosures are made from rugged, double insulated thermoplastic material. These stations have been
designed for easy handling and operation, even with heavy work gloves.
Two styles of stations are offered; “small hoist” pistol grip stations with integral parts (see page 163),
and "general purpose" station components with modular assembly required. The general purpose components are available as custom factory assembled stations. For custom applications, a wide range of
operators, contact blocks, legend plates and accessories are offered.
Features
Applications
• 1 and 2 speed versions
• Overhead cranes
• Double insulated
• Tower cranes
• Shock and corrosion resistant
• Fixed hoists
• 2, 4, 6, 8, 12 element versions
• Beam hoists
• Ease of operation
Specifications
Electrical ratings
NEMA A600, Q600
Enclosure
XACAO*
NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor/Outdoor), 5
IP 65
XACAO* (Pistol grip)
NEMA Type 4, 4X (Indoor), 5
IP 65
Operating temperatures
-15 °C to +70 °C
-5 °F to +158 °F
Housing
Yellow polypropylene
Storage temperatures
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °F to +158 °F
Shock resistance
100 g
Vibration resistance
15 g for f = 40 to 500 Hz
Mechanical life
1 million operations
(The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual
operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they create
any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty
offered on this product, please refer to Square D terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D
Digest.)
Operating force
XACA Multi-element types
-with contact ZB2BE:
1 daN (36 oz.) for 1N.O.,
1.3 daN (46.8 oz.) for 1N.O./1N.C.
-with contact XENG1491:
1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1N.C./2N.O.
-with contact XENG1191:
1.4 daN (50.4 oz.) for 1st step,
2.5 daN (89.9 oz.) for 2nd step
Cable entry
XACD - 7 to 18 mm
All other models - 8 to 26 mm
Cabling
Screw and captive cable clamp terminals. Recommended torque 15.62 in lbs. Capacity: minimum 1 x
.5 mm2 (20 AWG) solid or stranded, maximum with or without cable end: 2 x 1.5 mm 2 (16 AWG) or 1
x 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) or by cable quick connector conforming to NF C 20- 20 (on request).
File E164353
CCN NKCR
Approvals
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
Marking
XACA08
(Shown with optional operators and accessories)
162
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Standard Duty
Pistol grip stations
Description
Function
1 Speed / 2 Speed
Speeds
Catalog Number
1 N.O. contact per operator
2 Mechanically interlocked operators
1
XACA201q
2 N.O. (staggered) contacts per operator
2 Mechanically interlocked operators
2
XACA207q
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
2 Mechanically interlocked operators
1
XACA205q
1 N.O. contact per direction
1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle
1
XACD21A0101
1 N.O. + N.O. staggered
1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle
2
XACD21A1231
1 N.O. & 1 N.C. contact per direction
1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle
1
XACD21A0105
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. + 1 N.O. staggered
1 Mechanically interlocked 2 way toggle
2
XACD21A1241
XACA2013
q These XACD units are available with factory installed E-stops. Add a “3” to the end of the catalog number for standard E-stop or add a “4” for a
“Trigger Action” E-stop.
General purpose pendantst
XACA06
Enclosures
Catalog Number
2 hole enclosure
XACA02
3 hole enclosure
XACA03
4 hole enclosure
XACA04
6 hole enclosure
XACA06
8 hole enclosure
XACA08
12 hole enclosure
XACA12
t Standard enclosures include internal mounting plate, cable sleeve for 8 to 26 mm, internal cable clamp, suspension ring and cable tie.
Contact Blocks For Operators In Cover
Description
XACA03
(Shown with optional operator)
Wiring Diagram
Catalog Number
1 N.O./spring return/1 speed
–
ZB2BE101
1 N.C./spring return/1 speed
–
ZB2BE102
Fig. 1
XENG1191
1 N.O. early close & 1N.C.&1N.O./spring return/2 speed
1 N.C. & 2 N.O./spring return/1 speed
Fig. 2
XENG1491
1 N.O. & 1 N.O. latching/1 speed/interlocked
Fig. 3
XENG3781
1 N.O. & 1 N.C. latching/1 speed/interlocked
Fig. 4
XENG3791
For operators in base of enclosure j
1 N.O./1 speed
XACS101
1 N.C./1 speed
XACS102
2 N.O./1 speed
XACS103
2 N.C./1 speed
XACS104
1 N.O. & 1 N.C./1 speed
XACS105
j Cannot be used with XACA03 pendant.
ZB2BE10●
XENG37●1
Wiring diagrams
13
14
13
14
21
22
21
22
33
34
13
Fig. 1
XENG1191
33
14
13
14
13
14
11
12
34
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
XACS10●
163
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Operators and Accessories
Operators▲
Description
Color
White
Booted push button
Booted push button
Description
Mushroom head
Mushroom Size
Mushroom head, momentary
Mushroom head, momentary
Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release
Selector switch
Mushroom head, push to maintain/turn to release (trigger action) ❋
Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release
Mushroom head, push to maintain/key turn to release (trigger action) ❋
30 mm
40 mm
30 mm
XACA9411
Black
XACA9412
Green
XACA9413
Red
XACA9414
Yellow
XACA9415
Blue
XACA9416
Brown
XACA9419
Color
Catalog Number
Black
ZA2BC24
Red
ZA2BC44
Black
ZA2BC2
Red
ZA2BC4
Red
ZA2BS44
40 mm
Red
ZA2BS54
30 mm
Red
ZA2BS834
40 mm
Red
ZA2BS844
30 mm
Red
ZA2BS74
40 mm
Red
ZA2BS14
40 mm
Red
Description
Selector switch
(key operated)
Catalog Number
Color
ZA2BS844
Catalog Number
Selector switch/2 position - maintained❋❋
Black
ZA2BD2
Selector switch/3 position - maintained❋❋
Black
ZA2BD3
Selector switch/2 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position ❋❋
NA
ZA2BG4
Selector switch/3 position - maintained key operated - key removal from left or right position ❋❋
NA
ZA2BG5
Black
ZA2BB2
Red
ZA2BB4
Wobble stick (bottom mounting recommended)
Pilot light components
Description
Wobble stick
Color
ZB2BV006
Resistor supply base/with 130 V lamp (for 220-240 V applications) (AC/DC)
ZB2BV007
Green
Pilot light operators for incandescent lamps
XACB961
Catalog Number
Direct supply base/without lamp (for 6 to 120 V applications) (AC/DC)
XACA971
Pilot light operators for LED lamps
▲
❋
❋❋
ZA2BV03
Red
ZA2BV04
Amber
ZA2BV05
Blue
ZA2BV06
Clear
ZA2BV07
Green
ZA2BV033
Red
ZA2BV043
Amber
ZA2BV053
Booted push buttons are for cover mounting only. All other operators can be mounted on cover or bottom.
Trigger action mushroom heads are “tamper proof” whereby a change of contact state is not possible by “teasing” or floating the operator.
Not for use with XEN G contact blocks.
Enclosure Accessories
Description
XACA982
Catalog Number
Blank hole plug
ZB2SZ3
Mechanical interlock (momentary). For use with XAC booted operators only
XACA009
Adapter for self-supporting cable
XACB961
Low suspension ring for single row station
XACA971
Protective guard for bottom mounted mushroom head
XACA982
Protective guard for bottom mounted selector switch or key switch
XACA983
XACA983
164
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Exploded Drawing
XAC-B961
XEN-T1192
XAC-A941●
ZA2-BC4
XEN-G1● 91
ZA2-BC44
XEN-G37 ●1
XAC-A009
ZA2-BS54
ZB2-BE ● ● ●
ZA2-BS44
ZA2-BS14
ZB2-BY● ● ● ●
XAC-S ● ● ●
ZB2-BV00 ●
ZA2-BS74
ZB2-BY ● ● ● ●
ZA2-BD ●
ZA2-BG ●
XAC-A982
XAC-A971
ZA2-BD ●
ZA2-BB ●
XAC-A983
ZA2-BV0 ●
ZA2-BG ●
ZA2-BC ● ● BS ● ●
ZB2-SZ3
30075-16
165
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Lamps and Legend Plates
Lamps
Type
Voltage (AC/DC)
6
12
24
48
130
120
220
380
Replacement bulbs
(Type BA9s)
Incandescent
DL1CE0**
(Incandescent)
Neon
(use with direct supply light module)
Type
Color
Green
Red
Amber
Green
Red
Amber
Green
Red
Amber
Green
Red
Amber
LED, BA9s base for
Direct Supply blocks
DL1CJUS****
(LED)
Watts
1.2
2.0
2.0
2.4
2.6
Voltage
6 volt ac/dc
6 volt ac/dc
6 volt ac/dc
12 volt ac/dc
12 volt ac/dc
12 volt ac/dc
24 volt ac/dc
24 volt ac/dc
24 volt ac/dc
120 volt ac/dc
120 volt ac/dc
120 volt ac/dc
Catalog Number
DL1CB006
DL1CE012
DL1CE024
DL1 CE048
DL1CE130
NE51HRT120V
NE51HRT220V
NE51HRT380V
Part Number
DL1CJUS0063
DL1CJUS0064
DL1CJUS0065
DL1CJUS0123
DL1CJUS0124
DL1CJUS0125
DL1CJUS0243
DL1CJUS0244
DL1CJUS0245
DL1CJUS1203
DL1CJUS1204
DL1CJUS1205
PVC Standard legend plates 30 x 40mm
Texta
Bridge Forward
Bridge Reverse
Close
Down
Emergency Stop
Fast
Forward
For Rev
For-O-Rev
Hand Off Auto
High
High Low
Hoist Down
Hoist Up
In
Inch
Jog For
Jog Rev
Jog Run
Left
Low
Lower
Man Auto
Catalog number
ZB2BY2343
ZB2BY2344
ZB2BY2314
ZB2BY2308
ZB2BY2330
ZB2BY2328
ZB2BY2305
ZB2BY23
ZB2BY2384
ZB2BY2387
ZB2BY2338
ZB2BY2369
ZB2BY2342
ZB2BY2341
ZB2BY2503
ZB2BY2321
ZB2BY2381
ZB2BY2380
ZB2BY2365
ZB2BY2310
ZB2BY2336
ZB2BY2337
ZB2BY2372
Text a
Off
On
Off On
Open
Open Close
Open-O-Close
Out
Power On
Raise
Reset
Reverse
Right
Run
Slow
Start
Stop
Stop Start
Trolley Right
Trolley Left
Up
Up Down
Up-O-Down
Catalog number
ZB2BY2312
ZB2BY2311
ZB2BY2367
ZB2BY2313
ZB2BY2376
ZB2BY2388
ZB2BY2339
ZB2BY2326
ZB2BY2335
ZB2BY2323
ZB2BY2306
ZB2BY2309
ZB2BY2334
ZB2BY2327
ZB2BY2303
ZB2BY2304
ZB2BY2366
ZB2BY2345
ZB2BY2346
ZB2BY2307
ZB2BY2370
ZB2BY2389
a All nameplates are black w/white lettering except “Stop”, “Emergency Stop” and “Reset” which are red w/white lettering.
For black “Reset” change final digit of catalog number to 2.
Type
PVC blank legend
PVC custom engraved
Blank
Blank
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Special engravingj
Description
Black or red background-30 mm x 40 mm
Yellow or white background-30 mm x 40 mm
Black background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm
Red background, white letters-30 mm x 40 mm
White background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm
Yellow background, black letters-30 mm x 40 mm
Catalog number
ZB2BY2101
ZB2BY4101
ZB2BY2002
ZB2BY2004
ZB2BY4001
ZB2BY4005
j Please specify lettering when ordering. Two lines with 11 characters (including spaces) maximum on each line.
166
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Order Form
XACA Order guide instructions
Custom built pendant stations
1.
The first step in putting together your pendant station is to determine the number of operators that you require. This enables you to choose the
enclosure based on the number of holes needed.
2.
Select the type of operator, contact block and appropriate nameplate for each function required from pages 163-166. Enter the components
for each function on the order form below.
3.
Check for special functions that may be required. These items could include mechanical interlocks, adapters for self-supporting cab le, lower
support rings, protective guards etc.
TO BE COMPLETED BY SQUARE D
Name
TO BE COMPLETED BY CUSTOMER
Branch/Sales office
Firm
Delivery date
Date
Sheet No.
14
Date
Order No.
No. of
identical units
required
Functions
(optional)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Unit
reference
of enclosure
Mechanical
interlock
(draw a line
between the 2
units to be
interlocked★)
Cust. Order No.
Delivery date
XACA
Legends
Contact blocks
and pilot light
bodies
push button
pilot light or
blanking plug
1
2
3
4
5
13
6
15
7
8
16
9
10
17
11
12
* Mechanical interlock
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
3
4
★ Mechanical interlock XACA009
Number of XAC A009 required
Unit mounted in base of station (facing downwards)
13
2
3
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
Possible
combinations
Impossible
combinations
Attachments
Cross the
appropriate
box if required
Position
Type
14
Adapters for self supporting cable type BBAP
(only available with 8 to 26 mm dia. cable sleeve)
XACB961
15
Lower support ring
XACA971
16
Protective guard for base mounted selector switch
or 40 mm emergency stop push button
XACA982
17
Protective guard for key switch
XACA983
Photocopy this form and complete all information.
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Catalog No.
167
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XACA — Pendant Stations
Dimensions
General purpose type
XACA
●●●●
General
purpose type
Small hoist type
XACA201
Small hoist typeand A205
XAC A201 and A205
XAC A••••
Internal dia.
9 to 13 mm
Internal dia.
8 to 10 mm
11 to 14 mm
15 to 17 mm
18 to 22 mm
8.5
216
10.87
276
22 to 26 mm
1.9
48
A
1.66
42
1.97
50
B
2.36
60
Small hoist
XACD
XACD
Small Hoist
inner dia.
7 to 9 mm
10 to 12
13 to 15
16 to 18
8 mm dia.
2.75
70
3.55
90
11.83
300.5
3.15
80
1.3
33
9.45
240
XAC A982
.35
8
1.1
28
3.15
80
XAC A983
3.97
101
3.23
82
.79
20
3.58
91
2.25
57
XAC A971
3.15
80
No. of
Holes
IN/mm
A
B
2
IN
3
mm
IN
4
mm
IN
6
mm
IN
8
mm
IN
12
mm
IN
mm
15.00 380 15.00 380 17.33 440 19.70 500 22.10 560 26.78 680
7.50 190
7.50 190
9.85 250 12.20 310 14.57 370 19.30 490
168
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
Specifications
Specifications
Electrical ratings
Types SKRU2 - SKRU5: AC - Nema B300 DC - Nema P600
Types SKRU1, 10, 11: AC - Nema A600: DC - Nema P600
Enclosure type
UL Type 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, and 13
Operating temperature
- 30 °C to + 60 °C
- 13 °F to + 140 °F
Housing material
Polycarbonate
Storage temperature
- 40 °C to + 70 °C
- 40 °F to + 158 °F
Cable entry
1/2 inch NPT
Approvals
File E42259
CCN NKCR
File LR 25490
Class 3211 03
Marking
For Declaration of Conformity, see page 229.
Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU2 Through SKRU5)❋
AC – NEMA Type B300
Inductive
35% Power Factor
Volts▲
120
240
Make
Resistive
75% Power Factor
Amps
VA
Amps
Break
VA
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
Make, Break and
Continuous Carrying
Amperes
30
15
3600
3600
3
1.5
360
360
5
5
5
5
Electrical Contact Ratings (Types SKRU1, 10 and 11)❋
AC – NEMA Type A600
DC - Standard Duty - NEMA P600
Inductive
35% Power Factor
Volts❋
120
240
480
600
▲
Inductive
and
Resistive
Resistive
75% Power Factor
Make Amperes
Break Amperes
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
Make, Break and
Continuous
Carrying Amperes
60
30
15
12
6
3
1.5
1.2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Volts
120
240
600
Make and
Break Amperes
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
1.1
0.55
0.2
10
10
10
OSHA Regulation, Section 1910.170 Overhead and Gantry Cranes, limits the voltage at pendant push buttons to 150 Vac or 300 Vdc.
169
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
Application Data and Order Information
This line of pendant stations consists of polymeric enclosures
(2 through 10 units), push button units (1 through 5 speed) and
laminated legend plates. All enclosures have an extra single
unit space near the top which permits the installation of a toggle switch ➀, a Type SK operator or pilot light ➁ or a warning
label. All enclosures come with a stainless steel hanger bracket and internal strain relief post, as standard. Enclosures are
yellow and have a threaded opening in the top. The complete
line is UL Listed and CSA Certified with NEMA Type environmental ratings 1, 3, 4, 4X and 13.
LIFETIME
ENCLOSURE
WARRANTY
Enclosures
Enclosure For
Assembled Station●
Size
Conduit Entrance
Size
Enclosure Only▲
Type
Type
2 Button
4 Button
6 Button
8 Button
10 Button
3/ "-14 NPT
4
3/ "-14 NPT
4
1"-111/2 NPT
1
1 /4"-111/2 NPT
11/4"-111/2 NPT
SKYP2
SKYP4
SKYP6
SKYP8
SKYP10
SKYP20
SKYP40
SKYP60
SKYP80
SKYP100
Class 9001 SK push-to-test pilot lights and remote test pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures.
● Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators and legend plates. The
price of the total station consists of the prices of the individual components - there is no
charge for assembly. All custom orders must include the pendant key sheet available as
shown on page 173.
Threaded conduit hole
▲
Legend Plates
Hanger bracket (Part no. 6509101801)
Where Used
Space for toggle switch, a type SK operator or pilot light. Use
appropriate legend plates.
For SKRU1
through
SKRU11
With Toggle
Switch➀ in
Top Space of
Enclosure
Blank
Off-On
On-Off
Specify Marking
SKN500 ➂
SKN544 ➂
SKN545 ➂
SKN599 ➂
Type SKN2 legend plate
Push Button Units
Number of
Buttons
Per Unit
Type ✻
7
SKRU1
5
SKRU10
2
Single Speed –
Momentary Interlocked
Single Speed –
Momentary Non-Interlocked
Single Speed –
Maintained Interlock
10
SKRU11
2
Two Speed –
Momentary Interlocked
87
SKRU2
2
Three Speed –
Momentary Interlocked
88
SKRU3
2
Four Speed –
Momentary Interlocked
89
SKRU4
2
Five Speed –
Momentary Interlocked
90
SKRU5
2
2
✻
Description
Contact
Symbol –
See Below
Type
SKN200➄
SKN201
SKN202
SKN203
SKN204
SKN205
SKN206
SKN207
SKN208
SKN209
SKN210
SKN211
SKN299➄
Type SKYP enclosure
Type SKRU1 through SKRU11 operators. Any Type SK pilot
light▲ or operator can be mounted in this enclosure. The
enclosure depth will accommodate 1 Type KA1 thru KA6 (total
of 2) contact blocks.
Marking
Blank-Blank
Hoist: Up-Down
Trolley: East-West
Trolley: Fwd.-Rev.
Trolley: North-South
Bridge: Fwd.-Rev.
Bridge: East-West
Bridge: North-South
Start-Stop
Reset-Stop
Aux Hoist: Up-Down
Power: On-Off
Specify Marking
Blank
SKN100 ➃
On
SKN103
Off
SKN104
Emerg. Stop
SKN105
Run
SKN124
Power On
SKN138
Off-On
SKN144
Specify Marking
SKN199 ➃
➀ Can be supplied by Square D as Class 9001 Type SKSTS1- includes boot for NEMA Type
4X.
➁ See Class 9001 Type SK on page 171.
➂ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be used with toggle switch.
➃ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red background on a black core.
➄ 19 characters each side max.
With
Type SK
Operator or
Pilot Light➁
in Top Space
of Enclosure
Closing Plate
Type
Types SKRU 1, 10 and 11 use Type KA contact blocks. Types SKRU 2 thru 5 are factory
enclosed contact blocks.
SK52
Multispeed Contact Symbols (“X”= Contact Closed)
SPEED POSITION
OFF
1 2
2 1
Terminals
C
Terminals
C
1
2
Terminals
SPEED POSITION
OFF
1 2 3
3 2 1
Single Speed Contact Symbols
Terminals
C
C
1
1
1
2
2
2
2868-D30
3
87
3
7
2868-D29
5
10
88
Terminals
C
SPEED POSITION
OFF
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4
Terminals
C
1
1
2
2
3
3
Terminals
C
SPEED POSITION
OFF
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
Terminals
C
Dimensions ........................................................................................... Page 172
Key Sheet for Custom Assembled Pendant ........................................... Page 173
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
4
4
2868-D31
89
2868-D32
90
170
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SK — Operators
Application Data and Order Information
Non-illuminated
Description
Color
Catalog
2 Position
Red
SKR9R
Maintained Pull
Red (1)
Maintained Push
Color
(2) Other Color
Codes
Black
B▲
Red
R
Green
G
SKR9R05
(2)
SKR9 (2)
(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.
See note (3) below for additional options.
Blue
L
Yellow
Y
White
W▲
Orange
S
Clear
C
Amber
A
▲ These colors are not available on illuminated
push buttons.
Contact Blocks (3)
Illuminated
Description
Description
Color
Voltage
2 Position
Red
120 Vac/dc - Full Voltage
Symbol
Catalog
Catalog
SKR9P58R
KA1
Maintained Pull
Red (1)
24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage
SKR9P55R05
Maintained Push
(2)
24 Vac/dc - Full Voltage
SKR9P55 (2)
(Clear Cover)
KA3
(1) Red knob available with “Push Emergency Stop” printed on the red knob.
See note (3) below for additional options.
(Red Cover)
Shallow Depth Light Modules For Type SK Control Units
Both N.C. contacts are direct opening.
• UL listed and CSA certified
• LED light modules use lamp with 7 element LED cluster that provides illumination similar to incandescent illumination.
• LED light modules require the color cap color and the LED color be the same or use a clear color cap.
Voltage
Description
For Use With Single Lamp
Ill. Operators as
Indicated ➀
Light
Module Type
No.
Voltage
Assembly
Code
Rating
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
24-28 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
110-120 Vac-dc
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
Full Voltage
LED Red
LED Green
LED Yellow
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
KM55
KM55LR
KM55LG
KM55LY
KM58
KM58LR
KM58LG
KM58LY
55
55LR
55LG
55LY
58
58LR
58LG
58LY
1.2 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
3.0 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
0.5 VA
Replacement Lamps
Lamp Number
Lamp Part
(ANSI)
Number
757
2550101002
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
120MB
2550101027
6508805204
6508805206
6508805205
➀ 9001 SK
Maximum Current Ratings For Control Circuit Contacts – Types KA1-KA6, KA21-25, KA31-35, KA1G-KA6G
AC
DC
Inductive (NEMA Type A600)
35% Power Factor
Volts
120
240
480
600
Make
Break
Amperes
VA
Amperes
VA
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
60
30
15
12
7200
7200
7200
7200
6.0
3.0
1.5
1.2
720
720
720
720
10
10
10
10
Resistive 75%
Power Factor
Make, Break
and Continuous
Amperes
10
10
10
10
Inductive and Resistive (NEMA Type P600)
Volts
125
250
600
Make and Break
KA1
KA2
KA3
KA4
KA5
KA6
Continuous
Carrying
Amperes
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
0.55
0.2
1.1
–
–
1.1
0.55
0.2
10
10
10
(3) For additional Type SK push button operators (illuminated and non-illuminated), light modules, and contact blocks, see document 9001CT9601: 30mm Push Buttons Type K and SK. All illuminated push button operators must use a shallow depth light module listed above. Only standard pilot lights and non-illuminated selector switches can be used in Type SKYP enclosures.
171
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions
“A” Dimensions
Units
Inches
Conduit Opening
mm
NPT
2
11.70
297
3/
4
16.03
407
3/
6
20.36
517
1” -11 1/2
8
24.69
627
11/4” -111/2
10
29.02
737
11/4” -111/2
4” -14
4” -14
Type SKYP
Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot Lights and Remote Test
Pilot Lights will not fit in these enclosures.
Standard Pilot Lights will fit in these enclosures. For illuminated
operators, in the SKYP, the shallow depth light module
(9001KM55 or 9001KM58) must be used.
"A"
2.15
See Chart for NPT Size
3.19
81
54.48
2.32
59
4.38
111
2.12
54
4.79
122
4.33
110
7.37
187
4.00
102
2.68
68
D65075-140B
3.49
89
3.31
84
Dual Dimensions:
Inches
Millimeters
2.04
52
3.50
89
Type SKYP
Type SKYP
172
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9001, Type SKYP — Pendant Stations
Order Form
KEY SHEET FOR ORDERING CLASS 9001 TYPE SKYP
ASSEMBLED PENDANT CONTROL STATIONS
Control Products
CUSTOMER
CUSTOMER ORDER NO.
DATE
LIST PRICE EACH, DIB
QUANTITY
Class
Operator or Closing Plate.
Example - SKRU1
2.
Legend Plate Type Number
Example - SKN201
3.
Legend Plate Marking ▲
– Used Only if Special Marking is Required
Example:
Line 2 - SKN299
Line 3 - A.) Hoist
B.) FWD
C.) REV
A
2 Button
3/
4” -14
NPT
SKYP20
3/
4” -14 NPT
SKYP40
6 Button
1” -14 NPT
SKYP60
8 Button
11/4” -11 1/2
SKYP80
10 Button
11/4” -11 1/2
SKYP100
Where Used
Contact
Symbol
Type
SKRU1
2
Single Speed - Momentary
Interlocked
7
2
Single Speed - Momentary
Non-Interlocked
5
SKRU10
2
Single Speed - Maintained
Interlocked
10
SKRU11
2
Two Speed - Momentary
Interlocked
87
SKRU2
2
Three Speed - Momentary
Interlocked
88
SKRU3
2
Four Speed - Momentary
Interlocked
89
SKRU4
2
Five Speed - Momentary
Interlocked
90
SKRU5
Type
SK52
3
A)
B)
C)
1
3
Marking
Type
Blank-Blank
Hoist: Up-Down
Trolley: East-West
Trolley: Fwd.-Rev.
Trolley: North-South
Bridge: Fwd.-Rev.
Bridge: East-West
Bridge: North-South
Start-Stop
Reset-Stop
Specify Marking
SKN200➃
SKN201
SKN202
SKN203
SKN204
SKN205
SKN206
SKN207
SKN208
SKN209
SKN299➃
With Toggle
Switch ➀ in
Top Space of
Enclosure
Blank
Off-On
On-Off
Specify Marking
SKN500 ➁
SKN544 ➁
SKN545 ➁
SKN599 ➁
With Type SK
Operator ▲
or Pilot Light
in Top Space
of Enclosure
Blank
On
Off
Emerg. Stop
Run
Power On
Off-On
Specify Marking
Specify Marking
(Red Background)
SKN100 ➂
SKN103
SKN104
SKN105
SKN124
SKN138
SKN144
SKN199 ➂
SKN199R ➂
For SKRU1
through
SKRU11
A)
B)
C)
1
2
3
A)
B)
C)
1
2
3
A)
B)
C)
1
2
3
A)
B)
LEGEND PLATES – NEMA 4X, 13
PUSH BUTTON UNITS – NEMA 4X, 13
CLOSING PLATE
2
Type SKRU1 through
SKRU11 operators.
Type SKN2 legend
plate
▲ Assembled pendant stations consist of an enclosure, operators, and legend
plates. The price of the total station consists of the prices of the individual
components – there is no charge for assembly.
Description
1
2
Type
4 Button
3
Hanger bracket
Threaded conduit
hole
Space for toggle
switch ➀, a Type SK
operator or pilot light
or a warning label.
Use SKN5 or SKN1
legend plates.
Type SKYP enclosure
Enclosure
for Assembled
Station ▲
Conduit
Entrance
Size
2
1 SKRU1
2 SKN201
3
C
SKYP -________
Space for toggle switch ➀, a
Type SK operator or pilot light,
or a warning label. Use SKN-5
or SKN-1 legend plates.
1
1 SKRU1
2 SKN201
3
B
ENCLOSURES – NEMA 4X, 13
Number of
Buttons per
Unit
Type
TYPE NUMBER KEY
When operator and legend plate
use 2 adjacent holes - specify
same in both locations. Example:
1.
Size
9001
C)
1
2
3
Type SKRU1
through SKRU 11
operators or Type
SK operators and
Type SKN-2 legend plate.
A)
B)
C)
1
2
3
A)
B)
C)
1
2
3
A)
B)
C)
1
2
3
A)
B)
C)
➀ Can be supplied by Square D as 9001SKSTS1
➁ Includes legend plate, gasket and ground plate to be
used with toggle switch.
➂ Tri-laminated legend plate having a yellow or red
background on a black core.
➃ 19 characters each sides.
▲ Class 9001 Type SK Push-To-Test Pilot lights and Remote Test Pilot lights will not fit in these enclosures.
1
2
3
A)
B)
C)
173
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
174
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type XVA Indicating Banks and Beacons
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 181-182
XVAL Single Stage Indicating Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
XVAC Indicating Bank Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Prewired Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
LED Cluster Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179-180
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181-182
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
General Description
The XVA indicating bank is an illuminated
stackable modular system of signaling lights
that can be used for indicating the status of a
machine and verifying that status from a distance and in all directions (360°). The modular
system of lenses allows the unit to be constructed from any combination of 1 to 5 lenses. Constant, flashing and strobe units are available.
Examples: Indicates machine shutdown, shortage of materials, paging of supervisor or maintenance personnel, hazardous or dangerous
conditions to name a few. It is a perfect solution
for status indication on factory floors utilizing
JIT methods.
Machines, instrument panels and work stations
equipped with the XVA allow personnel to react
more quickly to any situation or incident.
Some industries that currently use or could use XVAs:
Automotives
OEMs
Electronics
Garment
Pharmaceuticals
Publishing
Textiles
Agriculture
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One complete single stage beacon or components consisting of 1 to 5 lenses forming an indicating bank.
Five colors to select from: green, red, orange, blue and
clear.
Signal can be continuous, flashing or strobe.
Visible from a distance and on a 360° radius.
Shock and vibration resistant.
One common base for 1-5 lenses, only one cable entry
required.
Aluminum tubes of 4 in. (100 mm), 16 in. (400 mm), and
31.5 in. (800 mm) lengths for extension of column.
Audible signal available
Protective treatment
Standard version, treatment TC “all climates”
Ambient temperature
Storage: -40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
Operating: -13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
Degree of protection
Approval per UL508. Meets NEMA Type 1 and 12
protection, IEC Type IP54
Material
Cover and lenses: polycarbonate
Base: Polyamide
Tube: Anodized aluminum
Gasket: Neoprene
Mounting
•
Canning
Test Equipment
Computer Industry
Food Processing
Robotics
Semiconductor
Machine Tool
•
•
•
Two screws affix base when units are direct mounted or
four screws used for tube and tulip mounted.
The tube and base of column mount directly on the tulip.
All wiring done into saddle clamp screws in the base.
See page 181 for wiring diagram.
Lenses stack on one another by use of a captive screw
through the lens.
Specifications
Typical applications for the XVA include:
Conveyor Systems
Machine Tools
Printing Presses
Retro-fit
Assembly Lines
Textile Looms
Specifications
Industrial Baking Ovens
Automated Paint Booths
Automated Test Equipment
Just-In-Time Manufacturing
Automated Manufacturing Lines
Assembly Work Stations
Rated insulation voltage 250 V
File E164353
CCN NKCR
Approvals
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03 and
Class 3211 07
Marking
For Declaration of
Conformity, see page 226
Lamps
5 W minimum, 7W maximum, length:
1.61" (41 mm) for DL1BA●●● 1.93" (49 mm) for DL1BL●●●
Terminal marking
Terminal marked “O” common to 5 elements and ground
Wiring
Captive terminal with screw saddle clamp,
minimum capacity:2 size #18 AWG series
maximum capacity: 2 size #12 AWG series
176
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVAL — Indicating Banks and Beacons
Single Stage Indicating Beacon
Indicating Beacons
Description
Signal
Steady light
lamp type BA15d
(not supplied)
≤ 240 Vac/dc
Standard flashing light
lamp type BA15d
(not supplied)
24 V - 240 Vac only (±
10%)
XVAL471
(One circuit only)
(1) XVAC211
Base + cover
Complete assembly
comprising:
1 cover
1 illuminated lens unit
1 base
Strobe light
(integral discharge tube)
24 Vdc, 260 mA max.
Strobe light
(integral discharge tube)
110-120 Vac, 110 mA
50-60 Hz
XVAC09
Strobe light
(integral discharge tube)
220 Vac (± 10%), 80 mA
50-60 Hz
XVAC01
XVAC11
Color
XVAL331
Red
XVAL341
Orange
XVAL351
Blue
XVAL361
Clear
XVAL371
Green
XVAL431
Red
XVAL441
Orange
XVAL451
Blue
XVAL461
Clear
XVAL471
Green
XVAL73C024
Red
XVAL74C024
Orange
XVAL75C024
Blue
XVAL76C024
Clear
XVAL77C024
Green
XVAL73B120
Red
XVAL74B120
Orange
XVAL75B120
Blue
XVAL76B120
Clear
XVAL77B120
Green
XVAL73A220
Red
XVAL74A220
Orange
XVAL75A220
Blue
XVAL76A220
Clear
XVAL77A220
Accessories and spare parts for indicating beacons and banks
Type
XVAC02, 027
XVAC03, 037
XVAC04, 047
Accessories
for tube
mounting
DL1B●●●●
Gaskets for
use at point
of mounting
Size/
Type
Voltage
Catalog
Number
4" metal tubes
100 mm
XVAC02
16" metal tubes
400 mm
XVAC03
31.5" metal tubes
800 mm
XVAC04
4" black anodized metal tubes
100 mm
XVAC027
16" black anodized metal tubes
400 mm
XVAC037
31.5" black anodized metal tubes
800 mm
XVAC047
1/2" NPT conduit adaptor
Metallic
XVAC00
Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized
Plastic
XVAC01
Tube support/fixing plate - Black Anodized
Metallic
XVAC11
Wall mounting bracket
Metallic
XVAC12
For direct base mounting
XVAC05
For tube support/mounting plate
XVAC06
For between lenses, base, cover - replacement
XVACO5
Catalog Number
Green
XVAC06
XVAC09
AC or DC
Lamps type
BA15d
Length
XVAC12
49 mm (BL)
41 mm (BA)
2.5 W
12 V
DL1BA012
4W
24 V
DL1BA024
6.5 W
24 V
DL1BL024
4W
48 V
DL1BA048
7W
110 V
DL1BA110
7W
120 V
DL1BL120
5W
160 V
DL1BA160
6W
260 V
DL1BA260
For Additional Lamps see LED Lamps on page 179 and 180.
177
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVAC — Indicating Banks and Beacons
Indicating Bank Components
(Components for variable composition)
Description
Lens unit sub assembly
Signal
Steady light lamp
type BA15d
(not supplied)
≤ 240 Vac/dc
(1) XVAC94
Standard flashing
light lamp
type BA15d
(not supplied)
24 V to 240 Vac
only (± 10%)
+
(1) XVAC341
Lens unit sub assembly
with strobe light (only 1
strobe may be used on
each bank and must be
mounted in the top
position).
+
(1) XVAC331
+
+
Audible sounder sub
assembly (90 db. at
1 meter, 3KHz)
(1) XVAC11
+
(1) XVAC06
+
XVAC331
Red
XVAC341
Orange
XVAC351
Blue
XVAC361
Clear
XVAC371
Green
XVAC431
Red
XVAC441
Orange
XVAC451
Blue
XVAC461
XVAC471
Strobe light
(integral discharge tube)
24 Vdc, 260 mA
max. common
negative (for common positive, take
off digit 1 at the
end of the reference. ▲
Green
XVAC73C0241
Red
XVAC74C0241
Orange
XVAC75C0241
Blue
XVAC76C0241
Clear
XVAC77C0241
Strobe light
(integral discharge tube)
110-120 Vac,
110 mA, 50-60 Hz
Green
XVAC73B120
Strobe light
(integral discharge tube)
220 Vac (± 10%),
80 mA
50-60 Hz
(1) XVAC027
Green
Clear
(1) XVAC211
Base + cover
+
Catalog
Number
Color
Continuous tone
(for common positive
remove digit 1 at the end
Intermittent tone
of the reference
Example: XVAC91)
Red
XVAC74B120
Orange
XVAC75B120
Blue
XVAC76B120
Clear
XVAC77B120
Green
XVAC73A220
Red
XVAC74A220
Orange
XVAC75A220
Blue
XVAC76A220
Clear
XVAC77A220
12 to 48Vdc, 13 mA max.
common negative
XVAC911
110 to 220 Vac, 3.3 mA
XVAC93
12 to 48 Vdc 13 mA max.
common negative
XVAC921
110 to 220 Vac, 3.1 mA
XVAC94
Cover and one to five unit base
XVAC211
Cover only
XVAC081
Base only
XVAC07
Indicating banks are supplied as sub-assemblies, individually referenced and boxed, for assembly by the user. Maximum number of units: 5, including 1 (max.) top mounted strobe.
See page 177 for Accessories and Spare Parts.
▲ Example: XVAC73C024
(3) DL1BL120
Pre-Wired Bases (1)
=
1 example
of a complete
indicating bank
Wire Gauge
Standard Wire (2)
#14 AWG (3)
XVAC211S5
#16 AWG
XVAC211S1
#18 AWG
XVAC211S10
#22 AWG
XVAC211S11
(1) Common and ground wires are provided with all of the above options.
(2) Standard wire provides 2 feet of wire as standard length.
(3) #14 AWG wire cannot be used with tube support/fixing plates (XVAC01 or XVAC11)and
wall mounting bracket (XVAC12).
178
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
LED Cluster Lamps
How to choose between the standard incandescent bulb
and the LED cluster lamp
Use standard incandescent bulb when desiring:
Use upgraded LED cluster lamp when desiring:
extended lamp life (industry average for an LED is approx. 100,000
hrs.) - lamp is normally ON
● resistance to vibration (e.g. direct machine mounting, conveyor
mount, etc.)
● to avoid machine and/or process downtime due to changing lamp,
or if process is complicated to reset
● lower power consumption
● long range cost savings (see table below)
average operating life ≤ 2,000 hours
a universal bulb
– each bulb can be used with any color lens
– Bipolar (e.g. 120 V bulb can be used
with either 120 Vac or 120 Vdc)
● low initial bulb cost for short term cost savings
● bulb is normally OFF
●
●
●
Product Cost Comparison
Lamp Type
Average Life
(approximate)
Miscellaneous
Incandescent
~ 2,000 hours
+ Low initial cost
+ Many color options
+ AC or DC power
- Generates heat
- Prone to shock and vibration
damage
• Maximum brightness
+ Extremely long life
+ Resistant to shock/vibration
+ Cool operation
+ Low power consumption
LED Color
Brightest
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Least bright
Blue
~ 100,000 hours (11.4 years)
LED
“LED Industry Average”
(~50 times life of incandescent)
Illumination
Cost Savings (over 11 years)
$5 List Price/bulb x 50
▲ ($30 cost/P.O.) (2 P.O.'s/yr.) (11yr.)
■ ($5/bulb change) (50 bulb changes)
= 250.00
= 660.00
= 250.00
—————
This price does not include cost of machine or process downtime.
$
$150 List Price/LED lamp x 1
▲ ($30 cost/P.O.) (1 P.O.)
■ ($5/lamp change) (1 lamp installation)
1,160.00
= 150.00
=
30.00
=
5.00
—————
This price does not include savings from
reduced power consumption.
$
185.00
▲ Average P.O. costs $25 - $50 to process; assume bulbs ordered twice each year.
■ Assume maintenance worker rate of approximately $20/hr. or $5/15 minutes to change
bulb.
NEW LAMP/LENS
COMBINATION
FREE LENS!
LED Lamp & Lens Assemblies
Color ▲
(Lamp/Lens)
Voltage
Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers
Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers ●
Indicating Banks and Beacons
Indicating Banks and Beacons
Green/Green
XVACD331B120
XVACD431B120
Red/Red
XVACD341B120
XVACD441B120
Orange/Orange
XVACD351B120
XVACD451B120
Yellow/Yellow ■
120 VAC
XVACD381B120
XVACD481B120
Yellow/Clear ▼
XVACD371B120
XVACD471B120
Lens
▲ Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.
● The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.
■ Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banks
and beacons) with XVAD381B120 (steady light) or
XVAD481B120 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.
▼ Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).
Color ▲
(Lamp/Lens)
Voltage
Steady Unit LED Catalog Numbers
Flashing Unit LED Catalog Numbers ●
Indicating Banks and Beacons
Indicating Banks and Beacons
Green/Green
XVACD331C024
XVACD431C024
Red/Red
XVACD341C024
XVACD441C024
XVACD351C024
XVACD451C024
Orange/Orange
24 VAC/DC
Yellow/Yellow ■
XVACD381C024
XVACD481C024
Yellow/Clear ▼
XVACD371C024
XVACD471C024
Lamp
▲ Yellow lamps can be installed in either yellow or clear bases.
● The flashing circuitry is in the LED lamp, not the lens.
■ Yellow lamp installed in a yellow lens. Order components XVAC381 (for indicating banks
and beacons) with XVAD381C024 (steady light) or
XVAD481C024 yellow (flashing) LED lamp. Lead time based on components.
▼ Yellow installed in a clear lens (both items are in stock).
179
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
LED Cluster Lamps
LED Cluster Lamp Selections ▲
Color
No twisting or
turning–insert
straight in and
click.
LED Cluster Lamp
File E164353
CCN NKCR2
File LR 44087
Class 3211 03
Steady Unit
(Recommended Lens Color)
Voltage
Current
Flashing Unit
LED Catalog No.
Current
● LED Catalog No.
Red
120 Vac
25 mA
XVAD341B120
25 mA
XVAD441B120
(Red)
24 V
AC/DC
AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA
XVAD341C024
AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA
XVAD441C024
Orange
120 Vac
25 mA
XVAD351B120
25 mA
XVAD451B120
(Orange)
24 V
AC/DC
AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA
XVAD351C024
AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA
XVAD451C024
Green
120 Vac
25 mA
XVAD331B120
25 mA
XVAD431B120
(Green)
24 V
AC/DC
AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA
XVAD331C024
AC: 80 mA
DC: 95 mA
XVAD4312C024
Yellow
120 Vac
25 mA
XVAD381B120
25 mA
XVAD481B120
24 V
AC: 80 mA
AC: 80 mA
XVAD381C024
XVAD481C024
AC/DC
DC: 95 mA
DC: 95 mA
▲ These LEDs will not fit in XVA flashing lenses (i.e. XVAC4••) nor in steady lenses manufactured with date codes before 9221 (21st week of
1992
Example of date code before this date would be 9210, 9138, etc.). LEDs will fit into lenses with a two letter date code, e.g. MA, CB, etc.
● The flashing circuitry is in the LED, not the lens.
*Yellow lens is not UL listed.
Note: The LEDs have a separate negotiation category from the standard XVA Line.
(Yellow or Clear)
Product Capabilities
Our new XVA LED Cluster Lamp has passed (and even surpassed) exhaustive testing to ensure the highest level of quality. The following are a few of those tests:
Reliability — predicted minimum mean time between failure (MTBF) of 200,000 hours.
Vibration Resistant — passed the following standard tests: IEC68-2-6: Cycling from 10 Hz
to 55 Hz for 5 minutes, and holding at resonance on 55 Hz for 30 minutes.
Low Power Consumption — Approximately 40% less power dissipation than the incandescent lamp.
Current Regulated — Illumination will not vary in intensity from 85% to 120% of rated voltage.
Leakage Current — Device will not illuminate with leakage current up to 3 mA.
UL Recognized, CSA Certified, with CE Marking
Noise Immunity — Meets requirements of IEC801. Passed the following standard tests:
IEC801-2: Electro-static discharge
IEC801-4: Fast transient burst
IEC801-5: Line-to-line surge withstand
IEC801-5: Line-to-ground surge withstand
Shock Resistant — Passed the following standard test: IEC68-2-27 (30 g, for 11 ms, 1/2 sine
wave).
Shipping Test — Passed National Safe Transit Committee Project 1A Test
Thermal Cycling Test — Passed 35 cycles from -25 °C to 75 °C (one cycle = -25 °C
to +75 °C to -25 °C in 1 hr.)
Salt Spray Test — Passed (96 hours). Test = 96 hours of direct spray.
Immune to interference from portable communication devices.
Storage Temperature -40 °C to + 70 °C (-40 °F to + 158 °F)
Operating Temperature -25 °C to + 55 °C (-13 °F to + 158 °F)
180
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
Dimensions
Indicating beacon, 1 stage
Tube length
2.7
69
4.2
107
4.2
107
b
dia.
.98
25
mm
in.
3.9
100
7.3
186
2.5
mm
63
15.7
400
19.1
486
14.3
363
31.5
800
34.9
886
30.0
763
Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81mm) to total stack height.
b
=
in.
Cabling
(base viewed from above)
3rd unit
b1
1.65
42
dia.
2.7
69
mm
2nd unit
4th unit
1st unit
5th unit
.63
16
=
b1
in.
=
2.12
54
=
Indicating bank
Column 1 to 5 stages
Common**
Mounting
with tube
dia.
2.67
68
** “—” pole to “common” terminal
1
2
1.57
40
b
b2
b2
No. of
lenses
1.65
42
=
3
dia.
.98
25
.63
16
dia.
2.7
69
b1
=
=
2.12
54
dia.
2.67
68
4
Tube length
b
b1
b2
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
3.9
100
7.3
186
2.5
63
4.2
mm
107
15.7
400
19.1
486
14.3
363
4.2
107
31.5
800
34.9
886
30.0
763
4.2
107
3.9
100
9.25
238
2.5
63
6.25
159
15.7
400
21.2
538
14.3
363
6.25
159
31.5
800
36.9
938
30.0
763
6.25
159
3.9
100
11.4
290
2.5
63
8.3
211
15.7
400
23.2
590
14.3
363
8.3
211
31.5
800
39.0
990
30.0
763
8.3
211
3.9
100
13.4
342
2.5
63
10.3
263
15.7
400
25.3
642
14.3
363
10.3
263
31.5
800
41.0
1042
30.0
763
10.3
263
=
Mounting
with tube
5
3.9
100
15.5
394
2.5
63
12.4
315
15.7
400
27.3
694
14.3
363
12.4
315
31.5
800
43.0
1094
30.0
363
12.4
315
Note: For strobe unit add 3.19" (81 mm) to total stack height.
Dual Dimensions:
Inches
mm
Wiring Diagram
L1
L2
0 (+)
1
2
3
4
5
181
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Type XVA — Indicating Banks and Beacons
Dimensions
Baseplate 1
Wall Mount Side
4.50
114.3
0.19
5
0.22
5.5
r=
0.17
4.32
0.39
10
0.40
10.5
0.90
22.86
0.53
13.5
65°
30°
0.05
1.27
2.04
51.82
0.059
r=
1.5
0.13
3.30
0.98
25
0.53
13.5
0.28
7.11
2.20
55.88
0.39
10
0.95
24
Inches
millimeters
0.059
r=
1.5
40°
Inches
millimeters
Wall Mount Bottom
2.68
68
Lite Tube
Dia.(Qty.3) 0.23
5.84
1.20
30.5
0.055
1.4
0.055
1.4
0.30
7.62
0.91
23
0.70
17.8
0.53
13.5
1.50
38
0.20
5.08
0.46
11.68
2.04
51.82
1.46
37
0.14
3.56
4.02
102
0.20
5.08
Dia. 0.15
3.81
0.047
@ 45°
1.2
0.43
11
Tubing and Thread Dimensions
Wall Mounting Bracket
To be Drawn
M23 x 2
Wall Mount Front
2.68
68
0.50
12.7
0.26
6.60
0.59
15
0.55
13.97
1.50
38
0.76
19.30
Drilling and tapping of support
0.76
19.30
Dia. (Qty. 2) 0.17
4.32
Dia. (Qty. 4) 0.20
5.08
1.33
43
Dia. 0.90
22.86
4.50
114.3
2.12
54
1.57
40
2.12
54
0.17
4.32
2 size M4 screws
(dia. 4)
1.65
42
2 size M5 screws
(dia. 5)
182
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Class 9003
CONTENTS
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Page
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 2, 3 and 4 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 5, 6 and 7 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Type K Rotary Cam Switch: 8, 9 and 10 Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Type K Instrument Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Type K Rotary Cam Switch Operators and Handles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Accessories and Legends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Type K Rotary Cam Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Type K Rotary Cam Switch Markings and Special Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
The Class 9003 Type K2 rotary cam switch is a versatile means of providing inexpensive logic control. The Class 9003 Type K cam switch is available with:
• Up to 12 switching positions
• Worldwide acceptance
• Attractive operator/handle appearance
• Up to 20 contacts
• Standard or custom configured sequences
A complete rotary cam switch consists of up to four items. This includes the contact block assembly, the operator/handle, a legend (if desired), and any
special accessories (if required).
A. There are two ways of ordering a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch contact block assembly.
1. If the desired contact sequence can be found on pages 185 through 189, order the class and type of the device.
2. If the contact sequence cannot be found on pages 185 through 189, use the keysheet on pages 193 through 195. Indicate the exact contact configuration desired. Devices will be assembled at the factory per this keysheet.
B. Operators/handles are listed on pages 190 and 191. The operator/handle is chosen depending on the application and size of the rotary cam switch.
C. Many operators/handles come standard with a blank legend plate. Separate legends for operators without blank legend plates or when an additional
legend is desired are listed on page 192. Page 194 contains a chart on the maximum characters allowed on all legend plates.
D. All accessories are listed on page 192.
Example – Below is an explanation of the Contact Sequence/Wiring
Diagrams found on pages 185 through 189.
1
6
1. Vertical arrow indicates contact status at 0° (up) handle position.
2. Terminal identification, terminals 1 and 2 are one contact.
3. Contact 3-4 is closed between 2nd and 4th position. The “H” indicates
that the contact does not open while switching from one position to
another.
4. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 4 and 5.
5. Jumpers installed by factory between terminals 2 and 4, 6 and 12, 8
and 10.
6. Horizontal arrow indicates spring return to previous position.
7. Contact 1-2 is open in third position.
8. Contact 1-2 is closed in second position.
9. A “1” in adjacent boxes does not assure that the contact remains
closed while switching between adjacent positions.
10. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 3 to
position 4. This contact is not closed at position 3 or at position 4.
2
2
1
3
5
7
9
11
8
7
3
4
4
9
10
2
4
6
8
10
12
5
5
5
Only an example! – Contact your local Square D Sales Office for conditions on
Spring Return and Jumper options and pricing.
Contact Ratings
The following contact rating charts are to be used in properly sizing a Class 9003 Type K rotary cam switch to a particular application. The UL ratings chart
below reflects the ratings to UL specifications. The UL file is E164864. The Class 9003 Type K2 is UL Listed per guide NLRV. The Class 9003 Type K3
through KA9 are UL component recognized per guide NLRV2. The lower chart is contact ratings per German specification VDE 0660. The CSA file is
LR 44087, Class 3211 03 or Class 3211 05.
UL Ratings
Contact Block
Assembly
Maximum
V
General
Purpose
A
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
300
120
600
600
600
600
600
600
12
20
25
32
45
63
110
195
110V120V
HP
0.5
0.75
2
2
–
–
–
–
Horsepower 1 PH - 2 pole 60 Hz
200V220V440V208V
240V
480V
HP
HP
HP
1
1
–
–
–
–
3
3
7.5
3
5
10
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
550V600V
HP
–
–
7.5
15
–
–
–
–
Horsepower 3 PH - 3 pole 60 Hz
200V220V440V208V
240V
480V
HP
HP
HP
2
3
–
–
–
–
5
7.5
15
7.5
10
20
15
15
30
15
20
40
25
25
60
30
30
75
110V120V
HP
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
15
550V600V
HP
–
–
20
25
40
50
60
75
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Electrical Ratings (VDE 0660)
Rated Cur- Continuous
Current Ith2
rent
Shaft
as
DiLoad
Con- menBreak
tact sions
Switch
Block
In
EnIa
Free closed
AIr
K2
c
In
Free
Air
Utilization
Category
AC1 Ie
c mm
A
A
A
A
6
20
20
16
16
K3
6
32
32
25
32
K4
8
63
63
50
40
K5
8
63
63
50
40
K6
8
80
80
63
63
K7
8
100
100
80
80
K8
8
160
160
125
125
K9
8
250
250
200
200
Rated
Operational Current Ie
Utilization Category
AC1
Utilization Category
AC2 and AC3
Utilization Category
AC3 and AC3
Operational Voltages
1 PH
Rated
InsuMain
240 V 415 V 500 V lation Switches
Volt220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220 V 415 V 500 V 660 V 240 V 415 V 220V 415 V 500 V 660 V
age
kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
A
A
A
V
V
A
A
A
A
4
4
4
6 10.5 14
14 4.5 7.5 2.2
1.3
2.2
2.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4
3
2
660
500
8.5 8.5 6.5
5
4.3 7.5 7.5 7.5 2.5 4.3 6.5 11
12
21 27.5 27.5 7
12
11
11
6
4
3
660
500
15 15.5 12
9
5.5 11
11
11
15
26
34
34
14
24 20.5
–
–
8.5
15
15
15
12
8
6
660
500
22
22
13
8.5
15
15
15
15
26
34
34
14
24
– 12.5 22
22
22
–
–
–
660
500
29
30
23 17.5 –
11
20
20
20
24 41.5 54
54 17.5 30
–
–
17
30
30
30
–
–
–
660
500
39
40 30.5 23
17
30
30
30
30 52.5 69
69
22
38
–
–
26
45
45
45
–
–
–
660
660
59
57
44
33
24
45
45
45
48
83 108 108 35
61 81.5
–
–
32
55
55
55
–
–
–
660
660
85
65
49
34
60
60
60
75 130 170 170 55
95 115 114 85
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
660
660
65
3 PH 3 Pole
1 PH 2
Pole
Rated Operation
Current Ie
Utilization
Category AC11
3 PH 3 Pole
1 PH 2
Pole
For Y q-Starters
Emergency
Stop
Switch
V
V
660
500
660
500
660
500
660
500
660
500
660
660
660
660
660
660
All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
184
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Emergency
Main
Switch
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —
see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
2 and 3 Contacts
4 Contacts
Contact Sequence
Wiring Diagram
1
3
45°
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
Panel Mountingt
Type
Contact Sequence
Wiring Diagram
K2B001S
45°
K2B001UA
45°
K2B002A
K3B002A
K4B002A
K5B002A
K6B002A
K7B002A
K8B002A
K9B002A
45°
2
4
1
3
Switching Angle
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Switching Angle
Panel Mountingt
Type
45°
K2D002S
45°
K2D002UA
45°
K2D003LA
45°
K2D004A
K3D004A
K4D004A
K5D004A
K6D004A
K7D004A
K8D004A
K9D004A
45°
K2D004GA
45°
K2D004NA
45°
K2D004QA
30°
K2D005T
30°
K2D012GA
45°
K2D012NA
45°
K2D012QA
K2B002GA
45°
K2B002NA
45°
K2B002QA
45°
K2B003T
45°
K2B004T
45°
K2B006T
45°
K22C002LA
45°
K2C003A
K3C003A
K4C003A
K5C003A
K6C003A
K7C003A
K8C003A
K9C003A
45°
K2C003GA
45°
K2C003NA
45°
K2C003QA
45°
K2C007T
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
t Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting
contact block assemblies.
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
185
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —
see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
6 And 7 Contacts
5 and 6 Contacts
Contact Sequence
Wiring Diagram
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
12
1
3
5
7
9
11
1
3
5
7
9
11
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
12
45°
K2E005A
K3E005A
K4E005A
K5E005A
K6E005A
K7E005A
K8E005A
K9E005A
45°
45°
45°
2
4
6
8
10
12
2
4
6
8
10
12
45°
45°
Contact Sequence
Wiring Diagram
Type
45°
45°
2
4
6
8
10
12
Panel Mountingt
K2E003WA
K3E003W
K4E003W
K5E003W
K6E003W
K7E003W
K8E003W
45°
2
4
6
8
10
1
3
5
7
9
11
1
3
5
7
9
11
Switching Angle
1
3
5
7
9
11
K2F003SA
K2F003UA
K3F003U
K4F003U
K5F003U
K6F003U
K7F003U
K8F003U
K9F003U
t Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting contact
block assemblies.
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
2
4
6
8
10
11
12
2
4
6
8
10
12
2
4
6
8
10
12
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
12
1
3
5
7
9
11
K2F006A
K3F006A
K4F006A
K5F006A
K6F006A
K7F006A
K8F006A
K9F006A
K2F006QA
1
3
5
7
9
1
3
5
7
9
11
K2E005QA
K2F006NA
2
4
6
8
10
12
1
3
5
7
9
11
K2E005NA
Switching Angle
2
4
6
8
10
12
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
12
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
13
12
14
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
13
12
14
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
12
13
14
Panel Mountingt
Type
45°
K2F013GA
45°
K2F013NA
45°
K2F013QA
60°
K2F013UA
K3F013U
K4F013U
K5F013U
K6F013U
K7F013U
K8F013U
K9F013U
45°
K2F022GA
45°
K2F022NA
45°
K2F022QA
45°
K2G007NA
45°
K2G007QA
45°
K2G007A
K3G007A
K4G007A
K5G007A
K6G007A
K7G007A
K8G007A
186
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —
see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
9 and 10 Contacts
8 Contacts
Contact Sequence
Wiring Diagram
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
Switching Angle
45°
45°
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
13
15
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
13
15
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
45°
30°
Panel Mountingt
K2H004UA
K3H004UA
K4H004UA
K5H004UA
K6H004UA
K7H004UA
K8H004UA
2
4
6
8
10
11
13
15
17
12
14
16
18
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
11
13
15
17
12
14
16
18
Panel Mountingt
Type
30°
K2I009NA
30°
K2I009QA
45°
K2I023GA
45°
K2I023NA
45°
K2I023QA
45°
K2K005SA
K2H008NA
K2H008QA
K2H014GA
45°
K2H014NA
45°
Switching Angle
1
3
5
7
9
K2H004S
45°
45°
Contact Sequence
Wiring Diagram
Type
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
17
10
12
14
16
18
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
17
10
12
14
16
18
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
17
10
12
14
16
18
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
17
19
10
12
14
16
18
20
K2H014QA
K2H032NA
t Contact local Square D Company sales office for ordering information on base mounting
contact block assemblies.
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9
11
13
15
10
12
14
16
45°
K2H032QA
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
187
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequences
and jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —
see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Type
Suggested Operator
and Legend Marking.
See pages 190 –191, 195
for other operators.
K2D023M
KBF1C 4-13
K2D024M
KBF1C 4-10
K2D1049M
KBF1C 4-534
K4D1049M
KBF2F4-534
VOLTMETER
For reading
1 phase to neutral
and 3 phase to
phase voltages
with off position
K2E025M
KBF1C 4-11
VOLTMETER
For reading
3 phase to phase
voltages of two
different supplies
with off position
K2H026M
KBF1C 4-12
K2F1050M
KBF1C 4-14
or
KBF1C 4-535
K4F1050M
KBF2F4-535
K2D1047M
KBF1C 4-536
K4D1047M
KBF2F4-536
Description
VOLTMETER
For reading
3 phase to
neutral voltages
with off position
VOLTMETER
For reading
3 phase to phase
voltages
with off position
VOLTMETER
For reading
3 phase to phase
and 3 phase to
neutral voltages
of one supply
with off position
Wiring Diagram
Contact Sequence
AMMETER
For reading the
amperage on three
lines using 2 CT's
with off position
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 190
188
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Class 9003 Type K instrument switches are a specialized form of a control circuit rotary cam switch. These switches have the proper contact sequences
and jumpers to provide measurement of either voltage or amperage of more than one source on one meter.
A complete rotary cam switch consists of: 1) Contact block assembly — see below. 2) Operator/handle — see pages 190 and 191. 3) Legend —
see pages 192, 195. 4) Any required accessories — see page 192.
Typet
Suggested Operator and Legend Marking. See
pages 190 –191, 195 for other operators.
AMMETER/VOLTMETER
Reads 3 current
transformers and
3 phase to neutral
voltages. Without
off position.
K2K1014M
KBF1C 9-14
AMMETER/VOLTMETER
Reads 3 current
transformers and
3 phase to phase
voltages. Without
off position.
K2K1021M
KBF1C 9-14
K2F003M
KBF1C 9-4
K2F1051M
KBF1C 4-536
K4F1051M
KBF2F4-536
AMMETER
Reads 3 current
transformers without
off position.
K2F013M
KBF1C 9-14
AMMETER
Reads 4 current
transformers with
with off position.
K2H004M
KBF1C 6-2
AMMETER
Reads 4 current
transformers without
off position.
K2H014M
KBF1C 9-5
Description
AMMETER
Reads 3 current
transformers with
off position.
Wiring Diagram
Contact Sequence
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136
Contact Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-136
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 14-142
189
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches. These are single hole mounting, and are mounted in a
22mm (7/8 inch) diameter mounting hole. All meet protection category IP-65.
Description
Style
Black
Bezel
Black
Knob
Chrome
Bezel
Black
Knob
Yellow
Bezel
Red
Knob
Knob
KAB1A
KBB1A
--
Keyt
KAB1S
KBB1S
--
Knob
KAA1A
KBA1A
--
Keyt
KAA1S
KBA1S
--
Knob
KAA2B
KBA2B
KCA2L
Keyt
KAA2S
KBA2S
--
Knob
KAC1B
KBC1B
KCC1L
Keyt
KAC1S
KBC1S
--
Knob
KAD1C
KBD1C
KCD1M
Keyt
KAD1S
KBD1S
--
Dimensions
q mm
Bezel – Small square similar to
9001D1 and D2 operators.
Does not include
blank legend plate.
Bezel – Small round similar
to 9001D3 and D4 operators.
Does not include
blank legend plate.
Bezel – Large round.
Does not include
blank legend plate.
Bezel – 45 x 45 mm.
Includes blank
legend plate.
Bezel – 60 x 60 mm.
Includes blank
legend plate.
t Key withdrawal codes.
When ordering a Key operator for a contact block assembly, the switching angle of the contact block assembly must
first be known. From the chart at right, choose the appropriate suffix for the desired switching angle. This suffix is
added to the end of the operator/handle's type number.
Example: 45° switching for 9003KAB1S
KAB1S16
Note: Key is removable in all positions.
Replacement Key is Class 9001Z18.
Angle
Code
30°
45°
60°
90°
Not Available
16
1
6
The following operators/handles are for the Class 9003 Type K2 Rotary Cam Switches with 90˚ switching angle and only two positions.
Description
For Size K2-K3
Bezel – 60 x 60 mm
Mounting – 22 mm
(7/8 inch)
Black Bezel
Black Knob
Yellow Bezel
Red Knob
KAD1X
KCD1Y
Dimensions
mm q
Marked 9-30
(see page 195).
No other markings
available.
q All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195
190
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switch. They are
suitable for panel mounting or base mounting of contact block assemblies. See description below for proper sizing of operators/
handles and contact block assemblies. These operators provide protection category IP-40. See page 192 for gaskets.
Black Legend
Black Knob
Chrome Legend
Black Knob
Yellow Legend
Red Knob
For size K2-K3
Bezel 45 x 45 mm
KAE1B
KBE1B
KCE1L
For size K2-K3
Bezel 60 x 60 mm
KAF1C
KBF1C
KCF1M
For size K4-K6
Bezel 60 x 60 mm
KAF2F
KBF2F
KCF2R
KAG2G
KBG2G
KCG2T
KAG2H
KBG2H
KCG2U
Description
Includes blank
bezel legend
Dimensions
mm a
Mounting
For size K7-K9
Bezel 90 x 90 mm
Includes blank
bezel legend plate
The following operators/handles are for 4 hole mounting of the Class 9003 Types K2 through K9 rotary cam switches with 90˚ switching angle
and only two positions.
Black Operator
Black Knob
Yellow Operator
Red Knob
For size K2-K3
Bezel 60 x 60 mm
KAF1X
KCF1Y
For size K4-K6
Bezel 60 x 60 mm
KAF2X
KCF2Y
KAG2X
KCG2Y
Description
Dimensions
mm a
Mounting
For size K4-K9
Bezel 90 x 90 mm
Marked 9-30 (see page 195) No other markings available.
a All dimensions are in millimeters (mm). To convert to approximate inch dimensions, divide mm by 25.4.
Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 184
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 192, 195
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 192
191
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Description
Type
Description
Number of
Contacts
Shrouds
Type
For large round bezel. See page 190 to
determine size of operators
For K2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8
12
16
20
KZ35
KZ36
KZ37
KZ38
KZ39
Holder with blank legend
Blank legend only
9001 01V
For K3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8
KZ53
KZ54
Empty holder only
KZ34
For K4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6
KZ58
KZ59
For K6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6
KZ59
KZ75
For K7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6
KZ60
KZ61
For K8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6
KZ61
KZ63
For K9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
KZ64
Ring Nut Wrench –
for use with all operators/handles listed on
page 190.
KZ33
Additional legend for 45 x 45 mm bezel operators. See page 190 to determine size of
operator.
Holder with blank legend
KZ13
Blank legend only
KZ76
Empty holder only
KZ14
Additional legend for 60 x 60 mm bezel operators. See pages 190-191 to determine size of
operator.
9001Z01
Holder with blank legend
KZ15
Blank legend only
KZ77
Empty holder only
KZ16
Blank legend plate
bezel inserts
Gasket used with operators/handles listed
on page 191 to provide IP-65 protection –
for panel mounting contact block
assemblies.
45 x 45 mm
KZ65
60 x 60 mm
KZ66
90 x 90 mm
KZ67
For small square bezel. See page 190 to
determine size of operator.
Holder with blank legend
900101Q
Blank legend only
900101W
Empty holder only
9001Z15
900101R
Blank legend only
900101W
Empty holder only
9001Z16
Replacement ring nut for all operators/
handles listed on page 190.
Color
Black
Silver
Yellow
KZ17
KZ18
KZ19
60 x 60
60 x 60
60 x 60
Black
Silver
Yellow
KZ20
KZ21
KZ22
90 x 90
90 x 90
90 x 90
Black
Silver
Yellow
KZ23
KZ24
KZ25
Description
Replacement Knobs
for K2-K3 Operators
For small round bezel. See page 190 to
determine size of operator.
Holder with blank legend
Size
45 x 45
45 x 45
45 x 45
Handle
Codet
Color
Length
(d)
Type
A
B
C
D
L
M
N
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
29 mm
34 mm
42 mm
57 mm
34 mm
42 mm
57 mm
KZ26
KZ27
KZ28
KZ29
KZ41
KZ42
KZ43
F
G
H
R
T
U
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
42 mm
57 mm
116 mm
42 mm
57 mm
116 mm
KZ44
KZ46
KZ48
KZ45
KZ47
KZ49
Replacement Knobs
K4-K9 Operators
KZ30
t
Last letter of the “operator/handle” type number is the “handle code.”
192
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Instructions
Explanation Of Example Below
1. Choose the chart below with the switching angle as determined on the
key sheet. This identifies the angular location and the position numbers
for the various positions of the rotary cam switch. Zero degrees or
straight up is always position 1. Use these position numbers when
completing the target table on page 194.
2. Terminals on the cam switch have the same numbers as the terminal
numbers on the target table. Contact 1-2 is a single contact.
3. WHEN INDICATING A CONTACT CLOSURE, PLACE “X” WITHIN
THE SQUARE AS SHOWN IN THE CONTACT SEQUENCE
EXAMPLE AT RIGHT.
1. Contact 1-2 is open in all positions but position 2.
2. Contact 3-4 is closed from the 2nd through the 4th position. The
contact does not open while switching from one position to another.
3. Contacts 5-6 and 7-8 overlap between positions 2 and 3.
4. Contact 9-10 is closed in positions 2 and 3. It is open momentarily
while switching between positions 2 and 3.
5. Contact 11-12 closes momentarily when switching from position 2 to
position 3. This contact is not closed in position 2 or position 3.
6. Position 1 is an off position.
POSITIONS
6. Based on the number of contacts, determine the price of the contact
block assembly below. Prices of operators/handles, legend
markings, and any accessories are listed on their respective page(s).
193
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Customer
F.O. NO.
Date
P.O. Number
Qty.
To order custom cam switches:
1. Indicate the contact size at right (9003K2-K9).
Switching Angle
Maximum
Number of Positions
See Ordering
Instructions at left
90°
60°
45°
30°
4
6
8
12
2-3
4-5
6-7
8-12
2. Indicate desired switching angle at right. If the switching angle is not
indicated, the factory will determine the angle from the recommended column of the table on right.
3. Per the example on page 193, fill in target table below.
Contact size
4. Indicate operator/handle type.
5. If operator/handle bezel has legend and legend marking is desired,
indicate legend marking on back of this form.
K____________
Class 9003
Type
Operator/Handle type
Class 9003
Type
______________
Separate legend
Class 9003
Type
______________
Switching angle
______________
6. If separate legend is required, indicate legend type on right and
marking on back of this form.
See page 184 for
Target Table Explanation
TargetTable
Target Table
Positions
Positions
1
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
S
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
17-18
19-20
21-22
23-24
25-26
27-28
29-30
31-32
33-34
35-36
37-38
39-40
194
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Standard Markings
Special Markings
The following legend markings are standard for the 45 x 45 mm and
60 x 60 mm bezel operators. To order one of these size bezel operators
with a standard marking, add the code below of the desired marking as
a suffix to the operator type number. Example: 9003 KBC1B 4-3.
All other legend engraving is considered special. To order, clearly
indicate the position of the desired marking. See below for the maximum
characters allowed on a specially engraved legend.
Rectangular Legends
30° Marking
Legend
Size
For Operator
Size
Maximum
# Characters
Per Position
900101Q
900101R
900101W
26 x 19 mm
–
7
900101V
9003KZ33
37 x 22 mm
–
11
9003KZ11
9003KZ13
9003KZ76
42 x 13 mm
45 x 45 mm
12
9003KZ15
9003KZ77
57 x 27 mm
60 x 60 mm
17
Type
01
01
8
765
3-1
2
3
4
01
9
8
3-2
765
2
3
4
01
2
10
9
3
4
8
765
11 0 1
2
10
9
3
4
8
765
3-4
3-5
3-3
12
10
9
876
3-6
3
4
5
12
10
9
3-7
876
3
4
5
11
10
9
12
876
3-8
3
4
5
12 1 2
3
11
10
4
5
9
876
3-9
3-10
45° Marking
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
0
5
1
2
3
4
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
0
0
0
0
1
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
4-11
1
8
7
6
HAND
AUTO
4-21
1
2
1
4-8
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
4-18
0
0
0
0
0
L1
MIN.
MAX.
AUTO
4-38
2
1
2
3
1
4-51
6
5
2
3
4
1
7
6
4-19
L2
L3
4-44
OFF
2
1
4-10
4-54
5
2
3
4
L1-L2
L2-L3
L1-L3
Type
VOLTMETER
AMMETER
4-534
4-535
4-536
L2-N
L3-N
4-55
4-56
60° Marking
1
0
2
4
6-1
0
1
HAND
AUTO
STOP
START
1
2
3
6-2
6-6
6-8
0
0
0
L1-L2
L1-L2
L2-N
L2-L3
L2-L3
L3-L1
L3-N
L3-L1
L3-L1
0
0
1
0
2
1
2
6-12
6-30
3
6-31
0
1
2
2
1
6-32
1
Legend
Size
Maximum
# Characters
Per Position
KZ17
KAC1B
KAE1B
KAC1S
KZ18
KZ19
KBC1B
KBE1B
KBC1S
KCC1L
KCE1L
45 x 45 mm
42 x 42 mm
3
KZ20
KAD1C
KAF1C
KAF2F
KAD1S
KZ21
KZ22
KBD1C
KBF1C
KBF2F
KBD1S
KCD1M
KCF1M
KCF2R
60 x 60 mm
57 x 57 mm
5
KZ23
KAG2G
KAG2H
KZ24
KZ25
KBG2G
KBG2H
KCG2T
KCG2U
90 x 90 mm
87 x 87 mm
6
1
0
2
6-33
All dimensions in mm. To convert to
approximate inches, divide mm by 25.4.
0
3
2
6-34
L1-N
6-11
1
2
L1-L2
L2-L3
For Bezel
Size
L1-N
2
VOLTMETER
Square Legends
4-20
3
4-59
AUTO
4-43
3-
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
1
2
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
4-9
4-17
AUTO
0
0 1
1
2
1.2
4-7
2
3
0
2
4-16
L1-N
4-58
1
2
3
4-15
2
4-57
4
4-14
4-34
3
7
6
5
3
1
1
2
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
1
2
3
4
4-6
1
2
6
5
0
4-13
HAND
4-23
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
3
0
L1-N
L2-N
L3-N
4-12
2
3
4
5
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
1 2-3 1-2
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
OFF 1
L1-N
0
OFF 1
0
2
0
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
90° Marking
0
0
3
0
1
2
9-1
1
START
9-2
2
4
1
START START
9-3
L3
1
L1
L1
L4
L2
4
0
2
L2
L3
3
9-4
9-5
9-6
2
STOP
START
0
L1
1
1
L2
L3
9-7
9-10
9-14
9-30
Positions of engravable locations on blank legends.
Rectangular Legends
Square Legends
t Maximum number of characters for these positions is one (1) less than the listed maximum in the chart above.
195
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Class 9003, Type K – Rotary Cam Switch
Panel Mount
Contact Block Assembly Depth
Number
of Contacts
K2
Length
at
mm
K3
Length
at
mm
K4, K5
Length
at
mm
K6
Length
at
mm
K7
Length
at
mm
K8
Length
at
mm
K9
Length
at
mm
1-2
52.5
50.5
58.5
64.5
3-4
62.5
63
74.5
86.5
67.5
77.5
120.5
86.5
106.5
5-6
72.5
76
90.5
108.5
192.5
105.5
135.5
264.5
7-8
82.5
89
106.5
130.5
124.5
164.5
–
9-10
92.5
102
122.5
152.5
143.5
193.5
–
11-12
102.5
115
138.5
174.5
162.5
222.5
–
13-14
112.5
15-16
122.5
17-18
132.5
19-20
142.5
t Dimension a for the 9003K2 is for 4 hole mounting operator/
handle. Add 18 mm to dimension a when using single hole
mount operator/handles.
With Shrouds
mm
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
b
48
54
85
85
85
111
111
180
c
26
27
40
40
40
50
50
88
Base Mount
The door interlock mounting radius is the length of the radius between the center of the mounting
hole of the operator/handle and the pivot point (hinge) of the panel front.
196
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and
Operator Interface
Specifiers Guide
MAGELISTM XBT Message Display and
Terminal Products
CONTENTS
Description ....................................................................................................... Page
General Information ............................................................................................. 198
Features and Characteristics ............................................................................... 202
Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH ..................................................................... 204
Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP ................................................... 206
Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE .......................................... 208
Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM ................................................ 210
Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA ................................................... 212
Software and Accessories ................................................................................... 214
XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines ................................................................... 217
Compatibility Tables ............................................................................................. 218
XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility .................................................. 219
Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 220
Technical Documentation .................................................................................... 222
Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E ............................................................. 223
Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M ........................................... 224
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
The MAGELiS XBT is a state-of-the-art industrial operator interface product line. It comprises three families—XBTH message displays, XBTP operator
terminals, and XBTE operator terminals—designed for machine builders, panel makers, and end users.
From a simple 2 x 20 character display to a 24 function key 4 x 40 character terminal, many flexible solutions are available to meet the customer's needs.
MAGELiS XBT products have a unique design—combining good looks, ergonomics, and practicality— providing unsurpassed value in terms of price and
performance. Windows software-based configuration software, simple page concept programming (messages and alarms), and downloadable
communication protocols make the MAGELiS XBT an outstanding choice for globally accepted, low cost operator interfaces.
MAGELiS Operator Terminals
●
Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.
●
Maximize access to information through simple keypad prompting.
●
Allow customization of function keys and front panel.
●
Utilize downloadable protocols for ease of installation and support.
●
Provide LCD and fluorescent displays based on cost and performance needs.
MAGELiS Software
●
Allows design of effective operator messages, prompting, and data entry.
●
Provides simple WYSIWYG configuration tools, on-line help, and examples.
●
Benefits designer with integrated alarming and communication setup.
●
Offer flexible solutions with a wide range of features.
●
Maximizes development with multi-language support.
●
Compliments application training with on-line simulation.
MAGELiS XBT operator terminals meet the requirements of the European Machinery Directive for function keys, symbols, icons, alarm handling, and
ability to structure information. MAGELiS XBT operator terminals carry the CE mark.
European Machinery Directive: 89/655 EEC: Minimum Health and Safety Regulations for the Protection of Machine Operators.
Low Voltage Equipment:
IEC 947-1, General Electrical Requirements
IEC 947-5, Control Equipment and Switching Devices
Other relevant standards met:
IEC 1131, Programmable Controllers
IEC 801, Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial Control Equipment
IEC 255, Electrical Relays
IEC 529, Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures
IEC 68, Environmental Testing
UL 508 : Type 4
CSA C22.2 No. 14 : Type 4
198
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
General Information
Square D, Groupe Schneider is pleased to provide you a complete line of rugged message display terminals. This family of display terminals is available
to meet a host of needs by establishing dialog and simplifying data exchanges between the programmable controller and the operator. With features
ranging from simple message readouts to user-programmable function keys, operators may adjust machine parameters through direct communications.
Some of the key features offered as a part of the XBT line are listed below. XBTs have been designed with the industrial environment in mind.
MAGELiS Message Displays, Terminals, and Configuration Software (XBTH, P, and E)
Refer to page 204
MAGELiS XBT industrial message displays and operator terminals are suitable to most any automation application. The product line can adapt
to almost any control system environment—from nano to micro to larger PLC systems of varying brands.
MAGELiS Message Displays:
●
XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.
●
XBTH: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 4 Service Keys, 4 Function Keys, or No Keys.
●
Store up to 200 messages.
MAGELiS Operator Terminals:
●
XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.
●
XBTP: 2-line x 20 characters - LCD Type, available with 9 Service Keys, 8 or 12 Function Keys.
●
Store up to 400 messages.
●
XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - Vacuum Fluorescent Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.
●
XBTE: 2-line or 4-line x 40 characters - LCD Type, available with 10 Service Keys, 24 Function Keys.
●
Store up to 800 messages.
MAGELiS Windows-based Configuration Software:
●
XBTL1000: Multilingual: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.
●
XBTL1***: Downloadable protocols: Modbus®, Uni-Telway, Siemens, etc.
This family of XBT products is configured through a single, Windows® software-based package, reducing your investment and installation costs.
Message Displays (XBTK, XBTM)
Refer to page 210
The XBTK and XBTM are Square D's single and two line display units. Display units establish one-way communication between the operator
and the machine. Messages contain machine status or fault indication.
●
XBTK: 1-Line x 20 1/2-inch characters.
●
XBTM: 1-Line x 10 1-inch characters, 2-Line x 21 1/2-inch characters.
●
Store up to 600 messages.
Operator Terminals (XBTA)
Refer to page 212
The XBT-A operator terminal establishes two-way dialog between the operator and the machine for monitoring and adjusting system
parameters.
●
1-line display of 16 characters.
●
8-12 Function Keys, 12 Edit Keys, 3 Service Keys.
●
Store up to 250 messages.
As you will see, Square D offers a full range of industrial grade message displays and terminals. From the simple display devices through more
sophisticated operator terminals, Square D can be your single source supplier for message displays and terminals. For specific ordering information
and pricing, contact your local Square D Field Office.
11/97
199
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
General Information
Design of the XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals
XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals
available:
- no operating system
- no protocol
- no application
Product Line
XBTH
XBTP
XBTE
+
+
XBTL1000 configuration software used with
compatible PC to:
- select the XBT-H/P display unit or terminal
- select the protocol used
- design an application on screen
- simulate the functions with the control system
- download the application
XBT-L1000
Compatible PC
UTW
+
+
MOD
SIE
UNI-TELWAY Siemens
Application
Pg 0
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
Pg 3
...
Modbus/Jbus
Design:
- of application pages
- of alarm pages
Pg 1
MACHINE ADJUSTMENT
Pg 2
MAINTENANCE
Pg 3
TEMPERATURE
SPEED
Pg 0
XBTL downloadable communication protocols:
- operating system of downloadable products
- downloadable applications.
Configuration:
- Windows compatible software
- user-friendly
- “WYSIWYG” type entry
(what you see is what you get)
Pg 1
Pg 2
Omron
Modicon
Communication
Message Displays or terminals:
- Automatic execution of commands transmitted
by the PLC
XBTP
TSX07
PLC:
- Programming communication configured
by dialogue table
Dialog Table
200
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
General Information
Presentation
The XBTH/P/E range of message displays and terminals comprise 3 families of products :
•
XBTH display units
- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display
- 2 lines of 20 characters
- With or without function keys
- 128/256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 200
application pages (approx), 256 available alarm
pages
- Optional Printer/Log function
XBTH
• XBTP terminals
- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display
- 2 lines of 20 characters
- Function and service keys
- 256 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 400 application
pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages
- Optional Printer/Log function
XBTP
• XBTE terminals
- Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display
- 2 or 4 lines of 40 characters
- Function, service and alphanumeric keys
- 384 kb Flash EEPROM memory, 800 application
pages (approx), 256 available alarm pages
- Optional Printer/Log function
XBTE
Description
XBTH/P/E message displays and terminals comprise :
Front panel :
2
1
1 2 indicator LEDs
2 Fluorescent or back-lit LCD display
3
5
3 Function keys with LED, and removable,
customizable legend
4 Service keys
4
5 Numeric keys (for XBTP)
Alphanumeric keys (for XBTE)
Rear panel :
- Plug-in terminal block for power supply, 3 screw
terminals (5.08 mm pitch)
- Serial port, 25-pin female SUB-D connector
- Printer port, 9-pin male SUB-D connector
11/97
201
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Features and Characteristics
Message Displays
XBTH
For selection
Display
Operator Terminals
XBTP
Refer to page 204
Operator Terminals
XBTE
Refer to page 206
Refer to page 208
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixels
per character), height 5 mm or LCD
backlit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.
- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to
25).
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixels
per character), height 5 mm or LCD
backlit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.
- 2 lines of 20 characters (scrolling to
25).
Flat membrane keypad with tactile
feedback and 2 mm travel.
- 1 version without keys
- 4 function keys + 1 service key
- 5 service keys
Flat membrane keypad with tactile
feedback and 2 mm travel.
- 8 function keys + 9 service keys
- 12 function keys + 10 service keys +
12 numeric keys
Flat membrane keypad with tactile
feedback and 2 mm travel.
- 24 function keys + 10 service keys +
12 alphanumeric keys
- 1-2 system indicator LEDs
- 0 or 2 service key LEDs
- 0 or 4 function key LEDs
- 2 system indicator LEDs
- 7 service key LEDs
- 8-12 function key LEDs
- 2 system indicator LEDs
- 7 service key LEDs
- 24 function key LEDs
- 1 buzzer
128 kB Flash EEPROM
200 application pages
256 alarm pages
128/256 kB Flash EEPROM
400 application pages
256 alarm pages
384
800
256
400
128
RS232/RS485/RS422
asynchronous serial link
RS232/RS485/RS422
asynchronous serial link
RS232/RS485/RS422
asynchronous serial link
Access to programmable controller
real-time clock.
Access to programmable controller
real-time clock.
Incorporated real-time clock.
RS232 serial link
RS232 serial link
RS232 serial link
UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens
UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens
UNI-TELWAY/Mod Bus/Siemens
Fluorescent green matrix, (5 x 7 pixels
per character), height 5 mm or LCD
backlit (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm.
- 2 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to
25)
- 4 lines of 40 characters (scrolling to
25)
Keyboard
Signalling
Memory
Transmission
Real-time clock
Printer
Protocols
kB Flash EEPROM
application pages - 2 lines/page
alarm pages - 2 lines/page
application pages - 4 lines/page
alarm pages - 4 lines/page
202
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Features and Characteristics
Operator Terminals
Message Displays
XBTM
1- or 2-line display
(configurable)
XBTK
1-line display
For selection
Refer to page 210
14 segment fluorescent green, height
10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.
- 1 line of 20 alphanumeric characters
(scrolling to 40).
Display
Refer to page 210
Memory
Transmission
SRAM with 5 year lithium battery
backup, holding 160 or 180 messages
of 20 characters.
Refer to page 212
Fluorescent green matrix display
(128 x 20 pixels)
- 1 line of 10 alphanumeric characters
(scrolling to 40) height 20 mm,
legible from up to 8 m.
- 2 lines of 21 alphanumeric
characters (scrolling to 2 x 84)
height 10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.
14 segment fluorescent green, height
10 mm, legible from up to 4 m.
- 1 line of 16 alphanumeric characters
(scrolling to 32).
3 operator guide inputs
(external buttons)
27 key keypad with tactile feedback
and 2 mm travel
Numeric models:
- 12 programmable function keys
- 12 numeric input keys
- 3 service keys.
Alphanumeric models:
- 27 alphanumeric input keys
- Flat 12 key keypad (F1 to F12 with
LED) with covering membrane.
Keyboard
Signalling
XBTA
1-line display
(keypad with tactile feedback)
Compact flush-mounting
4 system indicator lamps
1 buzzer
EEPROM cartridge, size 24K:
600 messages of 21 characters
Log RAM with backup:
100 messages of 21 characters
EEPROM holding 100 messages of
16 characters.
Parallel link
RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485 asynchronous serial link
Asynchronous serial link
Built-in and backed up by removable
lithium battery.
Real-time clock
RS 232C serial link
Printer
Protocols
11/97
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/
SYMAX®/MODBUS
203
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH
Type of display unit
XBTH0•2•10 (fluorescent)
XBTH0•1010 (back-lit LCD)
Conforming to standards
IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals
UL File E164866
CCN NRAQ
UL File E164866
CCN NRAQ
Temperature
Operation
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage
-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
-4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
NEMA and UL Type 4
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
NEMA and UL Type 4
Environment
Degree of protection
CSA File LR 44087
Class 2252 01
CSA File LR 44087
Class 2252 01
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing
Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts
(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Material
Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Enclosure
Keypad
Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts
(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Electrical characteristics
Display
Fluorescent green matrix for each character,
(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm
Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),
2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Keys
- 1 version with no keys (XBTH002010)
- 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH022010)
- 5 service keys (XBTH012•10)
- 1 version with no keys (XBTH001010)
- 4 function keys + 1 service key (XBTH021010)
- 5 service keys (XBTH011010)
Voltage
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
Voltage limits
18-30 Vdc
18-30 Vdc
Ripple
25 % maximum
25 % maximum
10 W
10 W
- 1 LEDs (XBTH002010)
- 6 LEDs (XBTH022010)
- 4 LEDs (XBTH012•10)
- 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010)
- 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page
- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
- 1 LEDs (XBTH001010)
- 6 LEDs (XBTH021010)
- 4 LEDs (XBTH011010)
- 128 kb Flash EEPROM, 256 kb (XBT-H011010)
- 200 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page
- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
Log function
Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission
(asynchronous serial link)
RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422
RS 232C/RS 485/RS 422
Downloadable protocol
Multiple (see page 214)
Multiple (see page 214)
Real-time clock
Access to PLC real-time clock
Access to PLC real-time clock
Printer port
(asynchronous serial link)
Relay
RS 232 (XBTH012110)
–
–
–
Connection
Power supply
Plug-in terminal block
3 terminals
Plug-in terminal block
3 terminals
Serial port
25-pin female SUB-D connector
25-pin female SUB-D connector
Printer port
9-pin male SUB-D connector
–
Power supply
Consumption
Operating characteristics
Signalling
Memory
204
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Message Displays - 2 Lines: XBTH
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)
XBTH002010
Download- Possible
able
links
exchange
protocol
Supply
voltage
Refer to
page 214
24
No printer
port
No log
Language
version
Number of
keys
Reference
Vdc
Weight
lb (kg)
Multilingual
No keys
XBTH002010
1.3 (0.6)
4 function keys
1 service key
XBTH022010
1.3 (0.6)
5 service keys
XBTH012010
1.3 (0.6)
5 service keys
XBTH012110
1.3 (0.6)
XBTH012010
Printer
port
and log
24
Multilingual
Display units with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)
Download- Possible
able
links
exchange
protocol
Supply
voltage
Language
version
Number of
keys
Reference
Weight
Vdc
lb (kg)
XBTH001010
Refer to
page 214
No printer
port
No log
24
Multilingual
XBTH021010
No keys
XBTH001010
1.3 (0.6)
4 function keys
1 service key
XBTH021010
1.3 (0.6)
5 service keys
XBTH011010
1.3 (0.6)
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E
XBTX000US
0.4(0.2)
(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documention in French, DE in German, ES in Spanish
and 1T in Italian.
11/97
205
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP
Type of terminal
XBTP0•2•10 (fluorescent)
XBTP0•1•10 (back-lit LCD)
Environment
Conforming to standards
IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals
UL File E164866 CSA File LR 44087
CCN NRAQ
Class 2252 01
UL File E164866
CCN NRAQ
Temperature
Operation
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage
-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
-4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
NEMA and UL Type 4
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
NEMA and UL Type 4
Type of mounting and fixing
Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts
(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts
(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 mm thick)
Material
Enclosure
Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Keypad
Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Degree of protection
CSA File LR 44087
Class 2252 01
Mechanical characteristics
Electrical characteristics
Display
Fluorescent green matrix for each character,
(5x7 pixels) 2 lines of 20 characters, height 5 mm
Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),
2 lines of 20 characters, height 9 mm
Keys
- 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP012010)
- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric
keys(XBTP022•10)
- 8 function keys + 9 service keys (XBTP011010)
- 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys
(XBTP021•10)
Voltage
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
Voltage limits
18-30 Vdc
18-30 Vdc
Ripple
25 % maximum
25 % maximum
10 W
10 W
Memory
- 17 LEDs (XBTP012010)
- 21 LEDs (XBTP022•10)
- 256 kb Flash EEPROM
- 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page
- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
- 17 LEDs (XBTP011010)
- 21 LEDs (XBTP021•10)
- 256 kb Flash EEPROM
- 400 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page
- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
Log function
Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission
(asynchronous serial link)
Downloadable protocol
RS 232/RS 485/RS 422
RS 232/RS 485/RS 422
Multiple (see page 214)
Multiple (see page 214)
Real-time clock
Access to PLC real-time clock
Access to PLC real-time clock
Printer port
(asynchronous serial link)
Relay
RS 232 (XBTP022110)
RS 232 (XBTP021110)
–
–
Connection
Power supply
Plug-in terminal block
3 terminals
Plug-in terminal block
3 terminals
Serial port
25-pin female SUB-D connector
25-pin female SUB-D connector
Printer port
9-pin male SUB-D connector
9-pin male SUB-D connector
Power supply
Consumption
Operating characteristics
Signalling
206
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Operator Terminals with 2-Line Display: XBTP
Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (fluorescent)
Downloadable
exchange
protocol
Number of keys
Funct. Service Num.
Supply Language
voltage version
Vdc
Reference
Weight
lb (kg)
No printer port, no log
XBTP022010
Refer to
page 214
8
9
–
24
Multilingual
XBTP012010
1.8 (0.8)
12
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTP022010
1.8 (0.8)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTP022110
1.8 (0.8)
With printer port and log
Refer to
page 214
12
Terminals with 2 lines of 20 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable
exchange
protocol
Number of keys
Funct. Service Num.
Supply Language
voltage version
Vdc
Reference
Weight
lb (kg)
No printer port, no log
Refer to
page 214
8
9
–
24
Multilingual
XBTP011010
1.8 (0.8)
12
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTP021010
1.8 (0.8)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTP021110
1.8 (0.8)
With printer port and log
Refer to
page 214
12
XBTP021010
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E
0.4 (0.2)
(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanish
and 1T in Italian.
11/97
XBTX000US
207
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE
Type of terminal
XBTE014•10/XBTE016•10 (fluorescent)
XBTE013•10/XBTE015•10 (back-lit LCD)
Conforming to standards
IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
IEC 1131-2, EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
Product approvals
UL File E164866
CCN NRAQ
UL File E164866
CCN NRAQ
Temperature
Operation
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage
-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
-4 °F to +140 °F (-20 °C to +60 °C)
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
NEMA and UL Type 4
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
NEMA and UL Type 4
Type of mounting and fixing
Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts
(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)
Flush-mounted with 4 or 6 pressure mounted bolts
(supplied) (on panel 1 to 6 m thick)
Material
Enclosure
Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
Keypad
Anti-UV treated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
Environment
Degree of protection
CSA File LR 44087
Class 2252 01
CSA File LR 44087
Class 2252 01
Mechanical characteristics
Electrical characteristics
Display
Fluorescent green matrix for each character (5x7 pixels)
- 2 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm
- 4 lines of 40 characters, height 5 mm
Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels),
- 2 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm
- 4 lines of 40 characters, height 9 mm
Keys
- 24 function keys
- 10 service keys
- 12 alphanumeric keys
- 24 function keys
- 10 service keys
- 12 alphanumeric keys
Voltage
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
Voltage limits
18-30 Vdc
18-30 Vdc
Ripple
25 % maximum
25 % maximum
10 W
10 W
Signalling
- 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer
- 33 LEDs + 1 buzzer
Memory
- 384 kb Flash EEPROM
- 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page
- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
- 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page
- 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page
Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
- 384 kb Flash EEPROM
- 800 application pages (approx) of 2 lines per page
- 256 available alarm pages of 2 lines per page
- 400 application pages (approx) of 4 lines per page
- 128 available alarm pages of 4 lines per page
Possibility of storing application and/or alarm pages
Transmission
(asynchronous serial link)
Real-time clock
RS 232/RS 485/RS 422
RS 232/RS 485/RS 422
Yes (incorporated)
Yes (incorporated)
Printer port
(asynchronous serial link)
Relay
RS 232 (XBTE014110/XBTE016110)
RS 232 (XBTE013110/XBTE015110)
0.5 A, 24 Vdc
0.5 A, 24 Vdc
Connection
Power supply and
parallel port
Plug-in terminal block
5 terminals
Plug-in terminal block
5 terminals
Serial port
25-pin female SUB-D connector
25-pin female SUB-D connector
Printer port
9-pin male SUB-D connector
9-pin male SUB-D connector
Power supply
Consumption
Operating characteristics
Log function
208
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Operator Terminals with 2 or 4-Line Displays: XBTE
Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)
XBTE014010
Downloadable
Number of keys
exchange
Funct. Service Alphanum.
protocol
No printer port, no log
Supply Language
voltage version
Vdc
Reference
Refer to
page 214
24
Weight
lb (kg)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE014010
2.2 (1.0)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE014110
2.2 (1.0)
With printer port and log
Refer to
page 214
24
Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (fluorescent)
Downloadable
Number of keys
exchange
Funct. Service Alphanum.
protocol
No printer port, no log
Supply Language
voltage version
Vdc
Reference
Refer to
page 214
24
Weight
lb (kg)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE016010
2.2 (1.0)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE016110
2.2 (1.0)
With printer port and log
XBTE016010
Refer to
page 214
24
Terminals with 2 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable
Number of keys
exchange
Funct. Service Alphanum.
protocol
No printer port, no log
Supply Language
voltage version
Vdc
Reference
Refer to
page 214
24
Weight
lb (kg)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE013010
2.2 (1.0)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE013110
2.2 (1.0)
With printer port and log
XBTE013010
Refer to
page 214
24
Terminals with 4 lines of 40 characters (back-lit LCD)
Downloadable
Number of keys
exchange
Funct. Service Alphanum.
protocol
No printer port, no log
Supply Language
voltage version
Vdc
Reference
Refer to
page 214
24
Weight
lb (kg)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE015010
2.2 (1.0)
10
12
24
Multilingual
XBTE015110
2.2 (1.0)
With printer port and log
XBTE015010
Refer to
page 214
24
Documentation (to be ordered separately)
Operating manual (A5 format) for XBTH/P/E
XBTX000US
0.4 (0.2)
(1)
(1) Replace the US at the end of the reference with FR for a documentation in French, DE in German, ES in Spanish
and 1T in Italian.
11/97
209
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM
Type of display unit
XBTK
XBTM
Operation
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage
-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529
Type of mounting and fixing
Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners
Flush-mounting by 2 retractable fasteners
Enclosure
Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black
satin-finish polyurethane paint
Zinc alloy. Front panel coated with black
satin-finish polyurethane paint
Fluorescent green, 14 segment
- 1 line of 20 characters, height 10 mm
Fluorescent green matrix (128 x 20 pixels)
- 1 line of 10 characters, height 20 mm
- 2 lines of 21 characters, height 10 mm
Voltage
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
Voltage limits
18 to 30 Vdc
18 to 30 Vdc
Ripple
25 % maximum
25 % maximum
10 W
25 W
Visual signalling
–
4 system indicator lights
Memory
Messages
SRAM with 5 year lithium battery backup
160 or 180 messages of 20 chars. (depending on model)
EEPROM cartridge
24 K bytes : 600 messages of 21 characters
Log
–
Parallel link
Yes
RAM with lithium battery backup
100 messages of 21 characters
Yes
Asynchronous
serial link
RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485
RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485
Protocol
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY (depending on model)
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY
Real-Time Clock
–
Yes, with lithium battery back-up
Printer link
(Asynchronous serial link)
Relays
–
RS 232C
–
1 N/O contact (min. 1 mA/5 Vdc, max. 0.5 A/24 Vdc)
Cabling
Plug-in terminal block
17 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)
Power supply and relays:
Plug-in terminal block with 5 screw terminals (5.08 mm
Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2
Capacity: 1.5 mm2
Parallel link:
Plug-in terminal block with 17 screw terminals (5.08 mm
pitch)
Clamping capacity : 1.5 mm2
Serial link
SUB-D 25-pin female connector
SUB-D 25-pin female connector
Printer link
–
SUB-D 9-pin male connector
Environment
Temperature
Degree of protection
Mechanical characteristics
Electrical characteristics
Display
Power supply
Consumption
Operating characteristics
Transmission
Power supply and
parallel link
pitch)
210
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Message Displays - 1 and 2 Lines: XBTK, XBTM
1-line display units (1 x 20 characters)
Data
exchange
protocol
Possible links
ASCII
No printer link
ADJUST
No real-time clock
UNI-TELWAY
Supply
voltage
VDC
Language
version
24
Multilanguage
Reference
Weight
lb (kg)
XBTK801010
4.2 (1.9)
XBTK801010
Display units with 1 line (1 x 10 characters) or 2 lines (2 x 21 characters)
XBTM801010
ASCII
No printer link
ADJUST
No real-time clock
UNI-TELWAY No operator guide
24
Multilanguage
XBTM801010
5.3 (2.4)
ASCII
With printer link
ADJUST
UNI-TELWAY
24
Multilanguage
XBTM804110
5.3 (2.4)
Note:
XBTM display units are supplied without a TSXMC70E324 EEPROM memory cartridge. Memory cartridges must
be ordered separately. (Refer to Software and Accessories on page 214).
11/97
211
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA
Type of terminal
XBTA keypad with tactile feedback
Environment
Temperature
Operation
32 °F to +122 °F (0 °C to +50 °C)
Storage
-40 °F to +158 °F (-40 °C to +70 °C)
Degree of protection
IP 65, conforming to IEC 529.
Mechanical characteristics
Type of mounting and fixing
Flush-mounting with 4 retractable fasteners
Enclosure
Front panel
Zinc alloy
Black satin-finish polyurethane paint
Rear cover
Zinc alloy
Function keys
8 to 12 depending on model
Input keys
12
Service keys
3
Alphanumeric keys
26 (alphanumeric model)
Keypad
Electrical characteristics
Display unit (fluorescent/green
14 segment, height 10 mm)
1 line of 16 characters
Power supply
Voltage
24 Vdc
Voltage limits
18 to 30 Vdc (ripple 25 %)
Consumption
10 W
Operating characteristics
Signalling
Visual
0 or 4 user indicator lights (depending on model)
Audible
1 buzzer
Memory
Messages
EEPROM:
100 messages of 16 characters
Transmission
Asynchronous
serial link
RS 232C/CL 20 mA/RS 422-485
Protocol
ASCII/ADJUST/UNI-TELWAY/SYMAX/MODBUS
Real-time clock
–
Printer link
–
Connection
Power supply
Plug-in terminal block
3 screw terminals (5.08 mm pitch)
Clamping capacity: 1.5 mm2
Serial link
SUB-D 25-pin female connector
Printer link
–
212
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Operator Terminals with 1-Line Display: XBTA
Flush-mounting compact terminals, keypad with tactile feedback
Data
exchange
protocol
ASCII
ADJUST
UNI-TELWAY
XBTA801010
Function keys
Number
Supply
voltage
Vdc
Language
version
F1 to F12
24
Multilanguage
XBTA801010
4.3 (1.95)
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA811010
4.3 (1.95)
12 with LED
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA821010
4.3 (1.95)
8+4 indicator
lights
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA831010
4.3 (1.95)
12
without LED
F1 to F12
24
Multilanguage
XBTA301010
4.3 (1.95)
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA311010
4.3 (1.95)
12 with LED
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA321010
4.3 (1.95)
12
without LED
F1 to F12
24
Multilanguage
XBTA401010
4.3 (1.95)
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA411010
4.3 (1.95)
Legend-plate
carrier
24
Multilanguage
XBTA421010
4.3 (1.95)
12
without LED
Marked
Reference
Weight
lb (kg)
SY/MAX
ModBus/
JBus
12 with LED
11/97
213
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Software and Accessories
XBTL software (1)
Description
Compatibility
Language
version
Configuration
and terminal
software
XBT•3
XBT•7/•8
Multilingual (2) DOS
XBTL100
Multilingual
Windows
XBTL900
DOS
XBTL100
Multilingual
Windows
XBTL900
DOS
XBTL400
Multilingual
X-TEL (V4 and V5)XBTL940
XBT•4
XBTL1000
XBT•4/•7/•8
Operating
system
Reference
Weight
lb (kg)
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
(0.65)
(0.65)
(0.65)
(0.65)
(0.65)
(0.65)
Configuration software XBTH/P/E
Multilingual
Windows
XBTL1000
1.4 (0.65)
for display units
and terminals
(1) XBTL software is supplied in an A5 box including a user's guide and one or two installation diskettes : one 5“1/4
and one 3“1/2 (XBTL900), one 3"1/2 (XBTL940/L1000). (2) English, Spanish, French, German, Italian.
Downloadable protocols (for use with XBTL1000 software)
Type of protocol
Allen-Bradley
Omron
UNI-TELWAY
Modbus
Siemens
Compatibility
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
Reference
XBTL1AB01
XBTL1OMR01
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1MOD01
XBTL1SIE01
Weight
lb (kg)
1.4 (0.65)
1.4 (0.65)
1.4( 0.65)
Interfaces
Connection
Link
Compatibility
Mounting
rail
Reference
Weight
lb (kg)
Screw terminals
CL/CL
Any XBT
"
'
XBTZ9011
XBTZ9012
0.3 (0.12)
0.3 (0.12)
CL/RS 232C or
RS 232C/CL
Any XBT
"
XBTZ961
0.3 (0.12)
CL/RS 232C
XBTKL/KN/ML
XBTZ939
0.1 (0.04)
Supply voltage
Compatibility
Reference
24 Vdc/1 A
Any XBT
TBXSUP10
Weight
lb (kg)
0.1 (0.04)
24 Vdc/320 mA
Any XBT
8440 PS24
0.1 (0.04)
Size
Compatibility
Reference
4 Kb
XBTKN/M/ML
XBTZ800004
0.1 (0.04)
16 Kb
XBTKN/M
XBTZ800016
0.1 (0.04)
24 Kb
XBTKN/M/TSX 17
TSXMC70E324
0.1 (0.04)
56 Kb
XBTKN/M
XBTZ800056
0.1 (0.04)
88 Kb
XBTKN/M
XBTZ800088
0.1 (0.04)
120 Kb
XBTKN/M
XBTZ800120
0.1 (0.04)
Use
Compatibility
Reference
For real-time clock back-up
XBTKN/M/TSX 17
TSX17ACC1
SUB-D connector
25-pin/25-pin
DC power supply
Input voltage
100-240 Vac
EEPROM memory cartridges
PS24
XBTZ800016
Weight
lb (kg)
Lithium battery
Weight
lb (kg)
0.04 ( 0.02)
214
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Software and Accessories
Connection cables for XBTH/P/E
Port
RS 232C
Transmission
PC/PS
programming
ASCII
Current loop
RS 485
ASCII
UNI-TELWAY
Plug
Compatibility
Any XBT (3)
Any XBT (3)
Any XBT (3)
Any XBT (1)
Any XBT (1)
Any XBT (1)
Any XBT
Any XBT (1)
Any XBT (1)
Any XBT (1)
Any XBT (1)
XBTH/P/E
Any XBT (1)
Length ▲
8.2 (2.5)
8.2 (2.5)
8.2 (2.5)
8.2 (2.5)
16.4 (5)
6.6 (2)
8.2 (2.5)
5.9 (1.8)
16.4 (5)
16.4 (5)
16.4 (5)
16.4 (5)
8.2 (2.5)
Catalog number
XBTZ915
XBTZ905
XBTZ9052
XBTZ905
XBTZ936
XBTZ933
XBTZ906
XBTZ908
XBTZ918
XBTZ948
XBTZ928
XBTZ958
XBTZ968
Connection
Compatibility
25-pin (male)-RJ45 XBTH/P/E
25-pin male-5 pin XBTH/P/E
male
Length ▲
8.2 (2.5)
8.2 (2.5)
Catalog number
XBTZ915
XBTZ909
Connection
9-pin (male)
25-pin (female)
25-pin (male)
–
Serial printer
XBT/XBTZ961
–
TSXSCA 62
TSXSCM 21•6
TSXP•••425
TSXSCG 1161
TSX17
TSX07/37
(1) Including XBTH/P/E terminals
(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.
(3) For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.
Cables for Open Protocol for XBTH/P/E
Port/Transmission
RS 232/RS 485
RS 232
SUB-D Adaptors for Open Protocol
Adaptor
Female adaptor
Female adaptor
Male adaptor
Male adaptor
Male adaptor
RS232/Current Loop
Connection
RJ45-25 pin female
RJ45-9 pin female
RJ45-9 pin male
RJ45-15 pin male
RJ45-25 pin male
25 pinmale-25 pin
female
Compatibility
XBTZ900
XBTZ900
XBTZ900
XBTZ900
XBTZ900
XBTZ939
Catalog number
XGVSZ2510
XGVSZ0910
XGVSZ0920
XGVSZ1520
XGVSZ2520
XBTZ939
Cables for ModBus Protocol
Port/Transmission
RS 232/RS 485
RS 232/RS 485
RS 232/RS 485
Connection
RJ45-RJ45
RJ45-RJ45
RJ45-RJ45
Compatibility
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
Length ▲
3 (.91)
6 (1.8)
12 (3.6)
Catalog number
110XCA28201
110XCA28202
110XCA28203
SUB-D Adaptors for ModBus Protocol
Adaptor
Male adaptor
Female adaptor
Male adaptor
Female adaptor
Connection
RJ45-9 pin 9male
RJ45-9 pin female
RJ45-25 pin male
RJ45-25 pin female
Compatibility
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
XBTH/P/E
Catalog number
110XCA20301
110XCA20302
110XCA20401
110XCA20402
Mounting rail
–
–
Catalog number
TSXPACC01
TFTXCBP025
Any XBT
–
XBTZ961
XBTH/P/E
–
XBTZ939
▲ feet (meters)
Interfaces
Connection
Dual port connection
Simulation
Current Loop
SUB-D connector
25-pin/25-pin
11/97
Link
UNI-TELWAY
RS 485/RS 232
converter
CL/RS 232C or
RS 232C/CL
CL/RS 232C
Compatibility
TSX07/37
TSX07/37
215
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Software and Accessories
Connection cables for XBTA/K/M
Port
RS 232C
Transmission
PC/PS
Any XBT (4)
Length
ft (m)
8.2 (2.5)
XBTZ915
Weight
lb (kg)
0.4 (0.2)
25-pin (female) Any XBT (1)
8.2 (2.5)
XBTZ905
0.4 (0.21)
25-pin (male)
Any XBT (1)
8.2 (2.5)
XBTZ9052
0.4 (0.21)
–
Any XBT (1)
8.2 (2.5)
XBTZ905
0.4 (0.21)
Serial
printer
XBTM
16.4 (5)
XBTZ936
0.4 (0.2)
XBT/XBTZ961
Any XBT (1)
6.6 (2)
XBTZ933
0.4 (0.2)
XBT/SYMAX
Any XBT
8.2 (2.5)
8010CC108
0.4 (0.2)
ASCII
–
Any XBT
8.2 (2.5)
XBTZ906
0.4 (0.21)
ADJUST
TSX47-40
Any XBT (2)
8.2 (2.5)
XBTZ902
0.4 (0.21)
UNITELWAY
TSXSCA62
Any XBT (1)
5.9 (1.8)
XBTZ908
0.5 (0.24)
TSXSCM 21•6
Any XBT (1)
16.4 (5)
XBTZ918
0.5 (0.23)
TSXP•••425
Any XBT (1)
16.4 (5)
XBTZ948
0.5 (0.23)
TSXSCG 1161
Any XBT (1)
16.4 (5)
XBTZ928
0.5 (0.24)
TSX17
XBTH/P/E (3)
16.4 (5)
XBTZ958
0.5 (0.24)
TSX17
Any XBT (1)
16.4 (5)
XBTZ917
0.5 (0.21)
1.6 (0.5)
XBTZ9171
0.5 (0.21)
ASCII
Current
loop
RS 485
XBTZ902
ADJUST
XBTZ928
Plug
Connection
Compatibility
9-pin (male)
Reference
TSX07/37
Any XBT (1)
0.8 (0.25) XBTZ968
Number
of sheets
1
Use with
Number
of labels
12
24
24
32
0.4 (0.18)
Function key labels
Color
Grey
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
XBTH02•010
XBTP01•010
XBTP02••10
XBTE01••10
Reference
XBLYH4
XBLYP8
XBLYP12
XBLYE24
Weight
lb (kg)
0.2 (0.1)
0.2 (0.1)
0.2 (0.1)
0.2 (0.1)
Including XBTH/P/E terminals.
Add the XBTZ939 module for XBTKL/KN/ML.
XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.
For XBTH/P/E in version V2.2.
216
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
XBT Cable Configuration Guidelines
Cables for connecting XBT terminals and devices/peripherals
Devices
Protocols
Connecting cables
XBT
Z902
(1)
FTX417
FTX507
PC RS 232
tsx07
XBT
Z905
XBT
XBT
Z9052 Z908
XBT
Z915
XBT
Z917
XBT
Z918
XBTZ928
XBT
Z948
XBT
Z968
XBT
Z958
(2)
ASCII
25-pin
(female)
ASCII
25-pin
(male)
ASCII
9-pin
(male)
ASCII
TSX07
Te
UNI-TELWAY
TSX17
ADJUST
TSX 17
TSX
SCG1161
UNI-TELWAY
UNI-TELWAY
TSX47-40
ADJUST
TSXSCM 21•6
UNI-TELWAY
TSXSCA 62
UNI-TELWAY
TSXP•••425 + TSXLES 64
Peripherals
UNI-TELWAY
Links
Connecting cables
XBTZ936
Printer
Serial
XBTM
Connecting cables to be used. Example : XBTZ917 cable to connect TSX17 (ADJUST) PLC with XBT
(1) Add XBTZ939 module (20 mA current loop/RS 232C interface) for XBTKL/KN/ML
(2) XBTH/P/E in UNI-TELWAY master function.
11/97
217
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Compatibility Tables
Compatibility Table for Protocols/Cables for MAGELiSTM
PLC
Series
TELE
XBT Status
Type
TSX07
Terminal Port
Slave
TSX37
Terminal Port
Slave
TSX37
Terminal Port+SCA
Slave
TSX37 + PCMCIA Terminal Port+SCA
Slave
TSX17
Terminal Port
Master
TSX17
TSXSCG 1161
Slave
TSX Series 7
TSXP...425
Slave
+TSXLES 64
TSX Series 7
TSXSCA 62
Slave
TSX Series 7
TSXSCM 21.6
Slave
MODICON
MICRO
MODICON 984
QUANTUM
COMM 1
984 ModBus Port
ModBus Port
SIEMENS
S5-90U
S5-95U
S5-95U
S5-105U
S5-105U
S5-115U
S5-115U
S5-135U
S5-135U
Terminal Port
Port communication
Terminal Port
Module
Terminal Port
Module
Terminal Port
Module
Terminal Port
ALLEN
BRADLEY
SLC500
OMRON
PLC Model
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
Protocol Name
(Part Number)
Unitelway 2.0
Unitelway 2.0
Unitelway 2.0
Unitelway 2.0
Unitelway 1.0
Unitelway 1.0
Unitelway 1.0
Type of
to Install
RS 485
RS 485
RS 485
RS 485
RS 485
RS 485
RS 485
Type of
Physical Layer
DIN
DIN
DIN
DIN
SUB-D
SUB-D
SUB-D
Cable
Connection PLC
XBTZ968
XBTZ968
XBTZ968+SCA62+ACC01
XBTZ908+SCA62
XBTZ958
XBTZ928
XBTZ948
XBTL1UTW01
XBTL1UTW01
Unitelway 1.0
Unitelway 1.0
RS 485
RS 485
SUB-D
SUB-D
XBTZ908
XBTZ918
Master
Master
Master
XBTL1MOD01
XBTL1MOD01
XBTL1MOD01
MODBUS
MODBUS
MODBUS
RS 232
RS 232
RS 232
RJ 45
SUB-D 25 male
SUB-D 25 male
XBTZ900+XGVSZ+Adapt.
XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910
XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
XBTL1SIE01
AS511
3964R
AS511
3964R
AS511
3964R
AS511
3964R
AS511
Current Loop
RS 232
Current Loop
RS 232
Current Loop
RS 232
Current Loop
RS 232
Current Loop
SUB-D 15 female
SUB-D 15 female
SUB-D 15 female
SUB-D 25 female
SUB-D 15 female
SUB-D 25 female
SUB-D 15 female
SUB-D 25 female
SUB-D 15 female
XBTZ939+XBTZ909
XBTZ900+XGVSZ1520
XBTZ939+XBTZ909
XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520
XBTZ939+XBTZ909
XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520
XBTZ939+XBTZ909
XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520
XBTZ939+XBTZ909
Terminal Port
Master
XBTL1AB01
DF1
RS 232
SUB-D 9 male
XBTZ900+XGVSZ0910
PLC5
Terminal Port
–
XBTL1AB01
DF1
RS 232
SUB-D 25 female
XBTZ900+XGVSZ2520
COM1
C200Hx
Terminal Port
Terminal Port
Terminal Port
Master
Master
Master
XBTL1OMR01
XBTL1OMR01
XBTL1OMR01
SYSMAC
SYSMAC
SYSMAC
RS 232
RS 232
RS 232
SUB-D 9 female
SUB-D 9 female
SUB-D 9 female
XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920
XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920
XBTZ900+XGVSZ0920
CV
Connection
Protocol
Chemical Compatibility Table for MAGELiSTM
Resistance of Chemical Agents
ACIDS
Nitric Acid
Sulfuric Acid
Citric Acid
Chloric Acid
ALCOHOLS
Ethanol
Glycol
Methanol
HYDROCARBONS
Hexan
Gasoline, Fuels
Grease
Hydraulic Oils
Cutting Oils
SOLVENTS
Trichlorethylene
Trichlorethane
Acetone
White Spirits
AGRO-CULTURAL PRODUCTS
Vegetable Oils
Animals Fats
Fruit Juices
Milk (Lactic Acid)
Concentration
Temperature
Enclosure
PPO •
Keypad
Polyester
PET ••
10%
50%
10%
50%
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
S
S
S
S
L
N
S
S
100%
100%
100%
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
S
?
L
S
S
L
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
S
N
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
100%
100%
100%
100%
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
N
N
N
L
L
L
L
S
100%
100%
100%
100%
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
+20 °C
S
L
?
S
S
S
?
S
S: Satisfactory for the temperature indicated
L: Limited for the temperature indicated
N: Non-satisfactory
?: Unknown, testing required
• Polyphenylene oxide with 10% fiberglass (PPO GFN1 SE1)
•• Anti-UV coated (Autoflex EB AG) hardened polyester
218
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
XBT Software and Environmental Compatibility
XBT software/XBT terminal compatibility
Terminal
Software
XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL100 XBTL400 XBTL400 XBTL900
V1.0
V2.1
V2.2
V2.3
V1.1
V1.2
V ≤ 1.2
(DOS,
and V1.1
Windows)
XBTL900 XBTL940 XBT
V ≥ 1.3
V1.1
L1000
(DOS,
(OS/2,
(DOS,
Windows)
X-TEL)
Window)
XBTA7/K7/KL7
XBTA8
XBTA3
XBTA4
XBTM/ML
XBTKN
XBTH/P/E
Compatible
XBT environmental compatibility
The XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane has been subjected to trials in collaboration with
DIVERSEY and HENKEL HYGIENE, whose detergents and disinfectant products are commonly used in the agrifoodstuffs industry.
Under normal conditions of use, the XBTA series of flat keyboards with covering membrane suffered no ill-effects after
200 hours being immersed in the following products :
DIVERSEY detergent and disinfectant products
SEPTINEIGE PLUS
Self-lathering disinfecting neutral detergent, 1 to 4% and 20 °C.
DIVOSAN MEZZO
Broad spectrum oxidizing acid disinfectant, 0.5% and 20 °C.
DILAC NEIGE
Self-lathering acid detergent, 3 to 5% and 20 °C.
DIVONEIGE ML
Self-lathering mild alkaline detergent, 2 to 5% and 20 °C.
CHLORINEIGE 400
Chlorinated self-lathering alkaline detergent, 1 to 5% and 20 °C.
HENKEL HYGIENE detergent and disinfectant products
P3 - FORMAKLAR
Broad spectrum non-oxidizing neutral disinfectant, tested at 4 % and 20 °C.
P3 - OXONIA ACTIF Strong oxidizing disinfectant, tested at 0.5% and 20 °C.
P3 - TOPAX M ACIDE Self-lathering acid disinfectant, tested at 2% and 40 °C.
P3 - TOPAX M 55
Chlorinated self-lathering disinfecting alkaline detergent, tested at 5 % and 50 °C.
P3 - HOROLITH M
Self-lathering acid detergent, tested at 5% and 20 °C.
11/97
219
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Dimensions
Dimensions
Message display
XBTH
2
50
in
(mm)
0.3
5.9
4.016
(102)
CUT-OUT
3.6
89.6
0.3
7
7.3
183.8
0.3
6.2
.217
(5.5)
7.953
(202)
3.58
(91)
4
102
0.5
12.4
Inches
mm
ENTER
8
202
0.3
6.2
.335
(8.5)
7.28
(185)
.472
(12)
.335
(8.5)
Depth =
± 0.5 mm
1.96
(50)
2.2
55.4
Operator terminal
XBTP
0.3
7.1
0.3
8.5
9.3
234.5
0.3
6.2
.217
(5.5)
10
(253)
0.4
10
6
(152)
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
+/-
0
.
DEL
HOME
SYST
ESC
MENU
+1
5.295
(134.5)
6
152
5.3
133.3
CUT-OUT
PRINT
MOD
ALARM
-1
SHIFT
ENTER
.315
(8)
10
253
0.5
12.5
9.308
(235.5)
.374
(9.5)
.472
(12)
Depth = 2.18
(55)
± 0.5 mm
2.3
58
Operator terminal
XBTE
0.3
7
0.4
9.2 0.3
7
10.5
264
.236
(6)
11.496
(292)
0.7
18.8
7.953
(202)
ABC
HOME
ESC
SYST
+1
MENU
DEF
GHI
7
8
9
JKL
MNO
PQR
4
5
6
STU
VWX
YZ
1
2
3
+/±
0
∑
7.244
(184)
8
202.5
7.2
182.5
CUT-OUT
DEL
in
(mm)
PRINT
MOD
ALARM
SHIFT
-1
ENTER
.335
(8.5)
0.5
13
11.6
292
10.453
(265.5)
.709
(18)
.472
(12)
Depth = 2.28
(58)
± 0.5 mm
220
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Dimensions
Dimensions
Message displays
XBTK
XBTM
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out:
276 x 61.5 ±0.5 mm(10.87 x 2.42 ± 0.02 in)
(2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in.)
Terminals
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out:
275.5 x 88.5 ± 0.5 mm.(10.85 x 3.48 ± 0.02 in)
(2) Support thickness: from 1.5 to 6 mm. (0.06 to 0.24 in)
Inches
mm
XBTA
(1) Dimensions for support cut-out: 231 x 145.5 ± 0.5 mm. (9.09 x 5.73 ± 0.02 in)
(2) Support thickness: 10 mm (0.39 in)
11/97
221
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Technical Documentation
Type
Language
XBTH/P/E
terminals
French
German
English
Spanish
Italian
XBTK
message displays
French
German
English
Spanish
Italian
XBTM
message displays
French
German
English
Spanish
Italian
XBTA
terminals
French
German
English
Spanish
Italian
XBT Terminal
Utilization
Handbook
French
German
English
Spanish
Italian
ASCII + ADJUST
UNI-TELWAY
MULTI-PROTOCOL
XBTX000FR
XBTX000DE
XBTX000US
XBTX000ES
XBTX000IT
XBTXK700F
XBTXK700D
XBTXK700E
XBTXK700S
XBTXK700T
XBTXK800F
XBTXK800D
XBTXK800E
XBTXK800S
XBTXK800T
XBTXM800F
XBTXM800D
XBTXM800E
XBTXM800S
XBTXM800T
XBTX63255
XBTX63257
XBTX63256
XBTX63258
XBTX63259
XBTXA800F
XBTXA800D
XBTXA800E
XBTXA800S
XBTXA800T
XBTXD800 FR
XBTXD800 DE
XBTXD800 EN
XBTXD800 ES
XBTXD800 1T
XBT installation bulletins supplied with the product are in English. If additional technical manuals or specific catalogs are
needed, they may be purchased separately.
For specific ordering information and pricing regarding the products shown in this catalog, contact your local
Square D Field Office.
222
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Communication Protocols for XBTH/P/E
Control system architectures
By remotely downloading protocols from a variety of manufacturers, MAGELiS terminals can easily be integrated with many popular PLCs. Remote
loading of protocols also provides:
● minimum stock with maximum effectiveness.
● convenient updating of installed base of products and protocols as new versions are introduced.
● point-to-point or multidrop PLC communication.
Factory network
Supervision
Level 2
ETHERNET/ETHWAY/FIPWAY/…networks
Machine
Control
Level 1
• Programmable controllers
• Numerical controllers
• Inter-product communication
• Operator interface
Third party PLC
TSX7
UNI-TELWAY bus
Downloadable
protocol
• Workshop terminals
(factory floor programming)
TSX17
XBTH
XBTE
XBTP
Single Machine
Downloadable
protocol
TSX07
Downloadable
protocol
XBTH
Modicon
11/97
XBTP
223
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
MAGELiSTM XBT Message Display/Terminal Products
Selection of Data Exchange Protocol for XBTA/K/M
UNI-TE protocol
●
●
Y
WA
I-TEL
UN
Serial link
Multi-station UNI-TE data exchange
protocol.
Using the XBT terminal in a multi-station
network architecture.
● Automatic data exchanges with
numerous Telemecanique devices:
variable speed controller
weighing system
numerical controller
● Direct access to the device variables.
The PLC program is very reduced or
non-existent.
ADJUST protocol
●
●
Serial link
Point-to-point data exchange
protocol with TSX7® PLCs.
Using the XBT terminal with TSX7 PLCs.
● Connect to the terminal port of the
TSX7 PLC (no special board in the
PLC).
● Direct access to the TSX7 PLC
variables. The PLC program is very
reduced or non-existent.
Selection of
data exchange
protocol
ASCII protocol
●
●
Serial link
Universal data exchange protocol
compatible with SY/MAX PLCs.
Using the XBT terminal with a Serial Link
● Connect to any programmable
control system which has a serial
link, including SY/MAX
programmable controllers.
Parallel link (24 V)
Using parallel connected message
displays
● Connect to any hard wired or
programmable control system.
● No special board required.
224
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’S
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNIT
Man-Machine Dialogue Activity Management
WE:
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA
40, Avenue A.Morizet
92100 Boulogne-Billancourt
FRANCE
declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):
TRADEMARK:
TELEMECANIQUE
NAME, TYPE:
Display units
MODELS:
XBT-K, -KL, -M,-KN, -HL, -H
NAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals with keypad LEDs
MODELS:
XBT-BB
NAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals
MODELS:
XBT-A, -E, -P
NAME, TYPE:
Operator dialogue terminals
MODELS:
XBT-VA, -VM
to which this declaration refers conform to :
STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,
General rules
IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)
Programmable controllers
IEC 1131
Electromagnetic compatibility
EN 50081-2
Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the
applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,
the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:
Low-voltage Directive
N°73/23/EEC
EMC Directive
N°89/336/EEC
The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds the
reference technical file available to the European Union authorities.
Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995
Authorized Signatory
Name:
Xavier Robineau Bourgneuf
Title:
DHM Activity Director
Signature:
ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.
225
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’S
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
INDUSTRIAL CONTROL BUSINESS UNIT
Man-Machine Dialogue Activity Management
WE:
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SA
40, Avenue A.Morizet
92100 Boulogne-Billancourt
FRANCE
declare under our own responsibility that the products(s):
TRADEMARK:
TELEMECANIQUE
NAME, TYPE:
Pushbuttons and pilot lights
MODELS:
XB2-B.., ZA2-B.., XB2-M.., Domino, XB2-E.., XVL...
NAME, TYPE:
Control Stations
MODELS:
XAL-.., XAP-..
NAME, TYPE:
Rotary switches
MODELS:
XBC-D.., K1.., K2..
NAME, TYPE:
Illuminated indicator bank
MODELS:
XVA..
to which this declaration refers conform to :
STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:
Low-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear,
General rules
IEC 947-1 (EN60947-1)
Electromechanical control circuit devices IEC 947-5-1 (EN60947-5-1)
Subject to installation, maintenance and use conforming to its (their) intended purpose, to the
applicable regulations and standards, to the supplier’s instructions and to standard practice,
the products conform to the requirements of the applicable European Directives:
Low-voltage Directive
N°73/23/EEC
EMC Directive
N°89/336/EEC
The CE mark on the products and/or their packaging signifies that Schneider Electric holds the
reference technical file available to the European Union authorities.
Done at ANGOULEME : 28 November 1995
Authorized Signatory
Name:
Xavier Robineau Bourgneuf
Title:
DHM Activity Director
Signature:
ALL DISTRIBUTION OR REPRODUCTION WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION IS FORBIDDEN.
226
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.
declare that the product range:Square D Class 9001 Type T Push Buttons,
Selector Switches, Pilot Lights and Contact Blocks.
Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance with
currently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,
complies with the provisions of Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive
Amendment 1
73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
EMC Directive
Amendments
89/336/EEC
91/263/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
The above product is in conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 60947-1
Underwriters Laboratory UL 508
National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2
Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.
Name . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD ....................................
Function . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................
227
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We, Schneider Limited, Cheney Manor, Swindon, Wiltshire, SN2 2QG.
declare that the product range:Square D Class 9001 Type TY and KY Enclosures
Provided that the said products are installed, maintained and used in the application for which they were made, in accordance with
currently accepted professional practices, relevant installation standards and manufacturer’s instructions,
complies with the provisions of Council Directives:
Low Voltage Directive
Amendment 1
73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
The above product is in conformity with the following standards:
BS EN 60947-1
Underwriters Laboratory UL 508
National Electrical Manufacturers Association ICS 1 and ICS 2
Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .if required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The CE Marking regarding the Low Voltage Directive was first affixed to the product type in 95.
Name. . . . . . . . . J FRENEHARD.....................................
Function. . . . . . . Director Industrial Controls ...................
228
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’S
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
WE:
Square D Company
128 Bingham Road
Asheville, NC 28802
Declare that the products:
BRAND: SquareD
NAME, TYPE: Class 9001, Type KM, KMF, “Light Modules”
“
“ , Type KA, “Contact Blocks”
“
“ , Type K, KX, SK, SKRU, “30 mm Operators”
“
“ , Type BW, SKYP “Pendant Stations”
Class 9002, Type AW, “Foot Switches”
To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:
The following Standards or Normative Documents:
- General rules: EN60947.1
- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1
subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose,
regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.
Meet the provisions of the following Directives:
No. 73/23/CCE of February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by
Directive 93/68/EC of July 22, 1993.
No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,
modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.
The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds the
reference technical file available to the European Authorities.
Executed at Raleigh: October 22, 1997
Authorized Signature:
Name:
Neil Tollas
Position:
Director, Logic Control
Signature:
229
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
MANUFACTURER’S
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
WE:
Square D Company
128 Bingham Road
Asheville, NC 28802
Declare that the products:
BRAND: Telemecanique
NAME, TYPE: XVA LED LAMPS
MODELS: XVAD•••B120, XVAD•••C024
To which this declaration refers are in conformity with:
The following Standards or Normative Documents:
- General rules: EN60947.1
- Electromechanical control circuit devices: EN60947.5.1
subject to installation, maintenance and utilization in accordance with their purpose,
regulations, current standards, manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.
Meet the provisions of the following Directives:
No. 73/23/CCE of February 19, 1973, named Low-voltage Directive, modified by
Directive 93/68/EC of July 22, 1993.
No. 89/336/CEE of May 3, 1989, named Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive,
modified by Directives 92/31/CEE of April 28, 1992 and 93/68/CEE of July 22, 1993.
The CE marking on the product and/or the packaging signifies that Square D holds the
reference technical file available to the European Authorities.
Executed at Raleigh: April 10, 1997
Authorized Signature:
Name:
Neil Tollas
Position:
Director, Logic Control
Signature:
230
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
11/97
Push Buttons and Operator Interface Specifiers Guide
Declaration of Conformity
NOTES:
231
11/97
© 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved
Square D Company
P.O. Box 27446
Raleigh, N.C. 27611, USA
Schneider Canada
6675 Rexwood Road
Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1V1
www.squared.com
O/S2 is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation
and
are registered trademarks of Underwriters Laboratory
is a registered trademark of Canadian Standard Association

Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation
Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.
SY/MAX is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.
MAGELiS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA
UNI-TELWAY is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA
X/TEL is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA
TSX 7 is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA
FINGERSAFE is a registered trademark of Square D Company
is a trademark of Square D Company
SERIPLEX is a registered trademark of Square D Company
™
9001CT9701 replaces the following:
9001CT9501, dated 1/96
9001CT9601, dated 11/96
9001CT9602, dated 11/96
9001CT9603, dated 11/96
9001CT9604, dated 1/97
9001CT9605, dated 1/97
9001CT9606, dated 1/97
9001CT9607, dated 1/97
9001CT9608, dated 1/97
9001CT9609, dated 2/97
Square D and
are registered trademarks of Square D Company.
Catalog No. 9001CT9701 November 1997 © 1997 Square D All Rights Reserved.